NEW AND RESTRUCTURED

POST-GRADUATE CURRICULA & SYLLABI

Fisheries Science

Education Division
Indian Council of Agricultural Research
New Delhi

April 2009
 
 
 
 
  
Contents
Page(s)

Executive Summary 3

BSMAC Composition 7

Preamble 8

Organization of Course Contents & Credit Requirements 11

Aquaculture 12

Aquatic Environment Management 39

Aquatic Animal Health 62

Business Management 80

Fish Biotechnology 96

Fish Genetics and Breeding 116

Fish Nutrition and Feed Technology 136

Fish Physiology and Biochemistry 157

Fish Processing Technology 172

Fisheries Economics 201

Fisheries Engineering and Technology 223

Fisheries Extension 237

Fisheries Resource Management 262

Common Supporting Courses 284

Compulsory Non-Credit Courses 288

2
 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The Country-level exercise undertaken by the ICAR aims to address certain concerns with
respect to acceptability, transferability of the knowledge and skills and employability of
the postgraduates receiving Agricultural Education in the Country. The overall aim is to
infuse quality, excellence and relevance in Agricultural Education.

The proposed curricula and syllabi are utilitarian, futuristic, incorporate modern science
and cutting-edge technologies, lay emphasis on experiential learning, and would equip
students to become entrepreneurs as well as professionals.

At present, besides the Central Institute of Fisheries education (CIFE), Mumbai which is a
Deemed University, postgraduate education in the Discipline of Fisheries Science is
offered by 10 Fisheries Colleges in the country. Six Colleges are offering both [Link].
and Ph.D. Degree programmes, while 4 Colleges are offering only [Link]. programme.
Most of the Colleges offer a few specializations ([Link]. 1 to 8 and Ph.D. up to 5),
whereas the maximum number of specializations is offered by CIFE – 9 in Masters and 8
in Doctoral programmes. The Curricula and Syllabi in the Broad Subject Matter Area
(BSMA) of Fisheries Science were reviewed by a Committee (BSMAC) and a total of 14
Courses for the [Link]. and 11 Courses for the Ph.D. programmes were identified. Their
salient features are as follows:
1. Aquaculture
• Aquaculture as a specialization is taught by all the Institutes offering postgraduate
programme in Fisheries, in view of its importance in terms of contribution to fish
production and employment generation.
• After studying the courses offered under Aquaculture by various Colleges and CIFE, a
synthesis was made taking into consideration the level of exposure required for the
students at Masters and Doctoral levels and in keeping with current knowledge and
future needs.
• Courses on culture of finfish and shellfish in fresh, brackish and marine waters are
included, besides ornamental fish culture.
• Courses on nutrition, seed production, health management, biotechnology and genetics
have also been included.

2. Aquatic Environment Management

• The name of this Subject Matter Area is new and has been adopted keeping in view the
environmental constraints faced by the fisheries and aquaculture sectors.
• Both Masters and Doctoral programmes lay emphasis on management of the aquatic
environment.
• New and innovative Courses such as Integrated Coastal Zone Management,
Environmental Biotechnology, Environmental Toxicology, etc at Masters level and
Environment Impact Assessment, Ecotoxicology, Restoration Ecology, etc. at Doctoral
level have been included.

3. Aquatic Animal Health

3
• The name of this Subject Matter Area is also new and has been adopted in preference
to Fish Pathology and Microbiology.
• The Subject Area aims to develop expertise necessary to understand the health
problems encountered in aquatic animals and to cater to the needs of the aquaculture
industry.
• In addition to the traditional courses pertaining to Microbiology, Parasitology and
Pathology, modern subjects such as Fish Immunology, Fish Virology and Cell Culture
and Clinical Pathology have been included at Masters level, while Fish and Shellfish
Virology, Fish Pharmacology, etc. have been incorporated at the Doctoral level.

4. Business Management
• This is a recently introduced Masters Degree programme and an innovation in the
discipline of Fishery Science.
• The aim is to train professional fisheries postgraduates to manage the fisheries
enterprises.
• The new courses include Managerial Economics, Marketing Management, HR
Management, Forecasting Methods and Operations Research, Introduction to WTO
and IPR, Export and Import Management, etc.

5. Fish Biotechnology
• The existing subject area of Fish Genetics and Biotechnology at Masters and Doctoral
levels has been bifurcated and an independent programme of Fish Biotechnology has
been proposed in view of the great strides made in the field of biotechnology and the
availability of biotechnological tools for development of fisheries and aquaculture.
• New Courses introduced include Genetic Engineering and its Application in Fisheries,
Bioinformatics, Marine Biotechnology, Aquaculture Biotechnology, etc. in [Link].
and Functional Genomics and Proteomics, RNAi Technology, etc. in Ph.D.

6. Fish Genetics and Breeding

• At present Masters and Doctoral Courses are being offered in the discipline of Fish
Genetics and Biotechnology and Ph.D in Fish Genetics at CIFE, Mumbai. The
combination of Fish Genetics and Breeding is, therefore, a new one.
• New Courses under [Link]. programme include Population Genetics, Quantitative
Genetics, Molecular Genetic Markers, Cytogenetics, etc. and under the Doctoral
programme Application of Genetics in Commercial Aquaculture, Transgenic
Production and GMOs, etc.
7. Fish Nutrition and Feed Technology
• At present the specialization of Nutrition and Biochemistry is being offered at CIFE,
Mumbai. However, it was felt necessary to bring it under the new nomenclature.
• Feed Technology component has attained great importance in recent years as feed
employed in the culture of fish and shellfish is becoming a limiting factor in terms of
economics as well as availability of quality ingredients.
• Nutrition and feed not only play a crucial role in enhancing the growth of fish, but also
in breeding and health management.
• It is aimed at training professionals to manage the numerous feed plants established in
the country, as well as develop newer and cheaper feeds for the farmed species.
• All these aspects have been considered in selecting courses recommended both at
[Link]. and Ph.D. levels.

4
8. Fish Physiology and Biochemistry
• Fish Physiology is an emerging area and it was felt logical to include this as a separate
specialisation in combination with Biochemistry at the Masters level to start with.
• Various aspects of physiology, including Ecophysiology of Fishes, Reproductive
Physiology and Endocrinology, Physiology of Fish Behaviour, Diagnostic
Biochemistry, etc. have been incorporated to disseminate the available current
knowledge.

9. Fish Processing Technology

• This is an ongoing programme both at Masters as well as Doctoral levels in quite a few
Fisheries Colleges, although under the nomenclature of Post Harvest Technology at
some places. Certain new courses have been included keeping in view the recent
trends in the sector.
• New Courses at the Masters level include Quality Assurance, Management and
Certification; Handling, Storage and Transport of Fresh Fish; Additives in Fish
Processing; Fish By-products and Waste Utilization, etc.
• New Courses at the Doctoral level include Quality Management Systems, Lipids of
Aquatic Origin, Toxins and Contaminants, Environmental Impact of Fishery
Industries, etc.

10. Fisheries Economics

• This is an important discipline which is presently being offered only at the Masters
level in a few Fisheries Colleges in the country. Development of the Curriculum and
Syllabus for the introduction of Ph.D. Programme in Fisheries Economics is a
progressive step.
• Some of the important subjects covered include Fisheries Resource Economics,
Environmental Economics, Econometrics, Indian Economy, Aquaculture Production
Economics, Fisheries Governance and Socio-Economics, etc.
11. Fisheries Engineering and Technology
• This is a course being offered at the Masters level to start with.
• The Course is meant to train postgraduates with the knowledge and skills necessary to
design, manage and maintain the fishing craft and gear which are vital components in
the fisheries industry.
• The new subjects introduced include Responsible Fishing, Engineering Graphics,
Fishing Harbour and Fleet Management, Environmental Engineering and Pollution
Control, etc.
12. Fisheries Extension
• This major area of study is presently being offered only in a couple of Fisheries
Colleges that too at the Masters level only.
• In view of the importance of Extension in the overall development of the fisheries and
aquaculture sectors, the course is proposed to be offered at the Ph.D. level also.
• Some of the new Courses include Participatory Approaches in Fisheries Extension;
Community Mobilization and Organizational Development; Gender, Livelihood and
Development; Indigenous Traditional Knowledge in Fisheries at the Masters level and
Monitoring and Evaluation of Development Programmes, Measurement and Scaling
Techniques, Ergonomics, etc. at Doctoral level.

5
13. Fisheries Resource Management
• By and large the core subject matter of this discipline at the undergraduate level is
traditionally dealt under the title of Fishery Biology with emphasis on Taxonomy,
Biology, Physiology, Fish Stock Assessment, etc. At the postgraduate level the
discipline has been renamed as Fisheries Resource Management.
• For the Masters porogramme the new subjects introduced include Marine Ecosystems,
Biodiversity and Conservation; Fisheries Regulations; Remote Sensing and GIS for
Fisheries Management; Aquatic Floral Resources, etc.
• For the Doctoral programme the new subjects introduced include Assessment of
Aquatic Biodiversity, Conservation and Management of Exploited Fisheries
Resources, Coral Reef Management, Fisheries Environment Assessment, etc.
14. Supporting Courses
• Introduction of Compulsory Supporting Courses (total 5 Credits) common to all
disciplines both at Masters and Doctoral levels is a new feature.
• In order to make the students proficient in Experimental Design for undertaking
meaningful and reliable research one Course on Statistical Methods and another
Course on Research Methodology have been introduced at the Masters level.

With the restructuring of Curricula and Syllabi there is a need to strengthen infrastructure,
especially in terms of equipment for conducting practicals and carrying out research. One
of the criticisms in the industry is that Fisheries graduates have less exposure to hands-on-
training. This should be overcome by creating better practical facilities for all the
subjects/courses. Field training in the form of experiential learning is recommended at the
[Link]. level. Also, faculty should have opportunities to upgrade knowledge through short
term training programmes. A grant of Rs. 100 lakhs may be provided to strengthen
education at Masters level and another Rs. 100 lakhs at Doctoral level to each of the
Colleges offering these programmes, especially to add laboratory facilities pertaining to
the new Courses. These measures would help in improving the quality of postgraduates
and make them better employable. Further, well trained and competent human resource
will be able to implement Fisheries Development programmes more effectively, which
would not only ensure nutritional security in the country, but also contribute to the
economic growth of the sector from which the society at large would derive benefit.

6
 BSMA Committee on Fisheries
(Fishery Sci, Inland Aq, Maricul, Fresh Water Aq, Post Harv. Tech/Fish Process. Tech/Aq. Fish Biol./Fish
Micro/Fish Hydrography/Fish Extn)

(Constituted by ICAR vide Office order No. F. No. 13 (1)/2007- EQRdated January 14, 2008)

Name Address
Dr. P. Keshavanath Campus Head & Former Dean, College of Fisheries,
Convenor KVAFSU, Matsyanagar, Kankanady Post,
Mangalore 575 002
Dr. Dilip Kumar Central Institute of Fisheries Education, Seven Bungalows,
Director Versova, Mumbai 400 061
Dr. A.G. Ponniah Central Instt. of Brackishwater Aquaculture, R.K. Puram,
Director Chennai 600 028
Dr. P. Natarajan Rajiv Gandhi Chair, School of Environmental Studies,
Professor Cochin Univ. of Science & Technology, Kochi 682 022
Dr. D.D. Nambudiri College of Fisheries, Kerala Agricultural University,
Dean Panangad, Kochi 682 506
Dr. V.K. Venkataramani Fisheries College and Research Institute, Tamil Nadu
Dean Veterinary, Animal Sciences University,
Toothukudi 628 008
Dr. S. Kovale College of Fisheries, Ratnagiri
Assoc. Dean
Dr. K.C. Dora College of Fisheries, West Bengal University of Animal and
Dean Fisheries Sciences, Budherhat, P.O. Panchasagar,
Chakagaria, Kolkata 700 005
Dr. M.K. Mukandan Central Institute of Fisheries Tech., Matsyapuri P.O.,
Head, Fish Processing Kochi 682 029
Division
Dr. P. Ravindranath College of Fisheries, SVVU, Muthukur 524 344
Dean
Member Secretary

      
 

7
 PREAMBLE
Fisheries has been in limelight during the past three decades as the fastest growing food
production system. Capture and Culture Fisheries are vibrant economic activities
contributing to agricultural (4.6% GDP) and national economy (1.3% GDP), livelihood
and nutritional security, employment generation (11 million people) and foreign exchange
earnings (Rs. 8364 crore in 2006-07). Aquaculture sector has witnessed spectacular
production increases over the past two decades, driven by technological developments and
increased demand for fish. The overriding challenges facing the fisheries sector have been
and still are production of adequate and cheap food fish for all and improve the quality of
life of fishers and farmers. This could be achieved only by addressing the issues of
underutilization and low productivity in inland water bodies, sustainability of capture
fisheries, huge post-harvest losses, poor quality and low value addition, unregulated
domestic markets and protective global markets, and the low level of domestic fish
consumption. However, the extent and quality of development is largely conditioned by
the given policy environment and the quality of available Human Resources.

Lack of comprehensive and enabling policy framework at Central and State levels, lack of
adequate and professionally skilled human resource resulting in poor implementation of
development and welfare programmes, ineffective and redundant services delivery
systems, and poor infrastructure development have almost limited the scope of fisheries
development in India. Ironically, the importance of policy and HRD has not been given
sufficient attention so far. In this context, generating competent professional human
resource would be one of the most critical inputs in driving the engine of sustainable
fisheries and further development of aquaculture by realising the immense potential for
horizontal and vertical expansion.

Globalisation like in other sectors has thrown up opportunities and risks in the fisheries
sector also, necessitating changes in policy and governance in order to maximize benefits
and minimize risks through sustainable and responsible fisheries management and
production. Further, it is having a profound effect on education too, transforming the
economies into knowledge based service and innovation economies. Agricultural
education in general and fisheries education in particular is no exception. For higher
education leaders in India (SAUs/DUs), this new environment holds both threats and
opportunities. To benefit from the opportunities as well as address the challenges, fisheries
education system should be subjected to constant innovations and reforms, particularly
with respect to redesigning of curricula and syllabi, innovative pedagogy, developmental
orientation, entrepreneurship, soft skill development, etc. This is a necessary condition to
prepare the graduates and equip them to not only effectively respond to the emerging
needs and challenges, but also to become creative and proactive partners in piloting this
knowledge-led revolution.

Keeping this in view, the ICAR which is vested with responsibilities of guiding and
coordinating agricultural education in the country took several steps to ensure quality
education to meet the ever changing national and global scenario in fisheries sciences. One
of these steps was to set up an Accreditation Board, which among other things is required
to periodically assess the curricula of various educational programmes offered by National
Agricultural Education System and suggest modifications. Fisheries education in India,
since the establishment of the Central Institute of Fisheries Education in 1961 for in-

8
service training and later the establishment of the first Fisheries College at Mangalore
under the SAU system in 1969, has grown manifold and evolved in the last four decades
as a professional discipline consisting of Bachelors, Masters and Doctoral programmes in
various branches of Fisheries Science. At present, 16 Fisheries Colleges offer four-year
degree programme in Bachelor of Fisheries Science ([Link].), while 10 of them offer
Masters and 6 Doctoral programmes. The undergraduate curricula and syllabi were
periodically revised and the most recent exercise was undertaken in 2006. All the Fisheries
Colleges are in the process of adapting these, bringing in parity of standards between
Colleges.

Restructuring of postgraduate curricula and syllabi to upgrade the competence and

standard of human resource in fisheries has been felt for quite some time. Only one such
exercise was carried out in 2002 to revise the Masters curricula and syllabi, but not that of
Doctoral programme. Even the revised Masters syllabi have not been adapted by majority
of the Fisheries Colleges. The present exercise of revising and reorienting the postgraduate
curricula was initiated by ICAR in 2007 through the constitution of a National Core
Group, drawing experts from various fields of Agriculture. Further, in early 2008, eighteen
Broad Subject Matter Area (BSMA) Committees were constituted to carry out the massive
exercise of restructuring the curricula and syllabi of various Masters and Doctoral
programmes. One of the BSMA committees was for Fisheries Science which had its first
meeting in March 2008 at CIFE, Mumbai to decide on the nomenclature and number of
specializations to be offered at Masters and Doctoral levels and also the broad curricula.
Taking into consideration the specializations presently being offered by different Fisheries
Colleges and CIFE, 14 [Link]. and 11 Ph.D. specialisations were identified. The criteria
for identification of these were their role in fish production and importance in the current
scenario of job opportunities; keeping future in view even emerging areas such as
Physiology have been included. Different groups were formed to draw up draft syllabi for
the different specializations with one member of BSMA as leader. These groups had a
series of online discussions and consultations and came out with the draft syllabi. A 2-day
consultative workshop of all stakeholders was conducted in April 2008 at CIFE, Mumbai
where the syllabi and curricula were discussed extensively. All the useful suggestions that
emerged from various stakeholders were incorporated and the draft document widely
circulated and further refined through online discussions. Following the meeting of
Conveners and Member Secretaries of BSMAs with the Chairman of the National Core
Group at Delhi in June 2008, the draft was modified as per the Template finalized in that
meeting.
The reviewer’s observations have been addressed and as per his suggestion Fisheries
Microbiology specialisation has been dropped. The revised draft was presented at the final
meeting of the National Core Group in November 2008 and finalised taking into
consideration all the suggestions. Compulsory Supporting Courses common to all
disciplines have been introduced both at Masters and Doctoral levels.

The restructured curricula and syllabi with more emphasis on hands on training are
expected to improve the skills of postgraduates, making them more competent, providing
broader employment opportunities. Effective implementation of the new curricula and
syllabi would require improved infrastructure facilities, including equipment for carrying
out practicals and research. Also, there is a need to upgrade knowledge of the faculty
through short term training. Therefore, it is imperative that ICAR provide special funds
towards these. An initial grant of Rs. 100 lakhs each for Masters and Ph.D programmes

9
may be released for strengthening postgraduate education at each of the Fisheries Colleges
offering postgraduate education.

We are thankful to all the members of the BSMA Committee on Fisheries Science and the
participants of consultative workshop for their valuable suggestions and contributions for
the development of the curricula and syllabi. We are grateful to Dr. J. C. Katyal, Vice-
Chancellor, CCSHAU and Chairman, National Core Group for Restructuring of Masters
and Doctorate Course Curricula and Syllabi, for providing guidance and encouragement in
this endeavour. Our thanks are due to Dr. Mangla Rai, D.G., ICAR, Secretary, DARE and
Chairman of the Accreditation Board and Dr. S.P. Tewari, DDG (Edn.), for their support
in bringing out this document. The extensive help rendered by Dr. P.S. Ananthan,
Scientist, CIFE, Mr. P. Krishnan, Scientist, CARI and Ph.D Scholar at CIFE and Mr. U.
Kanagarajan, Research Scholar, CIFE in compiling and editing is highly appreciated. We
also thank Dr. K. Ravindranath, Member Secretary, BSMA, for his untiring assistance
throughout the consultation process till final documentation. We hope that this document
will serve as a guide and help in achieving uniformly high standards in postgraduate
education in Fisheries Science across the country.

10
 ORGANIZATION OF COURSE CONTENTS
&
CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

Code Numbers
• All courses are divided into two series: 500-series courses pertain to Master’s level,
and 600-series to Doctoral level. A Ph. D. student must take a minimum of two 600
series courses, but may also take 500-series courses if not studied during Master’s
programme.
• Credit seminar for Master’s level is designated by code no. 591, and the two seminars
for Doctoral level are coded as 691 and 692, respectively.
• Similarly, 599 and 699 codes have been given for Master’s research and Doctoral
research, respectively.
Course Contents
The contents of each course have been organized into:
• Objective – to elucidate the basic purpose.
• Theory units – to facilitate uniform coverage of syllabus for paper setting.
• Suggested Readings – to recommend some standard books as reference material. This
does not unequivocally exclude other such reference material that may be
recommended according to the advancements and local requirements.
• A list of journals pertaining to the discipline is provided at the end which may be
useful as study material for 600-series courses as well as research topics.
• E-Resources - for quick update on specific topics/events pertaining to the subject.
• Broad research topics provided at the end would facilitate the advisors for appropriate
research directions to the PG students.
Minimum Credit Requirements
Subject Master’s programme Doctoral programme
Major 20 15
Minor 09 08
Supporting 05 05
Seminar 01 02
Research 20 45
Total Credits 55 75
Compulsory Non Credit Courses See relevant section

Major subject: The subject (department) in which the students takes admission
Minor subject: The subject closely related to students major subject (e.g., if the major
subject is Entomology, the appropriate minor subjects should be Plant Pathology &
Nematology).
Supporting subject: The subject not related to the major subject. It could be any
subject considered relevant for student’s research work.
Non-Credit Compulsory Courses: Please see the relevant section for details. Six
courses (PGS 501-PGS 506) are of general nature and are compulsory for Master’s
programme. Ph. D. students may be exempted from these courses if already studied
during Master’s degree.

11
 AQUACULTURE
Course Structure - at a Glance

CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS

AQC 501* SUSTAINABLE AQUACULTURE 2+1
SOIL AND WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN
AQC 502* 2+1
AQUACULTURE
AQC 503* NUTRITION AND FEED TECHNOLOGY 2+1
AQC 504* AQUATIC ANIMAL HEALTH MANAGEMENT 2+1
SEED PRODUCTION AND HATCHERY MANAGEMENT OF
AQC 505 2+1
FINFISHES
SEED PRODUCTION AND HATCHERY MANAGEMENT OF
AQC 506 1+1
SHELLFISHES
AQC 507 APPLIED GENETICS IN AQUACULTURE 2+1
AQC 508 NON-FOOD AQUACULTURE 1+1
AQC 509 COASTAL AQUACULTURE 2+1
AQC 510 FRESHWATER AQUACULTURE 2+1
LARVAL NUTRITION AND CULTURE OF FOOD
AQC 511 1+1
ORGANISMS
AQC 512 AQUACULTURE ENGINEERING 2+1

AQC 591 MASTER’S SEMINAR 1+0

AQC 599 MASTER’S RESEARCH 20

AQC 601** ADVANCES IN AQUACULTURE PRODUCTION SYSTEMS 2+1

AQC 602** ADVANCES IN SEED PRODUCTION AND HATCHERY 2+1
MANAGEMENT
AQC 603** AQUACULTURE AND ECOSYSTEM MANAGEMENT 2+1
AQC 604 AQUATIC ANIMAL HEALTH MANAGEMENT AND 1+1
QUARANTINE
AQC 605 FISH AND SHELLFISH PHYSIOLOGY AND 1+1
ENDOCRINOLOGY
AQC 606 ADVANCES IN FISH GENETICS 2+1
AQC 607 INTENSIVE FARMING SYSTEMS FOR TILAPIA AND 1+1
CATFISHES
AQC 608 AQUACULTURE DEVELOPMENT PLANNING AND 1+1
MANAGEMENT
AQC 609 APPLIED BIOTECHNOLOGY 1+1

AQC 691 DOCTORAL SEMINAR I 1+0

AQC 692 DOCTORAL SEMINAR II 1+0

AQC 699 DOCTORAL RESEARCH 45

* Compulsory for Master’s programme; ** Compulsory for Doctoral programme

12
 AQUACULTURE
Course Contents
AQC 501 SUSTAINABLE AQUACULTURE 2+1
Objective
To gain in depth knowledge and field exposure on sustainable aquaculture
practices.
Theory
UNIT I
Present scenario and problems: Trends in global and Indian aquaculture;
different farming systems; intensive systems and constraints -
environmental degradation and disease outbreaks.
UNIT II
Sustainability and development: Systems approach and its application in
aquaculture with special reference to resource-poor systems; Role of aquatic
resources in food and nutrition; Aquatic resource and livelihood systems.
UNIT III
Environmental issues: Exotic species introduction; escapement;
contamination of indigenous gene pool; salinization of soil and water;
environmental impact; over exploitation of wild stocks; mangrove
deforestation.
UNIT IV
Socio-economic issues: Conflicts over water and land use; conflicts of
interest between aqua farmers and fishermen; resistance from local public;
anti-dumping duties.
UNIT V
Strategies for sustainability: Sustainability concept; food security;
biosecurity; organic farming; integrated farming; responsible aquaculture;
rotational aquaculture; bioremediation; role of biotechnology, traceability.
Application of renewable energy in aquaculture - solar energy, wind, and
tidal energy, Seed certification, Sustainable use of antibiotics.
UNIT VI
Economic viability: export vs. domestic marketing, value addition.
UNIT VII
Guiding principles to sustainable aquaculture development: Coastal
Aquaculture Guidelines Source Book, FAO Code of Conduct for
Responsible Fisheries; Holmenskollen Guidelines for Sustainable
Aquaculture.
Practical
Visit to conventional aquafarm to see the management of used water;
Survey on environmental impact nearby aquaculture farms; Setting model
for sustainable aquaculture (organic farm, integrated farm); Applications of
remote sensing and GIS (geographical information system); Economic
evaluation of aquaculture practices.
Suggested Readings
Bardach JE. 1997. Sustainable Aquaculture. John Willey & Sons.
Bardach JE, Rhyther JH & Mc. Larney WO. 1972. Aquaculture Farming
and Husbandry of Freshwater and Marine Organisms. John Wiley
& Sons.

13
 Beets WC. 1990. Raising and Sustaining Productivity of Small-Holder
Farming Systems in the Tropics. Agbe Publ.
Edwards P, Little DC & Demaine H. (Eds.). 2002. Rural Aquaculture.
CABI.
FAO 2001. Planning and Management for Sustainable Coastal
Aquaculture Development. FAO.
Imai T. 1978. Aquaculture in Shallow Seas. Progress in Shallow Sea
Culture. Amerind Publ.
James PM. 1983. Handbook of Mariculture. Vol. I. Crustacean
Aquaculture. CRC Press.
Leung P, Lee CS & O'Bryen JP. (Eds.). 2007. Species and System Selection
for Sustainable Aquaculture. Blackwell Publ.
Midlen & Redding TA. 1998. Environmental Management for Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Selvamani BR & Mahadevan RK. 2008. Aquaculture, Trends and Issues.
Campus Books International.

AQC 502 SOIL AND WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN 2+1

AQUACULTURE
Objective
To learn effective soil and water quality management practices.
Theory
UNIT I
Soil and water interaction: Physical and chemical properties of soil and
water, Productivity vs nutrient quality and quantity of soil and water;
aquatic microorganisms and their role in carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus and
sulphur cycles and impact on aquatic habitats and species.
UNIT II
Soil and water quality monitoring: soil and water quality standards; soil and
water quality monitoring and management.
UNIT III
Fertilizers and manures: Different kinds of fertilizers and manures,
fertilizer grade, source, rate and frequency of application, Biofertilizers,
Use of treated sewage for pond fertilization, Ecological changes taking
place after fertilizing, Primary production, degradation of molecules in
aquatic environment, Utilization of bioactive compounds by
microorganisms.
UNIT IV
Soil and water quality management: Cat clay/pyrite soil, seepage, water
treatment, water filtration devices, aeration, chlorination, ozonization and
UV radiation, Algal bloom control, eutrophication, Aquatic weed
management, Waste water treatment practices, Water quality management
in hatcheries, Waste discharge standards, Role of microorganisms in fish
production, fish health and fish safety; Microbial load and algal blooms.
Practical
Equipment used in soil and water analysis; Soil sampling, determination of
soil moisture and bulk density; pond filling, analyses of mud acidity and
soil texture; Measurements of temperature, pH, conductivity, salinity,
transparency, turbidity and solids; Analyses of dissolved oxygen, alkalinity
and hardness, phosphorus, nitrogen; Estimation of primary productivity and

14
 chlorophyll; Application of fertilizers and pond liming; Analysis of toxic
elements; Microbial techniques; Visit to effluent treatment plant; Design
and operation of biological filters.
Suggested Readings
Adhikari S & Chatterjee DK. 2008. Management of Tropical Freshwater
Ponds. Daya Publ.
APHA, AWWA, WPCF. 1998. Standard Methods for the Examination of
Water and Wastewater, 20th Ed. American Public Health
Association, American Water Works Association, and Water
Pollution Control Federation, Washington, D. C.
Boyd, C. E. and Tucker, C. S. 1992. Water Quality and Pond Soil Analyses
for Aquaculture, Alabama Agricultural Experimental Station,
Auburn University.
Boyd CE. 1979. Water Quality in Warm Water Fish Ponds. Auburn
University.
ICAR. 2006. Handbook of Fisheries and Aquaculture. ICAR.
Parsons TR, Maita Y & Lalli CM. 1984. A Manual of Chemical and
Biological Methods for Seawater Analysis. Pergamon Press.
Rajagopalsamy CBT & Ramadhas V. 2002. Nutrient Dynamics in
Freshwater Fish Culture System. Daya Publ.
Sharma LL, Sharma SK, Saini VP & Sharma BK. (Eds.). 2008.
Management of Freshwater Ecosystems. Agrotech Publ. Academy.

AQC 503 NUTRITION AND FEED TECHNOLOGY 2+1

Objective
To create basic understanding on the nutritional requirements of
fish/shellfish and feed manufacture.
Theory
UNIT I
Fish nutrition: Principles of fish nutrition and terminologies, nutritional
requirements of cultivable finfish and shellfish: larvae, juveniles and adults.
UNIT II
Nutritional biochemistry: Classification, nutrient quality and evaluation of
proteins, lipids and carbohydrates.
UNIT III
Role of nutrients: amino acids, fatty acids, proteins, lipids, carbohydrates,
vitamins and minerals.
UNIT IV
Nutritional bioenergetics: Fish as an open thermodynamic system, Energy
requirement of fishes, protein to energy ratio, digestible energy, nitrogen
balance index, protein sparing effect, high energy feeds, isocaloric diets,
Optimal foraging theory, Mathematical modeling of ingestion, Metabolic
rate, Energy budgets, Energetic efficiency of fish production.
UNIT V
Nutritional physiology: Digestion, accretions and nutrient flow, Factors
affecting digestibility.
UNIT VI
Nutritional pathology: Antinutritional factors and antimetabolites, microbial
toxins, methods of elimination, nutrient deficiency and symptoms.

15
 UNIT VII
Feed Resources: Nutritional value of feed ingredients and live feed,
Contribution from natural food to nutrient requirements of fish, Feed
additives (attractants, growth stimulants and probiotics and binders), and
Feed resources assessment.
UNIT VIII
Feed Manufacture: Feed formulation and processing, On-farm feed
manufacture, Commercial feed manufacture, Feed storage.
UNIT IX
Feeding Practices: Supplementary feed–theory and practice, Complete diet -
theory and practice, Feeding methods and scheduling, ration size, feed
performance and economics.
Practical
Formulation and preparation of a balanced fish feed; Feeding trials;
Proximate analysis- moisture, crude protein, crude lipid ,ash , acid insoluble
ash content of feed; Estimation of crude fibre, nitrogen free extract, calcium
and phosphorus content of feed; Estimation of protein and lipid quality;
Determination of gross energy content of feed and feed ingredients;
Determination of the digestibility of feed using markers; Estimation of FCR
from feeding trials and preparation of feeding table; Estimation of growth
parameters from feeding trials; Analysis of mycotoxins from feed
ingredients/feed; Gut content analysis to study artificial and natural food
intake. Visit to feed manufacturing units.
Suggested Readings
ADCP (Aquaculture Development and Co-ordination Programme). 1980.
Fish Feed Technology. ADCP/REP/80/11. FAO.
Cyrino EP & Bureau D & Kapoor BG. 2008. Feeding and Digestive
Functions in Fishes. Science Publ.
D’ Abramo LR, Conklin DE & Akiyama DM. 1977. Crustacean Nutrition:
Advances in Aquaculture. Vol. VI. World Aquaculture Society,
Baton Roughe.
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall Aquaculture Series.
Elena M. 2003. Nutrition, Physiology and Metabolism in Crustaceans.
Science Publishers.
Guillame J, Kaushik S, Bergot P & Metallier R. 2001. Nutrition and
Feeding of Fish and Crustaceans. Springer Praxis Publ.
Halver J & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Tiews KT. 1979. Finfish Nutrition and Fishfeed Technology.
Vols. I, II Heenemann, Berlin.
Hertrampf JW & Pascual FP. 2000. Handbook on Ingredients for
Aquaculture Feeds. Kluwer.
Houlihan D, Boujard T & Jobling M. 2001. Food Intake in Fish. Blackwell.
Lavens P & Sorgeloos P. 1996. Manual on the Production and Use of Live
Food for Aquaculture. FAO Fisheries Tech. Paper 361, FAO.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Chapman & Hall.
New MB. 1987. Feed and Feeding of Fish and Shrimp. A Manual on the
Preparation and Preservation of Compound Feeds for Shrimp and
Fish in Aquaculture. FAO – ADCP/REP/87/26.

16
 NRC (National Research Council). 1993. Nutrient Requirements of Fish.
National Academy Press, Washington.
Ojha JS. 2005. Aquaculture Nutrition and Biochemistry. Daya Publ.

AQC 504 AQUATIC ANIMAL HEALTH MANAGEMENT 2+1

Objective
To provide holistic knowledge on fish and shellfish pathogens and their
control measures.
Theory
UNIT I
Basics of fish and shellfish health management: Host-pathogen-environment
relationship, Management of culture systems, Environmental stress.
UNIT II
Defence system in fish and shellfish: Defence systems in fish, innate and
acquired immunity, inflammation response to diseases. Antibody and cell
mediated immunity in fish and shellfish.
UNIT III
Parasitic and mycotic diseases: General characteristics, Epizootiology,
Diagnosis, Life cycle, Prevention and treatment.
UNIT IV
Infectious bacterial and viral diseases: General characteristics, Epizootiology,
Diagnosis, Prevention and treatment.
UNIT V
Non-infectious Diseases: Nutritional diseases, water, soil, environmental
parameters and their effects on fish health. Disease in hatcheries and grow-
out systems.
UNIT VI
Techniques in health management: Microbiological, haematological,
histopathological, immunological and molecular techniques. Disease
surveillance and reporting.
UNIT VII
Disease control and management: Environment management,
chemotherapeutic agents, host management, prophylaxis- vaccines,
adjuvants, immunostimulants and probiotics. Use and abuse of antibiotics
and chemicals in health management. Fish health and quarantine systems.
Seed certification, SPF and SPR stocks - development and applications.
Practical
General procedures for disease diagnosis; Taxonomy and identification of fish
parasites; Sampling, preparation of media and culture of pathogenic bacteria;
Techniques for bacterial classification; Histological techniques for disease
diagnosis; Molecular and immunological techniques; Biochemical tests;
PCR; ELISA; Agglutination test; Challenge tests; Purification of virus;
Stress related study of fish and shellfish; Disease treatments.
Suggested Readings
Aline W. 1980. Fish Diseases. Springer Verlag.
Andrews C, Excell A & Carrington N. 1988. The Manual of Fish Health.
Salamander Books.
Austin B & Austin DA. 1987. Bacterial Fish Pathogens (Diseases in Farm
and Wild). Ellis Harward.

17
 Felix S, Riji John K, Prince Jeyaseelan MJ & Sundararaj V. 2001. Fish
Disease Diagnosis and Health Management. Fisheries College and
Research Institute, T.N. Veterinary and Animal Sciences
University. Thoothukkudi.
Inglis V, Roberts RJ & Bromage NR. 1993. Bacterial Diseases of Fish.
Blackwell.
Iwama G & Nakanishi T. (Eds.). 1996. The Fish Immune System -
Organism, Pathogen and Environment. Academic Press.
Roberts RJ. 2001. Fish Pathology. 3nd Ed. WB Saunders.
Schaperclaus W. 1986. Fish Diseases. Vols. I, II. Oxonian Press.
Shankar KM & Mohan CV. 2002. Fish and Shellfish Health Management.
UNESCO Publ.
Sindermann CJ. 1990. Principal Diseases of Marine Fish and Shellfish.
Vols. I, II. 2nd Ed. Academic Press.
Walker P & Subasinghe RP. (Eds.). 2005. DNA Based Molecular
Diagnostic Techniques: Research Needs for Standardization and
Validation of the Detection of Aquatic Animal Pathogens and
Diseases. FAO Publ.
Wedmeyer G, Meyer FP & Smith L. 1999. Environmental Stress and Fish
Diseases. Narendra Publ. House.

AQC 505 SEED PRODUCTION AND HATCHERY 2+1

OF FINFISHES
Objective
To learn seed production and hatchery management of commercially
important cultivable fishes.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: History, constraints and current status of natural seed
collection and hatchery seed production.
UNIT II
Reproductive biology: Physiology and morphology; Molecular and
physiological basis of reproduction, Overview of current developments in
reproductive biology.
UNIT III
Gamete maturation and development: Spermatogenesis and oogenesis,
Hormonal pathways and mode of control.
UNIT IV
Environmental and endocrine control of reproduction: Reproductive cycles,
Seasonality (Photoperiod, change in water quality and quantity, temperature,
lunar cycle, etc.), Environmental and exogenous hormonal stimuli.
UNIT V
Induced spawning: Methods of natural and artificial fertilization, GnRH and
Linpe models, evaluation of milt and egg, cryopreservation technique, use of
different synthetic hormones and analogues for induced spawning, Egg
staging, Stripping and fertilization.
UNIT VI
Hatchery technology for different species: Indian major and minor carps,
Exotic carps, Catfishes, Tilapia, Masheer, Trout, etc.

18
 UNIT VII
Marine fish seed production: Seabass, milkfish, mullets, sea breams,
rabbitfish, grouper, yellowtail, eel, cobia, etc.
UNIT VIII
Hatchery design and management: Criteria for site selection of hatchery and
nursery, Design and function of incubators, Jar hatchery, Chinese hatchery
and other hatchery systems- design and operation, hatchery protocols, larval
rearing stages, rearing technology, packaging and transport of seed.
UNIT IX
Seed supply in aquaculture: Relationship between fry supply and grow-out,
Macro-planning of fry production to stimulate grow-out, Marketing and
economics of fish seed.
Practical
Study of gonadal development in carps and other cultivable finfishes;
Identification of carp and catfish seed; Collection and identification of
cultivable brackishwater finfish seed; Packing and transportation of
cultivable finfish seed; Induced breeding of fishes through various inducing
agents; Evaluation of carp milt and egg; Design and operation of Chinese
hatchery; Preparation of brood and larval feed for different cultivable
finfish; Rearing of carp spawn and fry; Visit to different finfish hatcheries.
Suggested Readings
FAO. 1992. Manual of Seed Production of Carps. FAO Publ.
ICAR. 2006. Hand Book of Fisheries and Aquaculture. ICAR.
Jhingran VG & Pullin RSV. 1985. Hatchery Manual for the Common,
Chinese and Indian Major Carps. ICLARM, Philippines.
Jhingran VG. 1991. Fish and Fisheries of India. Hindustan Publ.
Landau M. 1992. Introduction to Aquaculture. John Wiley & Sons.
Mcvey JP. 1983. Handbook of Mariculture. CRC Press.
Pillay TVR & Kutty MN. 2005. Aquaculture- Principles and Practices.
Blackwell.
Rath RK. 2000. Freshwater Aquaculture. Scientific Publ.
Thomas PC, Rath SC & Mohapatra KD. 2003. Breeding and Seed
Production of Finfish and Shellfish. Daya Publ.

AQC 506 SEED PRODUCTION AND HATCHERY 1+1

MANAGEMENT OF SHELLFISHES
Objective
To provide overall knowledge of seed production and hatchery management
of commercially important cultivable crustaceans and molluscs.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: Current status; problems and prospects.
UNIT II
Seed resources: Site selection and techniques of collection; identification
and segregation of shellfish seed.
UNIT III
Reproductive biology: Gonad anatomy, endocrinology and reproductive
mechanisms in prawns, shrimps, crabs, lobsters, mussels, oysters, scallops
and clams; age at first maturity; factors affecting maturation and spawning.

19
 UNIT IV
Broodstock: availability; improvement; nutritional requirements; transport;
captive rearing and maturation; induced spawning; physical and chemical
inducing agents; physiology and techniques of eyestalk ablation.
UNIT V
Seed production: Seed production of commercially important prawns,
shrimps, crabs, lobsters, mussels, edible oysters, pearl oyster, scallops,
clams and sea cucumber.
UNIT VI
Hatchery technology and management: Site selection and facilities required;
culture and use of different live feed in shellfish hatcheries; larval diseases
and their management; different chemicals and drugs used; water quality
and feed management; Hatchery standards and biosecurity; sanitary and
phytosanitary (SPS) measures; better management practices (BMPs);
packaging and transport of seed.
UNIT VII
Economics of seed production.
Practical
Layout and design of prawn and shrimp hatcheries; Study of gonad
development in different cultivable crustaceans and molluscs; Collection
and identification of shellfish seed; Packing and transportation of shellfish
seed; Eyestalk ablation technique; Identification of larval stages of shrimp,
prawn, crab, mussel and oyster; Culture techniques of microalgae and other
live feed used in shellfish hatcheries; Artemia hatching technique; Visit to
different shellfish hatcheries; Economic analysis of shellfish hatcheries.
Suggested Readings
CMFRI Bulletin. 1987. National Seminar on Shellfish Resources and
Farming.
FAO. 2007. Manual for Operating a Small Scale Recirculation Freshwater
Prawn Hatchery.
ICAR. 2006. Handbook of Fisheries and Aquaculture. ICAR.
Jhingran VG. 1991. Fish and Fisheries of India. Hindustan Publ. Corp.
Landau M. 1992. Introduction to Aquaculture. John Wiley & Sons.
Mcvey JP. 1983. Handbook of Mariculture. CRC Press.
Pillay TVR & Kutty MN. 2005. Aquaculture - Principles and Practices.
Blackwell.
Thomas PC, Rath SC & Mohapatra KD. 2003. Breeding and Seed
Production of Finfish and Shellfish. Daya Publ. House.
AQC 507 APPLIED GENETICS IN AQUACULTURE 2+1
Objective
To impart knowledge on genetic basis of inheritance and breeding plans for
commercially important fishes.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: Origin and advancement in genetics; physical basis of
heredity; genetic correlation, domestication and local adaptation.
UNIT II
Chromosome manipulation: Ploidy induction methods - triplody and
tetraploidy, advantages and disadvantages of polyploids, androgenesis and
gynogenesis.

20
 UNIT III
Sex determination: Sex differentiation and sex reversal in fishes, sex control
and its role in aquaculture.
UNIT IV
Selection: Scope, application and methods of selection, marker assisted
selection-biochemical and molecular markers. Molecular tools for stock
differentiation for selection.
UNIT V
Hybridization: Heterosis, hybrid vigour, introgression.
UNIT VI
Inbreeding: Methods of estimation, inbreeding depression and
consequences, measures to reduce inbreeding in hatcheries.
UNIT VII
Conservation genetics: Genetic resources of India and conservation,
endangered species, cryopreservation of fish gametes.
UNIT VIII
Cytogenetics: Importance and karyotyping.
UNIT IX
Fish breeding: History and advancement of fish breeding, mode of
reproduction, basic breeding methods and breeding programmes and goals.
UNIT X
Genetic management strategies: Environmental impacts, Lessons from the
green revolution, Bioprospecting, GMOs and their detection.
Practical
Estimation of gene and genotype frequencies; Exercises on Hardy-
Weinberg equation; Estimation of inbreeding coefficient; Protocol of
androgenesis and gynogenesis; Protocol of cryopreservation of milt;
Karyotypic studies; Isolation of DNA from fish blood.
Suggested Readings
Carvalho GR & Pitcher TJ. (Eds.). 1995. Molecular Genetics in Fisheries.
Chapman & Hall.
Falconer DS & Mackay. 1996. Introduction to Quantitative Genetics. 4th
Ed. Longman.
Kanakaraj P. 2001. A Text Book on Animal Genetics. International Book
Distributing Co.
Nair PR. 2008. Biotechnology and Genetics in Fisheries and Aquaculture.
Dominant Publ.
Padhi BK & Mandal RK. 2000. Applied Fish Genetics. Fishing Chimes.
Pandian TJ, Strüssmann CA & Marian MP. 2005. Fish Genetics and
Aquaculture Biotechnology. Science Publ.
Purdom CE. 1993. Genetics and Fish Breeding. Chapman & Hall.
Reddy PVGK. 2005. Genetic Resources of Indian Major Carps. FAO Publ.
Reddy PVGK, Ayyappan S, Thampy DM & Krishna G. 2005. Text book of
Fish Genetics and Biotechnology. ICAR.
Ryman N & Utter F. (Eds.). 1988. Population Genetics and Fishery
Management. Washington Sea Grant Programmes, USA.
Tave D. 1996. Genetics for Fish Hatchery Managers. 2nd Ed. AVI Publ.
Thorpe JE, Gall GAE, Lannan JE & Nash CE. (Eds.). 1995. Conservation
of Fish and Shellfish Resources, Managing Diversity.

21
AQC 508 NON-FOOD AQUACULTURE 1+1
Objective
To impart knowledge on ornamental fish production, pearl production, bait
fish culture and aquatic ornamental plant propagation.
Theory
UNIT I
Aquarium fish trade: Present status; potential; major exporting and
importing countries; species-wise contribution of freshwater and marine
fishes; contribution of culture and capture; marketing strategies; anesthetics,
packing and transportation.
UNIT II
Breeding techniques: Reproductive biology, captive breeding and rearing of
freshwater, brackishwater, marine ornamental fishes and invertebrates.
UNIT III
Aquarium keeping: Design and construction of tanks; species-wise tank size
requirement; heating, lighting, aeration and filtration arrangements;
decorations used; common aquarium plants and their propagation; Feed,
health and water quality management; prophylaxis; quarantine.
UNIT IV
Value addition: Colour enhancement; genetic manipulation and production
of new strains; hybrids; acclimatization strategies for marine ornamental
fish to freshwater.
UNIT V
Pearl Production: Overview of pearl trade, pearl oysters and mussels of
commercial importance; anatomy, biology and seed production, techniques
of implantation, method of rearing and harvesting of pearl, Mable pearl
production, processing and quality evaluation of pearls, pearl production by
tissue culture.
UNIT VI
Bait fish culture: Scope and importance, bait fish species (minnows, silver
heads, etc.), farming practices.
UNIT VII
Ornamental aquatic plants: Propagation methods, nutrient and
environmental requirement, cropping methods, packing and transport.
Practical
Identification of common freshwater aquarium fishes and breeding trials of
selected freshwater fishes; Identification of common brackish water and
marine aquarium fishes; Aquarium fabrication, setting and maintenance;
Preparation of powdered and pelleted feed for ornamental fishes; Visit to
ornamental fish farms; Study of bacterial, viral, fungal diseases of
ornamental fishes and their control; Prophylactic and quarantine measures;
Nuclei implantation in pearl oyster; Identification of ornamental aquatic
plants.
Suggested Readings
Axelrod HR & Vorderwinkler W. 1978. Encyclopaedia of Tropical Fishes.
TFH Publ.
Axelrod HR & Sweenen ME. 1992. The Fascination of Breeding Aquarium
Fishes. TFH Publ.
Axelrod HR. 1967. Breeding Aquarium Fishes. TFH Publ.
ICAR. 2006. Handbook of Fisheries and Aquaculture. ICAR.

22
 Mills D. 1981. Aquarium Fishes. Kingfisher Books.
Sanford G & Crow R. 1991. The Manual of Tank Busters. Salamander
Books.
Saxena A. (Ed.). 2003. Aquarium Management. Daya Publ.
Spotte S. 1979. Fish and Invertebrate Culture. John Wiley & Sons.
Thabrow De WV. 1981. Popular Aquarium Plants. Thornbill Press.

AQC 509 COASTAL AQUACULTURE 2+1

Objective
To gain knowledge in establishing and managing different fish/shellfish
farming systems in coastal waters.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: An overview of the status of coastal aquaculture; Present trend
and scope in India.
UNIT II
Different farming systems: Cage and pen culture – type, site selection,
construction, specifications for different species; Raft and rack culture – site
selection, design and construction.
UNIT III
Important cultivable finfishes: Distribution, biology, seed collection,
nursery rearing, culture techniques, problems and prospects (seabass,
milkfish, mullets, pearlspot, sea breams, rabbitfish, grouper, yellowtail, eel,
cobia, salmon, flatfish).
UNIT IV
Culture of marine molluscs and echinoderms: Present status and scope in
India, Species cultured (mussels, oysters, pearl oysters, scallops, clams,
cockles, abalones, sea cucumber) distribution, biology, practices followed in
India, farming methods - off-bottom and on-bottom culture; Problems and
prospects.
UNIT V
Culture of crustaceans: Shrimp farming: systems of farming – extensive,
semi-intensive and intensive; site selection, infrastructure requirement,
design and construction of culture systems, pond preparation, stocking, feed
and water quality management, disease prevention and treatment; harvesting
and handling; freshwater farming of tiger shrimp, shrimp farming in un-
drainable ponds, low and zero water exchange systems; Mud crab fattening,
production of soft-shell crabs; Lobster culture; Crayfish culture.
UNIT VI
Seaweed culture: Major seaweed species of commercial importance;
methods of culture; farming of agar, algin, carrageenan yielding species;
emerging trends in their farming in open seas; Integration with other
farming systems.
Practical
Identification of cultivable marine and brackishwater finfish and shellfish;
Identification of cultivable seaweeds; Designing of different farming
systems – cages, pens, rafts and racks; Visit to coastal aqaufarms.

23
 Suggested Readings
Bardach EJ, Rhyther JH & Mc Larney WO. 1972. Aquaculture the
Farming and Husbandry of Freshwater and Marine Organisms.
John Wiley & Sons.
FAO. 2001. Planning and Management for Sustainable Coastal
Aquaculture Development. FAO Publ.
Gilbert B. 1990. Aquaculture. Vol. II. Ellis Horwood.
ICAR. 2006. Handbook of Fisheries and Aquaculture. ICAR.
Pillay TVR. 1990. Aquaculture, Principles and Practices. Fishing News
Books.
Pillay TVR & Kutty MN. 2005. Aquaculture: Principles and Practices. 2nd
Ed. Blackwell.
Shepherd J & Bromage N. 1990. Intensive Fish Farming. B.S.P.
Professional Books.

AQC 510 FRESHWATER AQUACULTURE 2+1

Objective
To gain knowledge on fish and prawn farming in different culture systems.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: Present status, problems and scope of fish and prawn farming
in global and Indian perspective.
UNIT II
Aquaculture systems: Extensive, semi-intensive and intensive culture of fish,
Pen and cage culture in lentic and lotic water bodies, polyculture, composite
fish culture.
UNIT III
Fish farming: Nursery and grow-out, pond preparation, stocking, feeding and
water quality management in the farming of major and minor carps, magur,
singhi, murrels, tilapia, pangasius, freshwater turtle, etc.; Stunted seed
production and culture practice.
UNIT IV
Freshwater prawn farming: Monoculture practice of prawn in ponds, all-
male culture and its advantages, polyculture with carps, prawn farming in
inland saline soils. Nursery rearing, sex segregation, pond preparation,
stocking, feeding and water quality management, disease prevention and
treatment; harvesting and handling.
UNIT V
Integrated farming systems: Design, farming practices, constraints and
economics of IFS of fish with paddy, cattle, pig, poultry, duck, rabbit, etc.
UNIT VI
Wastewater-fed aquaculture: Water treatment methods, species selection,
culture practices, harvesting and depuration process.
UNIT VII
Economics of different fish farming systems.
Practical
Identification of commercially important cultivable fish and prawn species;
Assessment of seed quality- stress test; Calculating carrying capacity of
pond and stocking density; Check tray assessment and feed ration
calculation; Sampling procedure and growth assessment; Lime and

24
 fertilizer requirement calculations; Farm visits; Modeling of different
culture systems.
Suggested Readings
AAHRI. 1998. Health Management in Shrimp Ponds. Aquatic Animal Health
Research Institute (AAHRI), Department of Fisheries, Thailand.
Agarwal SC. 2008. A Handbook of Fish Farming. 2nd Ed. Narendra Publ.
House.
Beveridge MCM & Mc Andrew BJ. 2000. Tilapias: Biology and
Exploitations. Kluwer.
De Silva SS. (Ed.). 2001. Reservoir and Culture Based Fisheries: Biology
and Management. ACAIR Proceedings.
FAO. 2007. Manual on Freshwater Prawn Farming.
Midlen & Redding TA. 1998. Environmental Management for Aquaculture.
Kluwer.
New MB. 2000. Freshwater Prawn Farming. CRC Publ.
Pillay TVR. 1990. Aquaculture: Principles and Practices. Fishing News
Books, Cambrige University Press, Cambridge.
Venugopal S. 2005. Aquaculture. Pointer Publ.
Welcomme RL. 2001. Inland Fisheries: Ecology and Management. Fishing
News Books.

AQC 511 LARVAL NUTRITION AND CULTURE OF 1+1

FISH FOOD ORGANISMS
Objective
To impart basic understanding of the nutritional requirements of
fish/shellfish larvae and knowledge on mass culture and enrichment of live
food organisms.
Theory
UNIT I
Larval nutrition: Larval stages, nutritional requirements of fish and shellfish
larvae, quality requirements of larval feeds (particle size, digestibility),
natural food and its importance in aquaculture, nutritional quality of
commonly used fish food organisms, bioenrichment, biofilm/periphyton and
its use, culture of single cell proteins and their nutritional quality,
formulation and preparation of artificial feeds for larval rearing,
microparticulate diets.
UNIT II
Fish food organisms: Bacterioplankton, phytoplankton and zooplankton and
their role in larval nutrition.
UNIT III
Mass culture techniques: Methods of collection, maintenance and rearing of
fish food organisms, Different media used in culture, Mass culture of fish
food organisms and their application in hatcheries, culture of important
microalgae, rotifers, artemia, cladocerans, copepods, oligochaetes,
nematodes and insect larvae.
Practical
Collection, identification and isolation of live food organisms using various
techniques; Preparation of various culture media; Preparation and
maintenance of stock microalgal culture; Preparation of artificial feed for
rearing finfish and shellfish larvae; Mass culture of microalgae; Mass

25
 culture of cladocerans, copepods and rotifers; Culture of Artemia nauplii,
infusoria – freshwater and marine; Culture of earthworms and chironomid
larvae.
Suggested Readings
CIFE. 1993. Training Manual on Culture of Live Food Organisms for
AQUA Hatcheries. Central Institute of Fisheries Education,
Versova, Mumbai.
Finn RN & Kapoor BG. 2008. Fish Larval Physiology. Science Publ.
Hagiwara A, Snell TW, Lubzens E & Tamaru CS. 1997. Live Food in
Aquaculture. Proceedings of the Live Food and Marine Larviculture
Symposium. Kluwer.
MPEDA. 1993. Handbook on Aqua Farming - Live Feed. Micro Algal
Culture. MPEDA Publication.
Muthu MS. 1983. Culture of Live Feed Organisms. Tech. Paper 14.
Summer Institute in Hatchery Production of Prawns Seeds. CMFRI,
Cochin.
Ojha JS. 2005. Aquaculture Nutrition and Biochemistry. Daya Publ.
Santhanam R, Ramnathan M & Venkataramanujum. 1997. A Manual of
Methods in Plankton. Fisheries College and Research Institute,
Tamil Nadu Veterinary and Animal Sciences University, Tuticorin.
Sorgeloos P & Pandian KS. 1984. Culture of Live Food Organisms with
Special Reference to Artemia Culture. CMFRI Spl. Publ. No. 15.
Tonapi GT. 1980. Freshwater Animals of India. Oxford & IBH.

AQC 512 AQUACULTURE ENGINEERING 2+1

Objective
To learn the basic aspects of successful farm designing for effective
management and optimum yield.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: Technical components of farm designing, future trends in
aquaculture engineering.
UNIT II
Aquaculture facilities: Planning process, site selection and evaluation,
design, components and construction of tanks, ponds, cages and hatcheries.
UNIT III
Water intake and outlet: Pipe line, water flow and head loss, pumps.
UNIT IV
Water treatment: Equipment used for water treatment, filters, ultraviolet
light, ozone, heating and cooling and other processes of disinfection.
UNIT V
Aeration and oxygenation: Design and fabrication of aerators, oxygen
injection system
UNIT VI
Recirculation and water use system: Definition, components and design.
UNIT VII
Feeding system: Different types of feeding equipment, feed control systems,
dynamic feeding systems.
UNIT VIII
Instrumentation and monitoring: Instruments for measuring water quality.

26
 Practical
Visit to aqua farms; Contour survey and mappings; Evaluation of
performance of seepage controlling devices; Designing of fresh and
brackish water fin and shellfish farms; Designing of fresh and brackish
water fin and shellfish hatcheries; Estimation of construction cost of FRP
and cement hatchery units, inlets, outlets, sluice gate, monks, hatchery
sheds, supply channel and drainage systems, gravitational flow; Design and
construction of effluent treatment plant for hatchery; Evaluation of capacity
of aeration devices.
Suggested Readings
Thomas L. 1995. Fundamentals of Aquacultural Engineering. Chapman &
Hall.
Wheaton FW. 1977. Aquacultural Engineering. John Wiley & Sons.
Ivar LO. 2007. Aquaculture Engineering. Daya Publ. House.

AQC 601 ADVANCES IN AQUACULTURE PRODUCTION SYSTEMS 2+1

Objective
To impart essential knowledge and skills regarding advanced technologies
of different aquaculture production systems.
Theory
UNIT I
An overview of aquaculture production systems: Present status, constraints
and future perspectives of aquaculture production systems in India and the
world.
UNIT II
Advances in design and construction: Hatcheries; Earthen ponds; Concrete
tanks; Pens and cages; Rafts; Racks.
UNIT III
Aquatic plant production systems: Ornamental aquatic plants; microalgae
and seaweeds; Long line production system.
UNIT IV
Aquaculture production management: Monitoring of water quality; feeding
and monitoring, sampling and harvesting of finfishes and shellfishes.
UNIT V
Advances in farming systems: Enhancing carrying capacity; integrated
farming systems; semi-intensive and intensive culture systems;
Recirculatory system; Flow-through system.
UNIT VI
Code of conduct for responsible and sustainable aquaculture. Cluster
farming, Organic Farming, Satellite Farming and Co-operative farming.
Practical
Soil and water quality monitoring; Basic software packages for designing
aquaculture systems; Preparing a model layout for advanced production
system; Working out the economic feasibility of construction and
maintenance of different fish production systems; Preparation of project
proposal for fish production systems.
Suggested Readings
Dubey SK. 2006. Fish Farming. Dominant Publ.
Jhingran VG. 1991. Fish and Fisheries of India. Hindhustan Publ. Corp.

27
 Pandey N & Davendra SM. 2008. Integrated Fish Farming. Daya Publ.
House.
Pillay TVR & Kutty MN. 2005. Aquaculture: Principles and Practices. 2nd
Ed. Blackwell.
Rath RK. 2000. Freshwater Aquaculture. Scientific Publ.
Selvamani BR & Mahadevan RK. 2008. Fish Farming Systems. Campus
Books International.
Shepherd J & Brommage N. 1990. Intensive Fish Farming. B.S.P.
Professional Books.
Sinha VRP & Ramachandran V. 1985. Freshwater Fish Culture. ICAR.

AQC 602 ADVANCES IN SEED PRODUCTION AND 2+1

HATCHERY MANAGEMENT
Objective
To impart knowledge of the various requirements for seed production of
commercially important finfish and shellfish.
Theory
UNIT I
Reproductive biology of important fishers, crustaceans and molluscs.
Anatomy and morphology of reproductive organs. Reproductive behavior
of fishes. Sex determination in fishes.
UNIT II
Reproductive endocrinology: Anatomy and physiology of endocrine glands.
Biochemical characteristics of endocrine hormones. Role of endocrine
hormone in reproduction.
UNIT III
Broodstock management: Factors affecting the maturation and spawning of
fin fishes and shell fishes. Nutritional and environmental requirement for
broodstock. Nutritional and environmental manipulation for early
maturation. Criteria for the selection of brood stock. Selective breeding
strategies; Tagging; Transportation of brood stock. Natural and synthetic
anesthetics for transport. Vaccines and therapeutics for health management
of broodstock.
UNIT IV
Induced Spawning: Biochemical characteristics of synthetic hormone
analogues and their applications. Comparative evaluation of commercially
available inducing agents. Artificial insemination in crustaceans and
molluscs. Cryopreservation of gametes and embryos.
UNIT V
Seed production and hatchery technology: Advances in seed production of
commercially important finfishes and shellfishes. Seed production of
ornamental fishes. Artificial propagation of seaweeds.
UNIT VI
Hatchery management: Water quality management in hatcheries - Chemical,
Physical and Biological approaches. Nutritional requirement of larvae and
post larvae. Live feed culture. Nutritional enrichment of live feed.
Formulation of artificial diets. Strategies to control diseases in hatcheries.
Diagnosis, quarantine and seed certification. Use of Probiotics and
Immunostimulants in hatcheries, SPF and SPR. Effluent treatment in
Hatcheries. Seed transportation methods.

28
 Practical
Insemination; Cryopreservation of fish and shellfish gametes; Project
preparation for constructing hatchery; Quantitative and qualitative
determination of fish gametes like sperm motility, viability, counts; Digital
equipments in broodstock management; Methods to identify quality seeds -
stress test, microscopic examination.
Suggested Readings
Bardach EJ, Rhyther JH & Mc Larney WO. 1972. Aquaculture. The
Farming and Husbandry of Freshwater and Marine Organisms.
John Wiley & Sons.
Chakraborty C & Sadhu AK. 2000. Biology Hatchery and Culture
Technology of Tiger Prawn and Giant Freshwater Prawn. Daya
Publ. House.
Diwan AD, Joseph S & Ayyappan S. 2008. Physiology of Reproduction,
Breeding and Culture of Tiger Shrimp. Narendra Publ. House.
Gilbert B. 1990. Aquaculture. Vol. II. Ellis Harwood.
Jhingran VG & Pullin RSV. 1985. Hatchery Manual for the Common,
Chinese and Indian Major Carps. ICLARM, Philippines.
Thomas PC, Rath SC & Mohapatra KD. 2003. Breeding and Seed
Production of Finfish and Shellfish. Daya Publ. House.

AQC 603 AQUACULTURE AND ECOSYSTEM MANAGEMENT 2+1

Objective
To impart knowledge on interactions between aquaculture and the
environment.
Theory
UNIT I
Aquaculture and ecosystem relationship: Ecosystems and productivity,
biotic interaction within ecosystems and ecological homeostasis.
UNIT II
Climate: Weather elements of concern in aquaculture, Green house gases,
global warming and their impact.
UNIT III
Impact of environment on aquaculture: Raw water source, physical and
chemical characteristics, contaminants and pollutants (algae, pathogens,
heavy metals, pesticides) and their effect on productivity.
UNIT IV
Impact of aquaculture on environment: Waste water discharge, its quality
and quantity; impacts of effluents on ecosystems, chemical degradation of
soil and water.
UNIT V
Environment monitoring: Problems and preventive measures of antibiotic
and drug residues, salination of soil and water, Eutrophication, Environment
impact assessment and environmental audit, Biosensors in aquatic
environment, toxicity assessment, Ecolabelling and traceability.
UNIT VI
Environment management: Introduction of exotics and escape of farmed
fish, Pathogens in aquatic environment, Safety of aquaculture products,
Role of microbes in aquatic environment; assessment of probiotic impact in
aquaculture.

29
 Practical
Waste water analysis; Environment impact assessment; Environmental
audit; Toxicity assessment studies; Ecolabelling and traceability; Isolation,
enumeration and Identification of bacterial population; Physical and
chemical characteristics of soil; Design and construction of effluent
treatment plant.
Suggested Readings
Holmer M, Black K, Duarte CM, Marba N & Karakassis I. (Eds.). 2008.
Aquaculture in the Ecosystem. Daya Publ. House.
Lagler KP, Bardach JE, Miller RR & Passino MDR. 1977. Ichthyology.
John Wiley & Sons.
Midlen & Redding TA. 1998. Environmental Management for Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Nikolsky GV. 2008. The Ecology of Fishes. Academic Press.
Upadhyay AR. 2004. Aquatic Plants for the Wastewater Treatment. Daya
Publ. House.

AQC 604 AQUATIC ANIMAL HEALTH MANAGEMENT 1+1

AND QUARANTINE
Objective
To impart and update knowledge for combating pathogenic diseases in
aquatic environment and its management.
Theory
UNIT I
Defence mechanism in fish and shellfish: Specific and non-specific defence
mechanism, immunogenicity, immune cells, immune suppressant, ontogeny
of immune system; cellular adaptation, pathogen specificity.
UNIT II
Disease diagnostics tools: Histopathological methods, tools used in different
types of PCR, Immunoassay, Biochemical assay, Monoclonal and
polyclonal based antibody assay, Electron microscopy, Serological
techniques.
UNIT III
Disease prevention and therapeutics: Vaccines and bactericins, development
of vaccines like DNA vaccine, adjuvants, etc; administration and mode of
action of pathogen specific drugs, drug resistance, antiviral drugs, drug
regulation in India, pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics,
immunostimulants.
UNIT IV
Quarantine: Biosecurity principles, SPF and SPR, quarantine protocols, and
facilities, broodstock and seed quarantine measures, Quarantine of Aquatic
Animals and Premises.
Practical
Analysing and reporting legal problems relating to quarantine; Microscopic
techniques; Immunisation techniques; Necropsy examination to study
internal organs of fish; PCR; ELISA; Agglutination test; Gel
electrophoresis; Histopathology; Determination of dosages of chemicals
and drugs for treating common diseases.

30
 Suggested Readings
Andrews C, Excell A & Carrington N. 1988. The Manual of Fish Health.
Salamander Books.
Sindermann CJ. 1990. Principal Diseases of Marine Fish and Shellfish.
Vols. I, II. 2nd Ed. Academic Press.
Jorge E, Helmut S, Thomas W & Kapoor BG. 2008. Fish Diseases.
Science Publ.
Felix S, Riji John K, Prince Jeyaseelan MJ & Sundararaj V. 2001. Fish
Disease Diagnosis and Health Management. Fisheries College and
Research, Institute, T. N. Veterinary and Animal Sciences
University. Thoothukkudi.
Humphrey J, Arthur JR, Subasinghe RP & Phillips MJ. 2005. Aquatic
Animal Quarantine and Health Certification in Asia. FAO Publ.
Inglis V, Roberts RJ & Bromage NR. 1993. Bacterial Diseases of Fish.
Blackwell.
Iwama G & Nakanishi T. (Eds.). 1996. The Fish Immune System -
Organism, Pathogen and Environment. Academic Press.
Roberts RJ. 2001. Fish Pathology. 3nd Ed. WB Saunders.
Shankar KM & Mohan CV. 2002. Fish and Shellfish Health Management.
UNESCO Publ.
Wedmeyer G, Meyer FP & Smith L. 1999. Environmental Stress and Fish
Diseases. Narendra Publ. House.
Woo PTK & Bruno DW. (Eds.). 1999. Fish Diseases and Disorders. Vol.
III. Viral, Bacterial and Fungal Infection. CABI.

AQC 605 FISH AND SHELLFISH PHYSIOLOGY AND 1+1

ENDOCRINOLOGY
Objective
To learn functional physiology of fish and shellfish.
Theory
UNIT I
General physiology and endocrinology: Physiology of migration and
behaviour, chemical nature of hormones, storage, release and control of
hormones, serochemistry, structure and function of neuro-endocrine
system, biotic and abiotic factors influencing homeostasis, ecophysiology,
endocrine control of growth.
UNIT II
Nutritional and digestive physiology: Mechanism of chemo, electro and
mechanorecption, gustation, digestive enzymes and isozymes, nutrient
tansporters, gut microbial digestion, excretion.
UNIT III
Neurophysiology: Neurosecretory system in fishes, crustaceans and
molluscs, neurotransmitters, ecdysis.
UNIT IV
Reproductive physiology: Maturation and spawning, spermatogenesis,
oogenesis, yolk formation, mechanism of sex reversal.
UNIT V
Respiratory physiology: Structure and chemical composition of respiratory
pigments, gas exchange concept, osmoregulation.

31
 UNIT VI
Stress physiology: stress response, stress hormones, stress adaptation.
Practical
Hormone assay –RIA (Radio Immuno Assay); Dissection of fin and
shellfish to study endocrine glands; Histological techniques to study
endocrine cells; Identification of moult stages; Serological analysis;
Application of Electrocardiogram and respirometer.
Suggested Readings
Adiyodi KG & Adiyodi RG. 1971. Endocrine Control of Reproduction in
Decapod Crustacea. Biology Reviews.
Agarwal NK. 2008. Fish Reproduction. APH Publ.
Bell TA & Lightner TA. 1988. A Handbook of Normal Penaeid Shrimp
Histology. World Aquaculture Society.
Ghosh R. 2007. Fish Genetics and Endocrinology. Swastik Publ. & Distr.
Hoar WS, Randall DJ & Donaldson EM. 1983. Fish Physiology. Vol. IX.
Academic Press.
Maria RJ, Augustine A & Kapoor BG. 2008. Fish Reproduction. Science
Publ.
Matty AJ. 1985. Fish Endocrinology. Croom Helm.
Mente E. 2003. Nutrition, Physiology and Metabolism in Crustaceans.
Science Publ.
Nikolsky GV. 2008. The Ecology of Fishes. Academic Press.
Thomas PC, Rath SC & Mohapatra KD. 2003. Breeding and Seed
Production of Finfish and Shellfish. Daya Publ. House.

AQC 606 ADVANCES IN FISH GENETICS 2+1

Objective
To provide knowledge in genetics for improving qualitative and quantitative
traits in fish.
Theory
UNIT I
Scope of applied fish genetics: Inheritance of qualitative and quantitative
traits in fish; chromosomal polymorphism.
UNIT II
Non chromosomal inheritance: Mitochondrial inheritance.
UNIT III
Chromosome manipulation: Gynogenesis and androgenesis; production of
super-males and transgenic fish.
UNIT IV
Inbreeding and genetic drift: Estimation of genetic parameters.
UNIT V
Selective breeding: Qualitative and quantitative traits for selection, methods
of selection- individual selection, mass selection, family selection and
combined selection; Designing of breeding programmes.
UNIT VI
Genetic markers: Use of biochemical and molecular genetic markers in
hybridization, selective breeding.
UNIT VII
Diallele crossing: Genetic improvement of particular trait (disease
resistance) in fish.

32
 UNIT VIII
Chromosome banding techniques: C-banding, G-banding, NOR-banding,
FISH.
UNIT IX
Genotoxicity assay: Comet assay, sister chromatid exchange, MNT, etc.
Practical
Chi-square test; Estimation of heritability and repeatability; Assessment of
genetic gain through selection; Calculation of selection differential;
Calculation of selection response; Estimation of inbreeding coefficient and
path coefficient; Karyotypic studies; C-banding (hetero chromatin
banding); NOR- banding (nucleolar organizer region banding); G-banding
(Giemsa banding); Ploidy determination methods.
Suggested Readings
Das P & Jhingran AG. 1976. Fish Genetics in India. Today & Tomorrow
Publ.
Douglas T. 1998. Genetics for Fish Hatchery Managers. Kluwer.
Dunham RA. 2004. Aquaculture and Fisheries Biotechnology Genetic
Approaches. CABI.
Malvee S. 2008. Fish Genetics. SBS Publ.
Nair PR. 2008. Biotechnology and Genetics in Fisheries and Aquaculture.
Dominant Publ.
Padhi BJ & Mandal RK. 2000. Applied Fish Genetics. Fishing Chimes.
Pandian TJ, Strüssmann CA & Marian MP. 2005. Fish Genetics and
Aquaculture Biotechnology. Science Publ.
Reddy PVGK. 2005. Genetic Resources of Major Indian Carps. Daya
Publ.
Reddy PVGK, Ayyappan S, Thampy DM & Gopalakrishna. 2005. Text
Book of Fish Genetics and Biotechnology. ICAR.
Sinnot EW, Dunn L & Dobzansky T. 1989. Principles of Genetics. Mc
Graw Hill.

AQC 607 INTENSIVE FARMING SYSTEMs FOR TILAPIA 1+1

AND CATFISHES
Objective
To learn the techniques of intensive farming of tilapia and catfishes.
Theory
UNIT I
Intensive Farming Systems: Status and future prospectus of catfishes and
tilapia in India, Need for intensification, Development of intensive farming.
Disease and its control, constraints in intensive farming.
UNIT II
Catfish: Commercially important catfishes, Different culture systems,
Means of intensifying catfish culture, polyculture of catfish with other
species, Water quality management in catfish culture, feeds and feeding,
Economics of culture.
UNIT III
Tilapia: Commercially important tilapia, Different culture systems, Means
of intensifying tilapia culture, polyculture of tilapia, Water quality
management in tilapia culture, feeds and feeding, Techniques of sex

33
 reversal in tilapia, mass production of monosex seed and hybrids,
Production of red tilapia, Economics of culture.
Practical
Study of aerators and blowers; Experience in breeding and culture of
catfish; Experience in breeding and culture of tilapia; Seed production of
catfish and tilapia; Formulation of feeds for catfish and tilapia; Stocking
density manipulation and fish production; Economics of intensive farming
of catfish and tilapia.
Suggested Readings
Bardach EJ, Rhyther JH & Mc. Larney WO. 1972. Aquaculture The
Farming and Husbandry of Freshwater and Marine Organisms.
John Wiley & Sons.
Beveridge MCM & Mc Andrew BJ. 2000. Tilapias: Biology and
Exploitations. Kluwer.
Gilbert B. 1990. Aquaculture. Vol II. Ellis Harwood.
Jayaram KC. 2006. Catfishes of India. Narendra Publ. House.
Pillay TVR. 1990. Aquaculture, Principles and Practices. Fishing News
Books.
Rath PK. 2000. Freshwater Aquaculture. Scientific Publ

AQC 608 AQUACULTURE DEVELOPMENT PLANING AND 1+1

MANAGEMENT
Objective
To understand different aspects of planning and management processes
specific to aquaculture development.
To acquire competency to plan, implement, monitor and evaluate
aquaculture development programmes.
Theory
UNIT I
Importance, principles and processes in developing aquaculture
programmes; Planning for sustainable development; Types of planning;
Planning strategies at various levels - Top down and bottom up approaches.
Role and relevance of Panchayati Raj institutions in aquaculture
development; Plan allocation and performance of FFDA, BFDA and other
aquaculture related programmes over the different plan-periods in India.
UNIT II
Project preparation and project appraisal in terms of social benefit analysis,
shadow prices; Project management techniques - PERT and CPM; Logical
framework approach (LFA), Stakeholder analysis; Participatory Monitoring
and evaluation (PROME); People’s participation in aquaculture
programmes, significance, importance and approaches .
UNIT III
Critical analysis of aquaculture and rural development programmes; design,
operation, institutional mechanism and socio-cultural and economic impact
of programmes such as NREGA; labour market relations; Fisheries
development vis-à-vis fisheries for development; Livelihood Frameworks.
Practical
Need assessment, setting objectives, developing plan of work, Success
indicators, Impact assessment of aquaculture development programmes,
SWOT analysis; Exercises on PERT and CPM. Fisheries and Aquaculture

34
 policies of select countries; Study visits to selected aquaculture project
areas – FFDA/ BFDA/ SAUs/ICAR institutes.
Suggested Readings
Agarwal SC. 2004. Fishery Management. APH Publ. Corp.
Agarwal SC & Johal S. 2003. Fishery Development. Narendra Publ.
Felix S. 2007. Aquaculture Management Techniques. Daya Publ. House.
Singh B. 2007. Fishery Management: Planning and Objectives. Vista
International Publ. House.
Sinha VRP. 2005. Fisheries Research Planning and Management in
Developing Countries. Narendra Publ. House.

AQC 609 APPLIED BIOTECHNOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To learn various biotechnological applications for enhancing production
through sustainable eco-friendly culture.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: Scope of biotechnology in fisheries and aquaculture research.
UNIT II
Transgenics: Principles of transgenic technology and its application in
fisheries.
UNIT III
Feed biotechnology: Probiotics, single cell proteins, Nutraceuticals.
UNIT IV
Recombinant proteins of commercial importance: enzymes, hormones,
bioactive compounds, therapeutic proteins.
UNIT V
Biotechnological approaches in environmental management:
Bioremediation, biosensors, biofouling, treatment of waste water.
UNIT VI
Anti microbial Peptides and their applications.
UNIT VII
Vaccination in fishes- DNA vaccines, sub UNIT vaccines and Biofilm
Vaccines.
UNIT VIII
Applications of biotechnological tools: Recombinant DNA, Monoclonal
antibodies, Cell lines and stem cell culture, DNA markers and MAS.
UNIT IX
Biotechnological instrumentation in Aquaculture.
Practical
Cell culture and cell lines; Development of hybridoma and production of
monoclonal antibodies; Collection, handling and observation of gametes of
finfish and shellfish; Preparation of chromosomes from embryos and young
fish; Ploidy determination by RBC measurement and chromosome
numbers; Gene transfer experiments: northern blotting and southern
blotting for integration and expression of transgenes.
Suggested Readings
Felix S. 2007. Molecular Diagnostic Biotechnology in Aquaculture. Daya
Publ. House.

35
Fingerman M, Nagabhushanam R & Thompson MF. 1997. Recent
Advances in Marine Biotechnology. Vols. I-III. Oxford & IBH.
Glick BR & Pasternak JJ. 1999. Molecular Biotechnology: Principles and
Applications of Recombinant DNA Technology. ASM Press.
Nagabhushanam R, Diwan AD, Zahurnec BJ & Sarojini R. 2004.
Biotechnology of Aquatic Animals. Science Publ.
Nair PR. 2008. Biotechnology and Genetics in Fisheries and Aquaculture.
Dominant Publ.
Pandian TJ, Strüssmann CA & Marian MP. 2005. Fish Genetics and
Aquaculture Biotechnology. Science Publ.
Primrose SB. 1989. Modern Biotechnology. Blackwell.
Ramesh RC. (Ed.). 2007. Microbial Biotechnology in Agriculture and
Aquaculture. Vol. II. Science Publ.
Reddy PVGK, Ayyappan S, Thampy DM & Gopalakrishna. 2005. Text
Book of Fish Genetics and Biotechnology. ICAR.
Singh B. 2006. Marine Biotechnology and Aquculture Development. Daya
Publ. House.
Zhanjiang JL. 2007. Aquaculture Genome Technologies. Blackwell.

36
 AQUACULTURE
List of Journals

• Animal Feed Sciences and • Fisheries Research

Technology • Fisheries Science
• Animal Nutrition and Feed • Fishing Chimes
Technology • Genetics
• Annals of Nutrition and • Heredity
Metabolism • Hydrobiologia
• Annual Review of Nutrition • Indian Journal of Animal
• Annual Review of Physiology Nutrition
• Applied Aquaculture • Indian journal of Environmental
• Applied Engineering in Health
Agriculture • Israeli Journal of Aquaculture –
• Applied Fisheries and Bamidgeh
Aquaculture • Journal of Animal Breeding and
• Aquacultural Engineering Genetics
• Aquaculture • Journal of Animal Genetics
• Aquaculture and Fisheries • Journal of Applied Aquaculture
Management • Journal of Aquaculture and
• Aquaculture Asia Aquatic Science
• Aquaculture Economics and • Journal of Aquaculture in the
Management Tropics
• Aquaculture International • Journal of Biotechnology
• Aquaculture Nutrition • Journal of Environmental
• Aquaculture Research Research
• Asian Fisheries Science • Journal of Fish Diseases
• Asian Journal of Microbiology • Journal of Ichthyology
Biotechnology Environmental • Limnology and Oceanography
Science • Pesticides Research
• Chromosoma • Theoretical and Applied Genetics
• Comparative Biochemistry and • Toxic Environmental Chemistry
Physiology • Tropical Aquaculture
• Diseases of Aquatic Organisms • Tropical Aquarium
• Fish and Shellfish Immunology • Tropical Science
• Fish Physiology and • World Aquaculture
Biochemistry • Yojana

37
 AQUACULTURE
Suggested Broad Areas for Master’s and Doctoral Research
• Adverse effects of chemical fertilizer • Energy requirement of different
application cultivable species
• Alternative protein sources • Environmental manipulation and
• Antibiotic residues in the culture hatching rate
systems • Evaluation of ITKs in seed transport
• Aquaculture in inland salt affected • Extra hypothalamo-hypophysial
areas control of reproduction
• Automated live food production • Hybridization of cultivable species
systems • Impact of aquaculture development
• Bioactive compounds and • Impact of extreme climate on
Bioremediation aquaculture
• Bioenrichment of live food • Impact of probiotics on environment
• Biofertilizers in pond productivity • Multiple breeding of catfishes
• Breeding and rearing of indigenous • Nutraceuticals for aquaculture feed
brackish water and marine • Ontogeny of digestive system in fish
ornamental fishes larvae
• Breeding performance of different • Organic farming of fish and shrimp
stocks of brood • Participatory aquaculture
• Cage and pen culture for marine development models
finfish • Performance of commercially
• Carbon-nitrogen ratio in pond important catfishes in intensive
productivity systems
• Cell lines and stem cell culture • Performance of monosex tilapia in
• Conservation of endangered species intensive systems
• Control of bioluminescent bacteria • Pigment enhancement of selected
(LB) in aquaculture systems ornamental fishes
• Control of Cyanobacteria through • Production and evaluation of stunted
nutrient manipulation fingerlings
• Cryopreservation of gametes and • Quantification of phosphorus as a
embryos limiting factor in different types of
• Culture of live feed for larval rearing soils
• Defense mechanisms and immunity • Renewable energy in aquaculture
• Designing low cost effluent • Replacement of Artemia by
treatment plant formulated larval diets
• Designing of novel integration • Role of disruptors in aquaculture
systems • Shrimp culture in zero-water
• Development of fish and shrimp exchange system
maturation diets • Single cell proteins as feed
• Development of genetically ingredients
improved broodstock • Specific requirement of amino and
• Development of inert feeds for fatty acids.
larvae • Standardization of chemicals used in
• Development of vaccines Drug controlling diseases
resistance • Strategies for sustainable
• Development of vaccines for larvae aquaculture
• Disease control in ornamental fishes • Study of nutrient dynamics in ponds
• Efficiency of oxygen transfer
through different aeration devices
• Endocrine control of respiration and
osmoregulation

38
 AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT
Course Structure - at a Glance
 
CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS
AEM 501* AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT AND BIODIVERSITY 2+1
AEM 502* CHEMICAL INTERACTIONS IN THE AQUATIC 2+1
ENVIRONMENT
AEM 503*# INTEGRATED COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT 2+1
AEM 504* AQUATIC POLLUTION AND WASTEWATER MANAGEMENT 2+1
AEM 505 ECOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT OF LIMNETIC 2+1
ENVIRONMENT
AEM 506 ENVIRONMENTAL BIOTECHNOLOGY 1+1
AEM 507 ENVIRONMENTAL TOXICOLOGY 1+1
AEM 508 ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES IN ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES 1+1
AEM 509 PLANKTONOLOGY 1+1
AEM 510 FISHERIES OCEANOGRAPHY 1+1
AEM 511 AQUATIC MICROBIOLOGY 2+1

AEM 591 MASTER’S SEMINAR 1+0

AEM 599 MASTER’S RESEARCH 20

AEM 601** ADVANCES IN AQUATIC ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES 2+1

AEM 602** BIOTECHNOLOGY FOR CLEANER ENVIRONMENT 2+1
AEM 603** BENTHIC ECOLOGY 1+1
AEM 604 ESTUARINE AND COASTAL OCEANOGRAPHY 2+1
AEM 605 ORGANIC PRODUCTION AND PLANT PIGMENTS 2+1
AEM 606 ENVIRONMENT IMPACT ASSESSMENT 1+1
AEM 607 MANAGEMENT AND UTILIZATION OF WASTEWATER 2+1
AEM 608 APPLICATION OF REMOTE SENSING AND GIS IN FISHERIES 2+1
AEM 609 DISPERSAL AND FATE OF POLLUTANTS IN THE OCEAN 1+1
AEM 610 RESTORATION ECOLOGY 1+1

AEM 691 DOCTORAL SEMINAR I 1+0

AEM 692 DOCTORAL SEMINAR II 1+0

AEM 699 DOCTORAL RESEARCH 45

* Compulsory for Master’s programme; ** Compulsory for Doctoral programme
#AEM 503 cross listed with Fisheries Resource Management FRM 507

39
 AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT
Course Contents

AEM 501 AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT AND BIODIVERSITY 2+1

Objective
To acquaint the students with the theoretical and practical aspects of the
aquatic environment and biodiversity.
Theory
UNIT I
Concepts in aquatic environment: Aquatic environment/ecosystem –
components-structure and functions; Ecological concepts – succession,
homeostasis, natality and mortality, r and k selection; Concepts of habitat
and ecological niche; carrying capacity.
UNIT II
Environmental concerns: Environmental concerns – population explosion,
industrialization, urbanization, and natural calamities; Overexploitation of
resources; Environmental stresses; Global Warming; Ozone Depletion.
UNIT III
Biodiversity: Biodiversity – Definition and concept; Factors influencing
aquatic biodiversity; Types of biodiversity - Species diversity in different
ecosystems, Genetic Diversity, and Habitat Diversity; Biodiversity indices
and their significance; Concepts of Index of Biotic Integrity (IBI);
Economic appraisal of biodiversity; Global diversity patterns and loss of
biodiversity.
Practical
Collection of fauna and flora from different ecosystems; Analysis of
Biodiversity at community, population and species levels through different
methods; Case studies.
Suggested Readings
Carter RWG. 1998. Coastal Environments: An Introduction to the Physical,
Ecological and Cultural Systems of Coastlines. Academic Press.
Kormondy E.J. 1986. Concepts of Ecology. Prentice-Hall.
Park CC. 1980. Ecology and Environmental Management. Butterworths.
Simon J, Kaiser MJ & Reynolds JD. 2001. Marine Fisheries Ecology.
Blackwell.

AEM 502 CHEMICAL INTERACTIONS IN THE AQUATIC 2+1

ENVIRONMENT
Objective
To acquaint the students with basic principles of chemical interactions in the
aquatic environment.
Theory
UNIT I
Basic chemistry principles: Chemical reaction kinetics, chemical equilibria
and redox chemistry, solubility concept, dissolution kinetics, processes
controlling elemental cycling in the earth's crust, oceans and atmosphere.

40
 UNIT II
Soil properties: Soil structure and texture; Composition of oxide and silicate
minerals in relation to surface chemical processes; Charge and double layer,
and mineral equilibrium; Silicate weathering, transformation, weathering
products; Ion exchange - concept and source of cation exchange capacity
(CEC), adsorption on to clay minerals of major cations, specific adsorption
of major and minor nutrients, and heavy metal ions.
UNIT III
Nutrient dynamics: Chemistry of soil-nutrient interactions and water
permeability; Organic substances - biological processes in the degradation
and conversion of organic matter; Humus and biogeochemical substances -
structure, reactivity, solubility and mobility; Transport of substances -
nutrients (e.g., phosphate, nitrate, ammonia, Ca and K), Soil-water
interactions – availability of nutrients and productivity of aquatic
ecosystem.
UNIT IV
Pollutant dynamics: Pollutant cycling, bio-accumulation, bio-availability,
speciation and transport of contaminants (e.g., pesticides and heavy metals).
Practical
Sample Collection techniques; Determination of physicochemical
parameters of soil and water - pH, electrical conductivity, redox potential,
soil texture, bulk density, particle density, porosity, hydraulic conductivity,
organic carbon, total and available nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium and
micronutrients; C/N ratio; clay colloids in the soil; CEC;
Adsorption/fixation of ions on clay minerals.
Suggested Readings
Lindsay WL. 1979. Chemical Equilibria in Soils. John Wiley & Sons.
Manahan SE. 2000. Environmental Chemistry. Lewis Publ.
McBride MB. 1994. Environmental Chemistry of Soils. Oxford University
Press.
Stumm W & Morgan JJ. 1996. Aquatic Chemistry: Chemical Equilibria
and Rates in Natural Waters. John Wiley & Sons.
Tan KH. 1998. Principles of Soil Chemistry. CRC Press.

AEM 503 INTEGRATED COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT 2+1

Objective
To impart knowledge on the coastal resources, integrated coastal zone
management strategies and disaster management.
Theory
UNIT I
Coastal resources: Coastal natural resources systems: flora and fauna,
trophic relationship, nutrient production, cycle and transport; Mangrove
ecosystem - species diversity and distribution of mangroves in India, Other
inter-tidal system- Seagrass system, Coral reef system, Sandy beach
system, Lagoon and estuary system.
UNIT II
Developmental activities and biodiversity loss: Ecological issues, Non-
sustainable development, Pollution, threats to biodiversity, habitat
destruction, Depletion of fisheries resources, impacts of global environment
changes, Multiple uses of the Coastal Zone, Urban settlement, Industrial

41
 development, waste disposal, Shore protection works, ports and marine
transportation. Land transportation infrastructure, Water control and supply
projects, sea fisheries, Aquaculture, Coastal forest industries, Coastal
agriculture, industries.
UNIT III
Coastal Zone Management: Integrated Coastal Zone Management (ICZM):
its need and benefits, Principles, Goals and objectives of the ICZM
programme; Scope, Extent of jurisdiction, Boundaries of the coastal zone,
policies and planning for coastal resource management; Management
mechanisms- Pollution control, Protected areas (sanctuaries, marine parks
and biosphere reserves), Protection from natural hazards; Socioeconomic
impacts and its assessment, Disaster management for coastal environment.
UNIT IV
Coastal tourism: Beach resorts, restaurants and parks within the coastal
zone as per existing rules and regulations. Impact of pollution on coastal
resources.
Practical
Analysis of soil and water characteristics of coastal areas where man made
impacts have established; Assessment of damages of water quality;
Collection, preservation and identification of coastal biological
communities; Survey of different coastal zones; Visit to the protected areas.
Suggested Readings
Brahtz JFP. 1972. Coastal Zone Management. UN Department of
International Economic & Social Affairs, New York.
Cairns J Jr. 1994. Implementing Integrated Environmental Management
Virginia Tech. University.
Clark JR. 1992. Integrated Management of Coastal Zones. FAO Fisheries
Tech. Paper No. 327, Rome.
Coastal Area Management and Development 1982. UN Department of
International Economic & Social Affairs, New York.
David S & Jeremy P. 2001. Inshore Fisheries Management. Methods and
Technologies in Fish Biology and Fisheries. Vol. II. Kluwer.
Khanna BK. 2000. All You Wanted to Know About Disasters. New India
Publ. Agency.

AEM 504 AQUATIC POLLUTION AND WASTEWATER 2+1

MANAGEMENT
Objective
To impart fundamental and advanced knowledge on different aspects of
Aquatic pollution and waste water management.
Theory
UNIT I
Aquatic pollution and its management: Aquatic pollution – sources, types
and their impacts; Pollution problems of groundwater resources –sources of
contamination, management issues.
UNIT II
Pollutants - Sewage, pesticides, oils, metals, radioactive wastes, biomedical
wastes, etc. Common transport processes of pollutants in the aquatic
environment; dispersal of pollutants; Algal blooms and their management,
Methods of pollution surveys.

42
 UNIT III
Waste disposal and water quality criteria used in different parts of world -
national and international standards; ISO-14000(EMS), EIA, Management
strategies.
UNIT IV
Wastewater management: Wastewaters - classification and characteristics
of sewage and industrial effluents; treatment methods for water and waste
water; Principles of aeration, chlorination, ozonation and U.V. irradiation.
UNIT V
Waste recycling and utilization in aquaculture; Design and construction of
water filtration devices; aerobic and anaerobic treatment of wastewater.
UNIT VI
Wastes from fish processing units and their treatment; solid waste
management; removal of nitrogen and phosphorus from waste water; Role
of aquatic macrophytes in treatment of wastewater.
Practical
Collection and preservation of wastewater samples; Physicochemical
analysis of wastewater - total dissolved and suspended solids, DO, BOD,
COD, H2S,, NH3–N, NO2-N, NO3-N, PO4-P, CH4, heavy metals and
pesticides; Use of algae for waste water treatment; Visit to a sewage
treatment plant, fish processing unit and other industries; Exercise on
interpretation of water quality data for evaluation of aquatic health.
Suggested Readings
Baird DJ, Beveridge MCM, Kelly LA & Muir JF. 1996. Aquaculture and
Water Resources Management. Blackwell.
Cheremisinoff NP. 2002. Handbook of Water and Waste Water Treatment
Technologies. Butterworth – Heinemann.
Eckenfelder WW. 2000. Industrial Water Pollution Control. McGraw Hill.
Gray NF. 2004. Biology of Wastewater Treatment. Oxford University
Press.
Trivedy RK. 1998. Advances in Wastewater Treatment Technologies.
Global Science.

AEM 505 ECOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT OF LIMNETIC 2+1

ENVIRONMENT
Objective
To educate the students on the ecology of limnetic wetlands and to impart
skill and knowledge on the sustainable management of the limnetic
ecosystems.
Theory
UNIT I
Types: Categorization of different limnetic fisheries resources - lacustrine,
riverine and coldwater systems; Wetlands, Floodplain wetlands, swamps -
characteristics, flora and fauna.
UNIT II
Characteristics: Physical and chemical characteristics of limnetic
environment and its relationship with the organisms; influence on
metabolism, behavior and orientation of animals; Biological productivity in

43
 relation to fishery potential; Trophic relationships in the wetland ecosystem
- nutrient production, and transport, Trophic succession; Dynamics of lentic
and lotic systems; Water budgeting in limnetic ecosystems.
UNIT III
Conservation and Management: Functions of wetlands; Habitat
degradation- causative factors and controlling/management measures;
Destruction of wetlands - causes and consequences; Restoration,
conservation and management of wetlands; Resource enhancement;
Management of water bodies for economy-driven activities; Management
through Biomanipulation studies- top-down and Bottom-up methods;
Integrated Environment Management (IEM) Programme-involvement of
human element; River continuum concept and new paradigm shift; River
linking; International conventions - Ramsar; Environmental laws and
regulations; Index of Biotic Integrity (IBI); modeling studies; Wetland
mapping using remote sensing; Geographical Information System (GIS)-
Definition, Concepts and application.
Practical
Collection, preservation and analysis of flora and fauna (including
phytoplankton, zooplankton and benthos) of wetland ecosystem; Case
studies on soil and water quality assessment; Survey and sampling of lentic
and lotic waters; Calculation of shoreline development index and
morphometry; Determination of carrying capacity; Field visits to selected
reservoirs, lakes/wetlands and rivers.
Suggested Readings
Allan JD. 1995. Stream Ecology: Structure and Function of Running
Waters. Chapman & Hall.
Dodds WK. 2002. Freshwater Ecology: Concepts and Environmental
Applications. Academic Press.
Good RE, Whigham DF & Simpson RL. 1978. Fresh Water Wetlands:
Ecological Processes and Management Potential. Academic Press.
Hynes HBN. 1970. Ecology of Running Waters. Liverpool University
Press, Liverpool.
Mitsh WJ & Gosselink JG. 1996. Wetlands. John Wiley & Sons.
Nath S. (Ed.). 2008. Recent Advances in Fish Ecology Limnology and Eco
Conservation. Vol. VII. Narendra Publ. House.
Pattern BC. 1990. Wetlands and Shallow Continental Water Bodies. SPB
Academic Press.
Scheffer NM. 1998. Ecology of Shallow Lakes. Chapman & Hall.
Talling J & Lemoalle J. 1998. Ecological Dynamics of Tropical Inland
Waters. Cambridge University Press, London.
Wong MH. 2004. Wetland Ecosystems in Asia: Functions and
Management. Elsevier.

AEM 506 ENVIRONMENTAL BIOTECHNOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To impart basic knowledge on biotechnological applications of
microorganisms and demonstration of their potential for environmental
management.

44
 Theory
UNIT I
Fundamentals of environmental biotechnology: Environmental
biotechnology- concepts and scope; conventional and modern approaches,
Interrelationship of xenobiotics with other environmental variables; IPR
issues related to environmental biotechnology.
UNIT II
Genetically-improved strains: Genetically-improved strains - basic
concepts, application in waste management, pesticide degradation, heavy
metal remediation, oil removal; Nitrogen fixation; Phosphate solubilization;
Cellular and molecular markers of environmental pollution monitoring and
management.
UNIT III
Microbial consortia: Consortia of microbes for environmental protection –
Concept, scope and feasibility.
UNIT IV
Biological treatment and utilization of wastes: Bioreactors – principles and
application in nitrification, denitrification, reduction of BOD; Production of
biofuels, fermented products and biogas from wastes, Nutrient uptake by
aquatic organisms.
Practical
Genomic and plasmid DNA isolation; PCR and gel electrophoresis,
Cloning; Single-cell protein production; Case studies on wastewater
treatment/recirculatory systems; Quantification of N fixation, nitrification;
Screening of microbes for biodegradation properties.
Suggested Readings
Buck RP, Hatfield WE, Umana M & Bowden EF. 1990. Biosensor
Technology - Fundamentals and Applications. Marcel Dekker.
Fujita M & Ike M. 1994. Wastewater Treatment Using Genetically
Engineered Microorganisms. Technomic Publ. Co.
Kingsman SM & Kingsman AJ. 1988. Genetic Engineering: An
Introduction to Gene Analysis and Exploitation in Eukaryotes.
Blackwell.
Sambrook J & Russel DW. 2001. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory
Manual. CSHL Press.
Sayler GS, Sanseverino J & Kimberely DL. 1997. Biotechnology in
Sustainable Environment. Plenum Press.

AEM 507 ENVIRONMENTAL TOXICOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To impart knowledge on toxicological aspects of various pollutants.
Theory
UNIT I
Toxicity and metabolism: Factors influencing toxicity- environmental,
genetic and nutritional; Measurement and evaluation of the ecological
effects of toxicants; Metabolism of toxic substances by aquatic organisms -
consequences, synergistic and antagonistic effects; Acute poisons and
accumulative poisons; Bioaccumulation and biomagnification; Systemic

45
 effects of toxic metals, pesticides and herbicides; Effect of select toxicants
on aquatic life and detoxification.
UNIT II
Toxicity evaluation: Toxicity Testing - Microcosm and Mesocosm Tests,
Dose-Response Relationships, Toxicity Bioassay.
Practical
Toxicity evaluation of heavy metals on selected organisms by bioassay
techniques; Toxicity assessment of pesticides, PCBs and oil on selected
organisms; Analysis of heavy metals from aquatic ecosystems; Toxicity
testing methods.
Suggested Readings
Hoffman DJ. 1995. Handbook of Ecotoxicology. Lewis Publ.
Kumar A. (Ed.). 2008. Aquatic Environment and Toxicology. Daya Publ.
House.
Mayer H. 1977. Aquatic Toxicology and Hazards Evaluation. ASTM Publ.
Rand GM & Petrocelli SR. 1994. Fundamentals of Aquatic Toxicology.
Hemisphere Publ. Corp.
Raymond JM, Neisink RJM, de Vries J & Hollinger MA. 1996.
Toxicology: Principles and Applications. CRC Press.
Ware GW. 2002. Review of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology.
Springer Verlag.

AEM 508 ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES IN 1+1

ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
Objective
To impart knowledge and skills in analytical techniques employed in
environmental studies.
Theory
UNIT I
Overview and concepts: An overview of qualitative and quantitative
analytical techniques used in environmental science; Sampling techniques
and procedures; Factors affecting the choice of an analytical technique;
Interferences and their removal, Field kits and their application.
UNIT II
Photometric techniques: Theory, instrumentation and application of
colorimetry and spectrophotometry.
UNIT III
Separation techniques: Chromatography – theory, instrumentation and
applications of thin layer, paper, ion-exchange, size exclusion, high
performance liquid and gas; Methods of preparing biological samples for
chromatographic analysis; Theory and applications of electrophoresis;
Principles and uses of ultracentrifugation.
UNIT IV
Tracer techniques: Scintillation counters and radio isotopes in
environmental research.
Practical
Quantitative estimation of organic and inorganic pollutants and toxicants by
UV-Visible spectrophotometer, AAS, HPLC, GC.

46
 Suggested Readings
Eaton AD, Clesceri LS, Rice EW & Greenberg AE. 2005. Standard
Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. APHA-
AWWA-WEF, Washington DC.
Fishbein L. 1973. Chromatography of Environmental Hazards: Metals,
Gaseous and Industrial Pollutants. Elsevier.
Jeffery GH, Basset J, Mendham J & Denney RC. (Eds.). 1989. Vogel’s
Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis. Longman.
Sparks DL, Page AL, Helmke PA, Loeppert RH, Soltanpour PN, Tabatabai
MA, Johnston CT & Sumner ME. (Eds.). 1996. Methods of Soil
Analysis: Part 3. Chemical Methods. SSSA-ASA, Madison.
Welch PS. 2003. Limnological Methods. Narendra Publ. House.
Wilson K & Walker J. 2002. Practical Biochemistry: Principles and
Techniques. Cambridge University Press, Oxford.

AEM 509 PLANKTONOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To impart knowledge on plankton, their ecology and significance.
Theory
UNIT I
Plankton diversity and productivity: Classifications of plankton; Primary
and secondary production - estimation, significance, affecting factors;
Production - biomass (P/B ratio); Indices of productivity; Community
interrelationships.
UNIT II
Ecology of phytoplankton: Phytoplankton (freshwater and marine) -
methods of assessment, spatial and temporal variations, succession,
diversity; Nanoplankton; Algal blooms; Role in carbon sequestration.
UNIT III
Ecology and life history of zooplankton: Zooplankton (freshwater and
marine) – ecology of the major taxa, their food and feeding, reproduction of
important zooplankton, life history stages; swarms; Indicator species;
Predator-prey relationship; Impact of grazing in the aquatic ecosystem;
Vertical migration of zooplankton; Larval ecology of benthic invertebrates.
UNIT IV
Sampling and preservation techniques: Plankton nets and recorders,
catching efficiency of various nets; Plankton fixatives and preservatives.
Practical
Collection, preservation and quantitative estimation of phytoplankton and
zooplankton; Identification and classification of various phytoplankton and
zooplankton; Preparation of permanent slides; Logging, cataloguing and
sorting procedures.
Suggested Readings
Fasset NG. 1997. A Manual of Aquatic Plants. Allied Scientific Publ.
Lund HC & Lund JWG. 1995. Freshwater Algae. Biopress Ltd.
Mitra A. 2006. Introduction to Marine Phytoplankton. Narendra Publ.
Pillai NK. 1986. Introduction to Planktonology. Himalaya Publ. House.
Sournia A. 1978. Phytoplankton Manual. UNESCO Publ.
Tomas CR. 1997. Identifying Marine Phytoplankton. Academic Press.

47
AEM 510 FISHERIES OCEANOGRAPHY 1+1
Objective
To educate the students on the oceanographic concepts related to fisheries
and impart skill to operate oceanographic equipment.
Theory
UNIT I
Oceanographic factors in fisheries: Effects of physicochemical and
biological oceanographic factors on adaptation, behaviour, abundance and
production of aquatic organisms; Space and time scales in oceanographic
analysis; Speed and magnitude of short-term changes in the ocean;
Synoptic oceanographic analysis – currents, waves, tides, amplitudes,
stratification, related chemical factors, upwelling and circulation patterns.
UNIT II
Forcasting systems: Fisheries forecasts – interpretation and use of ocean
thermal structure in fisheries; Fisheries forecasting system in India and
other countries – remote sensing; Global Positioning System (GPS).
Application of Remote Sensing in fisheries; Application of echo-sounders
and SONAR.
UNIT III
Coastal fishery: Coastal fishery and hydrography- introduction, scope and
factors affecting; shoreline protection and influence of developmental
activities on coastal hydrography.
UNIT IV
Factors affecting marine fisheries: Environmental factors influencing the
seasonal variations in fish catches in the Arabian Sea and the Bay of
Bengal.
Practical
Oceanographic data analysis – water temperature, salinity, pH, nutrients,
benthos and sediment characteristics; Fisheries forecasting systems;
Oceanographic equipment and fish finding devices.
Suggested Readings
Grasshoff K, Ehrhardt M & Kremling V. 1983. Methods of Seawater
Analysis. Verlag Chemie.
Kennish MJ. 1989. Practical Handbook of Marine Science. CRC Press.
Laevastu T & Hayes ML. 1981. Fisheries Oceanography and Ecology.
Fishing News Books.
Lalli CM & Parsons TR. 1993. Biological Oceanography: An Introduction.
Elsevier.
Miller CB. 2004. Biological Oceanography. Blackwell.
Reddy MPM. 2007. Ocean Environment and Fisheries. Science Publ.

AEM 511 AQUATIC MICROBIOLOGY 2+1

Objective
To impart knowledge on aquatic microorganisms with reference to their
role in the aquatic environment and bioprospecting.
Theory
UNIT I
Cell structure and function: Prokaryotic and eukaryotic cell structure, cell
membrane, cell wall, proteins, nucleic acids - structure, properties and
interactions, microbial growth.

48
 UNIT II
Distribution and classification: Microbial community in freshwater, estuary
and marine environment (types and abundance). Microbial dependency on
physical, chemical and biological factors of the environment; Classification
of aquatic microorganisms, Microbes in extreme environments and their
significance - thermophiles, psychrophiles, halophiles and barophiles.
UNIT III
Microbial interaction with matter: Microbial interaction - role of microbial
population on the biogeochemical cycles (C, N, P, S, Si and Fe),
Xenobiotic and inorganic pollutants; Microbial degradation of natural and
synthetic compounds.
UNIT IV
Microorganisms and public health: Water-borne pathogens of public health
importance - protozoans, bacteria, enteroviruses; Microbial toxins;
Microbial standards for different water uses.
UNIT V
Microbes and aquatic environment: Principles and applications of
bioprocesses – bioremediation, biofertilization, biofilms, bio-leaching, bio-
corrosion, bio-fouling; Microorganisms as bioindicators, bioremediators
and biosensors; Microbial biomass production - single cell protein;
Bioprospecting.
Practical
Sampling methods; Isolation, identification and enumeration of algae and
bacteria from diverse aquatic habitats; growth kinetics; Management of
algal and bacterial cultures; Quantification of microbial activities in
nutrient cycles; Microbial sensitivity testing; Demonstration of biofilms.
Suggested Readings
Dhevendaran K. 2008. Aquatic Microbiology. Daya Publ. House.
Frobisher M, Hinsdill RD, Crabtree KT & Goodheart CR. 1974.
Fundamentals of Microbiology. WB Saunders.
Geesey G, Lewandowski Z & Flemming HC. (Eds.). 1994. Biofouling and
Biocorrosion in Industrial Water Systems. CRC Press.
Prasad AB & Vaishampayan A. 1994. Nitrogen Fixing Organisms –
Problems and Prospects. Scientific Publ.
Rheinheimer G. 1992. Aquatic Microbiology. John Wiley & Sons.
Stanier R, Ingraham JL & Adelberg EA. 1976. General Microbiology.
MacMillan.
Vernam AH & Evans M. 2000. Environmental Microbiology. Blackwell.

AEM 601 ADVANCES IN AQUATIC ENVIRONMENTAL 2+1

STUDIES
Objective
To impart knowledge on various aspects of advances in aquatic
environment studies.
Theory
UNIT I
Factors effecting productivity of aquatic ecosystems and their interactions;
phosphorus, nitrogen and silica cycles; minor metallic elements; organic
matter in lake waters. Dynamics of flowing water; Indices of productivity;
pollution index –usefulness and limitations.

49
 UNIT II
Eutrophication – causative factors, effects on water quality, fish and other
biota; measures to control the lake degradation due to eutrophication.
UNIT III
Biomanipulation: Concept and approaches- studies on Planktivorous,
Benthivorous and Omnivorous fish. Biological control of macrophyte and
eutrophication.
UNIT IV
Biomonitoring of aquatic environment, scope and process; Bioindicator
organisms and its Characteristics; Assessment of water quality through
bioindicators.
UNIT V
Global warming and green house effects- process and impact on aquatic
environment; Integrated environment management (IEM), Role of human
element in IEM, Analytical Behavior Analysis Approach (ABAA) for IEM.
UNIT VI
Natural disasters: formation, causes and effects; effects on aquatic habitat
and coastal population; Concerns and management; mitigation process;
preparedness, Anthropogenic activities leading to environmental disasters.
Man-made aquatic environmental degradation; effects on aquatic life.
Practical
Analysis of ions; Calculation of shoreline development index and other
indices of lake productivity; Studies on eutrophication in natural waters-
tanks and ponds; Collection, preservation and estimation (quantitative and
qualitative) of bioindicator organisms in polluted water. Demonstration of
Biomanipulation experiment; Preparation of disaster kits for coastal fisher;
Interaction of the Govt. and Non-Govt. Organizations engaged for disaster
management.
Suggested Readings
Brudtland GH. 1987. Our Common Future: World Commission on
Environment and Development. Oxford University Press.
Gates DM. 1993. Climate Change and its Biological Consequences.
Saunderland.
Goudie A. 1993. The Human Impact on the Natural Environment. MIT
Press.
IUCN, UNEP, WWE. 1991. Caring for the Earth: Strategies for
Sustainable Living. Earthscan.
Sakhare VB. (Ed.). 2007. Advances in Aquatic Ecology Vol. I. Daya Publ.
WCMC. 1992. Global Biodiversity: Status of the Earth’s Living Resources.
Chapman & Hall.

AEM 602 BIOTECHNOLOGY FOR CLEANER ENVIRONMENT 1+1

Objective
To educate the learners about the application of biotechnology in aquatic
environment management.
Theory
UNIT I
Pollution Control: Cleaner technologies, Reducing environmental impact of
industrial effluents, Toxic site reclamation.

50
 UNIT II
Microbial transformation of toxic metals, Removal of spilled oil and grease
deposits, ‘Biorational’ or ‘Environmentally Safe’ weed and pest control,
Bio-fertilizers, Bio-sensors and biochips to detect environmental pollutants.
UNIT III
Application of biotechnological tools in biomonitoring of aquatic
environment; Renewable or bio-energy and bio-fuels from aquatic
environment, Energy and fuel production using micro-organisms;
Production of food: Single cell protein, Algal biotechnology for production
of food; Use of microbes for improving soil fertility, biodegradation.
UNIT IV
Biodiversity and its conservation: Current levels of biodiversity, alpha and
beta biodiversity, in situ and ex situ conservation-gene banks, species
conservation. Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) and protection (IPP): IPP
and aquatic genetic resources (AGR).
Practical
Quantification of faunal changes in polluted water; Gel electrophoresis;
Total DNA isolation; Mitrochondial DNA isolation, Separation and
detection of fragments, Comet assay, Micronucleus test, Sister Chromatid
exchange; Assessing the molecular and cellular level changes in the
Aquatic organisms; Genomic libraries and the development of species
specific probes. Southern hybridization; RFLP analysis, PCR mechanics.
Suggested Readings
Buck RP, Hatfield WE, Umana M & Bowden EF. 1990. Biosensor
Technology - Fundamentals and Applications. Marcel Dekker.
Crespi RS. 1991. Biotechnology and Intellectual Property. Parts 1, 2.
TIBTECH 9.
Moo-Young M, Anderson WA & Chakrabarty AM. 2006. Environmental
Biotechnology: Principle and Applications. Kluwer.
Sambrook J & Russel DW. 2001. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory
Manual. CSHL Press.
Sayler GS, Sanseverino J & Kimberely DL. 1997. Biotechnology in
Sustainable Environment. Plenum Press.
Yoxen E. 1988. The Gene Business: Who should Control Biotechnology.
Oxford University Press.

AEM 603 BENTHIC ECOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To impart theoretical and practical knowledge of benthic ecology.
Theory
UNIT I
Benthic habitat- rocks, reefs, marshes and sediments that form the habitat;
recycling of nutrients and the burial and storage of organic matter.
UNIT II
Community ecology; Physical, chemical and biological factors effecting
benthic population; abundance and distribution of benthic communities-
major groups- their life cycles, food and feeding habits and ecological
significance; Role in maintaining ecological balance; Recruitment
dynamics; Predator prey interaction; Invasive species.

51
 UNIT III
Human impacts; modification of coastal habitats, and major alterations of
biogeochemical cycles; contaminants; Benthic organisms as pollution
indicators and biomonitors.
Practical
Collection and analysis of soil and water of nearby benthic habitat;
collection, identification and preservation of macro and micro benthos;
study of food and feeding habit of some benthic population.
Suggested Readings
APHA (American Public Health Association). 1989. Standard Methods for
the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 17th Ed. American
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Clegg J & Anthon H. 1968. Pond and Stream Life. Blandford Press.
Cole GA. 1988. Textbook of Limnology. 3rd Ed. Waveland Press.
Cuffney TF, Gurtz ME & Meador MR. 1993. Methods for Collecting
Benthic Invertebrate Samples as Part of the National Water-Quality
Assessment Programme. U.S. Geological Survey Open-File Report
93-406. U.S.G.S., Raleigh, North Carolina.
Dawson CL & Hellenthal RA. 1986. A Computerized System for the
Evaluation of Aquatic Habitats Based on Environmental
Requirements and Pollution Tolerance Associations of Resident
Organisms. EPA/600/S3-86/019. Environmental Research
Laboratory, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Corvallis,
Oregon.
Downing JA & Rigler FH. (Eds.). 1984. A Manual on Methods for the
Assessment of Secondary Productivity in Fresh Waters. 2nd Ed. IBP
Handbook 17. Blackwell.
Elliott JM. 1977. Some Methods for the Statistical Analysis of Samples of
Benthic Invertebrates. 2nd Ed. Freshwater Biological Association
Scientific Publication No. 25.
Whitton BA. (Ed.). 1975. River Ecology. University of California Press,
Berkeley, California.

AEM 604 ESTUARINE AND COASTAL OCEANOGRAPHY 2+1

Objective
To impart knowledge on the dynamics of coastal environment.
Theory
UNIT I
Definition of an estuary; Buoyancy input as freshwater.
UNIT II
Dynamics of the gravitational circulation; Mixing of fresh and salt water;
Sources of energy for mixing. Estuarine circulation, Richardson number.
Contributions to the salt flux.
UNIT III
Simplified salt balance using the steady state salinity distribution to predict
the concentration of a pollutant. Freshwater fraction. The flushing time of
an estuary and methods of determining it.

52
 UNIT IV
Waves in shallow waters, transformation, refraction and reflection; Mass
transport. Return flow. Rip current. Long shore currents. Momentum
balance.
UNIT V
Sediment transport. Base studies on sedimentation in Estuaries effects of
man –made structures and breakwaters on coastal sedimentation. Standing
waves and harbor resonance.
Practical
Measurement of tidal currents in estuaries - analyses of tidal heights – Net
flow and residence time computations. Computation of salt and nutrient
flux. Construction of wave refraction diagrams. Computation of longshore
currents and sediment drift beach profiles.
Suggested Readings
Carter RWG. 1998. Coastal Environments: An Introduction to the Physical,
Ecological and Cultural Systems of Coastlines. Academic Press.
Clark JR. 1992. Integrated Management of Coastal Zones. FAO Fisheries
Tech. Paper No. 327.
Kormondy EJ. 1986. Concepts of Ecology. Prentice-Hall.
Park CC. 1980. Ecology and Environmental Management. Butterworths.

AEM 605 ORGANIC PRODUCTION AND PLANT PIGMENTS 2+1

Objective
To impart advance knowledge on primary productivity and pigments.
Theory
UNIT I
Concepts of production; measurements of rate of production – oxygen
technique, radiotracer technique (C14), in-situ measurements.
UNIT II
Phytoplankton production in an isolated, non isolated communities in
flowing and standing waters, measurement of rates of production from
changes in phytoplankton biomass.
UNIT III
Measurement of photosynthesis under laboratory conditions; factors
regulating aquatic production; The role of Enzymes in relation to
photosynthesis; The photosynthetic pigments, their location in the
chloroplast, The role of accessory pigments during photosynthesis;
Molecular organisation of chlorophylls, phycobilins and carotenoids;
Pigment degradation products – phaeopigments – phaeophytin and
phaeophorbides.
UNIT IV
Chloroplast – structure and function of grana and lamellae. Structure of
chloroplast membrane – in relation to energy coupling and transport.
UNIT V
Application of remote sensing in studies on chlorophyll and other pigments.
UNIT VI
Production rates – direct measurement of zooplankton reproduction –
marking populations. Laboratory measurements of physiology of
zooplankton – feeding, respiration and excretion.

53
 Practical
Estimation of primary production in waters –by Light and Dark Bottle
method and radioactive carbon C14 technique. Laboratory studies to
understand the impact of nutrients and light on primary production using
selected algal cultures. Laboratory studies on the oxygen consumption,
filtration and grazing by selected zooplankters. Collection of water samples
from selected aquatic environments for the estimation of different plant
pigments – chlorophylls and carotenoids; Estimation of pigments in some
of the selected aquatic weeds.
Suggested Readings
Eaton AD, Clesceri LS, Rice EW & Greenberg AE. 2005. Standard
Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. APHA-
AWWA-WEF, Washington DC.
Fishbein L. 1973. Chromatography of Environmental Hazards: Metals,
Gaseous and Industrial Pollutants. Elsevier.
Talling J & Lemoalle J. 1998. Ecological Dynamics of Tropical Inland
Waters. Cambridge University Press.

AEM 606 ENVIRONMENT IMPACT ASSESSMENT 1+1

Objective
To impart theoretical and practical knowledge of environment impact
assessment for sustainable development.
Theory
UNIT I
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA): Process, evaluation and
methodology; Social Impact Assessment (SIA) as a part of EIA-principals
and process; EIA of aquacultural projects, coastal industries and other
developmental activities.
UNIT II
Environmental audit: Concept, setting up an audit programme, typical audit
process, carrying out the audit, benefits of environmental auditing,
Environmental audit programme in India.
UNIT III
International and national environmental protection standards;
Environmental quality monitoring; ISO-14000-Environment Management
System (EMS)-present status; Impacts on developing countries.
Practical
Field visits for EIA and SIA of certain aquacultural projects; EIA report
preparation; Setting up of Environmental audit programme.
Suggested Readings
Canter LW. 1994. Environmental Impact Assessment. Mc-Graw Hill.
Grilbert M & Gould R. 1998. Achieving Environmental Standards. Pitman
Publ.
Wathern P. (Ed.). 1988. Environmental Impact Assessment: Theory and
Practice. World Research Institute, Routledge, London.
AEM 607 MANAGEMENT AND UTILIZATION OF 2+1
WASTEWATER
Objective
To impart theoretical and practical knowledge on management and
utilization of wastewater for sustainable development.

54
 Theory
UNIT I
Advance treatment methods-Principles and procedures; ozonation, U.V.
irradiation etc; Oxidation of sediment; Aerobic and anaerobic treatment
process; Role of aquatic macrophytes in biological treatment of waste
water; Wastewater treatment through the use of solar energy; Basic design
of water and wastewater treatment plants. Removal of nitrogen and
phosphorus from wastewater.
UNIT II
Waste recycling and waste management in aquaculture; Design and
construction of water filtration devices; Utilization of wastewater for mass
cultivation of algae and other fish food organisms; Utilization of waste
water for aquaculture and Agriculture.
UNIT III
Waste disposal criteria used in different parts of world - national and
international standards; Production of biogas from sewage; Advances in
Pollution prevention, Environmental management.
Practical
Estimation of physico-chemical characteristics of wastewater. Estimation
of nutrients and contaminant of wastewaters. Analysis of living
communities associated with treatment processes; Demonstration of
wastewater treatments (ozonisation, chlorination, aeration, precipitation,
coagulation etc.).
Suggested Readings
Baird DJ, Beveridge MCM, Kelly LA & Muir JF. 1996. Aquaculture and
Water Resources Management. Blackwell.
Cheremisinoff NP. 2002. Handbook of Water and Waste Water Treatment
Technologies. Butterworth-Heinemann.
Eckenfelder WW. 2000. Industrial Water Pollution Control. McGraw Hill.
Fujita M & Ike M. 1994. Wastewater Treatment using Genetically
Engineered Microorganisms. Technomic Publ. Co.
Gray NF. 2004. Biology of Wastewater Treatment. Oxford University
Press.
Trivedy RK. 1998. Advances in Wastewater Treatment Technologies.
Global Science.

AEM 608 APPLICATION OF REMOTE SENSING AND GIS 1+1

IN FISHERIES
Objective
To impart theoretical knowledge and practical skill on application of
remote sensing and GIS in oceanographic studies and aquatic environment
management planning.
Theory
UNIT I
General consideration, Survey planning, Position fixing; Sampling
frequency and duration, Data storage and transmission;
UNIT II
Sensors for temperature and salinity (Via conductivity); The measurement
of depth (via pressure); CTD units for estuarine and open ocean work;
Sensor calibration techniques; Sensors for measuring flow; Tracking of

55
 drogue buoys. Acoustic Doppler current measurements; Optical
measurements; transmittance and subsurface reflectance;
UNIT III
In situ fluorescence for the determination of pigment concentration;
Remote sensing optical methods; Satellite measurements of temperature
(via thermal I.R.), the interpretation of Microwave (geotropic currents,
waves, surface winds).
UNIT IV
Geographical Information System (GIS): Definition, Concepts, Spatial data
management. Data base management system. Data Capture, Digitization,
Data integration, Projection and Registration, Data Structure, Data
Modeling. Visual Image Interpretation; Applications of GIS in aquatic
Resource identification; Digital Image Processing (DIP): Different Methods
and Approaches
Practical
Position fixing techniques. Operation of C.T.D. units and their calibrations.
Various types of current meters and measurement of currents. Wave
recorders and measurements. Determination of pigment concentrations.
Remote sensors – interpretation of data. Practical on visual interpretation of
data from map, Practical on Digital Image Processing (DIP). Field practical
on the Application of GPS. Mapping of aquatic environment resources
through GIS softwares (ARCVIEW, MAPINFO etc.).
Suggested Readings
Elangovan K. 2005. GIS: Fundamentals, Applications and
Implementations. New India Publ. Agency.
ESRI. 2007. Understanding GIS, The ARC/INFO Method. Environmental
System Research Org, USA.
Lillesand TM, Kiefer RW, Chipman JW. 2004. Remote Sensing and Image
Interpretation. John Wiley & Sons.
Meaden GJ & Do Chi T. 1996. Geographical Information System:
Applications to Marine Fisheries. FAO Tech. Paper No. 356.
Meaden GJ & Kapetsky JM. 1991. Geographical Information System and
Remote Sensing in Inland Fisheries and Aquaculture. FAO Tech.
Paper No. 318.

AEM 609 DISPERSAL AND FATE OF POLLUTANTS IN THE 1+1

OCEAN
Objective
To impart theoretical and practical knowledge on dispersal and fate of
pollutants.
Theory
UNIT I
Common transport processes of pollutants in the ocean.
UNIT II
Influence of winds, tides, Waves and currents on the dispersal of pollutants,
mixing due to waves and Wave induced currents; Principles of design of
marine waste disposal system.
UNIT III
Pollutant dispersion in coastal waters and estuaries, dispersion near outfall
sites; Methods of pollutant dispersal dye diffusion studies.

56
 Practical
Techniques of computation of dispersion coefficients; Calculation of
Richardson number, tidal exchange calculation at the estuarine mouth;
Numerical analysis of estuarine dispersion; Simple plume experiments –
designs of waste discharge and thermal systems.
Suggested Readings
John J, William R & Feiss GP. 1998. People and the Earth: Basic Issues in
the Sustainability of Resources. Cambridge University Press.
Laevastu T, Clancy M & Stroud A. 1974. Computation of Tides, Currents
and Dispersal of Pollutants in Lower Bay and Approaches to New
York with Fine Medium Grid Size Hydrodynamical-Numerical
Models. Part 3. National Technical Information Service Springfield,
Virginia.
Roy MH. (Ed.). 1982. Pollution: Causes, Effects and Control. The Royal
Society of Chemistry, England.
Wlodzimierz C & Pawel R. 2005. Water Quality Hazards and Dispersion
of Pollutants. Springer.

AEM 610 RESTORATION ECOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To acquire theoretical and practical knowledge on ecological restoration.
Theory
UNIT I
Ecological restoration- Need, concept and definition; Approaches;
Rationale for restoration; Differences between conservation and restoration;
critical ranges of variability in biodiversity.
UNIT II
Ecological processes and structures, regional and historical contexts, and
sustainable cultural practices; Ecosystem integrity; community ecological
principles; Disturbance, Succession, Fragmentation, Ecosystem auditing;
Ecosystem function.
UNIT III
Emerging concepts-Assembly, Stable states; Biotic and abiotic flows and
cultural interactions; Application of theory-Invasion, competitive
dominance and resource use; IV Restoration planning; Wetland
assessment, Delineation, and regulation; Recovery process, Mitigation,
Rehabilitation and Reclamation; Dynamics and restoration of degraded
wetlands; Removal of threats to the health and integrity of the restored
ecosystem.
UNIT IV
Individuals participation in a restoration programme; different human
participatory programme; Sustainable cultural practices; constraints and
opportunities; Economics of recovery process.
Practical
Collection and segregation of native and non native species from a
damaged environment; Making list of historical and cultural interactions;
Status of assemblages; calculation of Index of Biotic Integrity; Listing of
the threats to the integrity of the ecosystem; Organizing different
participatory programme.

57
Suggested Readings
Jordan WR, Gilpin ME & Aber JD. (Eds.). 1987. Restoration Ecology: A
Synthetic Approach to Ecological Research. Cambridge University
Press.
Luken JO. 1990. Directing Ecological Succession. Chapman & Hall.
Perrow MR & Davy AJ. (Eds.). 2002. Handbook of Ecological
Restoration. Vol. I. Principles of Restoration. Cambridge
University Press.
SER. 2004. The SER Primer on Ecological Restoration. Version 2. Society
for Ecological Restoration Science and Policy Working Group.
Temperton VK, Hobbs RJ, Nuttle T & Halle S. (Eds.). 2004. Assembly
Rules and Restoration Ecology: Bridging the Gap Between Theory
and Practice. Island Press.
Van Andel J & Aronson J. (Eds.). 2006. Restoration Ecology. Blackwell.
Wilson EO. 1988. Biodiversity. National Academy. Washington DC.
Young TP. 2000. Restoration Ecology and Conservation Biology.
Biological Conservation.

58
 AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT
List of Journals
• Acta Oecologica – International Journal of Ecology
• Agriculture, Ecosystem and Management
• Analytica Chemica
• Applied Environmental Microbiology
• Applied Microbiology and Biotechnology
• Applied Soil Ecology
• Aquaculture
• Aquaculture Engineering
• Aquatic Microbial Ecology
• Australian Journal of Ecology
• Australian Journal of Soil Research
• Biology and Fertility of Soils
• Bioresource Technology
• Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology
• Canadian Journal of Fisheries and Aquatic Sciences
• Coastal Aquaculture
• Communication in Soil and Water analysis
• Current Opinion in Biotechnology
• Ecological Restoration- Journal published by the University of Wisconsin Press
• Ecotoxicology and Environmental Safety
• Environment and Ecology
• Environmental Pollution
• Environmental Science
• Environmental Studies
• Environmental Technology
• Environmental Toxicology
• Estuarine, Coastal and Shelf Science
• FEBS Letters
• FEMS Microbiology Ecology
• FEMS Microbiology Letters
• FEMS Microbiology Reviews
• Fisheries Oceanography
• Fisheries Science
• Functional Ecology
• Geo-Marine Letters
• Hydrobiologia
• Indian Journal of Environment and Toxicology
• Indian Journal of Marine Sciences
• International Journal of Ecology and Environmental Sciences
• Journal of Aquatic Botany
• Journal of Chromatography
• Journal of Ecotoxicology
• Journal of Environmental Quality
• Journal of Marine Research USA
• Journal of Phycology

59
• Journal of Plankton Research
• Journal of Sustainable Agriculture
• Limnology and Oceanography
• Marine Biology
• Marine Ecology
• Marine Pollution Bulletin
• Oceans
• Restoration Ecology
• Science of the Total Environment
• Seaweed Research and Utilization
• Society for Ecological Restoration International
• Soil Science Society of America Journal
• Spill Science and Technology Bulletin
• Systematic and Applied Microbiology
• Toxicon
• Trends in Biotechnology
• Water Research
• World Journal of Microbiology and Biotechnology

Suggested Broad Areas for Master’s and Doctoral Research

• Soil- water – nutrient interaction
• Nutrients in fish productivity
• Pollutant cycling in aquatic environment
• Coastal pollution assessment
• Conservation of ecologically important species
• Impact of coastal zone regulations and policies on coastal zone
• Resource assessment through remote sensing and GIS
• Genetic improvement of microbes
• Bioaccumulation of toxicant
• Effects of toxicant on aquatic biota
• Development of methods for efficient and rapid analysis
• Comparison of different analytical techniques
• Documentation of planktons in diverse aquatic habitats
• Diversity analysis and algal indices of pollution load
• Evaluation of plankters for fish food
• Marine pollution and fisheries production
• Seasonality of fish catch and meteorological factors
• Application of GPS and remote sensing in marine fisheries
• Bioactive compounds from sea
• Microbial pollution indicators
• Biomonitoring of aquatic environment
• Microbial indicators of pollution
• Use of microbes for improving soil fertility
• Factors effecting benthic population
• Abundance and distribution of benthic communities
• Benthic organisms as pollution indicators and biomonitors
• Measurement of tidal currents in estuaries

60
• Dynamics of estuarine circulation
• Measurement of rates of production from changes in phytoplankton biomass
• Application of remote sensing in studies on chlorophyll and other pigments
• Principles and practices of EIA
• Preparation of environmental audit
• Role of aquatic macrophytes in biological treatment of wastewater
• Removal of nitrogen and phosphorus from wastewater
• Utilization of wastewater for mass cultivation of algae
• Effect of selected toxicants on aquatic life and detoxification mechanism
• Toxicity assessment of pesticides and oil on selected organisms
• Applications of GIS in aquatic resource identification
• Application of remote sensing and GIS in oceanographic studies
• Computation of dispersion coefficients
• Analysis of estuarine dispersion
• Design of marine waste disposal systems
• Dynamics and restoration of degraded wetlands
• Removal of threats to the health and integrity of the restored ecosystem

61
 AQUATIC ANIMAL HEALTH
Course Structure - at a Glance
 
CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS
AAH 501* VIRAL AND BACTERIAL DISEASES OF FINFISH 2+1
AND SHELLFISH
AAH 502* PARASITIC DISEASES OF FINFISH AND 2+1
SHELLFISH
AAH 503* HEALTH MANAGEMENT IN AQUACULTURE 2+1
AAH 504* SYSTEMIC FISH PATHOLOGY 2+1
AAH 505 FISH IMMUNOLOGY 2+1
AAH 506 MICROBIOLOGICAL TECHNIQUES 1+1
AAH 507 FISH VIROLOGY AND CELL CULTURE 2+1
AAH 508 CLINICAL PATHOLOGY 1+1
AAH 509 NON-INFECTIOUS AND FUNGAL DISEASES 1+1
AAH 510 AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT AND FISH HEALTH 1+1
AAH 511 DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUES 1+1

AAH 591 MASTER’S SEMINAR 1+0

AAH 599 MASTER’S RESEARCH 20

AAH 601** FISH AND SHELLFISH VIROLOGY 2+1

AAH 602** ADVANCES IN PARASITOLOGY 2+1
MOLECULAR MECHANISMS IN DISEASE
AAH 603** 2+1
PROCESS
AAH 604 CRUSTACEAN PATHOLOGY 1+1
AAH 605 FISH PHARMACOLOGY 2+1
BIOTECHNOLOGICAL TOOLS IN DISEASE
AAH 606 1+1
DIAGNOSIS
PUBLIC HEALTH MICROBIOLOGY AND
AAH 607 2+1
EPIDEMIOLOGY
AAH 608 MOLECULAR TECHNIQUES IN MICROBIOLOGY 1+1
AAH 609 FISH MYCOLOGY AND VIROLOGY 1+1

AAH 691 DOCTORAL SEMINAR I 1+0

AAH 692 DOCTORAL SEMINAR II 1+0

AAH 699 DOCTORAL RESEARCH 45

* Compulsory for Master’s programme; ** Compulsory for Doctoral programme

62
 AQUATIC ANIMAL HEALTH
Course Contents

AAH 501 VIRAL AND BACTERIAL DISEASES OF FINFISH 2+1

AND SHELLFISH
Objective
To impart knowledge of viral and bacterial infections, their replication
strategies and pathogenesis in fish and shellfish.
Theory
UNIT I
Virology: General biology of viral infections, virus classification, virus
replication. OIE Notifiable diseases.
UNIT II
Aetiology, pathogenesis, epidemiology, treatment and control, immunology
and molecular biology of viruses/viral diseases of finfishes with emphasis
on the following: Epizootic haematopoietic Necrosis (EHN), Infectious
Haematopoietic Necrosis (IHN), Oncorhynchus Masou Virus ( OMV),
Viral Encephalopathy and Retinopathy (VER), Spring Viraemia of Carp
(SVC), Viral Haemorrhagic Septicaemia (VHS),Lymphocystis and
Infectious Pancreatic Necrosis (IPN).
UNIT III
Major viral pathogens of commercially important cultured crustaceans with
special reference to shrimp and freshwater prawn: viral and bacterial;
Biology, morphology, diagnostic methods, clinical signs and pathological
changes associated with these pathogens; Viruses: WSSV, YHV, TSV,
IHHNV, MBV, HPV, BP, BMN, LOVV, GAV, MrNV.
UNIT IV
Pathogenesis, virulence mechanisms, epidemiology, treatment and control
measures of the bacterial diseases of finfish and shell fish with emphasis on
Furunculosis, Haemorrhagic septicemia, Columnaris disease, Tail and fin
rot, Bacterial gill disease, Vibriosis, Mycobacteriosis, Nocardiosis,
Haemophilosis, Edwardsiellosis, enteric red mouth.
UNIT V
Bacterial diseases of shellfish such as Vibriosis; Necrotizing
hepatopancreatitis, rickettsial diseases, mycobacteriosis.
Practical
Examination of moribund fish for viral and bacterial diseases; Sampling
techniques, culture techniques, bioassay methods; Serological techniques in
disease diagnosis, microbial identification.
Suggested Readings
Austin B & Austin DA. 1993. Bacterial Fish Pathogens. Disease in
Farmed and Wild Fish. 2nd Ed. Ellis Horwood.
Eiras J, Segner H, Wahli T & Kapoor BG. 2008. Fish Diseases. Science
Publ.
Inglis V, Roberts RJ & Bromage NR. 1993. Bacterial Diseases of Fish.
Blackwell.
Noga EJ. 1996. Fish Disease Diagnosis and Treatment. Mosby-Year Book.
Roberts RJ. 2001. Fish Pathology. 3nd Ed. W.B. Saunders.
Sindermann CJ. 1990. Principal Diseases of Marine Fish and Shellfish.
Vols. I, II. 2nd Ed. Academic Press.

63
 Stoskopf MK. 1993. Fish Medicine. WB Saunders.
Wolf K. 1988. Fish Viruses and Viral Diseases. Cornell University Press.
AAH 502 PARASITIC DISEASES OF FINFISH AND SHELLFISH 2+1
Objective
To comprehend the taxonomy, morphology, pathology and host-parasite
relation of common parasites of aquatic organisms and to understand the
significance of parasites in fish health.
Theory
UNIT I
Parasite taxonomy and morphology: Protozoan and metazoan parasites of
fish and shellfish.
UNIT II
Life cycle of fish and shellfish parasites.
UNIT III
Parasite pathology: Pathology, treatments and control of the disease caused
by protozoan parasites: Costia necatrix, Trypanosoma, Trypanoplasma,
Ichthyophthirius, Urceolariid ciliates, Microsporidians, Myxozoans.
UNIT IV
Parasite pathology: Pathology treatments and control of the disease caused
by Metazoan parasites: Trematodes: Dactylogyrus, Gyrodactylus,
Diplozoan, Sanguinicola, Neascus cuticola, Cestodes: Diphyllobothrium
latum, Caryophyllaeus, Ligula; Nematodes: Capillaria, Camallanus.
UNIT V
Parasite pathology: Pathology treatments and control of disease caused by
Acanthocephalan parasites, Crustacean parasites: Lernea, Argulus,
Ergasilus, fish leeches.
UNIT VI
Shellfish parasites: Pathology, treatment and control of the disease caused
by Microsporidians, Haplosporidians, Ciliates and Cephaline gregarines.
Practical
Collection and identification of parasites; Preparation of permanent slides,
micrometry and diagrams of parasites; Histopathological slide preparation
of parasite-infected tissues; Processing for study of helminths and their
larval stages; Examination of intermediate host for larval stages; Processing
and study of the arthropods and their larval stages; Fixation staining and
study of the protozoans; Examination of biopsy material, examination of
tissue sections for parasites.
Suggested Readings
Ferguson HW. (Ed). 2006. Systemic Pathology of Fish: A Text and Atlas of
Normal Tissues in Teleosts and their Responses in Disease. 2nd Ed.
Scotian Press.
Lom J & Dykova I. 1992. Protozoan Parasites of Fishes. Elsevier.
Noga EJ. 1996. Fish Disease. Diagnosis and Treatment. Mosby-Year
Book.
Rhode K. 2005. Marine Parasitology. Steven Simpson Books.
Roberts RJ. 2001. Fish Pathology. 3rd Ed. WB Saunders.
Sindermann CJ. 1990. Principal Diseases of Marine Fish and Shellfish.
Vols. I, II. 2nd Ed. Academic Press.
Stoskopf MK. 1993. Fish Medicine. WB Saunders.
Woo PTK & Bruno DW. (Eds.). 1999. Fish Diseases and Disorders. CABI.

64
AAH 503 HEALTH MANAGEMENT IN AQUACULTURE 2+1
Objective
To understand the essential principles of aquatic animal health
management, biosecuirty and specific issues associated with the system.
To appreciate the significance of national and international instruments in
quarantine, disease reporting and surveillance and their application in
transboundary movement of aquatic organisms.
Theory
UNIT I
Review of various diseases of finfish and shellfish significant to
aquaculture; diagnostic procedures and their application in aquaculture.
UNIT II
Disease monitoring, surveillance, epidemiology, quarantine, certification
and import risk analysis.
UNIT III
Prophylaxis, hygiene and therapy of fish and shellfish diseases.
UNIT IV
Commonly used drugs/chemicals in aquaculture, drug delivery.
UNIT V
Vaccines and vaccination, probiotics and bioremedial measures;
immunostimulants and their role.
UNIT VI
Application of health management protocols and biosecurity principles in
aquaculture.
UNIT VII
Longterm strategy in health management; Advances in disease control and
management; Principles of SPF/SPR.
Practical
Demonstration of different diagnostic tools. Sampling procedures for
disease investigation; methods of chemical/drug delivery/application; case
study.
Suggested Readings
David SA, Lee CS & O’Bryen PJ. 2006. Aquaculture Biosecurity-
Prevention, Control and Eradication of Aquatic Animal Diseases.
World Aquaculture Society. Blackwell.
Felix S, Riji John K, Prince Jeyaseelan MJ & Sundararaj V. 2001. Fish
Disease Diagnosis and Health Management. Fisheries College and
Research Institute, T.N. Veterinary and Animal Sciences
University. Thoothukkudi.
Humphrey J, Arthur JR, Subasinghe RP & Phillips MJ. 2005. Aquatic
Animal Quarantine and Health Certification in Asia. FAO.
John P. 1999. Health Maintenance and Principal Microbial Diseases of
Cultured Fishes. 2nd Ed. Blackwell.
Noga EJ. 1996. Fish Disease. Diagnosis and Treatment. Mosby-Year
Book.
Shankar KM & Mohan CV. 2002. Fish and Shellfish Health Management.
UNESCO.
Stoskopf MK. 1993. Fish Medicine. WB Saunders.

65
AAH 504 SYSTEMIC FISH PATHOLOGY 2+1
Objective
To understand the various systems of fishes and shrimps with specific
reference to their pathological significance.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: Anatomy and physiology of teleost Integumentary,
musculoskeletal, respiratory, circulatory, reticuloendothelial, renal,
excretory and digestive systems.
UNIT II
Pathophysiology: Stress and general adaptation syndrome, inflammatory
response, necrosis and types, stages.
UNIT III
Integumentary system: Cuticular, epidermal dermal and hypodermal
changes, hyperplasia and ulceration.
UNIT IV
Respiratory system: Lamellar oedema, lamellar hyperplasia and lamellar
fusion.
UNIT V
Blood vascular system: Pathology of heart, vessels, blood composition,
cellular components of blood and haemopoietic tissue.
UNIT VI
Digestive system: Digestive tract and its pathology; hepatic necrosis, lipid
infiltration, hepatic granuloma, cirrhosis, pancreatic atrophy, neoplasia;
epithelial sloughing of intestine.
UNIT VII
Excretory system: Kidney and its pathology, renal tubules and collecting
ducts.
UNIT VIII
Nervous system: Pathology of brain, spinal cord, peripheral nerves,
meninges, sense organs.
UNIT IX
Musculoskeletal and Endocrine system: Pathological changes in red and
white muscle bone and cartilages. Endocrine systems and pathology.
UNIT X
Systemic pathology in shrimp: Integument, respiratory, digestive and
nervous system and its pathology.
Practical
Necropsy techniques, Systemic pathology of different organs and their
identification.
Suggested Readings
Andrews C, Excell A & Carrington N. 1988. The Manual of Fish Health.
Salamander Books Ltd.
Eiras J, Segner H, Wahli T & Kapoor BG. 2008. Fish Diseases. Science
Publ.
Ferguson HW. (Ed). 2006. Systemic Pathology of Fish: A Text and Atlas of
Normal Tissues in Teleosts and their Responses in Disease. 2nd Ed.
Scotian Press.
Roberts RJ. 2001. Fish Pathology. 3rd Ed. WB Saunders.

66
 Sindermann CJ. 1990. Principal Diseases of Marine Fish and Shellfish.
Vols. I, II. 2nd Ed. Academic Press.

AAH 505 FISH IMMUNOLOGY 2+1

Objective
To teach basic principles of fish and shellfish immunology.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction to fish immunology and terminologies; historical
developments; Phylogeny of fish immune system.
UNIT II
Lymphoid tissues and cellular components of immune system.
UNIT III
Non specific humoral and cellular defence mechanisms.
UNIT IV
Specific defence mechanisms; Memory function and immunological
tolerance.
UNIT V
Complement system, function, components, complement activation.
UNIT VI
Antigens and antigenicity; structure of antibody. Types of antibodies,
Theories of antibody formation, Antibody mediated immune response:
general characteristics, immunoglobulin classes, structure and function and
synthesis.
UNIT VII
Phagocytic systems; Lymphoid systems; Antigen processing and major
histocompatibility complex.
UNIT VIII
Cell mediated immune response and its components; Hypersensitivity
reactions.
UNIT IX
Invertebrate defence mechanisms.
Practical
Preparation of antigen; Raising of antibodies; Antigen-antibody reactions;
Agglutination tests; Precipitation tests: gel diffusion;
Immunoelectrophoresis, counter immunoelectrophoresis; Isolation of
antibody from serum; ELISA; Western blotting; Isolation of lymphocytes
and blastogenesis; Non-specific immune response (NBT and
prophenoloxidase).
Suggested Readings
Ellis AE. 1988. Fish Vaccination. Academic Press.
Iwama G & Nakanishi T. 1996. The Fish Immune System. Organism,
Pathogen and Environment. Academic Press.
Janis K. 1997. Immunology. 3rd Ed. WH Freeman.
Swain P, Sahoo PK & Ayyappan S. 2005. Fish and Shellfish Immunology:
An Introduction. Narendra Publ. House.

AAH 506 MICROBIOLOGICAL TECHNIQUES 1+1

Objective
To comprehend different microbiological techniques used in research.

67
 Theory
UNIT I
Techniques in sterilization; Preparation of media. Safety in microbiology
laboratory, bio-safety levels.
UNIT II
Microscopy: bright field, fluorescence, phase contrast, dark field and
electron microscope.
UNIT III
Stains, staining and its chemistry.
UNIT IV
Isolation and culture of different types of bacteria; Techniques for
identification: biochemical, serological and molecular techniques.
UNIT V
Techniques for isolation and identification of fungi; Basics of mycological
and virological techniques.
Practical
Practical on microscopic techniques; Antibiotic sensitivity testing;
Identification of microorganisms, anaerobic bacteria, mycological and
virological techniques.
Suggested Readings
Chakraborthy P. 1995. A Text Book of Microbiology. New Central Book
Agency.
Criusted J. 1986. Methods in Microbiology. Academic Press.
Harry WSJR, Paul JV & John JL. 2000. Microbes in Action. Freeman &
Co.
James M. 1978. Modern Food Microbiology. 2nd Ed. D. Van Nostrand Co.
Michael J, Pelizar JR & Chan ECS. 1998. Microbiology. Tata McGraw
Hill.
Paul JH. 2001. Marine Microbiology - Methods in Microbiology. Vol.
XXX. Academic Press.
Samuel CP & Dunn CG. 1959. Industrial Microbiology. McGraw Hill.
Silliker JH, Elliof RP, Baired AC & Boyan FL. 1980. Microbial Ecology of
Foods. Vol. II (ICMSF). Academic Press.
William CF & Westhoff DC. 2000. Food Microbiology. Tata Mc Graw
Hill.
AAH 507 FISH VIROLOGY AND CELL CULTURE 2+1
Objective
To understand classification and structure of viruses and methods of their
culture.
Theory
UNIT I
Virus taxonomy, viral structure, viral genetics.
UNIT II
Replication of viruses, host-virus interaction, viral vectors, bacteriophages,
propagation of viruses.
UNIT III
Principles of cell culture, development of primary cell culture, maintenance
of cell lines.
UNIT IV
Scaling up of cell culture, characterization and preservation of cell lines.

68
 UNIT V
Hybridoma and monoclonal antibody production.
Practical
Virus isolation techniques, virus propagation, viral quantitation,
neutralization techniques, electron microscopy, cell culture characterization
(counting, staining), karyotyping, cell culture preservation, viable cell
counts, MTT assay.
Suggested Readings
Alan C. 2005. Molecular Virology. Academic Press.
David MK, Peter MH, Diane EG, Robert AL, Malcolm AM, Bernard R &
Stephen ES. 2007. Fields Virology. 5th Ed. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins.
Dimmock N, Easton A & Leppard K. 2006. Introduction to Modern
Virology. 6th Ed. Blackwell.
Freshney IR. 2005. Culture of Animal Cells: A Manual of Basic Technique.
3rd Ed. John Wiley & Sons.
John RK & Rosalind GM. 2004. Finfish and Shellfish Diseases (Practical
Manual). Fisheries College and Research Institute, TANUVAS,
Thoothukkudi.
Mothersill C & Austin B. 2000. Aquatic Invertebrate Cell Culture. Springer
Praxis.
Roberts RJ. 2001. Fish Pathology. 3nd Ed. WB Saunders.

AAH 508 CLINICAL PATHOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To teach methods in clinical pathology of aquatic organisms.
Theory
UNIT I
Detailed study of normal and abnormal constituents of blood with reference
to pathogenic condition.
UNIT II
Stress induced conditions in fishes and their pathology.
UNIT III
Physiological effects of stressors on fish, tolerance level (pH, ammonia,
oxygen, temperature, handing stress, crowding, transportation, chemicals
and bacterial toxins).
UNIT IV
Cellular response to stress, response to some specific disease.
Practical
Study of cellular components of blood: T.E.C., D.L.C., T.L.C.,
haemoglobin, total protein, glucose and other parameters, cholesterol, lipid
profile, creatinine, urea and enzymes in blood during disease conditions.
Suggested Readings
Ferguson HW. (Ed.). 2006. Systemic Pathology of Fish: A Text and Atlas of
Normal Tissues in Teleosts and their Responses in Disease. 2nd Ed.
Scotian Press.
Noga EJ. 1996. Fish Disease. Diagnosis and Treatment. Mosby-Year
Book.
Roberts RJ. 2001. Fish Pathology. 3nd Ed. WB Saunders.

69
 Sindermann CJ. 1990. Principal Diseases of Marine Fish and Shellfish.
Vols. I, II. 2nd Ed. Academic Press.
Stoskopf MK. 1993. Fish Medicine. WB Saunders.
Wedmeyer G, Meyer FP & Smith L. 1999. Environmental Stress and Fish
Diseases. Narendra Publ. House.
Leatherland JF & Woo PTK. 1998. Fish Diseases and Disorders. Vol. II.
Non-Infectious Diseases. CABI.

AAH 509 NON-INFECTIOUS AND FUNGAL DISEASES 1+1

Objective
To comprehend the etiology and management of different non-infectious
and fungal diseases.
Theory
UNIT I
Studies on the causes, pathogenesis, pathology, diagnosis and differential
diagnosis of various diseases due to nutritional imbalance and avitaminosis,
anorexia, mineral deficiency and toxicity.
UNIT II
Metabolic diseases in finfish and shellfish. Genetic diseases and neoplastic
lesions.
UNIT III
Fungal diseases of finfish and shellfish- External and internal fungal
infections.
UNIT IV
Epizootic ulcerative syndrome (EUS) in fishes- Etiology, epidemiology,
pathogenesis diagnosis and management.
UNIT V
Fungal diseases of shellfish, larval mycosis, fusarium disease, Crayfish
plague.
Practical
Study of gross and histopathological changes due to various metabolic
diseases and nutritional disorders. Isolation of fungal pathogens.
Suggested Readings
Leatherland JF & Woo PTK. 1998. Fish Diseases and Disorders. Vol. II.
Non-Infectious Diseases. CABI.
Lim C & Webster CD. 2001. Nutrition and Fish Health. Haworth Press.
Roberts RJ. 2001. Fish Pathology. 3nd Ed. WB Saunders.
Stoskopf MK. 1993. Fish Medicine. WB Saunders.

AAH 510 AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT AND FISH HEALTH 1+1

Objective
To comprehend the basic principles of aquatic animal health management
in relation to their environment.
Theory
UNIT I
Environmental variables related to fish health; Water quality and sediment
characteristics.
UNIT II
Nature and type of pollutants. Impact of pollutants on environment and fish
health.

70
 UNIT III
Biological indicators and indices of water quality. Sanitation in aquaculture
systems.
UNIT IV
Algal blooms and environmental microflora. Microbial toxins.
UNIT V
Probiotics and bioremedial measures. Nitrogen balance in aquatic
ecosystem.
Practical
Estimation of major pollutants using spectrophotometry. Hematological,
histoptathological and biochemical analysis of fish exposed to specific
pollutants. Testing the efficacy of aquaculture sanitizers.
Suggested Readings
Braunbeck T, Hinton DE & Streit B. 1998. Fish Ecotoxicology. Birkhäuser.
Noga EJ. 1996. Fish Disease. Diagnosis and Treatment. Mosby-Year
Book.
Vernam AH & Evans M. 2000. Environmental Microbiology. Blackwell
Publ.
Wedemeyer GA. 1996. Physiology of Fish in Intensive Culture Systems.
Springer.

AAH 511 DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUES 1+1

Objective
To learn the principles and protocols of diagnostic tests used in the
diagnosis of fish diseases.
Theory
UNIT I
Common bacterial pathogens of fishes. Handling of diseased fish for
bacteriological examination, Withdrawal of blood and materials from
internal organs for bacteriological examination. Diagnosis and infection
experiments, Cultural and biochemical identification procedures.
Mycological techniques.
UNIT II
Culture media for isolation of pathogens, non-selective, enriched,
enrichment and selective media. Inoculation and purification techniques.
Staining methods.
UNIT III
Serology of microbial disease – agglutination precipitation and ELISA
methods in disease diagnosis. Processing tissue samples for virological
examination. Techniques for isolation of viruses. Serological tests for
identification of viruses.
Practical
Methods for examination and analysing fish for health
certification/diagnosis of disease condition, techniques for sample
collection and processing for bacteriological, mycological and
virological agents, methods for isolation of various bacterial, fungal
and viral pathogens by conventional methods, rapid nucleic acid based
methods and serological procedures.
Suggested Readings
de la Maza LM, Pezzlo MT & Baron EJ. 2000. Diagnostic Microbiology.

71
 2nd Ed. WB Saunders.
Koneman EW. 2005. Color Atlas and Textbook of Diagnostic Microbiology.
6th Ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
OIE. 2006. Manual of Diagnostic Tests for Aquatic Animals. 5th Ed.

AAH 601 FISH AND SHELLFISH VIROLOGY 2+1

Objective
To understand the etiology and pathogenesis of common fish and shell fish
viral diseases.
Theory
UNIT I
Molecular virology and pathogenesis of selected viruses infecting fish and
shellfish such as IPN, VHS, IHN, VHS.
UNIT II
Nodavirus infection of fish and freshwater prawns, WSSV, YHV.
UNIT III
Antiviral drugs, viral vaccines, emerging viruses and evolution of new
viruses.
Practical
Molecular detection and sequence analysis of fish/shellfish viruses;
Collection and analysis of molecular information of various viruses using
sequence information available in public domain.
Suggested Readings
Alan C. 2005. Molecular Virology. Academic Press.
David MK, Peter MH, Diane EG, Robert AL, Malcolm AM, Bernard R &
Stephen E S. 2007. Fields Virology. 5th Ed. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins.
Dimmock N, Easton A & Leppard K. 2006. Introduction to Modern
Virology. 6th Ed. Blackwell.
Flint SJ, Enquist LW, Krug RM, Racaniello VR & Skalka AM. 2000.
Principles of Virology, Molecular Biology, Pathogenesis and
Control. American Society of Microbiology.
Freshney IR. 2005. Culture of Animal Cells: A Manual of Basic Technique.
5th Ed. John Wiley & Sons.
Roberts RJ. 2001. Fish Pathology. 3rd Ed. WB Saunders.

AAH 602 ADVANCES IN PARASITOLOGY 2+1

Objective
To understand the pathobiology of parasitic infection in fishes.
Theory
UNIT I
Environmental parasitology: Macro-environmental and micro-
environmental influence on parasite incidence.
UNIT II
Host parasite interaction: Pathological changes induced in host due to
parasitic infection.
UNIT III
Molecular parasitology; Parasite biochemistry.
UNIT IV
Evolution of parasites; Hyperparasitism.

72
 UNIT V
Antiparasitic drugs applied in aquaculture and their action.
UNIT VI
Parasitic immunity.
Practical
Isolation techniques of parasites. Molecular characterization of parasites.
Use of molecular probes for identification of parasites and tracking life
stages of parasites.
Suggested Readings
Lewis EE, Campbell JF & Sukhdeo MVK. 2002. The Behavioural Ecology
of Parasites. CABI.
Poulin R & Grimes LR. 2007. Evolutionary Ecology of Parasites. Princeton
University Press.
Theodor VB. 1974. Biochemistry of Parasites. 2nd Ed. Academic Press.

AAH 603 MOLECULAR MECHANISMS IN DISEASE PROCESS 2+1

Objective
To understand the molecular mechanism of common diseases and methods
for studying them.
Theory
UNIT I
Uptake of macromolecules by cells. Viral gene expression. Channelising
the cellular events to study the cell viability, cell proliferation, cell lineage.
UNIT II
Biological performance of each cell, i.e., changes in mitochondrial
junction, morphology, Ca+ metabolism, vesicle trafficking; membrane
transport system; protein molecule dynamics and expression profile of each
cell.
UNIT III
RNA interfering mechanisms.
Practical
FISH technique, TUNEL assay, MTT assay, NO assay, COMET assay to
detect apoptosis. FRET and FRAP microscopy techniques.
Suggested Readings
Alan C. 2005. Molecular Virology. Academic Press.
David MK, Peter MH, Diane EG, Robert AL. Malcolm AM, Bernard R &
Stephen ES. 2007. Fields Virology. 5th Ed. Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins.
Flint SJ, Enquist LW, Kru RM, Racaniello VR & Skalka AM. 2000.
Principles of Virology, Molecular Biology, Pathogenesis and
Control. American Society of Microbiology.

AAH 604 CRUSTACEAN PATHOLOGY 2+1

Objective
To understand the microscopic pathology associated with various diseases
of crustaceans.
Theory
UNIT I
Normal histology of different organs of crustaceans with special reference
to penaeid shrimp.

73
 UNIT II
Major pathogens of commercially important cultured crustaceans with
special reference to shrimp and freshwater prawn pathogens: viral,
bacterial, fungal and parasites.
UNIT III
Biology, morphology, diagnostic methods, clinical signs and symptoms and
pathological changes associated with these pathogens.
UNIT IV
Bacterial diseases: Vibriosis; necrotizing hepatopancreatitis, rickettsial
diseases, mycobacteriosis.
UNIT V
Fungal diseases: Larval mycosis, fusarium disease; Parasitic diseases:
Microsporidians, Haplosporidians, Ciliates, Cephaline gregarines. Diseases
of non infectious etiology: gas bubble disease, hemocytic enteritis.
Practical
Detailed study on normal histology of different organs/tissues of
crustaceans. Diagnostic procedures: field level diagnostic methods (direct
microscopic observation, tissue impression, smear and routine staining
methods); Histopathology of different diseases of crustaceans. Serological
methods; Electron microscopy; Gene probe and dot blot assay; In-situ
hybridization (ISH) and polymerase chain reaction (PCR).
Suggested Readings
Bell AT & Lightner DV. 1988. A Handbook of Normal Penaeid Shrimp
Histology. World Aquaculture Society, Lousiana, USA.
Lightner DV. 1996. A Handbook of Shrimp Pathology and Diagnostic
Procedures for Diseases of Cultured Penaeid Shrimp. World
Aquaculture Society, Lousiana, USA.

AAH 605 FISH PHARMACOLOGY 2+1

Objective
To understand the principles and application of pharmacodynamic
compounds applied in aquaculture. To elucidate the pharmacodynamics of
important chemicals/drugs applied in aquaculture.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction to pharmacology, pharmacological terms and definitions,
sources of drugs.
UNIT II
Principles of drug activity, pharmacokinetics. Absorption, distribution,
biotransformation and excretion of drugs.
UNIT III
Pharmacodynamics, concept of drug receptor, dose response relationship,
half-life and withdrawal period, factors affecting drug effect and dosage,
principles of drug safety in terms of species and environment.
Practical
Antibiogram preparations; Antibiotic residual assays; Studies on
histopathololgical changes caused due to chemotherapy. Important
anesthetics and their mode of action.

74
 Suggested Readings
Brown KMT. 2000. Applied Fish Pharmacology. Aquaculture Series 3,
Kluwer.
Noga EJ. 1996. Fish Disease, Diagnosis and Treatment. Mosby-Year
Book.
Richard DH, Mary JM, Richard AH & Pamela CC. 2005. Pharmacology.
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Stoskopf MK. 1993. Fish Medicine. WB Saunders.

AAH 606 BIOTECHNOLOGICAL TOOLS IN DISEASE 1+1

DIAGNOSIS
Objective
To understand the principles and applications of different biotechnological
tools used for disease diagnosis.
Theory
UNIT I
Advances in disease diagnostic procedures in aquaculture.
UNIT II
Molecular diagnostic methods such as in situ hybridization, nucleic acid
probe-based diagnosis; Choice and characteristics of probe, Probe labeling.
UNIT III
Hybridization: Hybridization strategies, factors affecting the rate of
hybridization, Immobilization of nucleic acid on filters. Types of
hybridization: Southern, Northern, Dot/Slot blot hybridization.
UNIT IV
Various types of polymerase chain reaction (PCR) such as conventional
one step, nested and semi-nested PCR, RT-PCR, real-time PCR; LAMP.
UNIT V
DNA Microarrays: DNA chips, preparations of DNA arrays, label and
applications; other related molecular techniques.
UNIT VI
Monoclonal antibody-based diagnostics.
Practical
Nucleic acid extraction, PCR detection of various pathogens. Monoclonal
antibody-based diagnostic application. Protein profiling, DNA
fingerprinting.
Suggested Readings
Altman A. 1997. Agricultural Biotechnology. CRC Press.
Noga EJ. 1996. Fish Disease, Diagnosis and Treatment. Mosby-Year
Book.
Sambrook J & Russel D. 2001. Molecular Cloning. 3rd Ed. Cold Spring
Harbour Laboratory.

AAH 607 PUBLIC HEALTH MICROBIOLOGY AND 2+1

EPIDEMIOLOGY
Objective
To learn the zoonotic importance of fish pathogens and toxins produced by
aquatic organisms.

75
 Theory
UNIT I
Introduction to food-borne diseases – Classification; food-borne infection
and intoxication- microorganisms important in food borne diseases and
food toxicity – economic importance of food - borne illness.
UNIT II
Factors influencing food-borne disease outbreaks; Sources and transmission
of pathogens in foods: human, animal, and environmental reservoirs;
crosscontamination; food associations; Microbial detection and indicator
organi[Link] and techniques; pathogen indicators; bacteria
responsible for food borne infection and intoxication; bacterial toxin and
miscellaneous toxic factors; factors affecting toxin production in foods;
fungal toxins, aflatoxin, ochratoxin and other fungal toxins; factors
affecting fungal toxin production in food; marine toxins PSP, ASP, NSP,
ciguatera poisoning and other marine toxins; histamines and other
bioamines toxicity.
UNIT III
Zoonoses: Zoonoses of different origins – rare, new, and emerging
zoonoses; trematode, cestode and nematode zoonoses; food borne viruses;
prevention and control of food toxicity and food-borne diseases.
Government Agency and Food Safety Policy: HACCP, Risk Assessment,
New pathogens and emerging food borne diseases. Current Food Safety
Topic: antibiotic resistance.
Practical
Isolation and identification of toxin producing microorganisms and other
potent human pathogens in fish and fishery products – detection of toxins
using biological and immunological techniques.
Suggested Readings
Doyle MP & Buechat LR. 2007. Food Microbiology. 3rd Ed. ASM Press.
Huss HH, Ababouch L & Gram L. 2004. Assessment and Management of
Fish Safety and Quality. FAO Fisheries Tech. Paper 444.
James MJ. 2005. Modern Food Microbiology. 7th Ed. Springer.
FAO. 2004. Marine Biotoxins Food and Nutrition. Paper 80.

AAH 608 MOLECULAR TECHNIQUES IN MICROBIOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To understand the molecular techniques used in genetic manipulation.
Theory
UNIT I
Techniques for isolation of DNA for gram positive bacteria, gram negative
bacteria, fungal cells, animals cells, DNA detection, purification,
quantification. Plasmid DNA and techniques for isolation and purification
of plasmids.
UNIT II
Determination of G+C content of DNA: Chromatographic technique,
spectrophotometric method, isopycinic bouyant density gradient
centrifugation.
UNIT III
Restriction fragment length polymorphism: Different types of restriction
enzymes, their target sites, digestion patterns, chromosomal DNA-RFLP,

76
 plasmid DNA, PCR-RFLP, Pulsefield gel electrophoresis and its
applications.
UNIT IV
Methods of gene transfer: Transformation, plasmid DNA as cloning
vectors, electroporation.
UNIT V
Gene transfer by conjugation: Conjugative plasmids and their application in
recombinant DNA technology Gene transfer by transduction: application of
bacteriophages in cloning.
Practical
Isolation of DNA and RNA; Quantification of DNA and RNA, gene
amplification, primer designing, gene cloning-restriction digestion, ligation
and transformation, gene sequencing, gene expression, immunoblotting,
design and application of gene probes.
Suggested Readings
Brown TA. (Ed.). 2002. Essential Molecular Biology. Vols. I, II. 2nd Ed.
Oxford University Press.
Lewin B. 2003. Gene VIII. Oxford University Press.
Sambrook J & Russel D. 2001. Molecular Cloning. 3rd Ed. Cold Spring
Harbour Laboratory.

AAH 609 FISH MYCOLOGY AND VIROLOGY 1+1

Objective
To study the characteristics of fungal and viral agents causing diseases in
fish and shellfish and their control measures.
Theory
UNIT I
Fungi and environment, role of fungi in food processing and aquaculture,
the growth of yeasts and molds in fishes – effect of heat, chilling, freezing
and chemical preservatives on common fungi associated with fishes.
Mycotoxins – source and conditions effecting their production. Techniques
for isolation and identification of yeasts and molds.
UNIT II
General properties of viruses. Viruses associated with fishes and water
characteristics. Effect of heat and freezing on food-borne viruses.
Techniques for cultivation of viruses, tissue culture.
Practical
Isolation and identification of aquatic fungi, fungi involved in food spoilage
and diseases, application of fungi, detection of mycotoxins, isolation of
viruses using cell culture, molecular identification of viral diseases.
Suggested Readings
George P. 1987. Textbook of Fish Health. 2nd Ed. TFH Publ.
Hoole D, Bucke D, Burgess P & Wellby I. 1991. Diseases of Carps and
Other Cyprinid Fishes. Wiley-Blackwell.
Roberts RJ. 2001. Fish Pathology. 3nd Ed. W.B Saunders.
Sindermann CJ. 1990. Principal Diseases of Marine Fish and Shellfish.
Vols. I, II. 2nd Ed. Academic Press.
Woo PTK & Bruno DW. (Eds.). 1999. Fish Diseases and Disorders. Vol.
III. Viral, Bacterial and Fungal Infections. CABI.

77
 AQUATIC ANIMAL HEALTH
List of Journals
• Applied Bacteriology
• Aquaculture
• Aquaculture Research
• Asian Fisheries Science
• Bulletin of the European Association of Fish Pathologists
• Developmental and Comparative Immunology
• Diseases of Aquatic Animal Health
• Diseases of Aquatic Organisms
• European Journal of Pharmacology
• Fish and Shellfish Immunology
• Fish Pathology
• Fish Veterinary Journal
• Fishfish and Shellfish Immunology
• Indian Journal of Pharmacology
• International Journal for Parasitology
• Journal of Applied Microbiology
• Journal of Aquatic Animal Health
• Journal of Clinical Pharmacology
• Journal of Fish Diseases
• Journal of General Virology
• Journal of Invertebrate Pathology
• Journal of Parasitology
• Journal of Virological methods
• Journal of Virology
• Letters in Applied Microbiology
• Methods in Cell Science
• Microbiology
• Molecular and Biochemical Parasitology
• Parasitology
• Parasitology Today
• The Veterinary Record
• Trends in Biotechnology
• Veterinary Record
• Veterinary Research

78
 Suggested Broad Areas for Master’s and Doctoral Research

• Characterization of viral and bacterial etiological agents of fish and shellfish infections
• Prophylactic and therapeutic measures to control infectious diseases of fish and
shellfish
• Characterization of parasites infecting fish and shellfish
• Host-parasite relation of various parasites and their biology
• Therapeutic approaches for control of infections
• Histopathological investigations of specific disease conditions
• Ultra structural changes in the specific tissues following infections
• Host immune responses against candidate antigens, immunomodulation, inflammatory
responses against specific stress factors, ontogeny of immune system,
immunotolerance.
• Isolation and identification of bacterial and fungal agents of infection.
• Characterisation of viral agents of infections, improved diagnostic methods including
PCR, nucleic acid probes and monoclonal based techniques.
• Development and characterisation of fish cell lines
• Biochemical changes of blood and enzyme parameters due to stress
• Stress induced physiological changes in fish
• Nutritional diseases, pathological investigations following toxicity, genetic disorder
• Stress induced changes in the physiological parameters, effect of sublethal
concentrations of pollutants in fish, elimination of toxic chemicals by fish
• Changes in the blood chemistry following adverse water quality
• Bioremediation measures to reduce pollution loads
• Control of blooms and nitrogen pollution in ponds
• Identification and characterization of common fish and shellfish viruses
• Development and characterization of fish vaccines
• Molecular characterization of parasites infecting finfish/shellfish
• Development of molecular probes for parasites
• Application of molecular tools in ecological studies related to parasites
• Channelizing the cellular events to study the cell viability
• Characterization of endemic, exotic and emerging diseases of crustaceans, especially
penaeid shrimp and freshwater prawns.
• Microscopic and ultrastructural studies related to viral diseases
• Effect of chemicals, disinfectants, antibiotics in fish
• Pharmacodynamics of drugs in fish, drug delivery systems, excretion of drugs, residual
assays, herbal compounds as therapeutic drugs
• Development of improved diagnostic techniques using molecular and immunological
methods

79
 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
Course Structure - at a Glance

CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS

FBM 501* MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 2+1
FBM 502*# MARKETING MANAGEMENT 2+1
FBM 503* HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 2+1
FBM 504* FINANCE AND ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGERS 2+1
FBM 505* ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 2+1
FBM 506* FORECASTING METHODS AND OPERATIONS RESEARCH 2+1
FBM 507 BUSINESS COMMUNICATION SKILLS 0+2
FBM 508 INTRODUCTION TO WTO AND IPR 1+1
FBM 509 INDIAN AND GLOBAL FISHERIES INDUSTRY 1+1

FBM 510 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT 1+1

FBM 511# INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS AND TRADE 1+1

FBM 512 EXPORT AND IMPORT MANAGEMENT 1+1
FBM 513 INTRODUCTION TO GIS 0+2
FBM 514# PROJECT FORMULATION AND MANAGEMENT 1+1

FBM 591 MASTER’S SEMINAR 1+0

FBM 599 MASTER’S RESEARCH 20

* Compulsory for Master’s programme
# FBM 502, FBM 511 and FBM 514 cross listed with Fisheries Economics FEC 505, FEC 508 and
FEC 507 respectively.

80
 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
Course Contents

FBM 501 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 2+1

Objective
To familiarise the students with the basic concepts and analytical tools of
economics as applied to management decisions.
To provide an interface between economics and management decisions.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction to managerial economics: Microeconomics, Macroeconomics,
Demand analysis - types of demand, determinants of demand; elasticity of
demand. Analysis of costs - nature of costs, cost-output relationship in short
and long term, profit maximization.
UNIT II
Theory of production - production function, laws of production; laws of
returns, returns of scale, economies of scale. Production relationship:
factor-product, factor-factor and product-product.
UNIT III
Market structure and price determination; perfect and imperfect
competitions. Monopoly, price discrimination; monopolistic competition
and oligopoly.
UNIT IV
Types of economy, Measuring performance of the economy. Consumption,
saving and investment function. Income and employment determination.
Aggregate demand and supply, general equilibrium; multiplier.
UNIT V
Money - functions of money, theory of money and price, Inflation, Balance
of payment and Exchange rate.
Practical
Demand - supply relationship. Elasticity - price, income, cross. Exercises
in factor-product, factor-factor and product-product relationships.
Production costs and their relationship, Break-even point, National income
accounting. Multiplier. Inflation. Case studies on different micro and
macro-economic variables in fisheries sector.
Suggested Readings
Ahuja HL. 2005. Macroeconomics- Theory and Practice. S. Chand & Co.
Dewett KK. 2005. Modern Economic Theory. S. Chand & Co.
Dwivedi DN. 2000. Managerial Economics. Vikash Publ. House.
Koutsoyiannis A. 2000. Modern Microeconomics. The Mc Millan Press.
Mankar VG. 1984. Business Economics - Micro Analysis. Himalaya Publ.
House.
Samuelson PA & Nordhaus WD. 2001. Economics. Tata McGraw Hill.
Thomas CR & Maurice SC. 2006. Managerial Economics. Tata McGraw-
Hill.

FBM 502 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 2+1

Objective
To familiarize the students with the basic concepts and principles of
marketing as applied to fisheries.

81
 To provide an interface between marketing and management decision.
Theory
UNIT I
Marketing management - Introduction and overview. Marketing system and
environment Market opportunity identification- Customer analysis. Market
segmentation, market positioning and consumer behaviour, Competition
analysis, Market assessment, Marketing environment.
UNIT II
Demand assessment and forecasting, Designing the offer-product decision
and pricing decision, product decision and strategies, product life cycle,
new product development, branding and packaging decisions, Delivering
the offer- distribution management, sales management and communication
strategy management – Salesmanship.
UNIT III
Product management. Pricing policies and practices. Distribution strategy
- channels of distribution, physical distribution.
UNIT IV
Marketing information system. Marketing communication - advertising,
publicity, personal selling, sales promotion.
UNIT V
Marketing research and information system, Marketing research and its
application in fisheries marketing strategy, planning and organisation,
emerging issues in marketing, e-marketing.
Practical
Marketing mix, marketing strategy, segmentation, pricing methods,
consumer behaviours, new product development, marketing research,
measuring effectiveness of marking mix, performance evaluation,
efficiency analysis.
Suggested Readings
Adcock D, Bradfield R, Halborg A & Ross C. 1995. Marketing Principles
and Practice. Pitman Publ.
Amarchand D & Varadharajan B. 1979. An Introduction to Marketing.
Vikas Publ.
Chaston I. 1983. Marketing in Fisheries and Aquaculture. Fishing News
Books.
Dennis A, Brandfield R, Al Halhorg & Ross C. 2004. Marketing Principles
and Practice. Pitman Publ.
Ian C. 1984. Marketing In Fisheries and Aquaculture. Fishing News
Books.
Jolson MA. 2004. Marketing Management. Macmillan Publ.
Kotler P. 2005. Marketing Management. Prentice Hall of India.
Kotler P & Armstrong GM. 2006. Marketing: An Introduction. Prentice
Hall.
Phillip K & Armstrong G. 2007. Principles of Marketing. Prentice Hall.
Phillip K. 2008. Marketing Management. 12th Ed. Prentice Hall of India.

FBM 503 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 2+1

Objective
To familiarize the students with the basic concepts of Human Resource
Management with special reference to organizations in fisheries sector.

82
Theory
UNIT I
Concept of management: Definition, Management process (planning,
organising, staffing, leading and controlling), Managerial levels and roles.
Evolution of management theories: Scientific management school,
Classical organization theory school, Behavioural school, Management
science school.
UNIT II
Concept of Human Resource Management (HRM), Primary activities of
HRM (staff, training and development, motivation, maintenance), HR
process (HRP, recruitment, selection, socialization, training and
development, performance appraisal, promotion, transfer, demotion,
separation).
UNIT III
HR outsourcing, Understanding equal opportunity: Guarding against
discriminatory practices, glass ceiling, Managing careers: Concept of
career, individual and organisational perspective, career development
versus employee development, internal, external events and career stages,
mentoring and coaching.
UNIT IV
Compensation dynamics: Contracts for compensation, efficiency wages,
wage earning and sharing, ownership options, screening, signalling,
designing of contract, types of rewards, job evaluation and establishing pay
structure, executive, international and special compensation plans,
employee benefits, safety and health programmes, labour relations and
collective bargaining. Corporate social responsibility.
Practical
Applying management functions in a real setting; developing managerial
games; creativity and problem solving techniques; understanding different
perceptions and avoiding perceptual distortions; analysing different needs
of a diverse work place; performance evaluation; psychometric testing;
developing training module for leadership and motivation; exercises on
time management.
Suggested Readings
Alan P. 2000. Principles of Human Resource Management. Blackwell.
Bratton J. 1999. Human Resource Management: Theory and Practice.
MacMillan.
Decenzo DA & Robbins SP. 1993. Human Resource Management. John
Wiley & Sons.
Ferris GR. 1995. Handbook of Human Resource Management. Blackwell.
Milgrom P & Robert J. 1992. Economics Organization and Management.
Prentice Hall.
Schuler RS & Jackson S. 1997. Strategic Human Resource Management.
Blackwell.

83
FBM 504 FINANCE AND ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGERS 2+1
Objective
To familiarise the students with the concept and practice of finance,
accounting and financial management.
To make the students understand the various accounting practices prevalent
in fisheries organizations.
Theory
UNIT I
Overview of Financial management, Financial systems, Financial
statements, taxes and cash flow, Analysing financial performance, Break
even analysis and leverage, Time value of money, valuation bonds and
stocks, Risk and return, Capital budgeting, techniques of capital budgeting,
Cost of capital, Sources of long term finance, Dividend decisions, Debt
analysis and management, Leasing hire purchase and project finance,
Inventory management, Working capital management,, merger,
acquisitions and restructuring Stock exchange, Mutual fund ,Banking
systems.
UNIT II
Accounting: Theoretical concept of accounting, Meaning and scope of
accounting, accounting principles, journalising transactions, ledger posting
and trial balance, negotiable instruments, Final accounts, Depreciation
provisions and reserves, single entry systems double entry system,
inventory valuation, joint stock company, shares and capital, debentures,
management accounting: nature and scope, financial statements analysis
and interpretation, ratio analysis, classification of ratios, fund flow and cash
flow statements.
Practical
Case studies and practicals on financial management and accounting,
Familiarisation and application of Tally software.
Suggested Readings
Anthony RN & Reece JS. 1970. Accounting Principles. AITBS Publ.
Chandra P. 2005. Fundamentals of Financial Management. Tata Mc Graw
Hill.
Frank W & Alan S. 2008. Business Accounting. 8th Ed. Prentice Hall.
Maheshwari SN & Maheshwari SK. 2000. Accountancy. Vikash Publ.
House.
Xavier GF. 2003. Business Accounting and Financial Analysis. Macmillan.

FBM 505 ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 2+1

Objective
To familiarize the students with the basics of organizational behaviour and
its relevance and application in the fisheries sector.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: Concept and definition, Contributing disciplines to OB,
Challenges and opportunities, Basic organizational behaviour model.
Individual: Foundations of individual behaviour, Biographical
characteristics, values, attitudes and job satisfaction, personality and
emotions, perception, basic motivation concepts, concept of motivation,
early and contemporary theories of motivation.

84
 UNIT II
Group: Concept of groups, stages of group development, group decision
making techniques, foundations of group behaviour, work teams - types of
teams, creating effecting teams.
UNIT III
Leadership: concept of leadership, trait, behavioural and contingency
theories, concept of trust, types of trust, conflict and negotiations - concept,
transition and conflict thoughts, conflict process, negotiation and its
process, bargaining strategies, third party negotiation, conflict management
techniques, power and politics - concept of power, bases of power,
dimension of power tactics, power coalitions, unequal power at work place.
UNIT IV
Organization structure: Concept, work specialization, departmentalization,
chain of command, span of control, centralization and decentralization,
formalization, common organizational designs. Organizational dynamics:
Change management - concept of change, forces of change, managing
planned change, resistance to change, over coming resistance to change,
Stress management – concept, causes and its management.
Practical
Role play on motivation, microtromics management simulation on
leadership, psychometric testing on personal approach to leadership,
conflict management, team exercises in team building, analysing group
effectiveness, biases and ethics in decision making, evaluation of MPS,
building effective work teams, personality and stress, methodologies to
measure stress, case study on organisational behaviour in public and private
enterprises; case studies on stress and conflict management. Case study on
conflict management in fisheries sector.
Suggested Readings
Buchanan D & Huczynski A. 2000. Organizational Behaviour: An
Introductory Text. Prentice Hall.
Gordon J. 2002. Organisational Behaviour: A Diagnostic Approach.
Prentice Hall.
Mullins LJ. 2005. Management and Organisational Behaviour. Prentice
Hall.
Robbins S. 2007. Organisation Behaviour. Prentice Hall.
Wilson F. 2004. Organizational Behaviour - A Critical Introduction.
Oxford University Press.

FBM 506 FORECASTING METHODS AND 2+1

OPERATIONS RESEARCH
Objective
To familiarize students with various forecasting techniques of time series
data in business application.
To acquaint the students to various tools and techniques of optimization in
fish business planning and management.
Theory
UNIT I
Forecasting, needs and uses of forecasting; Current status of forecasting
techniques; Fundamentals of quantitative forecasting. Time series methods:
smoothing, averaging and exponential smoothing methods, decomposition

85
 methods - trend fitting, ratio to moving average method, decomposition
analysis.
UNIT II
Regression and Economic Methods; Multiple regression, multicollinearity,
auto correlation and heteroscedasticity, Econometric models and
forecasting. Stationary and non-stationary time series data; Seasonal and
non-seasonal models; Auto-regressive moving average (ARMA) and Auto
regressive integrated moving average (ARIMA) models.
UNIT III
Historical development of operations research, concepts and applications in
fish business management. Optimization; Inequality constraints;
Formulation of linear programming, general statement of linear
programming, assumptions underlying linear programming, solution to
linear programming problems using graphic method; Simplex method,
conditions for application of simplex method, solution to dual programme.
UNIT IV
Transportation and Assignment problem. Sequencing and inventory
management.
Practical
Smoothing and decomposition methods, trend fitting, ratio to moving
average, regression and econometric methods, fitting of ARMA and
ARIMA models. Exercises on optimization, linear and non-linear
programming, dynamic programming, transportation, assignment,
sequencing and inventory management.
Suggested Readings
Armstrong JS. 2002. Principles of Forecasting – A Handbook for
Researcher and Practitioners. Springer Series.
Brinson R & Naadimuthu G. 1997. Schaum's Outline of Operations
Research. McGraw-Hill.
Cliffs E. 1994. Time-Series Analysis, Forecasting and Control. Prentice
Hall.
Haley KB. 1978. Operational Research. Elsevier.
Lieberman H. 2001. Introduction to Operations Research. Tata McGraw-
Hill.
Makridakis S, Wheelwright SC & Hyndman RJ. 2003. Forecasting
Methods and Applications. 3rd Ed. John Wiley & Sons.
Nigel S, Stuart C & Robert J. 2007. Operations Management. 4th Ed.
Prentice Hall.
Philip HF. 1998. Time Series Models for Business and Economic
Forecasting. Cambridge University Press.
Pindyck RS & Daniel LR. 1997. Econometric Models and Economic
Forecasts. McGraw-Hill.
Priestley MB. 1994. Spectral Analysis and Time Series. Academic Press.
Taha HA. 2003. Operational Research: An Introduction. Prentice Hall.

FBM 507 COMMUNICATION SKILLS 0+2

Objective
To equip the students with effective communication and presentation skills.
To motivate and build self confidence among the students.

86
 Practical
Communication and communication skills - context, message, audience and
purpose analysis - listening, interviewing and note taking - verbal and non-
verbal communication; Reading skills: reading and interpreting interviews,
business / technical articles - case analysis - book review.
Writing skills: Writing persuasive messages / letters, e-mail, and resumes -
developing and refining personal and group vision statements - writing
situation analyses and minutes of the meeting; Writing technical reports -
report planning and research (information acquisition, data sources,
questionnaire, analysis and interpretation), writing abstract, executive
summary, introduction, conclusions, recommendations and references;
report organization and presentation.
Oral presentation skills: Voice culture; basic oral presentation techniques;
developing and presenting synopses and detailed project proposals -
impromptu presentations and audience management - conducting mock
interviews.
Communicating in groups; Event management - conducting workshop,
write-shop, seminar and public meeting; using audio and visual aids;
designing a website; selecting and integrating media into multi-media
presentations; brainstorming session on career opportunities in fisheries
sector.
Suggested Readings
Lesiskar RV & Pettit JD. 1979. Business Communication. 8th Ed. Tata Mc
Graw- Hill.
Locker KO & Kaczmarek SK. 2004. Business Communication-Building
Critical Skills. Tata McGraw Hill.

FBM 508 INTRODUCTION TO WTO AND IPR 1+1

Objective
To familiarize the students with the regulatory framework and implications
of WTO and IPR regime for the fisheries sector.
Theory
UNIT I
Globalisation: dimensions and driving forces; Introduction to GATT and
WTO; WTO Framework, its key subjects, principles and privileges.
UNIT II
Agreement on Sanitary and Phytosanitary Measures (SPS) and its
implications; Regulations in EU, USA and Japan for seafood Exports;
Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) and other Types of Non-Tariff Barriers
(NTBs); Fisheries Subsidies and WTO; Agreement on Anti-Dumping and
Fisheries Trade.
UNIT III
Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights (IPR); Seven forms of IPRs;
Property Rights framework under TRIPS Agreement; TRIPS and Patents:
Patentable subject matter; patenting process and procedure; Importance of
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT).
UNIT IV
Patenting in India before and after the Patents Act, 1970; Features of Indian
Patents (Amendment) Act, 2005; Patents in Indian fisheries sector; Patent
searches.

87
 UNIT V
Critical Issues in WTO: Fisheries Trade and Environment, Fisheries Trade
and Food Security; Understanding protests against globalisation and WTO.
Critical Issues in IPRs: Patenting of life forms; GMOs in fisheries;
Protection of traditional knowledge, benefit sharing and bio-piracy.
Practical
Case studies on (ab)use of SPS / TBT measure. Case studies on dumping
and anti-dumping measures in seafood trade; SWOT analysis of WTO;
Case studies on competitiveness of Indian fish and fish products under
WTO regime; Case studies on disputes in TRIPS; Case studies on patents /
IPRs in agriculture sector; Online retrieval of patent information; Exercise
in drafting a patent application; Group discussion on patenting of life
forms.
Suggested Readings
CMA / IIMA. 2001. Implications of WTO Agreements for Indian
Agriculture. Oxford and IBH.
Ganguli P. 1998. Gearing Up for Patents: The Indian Scenario. Orient
Longman.
Sikdar S. 2003. Contemporary Issues in Globalisation- an Introduction to
Theory and Policy in India. Oxford University Press.
[Link]; [Link]; [Link];
[Link]

FBM 509 INDIAN AND GLOBAL FISHERIES INDUSTRY 1+1

Objective
To familiarize the student with the evolution, growth and performance of
different sub sectors of the Indian and global fish industry.
Theory
UNIT I
Growth and evolution of Indian fisheries industry; size, organisation,
structure and ownership in fishing, hatchery, feed, health management, cold
storage, processing and allied sectors. Growth of aquaculture as industry.
Manufacturers and merchant traders. Wholesale and retail sectors.
Investments, innovations and productivity in Indian fisheries industry.
UNIT II
Global fisheries industry: Growth and evolution; major features; Size,
organisation, structure and ownership in global fisheries industry. World
fishing industry: Fresh, frozen, cured, canned, meat and oil. Fisheries
industry in US, Japan, European Union, Thailand, China, Vietnam,
Indonesia, Bangladesh and Sri Lanka.
UNIT III
Regulation of the fishing industry in major fisheries economies. Support
measures, subsidies and protectionism in global fisheries industry.
Globalisation and changing facets of global and Indian fisheries industry.
Emerging sectors: Ecotourism and aqua-tourism.
Practical
Case studies on world shrimp, tuna, salmon and cephalopod industries.
Trend analysis of fisheries production and productivity of major producers.
SWOT analysis of fisheries industry of major producers.

88
 Suggested Readings
FAO. Fisheries Statistics. Rome (Various years).
FAO. Globefish Commodity Updates. Rome (Various years).
Ministry of Agriculture. Handbook of Fisheries Statistics. New Delhi
(Various years).
Oscar JB. 1999. Export Competitiveness in South-East Asia: Policy
Initiatives and Corporate Actions in Marine Products Industry.
Wheeler Publ.
Porter G. 1998. Fisheries Subsidies – Over fishing and Trade. Geneva.

FBM 510 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT 1+1

Objective
To make the students understand concepts and practices of
entrepreneurship skills.
To identify a business idea and develop it into a business proposal.
Theory
UNIT I
Assessing overall business environment in the Indian economy. Overview
of Indian social, political and economic systems and their implications for
decision making by individual entrepreneurs. Globalisation and the
emerging business / entrepreneurial environment. Overview of aqua inputs
and fish processing industry.
UNIT II
Concept of entrepreneurship; entrepreneurial characteristics; managerial
skills and risk taking behaviour; managing an enterprise; motivation and
entrepreneurship development; importance of planning, monitoring,
evaluation and follow up in entrepreneurship; managing competition
development; entrepreneurship development programmes; Generation,
incubation and commercialization of ideas and innovations. Role and
promotion of leadership, collective action and stakeholder cooperation.
UNIT III
Project, project cycle, project formulation, monitoring and evaluation
methods - NPV, BCR and IRR; Guidelines for project formulation.
UNIT IV
Government schemes and incentives for promotion of entrepreneurship.
Government policy on Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs) / SSIs.
Venture capital. Contract farming. Social Responsibility of Business.
Practical
Spotting business opportunities and exploring entrepreneurial possibilities
in different sectors of fisheries industry; developing a pilot project based on
identified business; case studies of successful and failed entrepreneurs.
Critical review of Agri business clinics and e-chaupals. Case studies from
aqua industry / fish processing industry. Exercises in business
environmental Analysis. Hands on training and experiential learning –
developing and testing a business plan.
Suggested Readings
Bartlett C & Piramal G. 2000. World Class in India: A Case Book of
Companies in Transformation. Penguin India.
FICCI. 2000. A Pictorial History of Indian Business. Oxford University
Press.

89
 Krueger NF. 2002. Entrepreneurship – Critical Perspectives on Business
Management. Taylor & Francis.
Ojha SN & Salim SS. 2000. Entrepreneurship Development and Project
Formulation. CIFE, Mumbai.

FBM 511 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS AND TRADE 1+1

Objective
To familiarize the students with the basic concepts and principles of
economics as applied to international trade.
Theory
UNIT I
International trade: Nature of international trade, difference between
domestic and foreign trade; Theories of international trade: absolute and
comparative advantage, modern theories of international trade - Hecksher
Ohlin theorem.
UNIT II
Concepts of terms of trade, free trade, protection, tariffs, quantitative
restrictions and other non-tariff measures.
UNIT III
Exchange rate, devaluation and depreciation, balance of payments,
international capital movements, state trading.
UNIT IV
International gold standard; International Monetary Fund and World Bank;
Multi National Corporations and international trade; India’s foreign trade
and balance of payment.
Practical
Pattern and Performance of India's Seafood Exports; Case studies on
product and market diversification. Case studies on competitiveness of
Indian fish and fish products. Case studies on exports of value added
seafood products; Case study of a seafood export firm; Case studies on
(ab)use of SPS / TBT measure; Case studies on non-tariff barriers in
fisheries trade; Case studies on dumping and anti-dumping measures in
seafood trade; SWOT analysis of WTO; Case Studies on disputes in
TRIPS.
Suggested Readings
Appleyard DR & Field A. J. 2001. International Economics. 4th Ed.
McGraw Hill.
Dennis A. 2001. Trade Theory and Practice. Irwin Publ.
Francis C. 2008. International Economics. Tata McGraw Hill.
Krugman PR & Obstfeld M. 1991. International Economics: Theory and
Policy. Harper Collins Publ.
Mithani JP.1998. International Economics. Tata McGraw Hill.
Samuelson P & Nordhaus WD. 2001. Economics. Tata McGraw Hill.
FBM 512 EXPORT AND IMPORT MANAGEMENT 1+1
Objective
To familiarise the students with the basic processes and procedures in
fisheries export and import management.

90
 Theory
UNIT I
Introduction to Exports/Imports; Organisation of export and import firms
and business planning; Planning and preparations for export/import
operations; Registration process; Selection of products and markets;
Export-import logistics and transportation; Export/import pricing, terms of
sale and settlement; sampling, inspection and detention; INCO terms;
Documentation – standardized preshipment documents, commercial and
regulatory documents; Port and customs clearance – Specialised service
providers. Export/Import credit instruments and procedures - meaning and
importance of Letters of credit; cargo and credit insurance – role of ECGC -
Trade finance and EXIM bank.
UNIT II
Export/Import Promotional measures - EPCG scheme – Duty
Exemption/Remission scheme –central excise and sales tax exemption;
OGL, negative list, canalisation and counter trade. Present export/import
policy. Role of Export Promotion Councils, MPEDA – DCIS – DGFT –
ITC (HS) Classification. Export Oriented Units – Export Processing Zones
- Special Economic Zones – Deemed Exports. Market access and trade
liberalisation. WTO and trade policy reviews.
Practical
Export Composition and destination of Indian agricultural commodities and
seafood products. Import composition and Origin. Case studies of seafood
export firms.
Suggested Readings
Exporters Encyclopedia. 2004. Dun & Bradstrect Publ., USA.
IIFT. Background Papers on Export Procedures and Documentation, New
Delhi. (Various years).
ITC. 2002. Import Management: Handbook of Import Documentation.
UNCTAD, Geneva.
Ramakrishna S. 1992. Quality Control and Preshipment Inspection for
Exports. S. Chand & Co.
FBM 513 INTRODUCTION TO GIS 0+2
Objective
To familiarize the students with the basic concepts and practices of GIS.
Practical
Fundamentals concepts of GIS, GIS Subsystems, Components of GIS, GIS
data models, Spatial Data and attribute data, Vector and raster models,
Spatial data relationships, Attribute data models-tabular and relational
models (RDBMS), Remote sensing as an input to GIS, Manual digitizing
and Automatic scanning, Data editing and quality assurance, Map features
– point, line, polygon, area, Map characteristics, map projection and co-
ordinate system, Creation of thematic layers, Introduction to GIS software.
Familiarization with GIS software and use of GPS; Map scanning and geo-
registration of topo-sheet, satellite image and administrative map, Image
classification , Digitization of different features from topo-sheet and
satellite image, Creation of attribute table , joining of tables , Creation of
different thematic layers.

91
 Suggested Readings
Course Manual of Winter School on Remote Sensing and GIS Applications
in Fisheries Research and Management, 5-25 January, 2005, CIFE,
Mumbai.
Floyd FS. 2007. Remote Sensing: Principles and Interpretation. WH
Freeman & Co.
James BC. 2002. Introduction to Remote Sensing. Taylor & Francis.
Michael ND. 2005. Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems.
John Wiley & Sons.
Peter MA & Nicholas JT. (Eds.). 2005. Advances in Remote Sensing and
GIS Analysis. John Wiley & Sons.
Thomas ML & Ralph K. 1987. Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation.
John Wiley & Sons.

FBM 514 PROJECT FORMULATION AND MANAGEMENT 1+1

Objective
To familiarize the students with the basic concepts and principles of project
formulation and management techniques.
To prepare the students to exploit business opportunities in fisheries and
aquaculture.
Theory
UNIT I
Concept, scope and definition of project, difference between plan and
project, project types - advantages and limitations, elements of project
cycle - aspects of project preparation and analysis, project cost and benefits
– comparisons – tangible and intangible cost and benefits.
UNIT II
Financial and economic aspects of projects: Feasibility analysis –
undiscounted measures of project worth, ranking by inspection, pay back
period, average annual proceeds per unit of outlay, time value of money,
discounted measures–discounted pay back period, derivation of incremental
net benefit, net present worth, BC ratio, IRR, net benefit investment ratio,
project alternatives, risk and uncertainties, sensitivity analysis. Farm
planning, budgeting – complete and partial budgeting - farm business
analysis and appraisal techniques – ratio analysis, asset valuation and
depreciation. Financial analysis-balance sheet, cash flow analysis, profit
loss statements.
UNIT III
Guidelines for project preparation report – objective, rational, area,
organization, production, markets and financial results, benefits. Sources of
institutional assistance for project preparation and formulation, bilateral and
multilateral assistance. Project implementation – objective and tasks,
economic aspects of project evaluation. Project management – management
techniques – bar chart, milestone chart, activity slack bar chart, PERT,
CPM, inventory management and control, management information system
and project monitoring.
Practical
Case studies: Ratio analysis, computing depreciation, valuation of project
inventories, complete and partial Budgeting, cash flow analysis, balance
sheet / net worth statement, profit–loss statement/income statement,

92
 undiscounted and discounted measures, net work techniques, bar charts,
milestone chart and activity slack bar chart, PERT and CPM - project
preparation for capture, culture and processing sectors - sensitivity analysis,
project monitoring and evaluation, case studies and feasibility evaluation.
Suggested Readings
Chaudhary S. 1988. Project Management. Tata McGraw Hill.
Fisheries Project Formulation. FAO Tech. Paper No.334.
Gittenger P. 1972. Economic Analysis of Agricultural Projects. Johns
Hopkins University Press.
Ojha SN & Salim SS. 2000. Entrepreneurship Development and Project
Formulation. CIFE, Mumbai.
Rodney J, Turner S & Simister J. (Eds.). 2007. Project Management.
Infinity Books.
Salim SS, Biradar RS & Pandey SK. 2004. Economic Analysis of Fisheries
Projects. CIFE, Mumbai.
Shang YC. 1990. Aquaculture Economic Analysis - An Introduction. World
Aquaculture Society, USA.

93
 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
List of Journals

• Agricultural Economics Research Review

• Aquaculture International
• Business India
• Economic and Political Weekly
• European Journal of Operational Research
• Extension Review
• Face-to-Face Communication Skills – Newsletters
• Fishing Chimes
• Geographical and Environmental Modeling
• ICFAI Journal of Finance and Accounting
• ICFAI Journal of Marketing
• Indian Journal of Agricultural Economics
• Indian Journal of Agricultural Marketing
• Indian Journal of Foreign Trade
• International Entrepreneurship and Management Journal
• International Journal for Geographical Information Science
• International Journal of Forecasting
• International Journal of Remote Sensing
• International Small Business Journal
• Journal of Cooperative Communication Skills
• Journal of Entrepreneurship Development
• Journal of Fisheries Technology
• Journal of Geographical Systems
• Journal of Indian Seafood Export Association
• Journal of the Operational Research Society
• Journal on Export and Import management
• Operations Research
• Vikalpa
• WTO Review

94
 Suggested Broad Areas for Master’s and Doctoral Research

• Appraisal of the different fisheries projects

• Barriers in developing effective communication skills among fisheries graduates
• Characteristics of a successful entrepreneur
• Communications pattern and processes in fisheries organizations and industry
• Comparative performance of fisheries industries
• Comparative study of accounting practices followed by Indian fisheries Industry
• Consumer behaviour of value added fish products
• Developing decision support system using RS and GIS for management of
reservoirs, floodplains, etc.
• Developing forecasting models for growth in fish demand, supply and
consumption of fish
• Economic analysis of aquaculture practices
• Economic and financial analysis of fisheries project proposals
• Economic evaluation of different fishing techniques
• Export performance and potential of fish and fish products
• HRM practices of various state fisheries departments, NGOs
• Market structure and price determination
• Organization pattern and dynamics of change in service delivery agencies
• Potential for organized fish retailing
• Preparation of model commercial project proposals
• Study of non-tariff and customs related restrictions in major fish trading countries

95
 FISH BIOTECHNOLOGY
Course Structure - at a Glance
 
CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS

FBT 501* FUNDAMENTALS OF MOLECULAR BIOLOGY 2+1

FBT 502* BASIC CONCEPTS OF CELL BIOLOGY 2+1
FBT 503* GENE STRUCTURE AND REGULATION OF EXPRESSION 2+1
GENETIC ENGINEERING AND ITS APPLICATION IN
FBT 504* 2+1
FISHERIES
FBT 505# MOLECULAR AND IMMUNOGENETICS 1+1
FBT 506# BIOINFORMATICS 1+1
FBT 507# CELL AND TISSUE CULTURE 1+1

FBT 508 MARINE BIOTECHNOLOGY 1+1

FBT 509 AQUACULTURE BIOTECHNOLOGY 1+1

FBT 591 MASTER’S SEMINAR 1+0

FBT 599 MASTER’S RESEARCH 20

FBT 601** ADVANCES IN MOLECULAR AND CELL BIOLOGY 2+1

FBT 602** GENETIC ENGINEERING OF EUKARYOTES 2+1
FBT 603** GENETIC ENGINEERING OF BACTERIA AND VIRUSES 2+1
FBT 604 BIOSAFETY AND PATENT LAWS 2+0
FBT 605 FUNCTIONAL GENOMICS AND PROTEOMICS 1+1

FBT 606 PROTEIN CHEMISTRY AND ENGINEERING 1+1

FBT 607 RNAI TECHNOLOGY 1+1

FBT 608 BIOPROCESS TECHNOLOGY 1+1

FBT 691 DOCTORAL SEMINAR I 1+0

FBT 692 DOCTORAL SEMINAR II 1+0

FBT 699 DOCTORAL RESEARCH 45

* Compulsory for Master’s programme; ** Compulsory for Doctoral programme
#FBT 505, FBT 506 and FBT 507 cross listed with Fish Genetics and Breeding FGB 507, FGB
510 and FGB 512 respectively

96
 FISH BIOTECHNOLOGY
Course Contents

FBT 501 FUNDAMENTALS OF MOLECULAR BIOLOGY 2+1

Objective
To provide knowledge of basic molecular processes involving nucleic acids
and protein structure, synthesis and maintenance within a living cell.
Theory
UNIT I
Nucleic Acids: Genetic material, Structures of DNA and RNA;
Stereochemistry of bases and secondary structures; Organisation of the
nucleic acids - chromatin structure.
UNIT II
DNA replication: Models of DNA replication in prokaryotes and
eukaryotes; Mechanics of DNA replication; Enzymes; Structure and
function of DNA polymerases; Types of priming.
UNIT III
Transcription: Prokaryotes – Bacterial RNA polymerase, initiation,
elongation and termination, types of RNA polymerases; Eukaryotes –
enzymes and mechanics, post transcriptional modifications; Structure and
synthesis of rRNA and tRNA.
UNIT IV
Translation: Genetic code, codon bias, types and structures of ribosomes,
tRNA structure, Wobble hypotheisis, mechanisms of initiation, elongation,
termination, and post-translational modifications in prokaryotes and
eukaryotes and the factors involved in various steps, concept of polysomes
and protein structure.
UNIT V
DNA recombination: Molecular models – homologous and site-specific
recombination; crossing over; Holliday junction; transposition.
UNIT VI
Mutations: Types, mutagens – nitrous acid, UV, aflatoxin, bleomycin.
UNIT VII
DNA Repair: Types and mechanisms.
UNIT VIII
Gene transfer: Molecular mechanisms of conjugation, transduction,
transfection and transformation.
Practical
Nucleic acid isolation (genomic/plasmid DNA and RNA); Agarose gel
electrophoresis; Nucleic acid quantification; Protein purification and
separation in polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis (SDS-PAGE); Preparation
of competent cells and transformation.
Suggested Readings
Boyer R. 1999. Concepts in Biochemistry. Cole Publ. Co.
Glick BR & Pasternak JJ. 2005. Molecular Biotechnology: Principles and
Applications of Recombinant DNA Technology. ASM Press.
Lewin B. 2008. GENES – IX. Jones & Bartlet Publ.
Primrose SB. 1987. Modern Biotechnology. Blackwell.

97
 Watson JD, Baker TA, Bell SP, Gann A, Levine M, Losick R & Inglis C.
2007. Molecular Biology of the Gene. 6th Ed. Benjamin Cummings
Publ.

FBT 502 BASIC CONCEPTS OF CELL BIOLOGY 2+1

Objective
To outline the basic structure, growth and differentiation of prokaryotic and
eukaryotic cell, sub cellular components and their function.
Theory
UNIT I
Prokaryotic and eukaryotic cell architecture: Cell theory; diversity of cell
size and shape.
UNIT II
Organization and function of sub-cellular organelles: Cell membrane;
cytoplasm; endoplasmic reticulum; Golgi apparatus; lysosomes;
mitochondria; nucleolus; peroxisomes and sub-nuclear structures.
UNIT III
Principles of membrane transport: Active/passive membrane transport
(Case study - Osmoregulation in freshwater and marine fishes) ion
channels; carrier proteins; cell signaling.
UNIT IV
Cell division: Cell cycle and its regulation; Cell growth and differentiation.
UNIT V
Cell motility: Actin-myosin filaments; flagella; cilia.
UNIT VI
Protein sorting: Secretion and targeting; vesicular traffic; endocytosis;
exocytosis; protein translocation and secretary pathways.
Practical
Microscopic techniques- bright field, phase contrast and fluorescent
microscopy; Microtomy; Sub-cellular fractionation and their functional
integrity; Chromosome preparation; Histochemical techniques.
Suggested Readings
Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, Raff M, Roberts K & Walter P. 2002.
Molecular Biology of the Cell. 4th [Link] Publ.
Lodish H, Berk A, Matsudaira P, Kaiser CA, Krieger M, Scott MP,
Zipursky L & Darnell J. 2004. Molecular Cell Biology. 5th Ed. WH
Freeman.
Scott FG. 1998. Developmental Biology. 2nd Ed. Sunderland Sianuer
Associates.
Wilson EB. 1900. The Cell in Development and Inheritance. 2nd Ed. The
MacMillan Co.

FBT 503 GENE STRUCTURE AND REGULATION OF 2+1

EXPRESSION
Objective
To understand the structure of genes in prokaryotes and eukaryotes and the
significance of cis and trans acting genetic elements in the regulation of
gene expression.

98
Theory
UNIT I
Gene structure: Promoters, UTRs, ORFs, exons, introns, termination signal,
mono- and polycistronic genes, Gene clustering; Overlapping genes in (Phi
X174 virus).
UNIT II
Bacteriophage genome: Organization and life cycle of Lambda and M13.
UNIT III
Regulation of gene expression in Prokaryotes: Operon concept (Lac/Trp);
SOS response, bidirectional promoters.
UNIT IV
Regulation of gene expression in Eukaryotes: DNA protein interactions
(zinc fingers, leucine zippers, helix turn helix, Z-DNA); transcription
factors, promoters, enhancers, repressors, insulators, attenuators, IRES,
alternative splicing.
UNIT V
RNA in gene regulation : Antisense RNA, microRNA, ribozymes.
UNIT VI
Case study: Molecular regulation of growth hormone expression in carp/or
Molecular regulation of Na+K+ ATPase in gills and kidney cells of
freshwater and marine fishes.
UNIT VII
Expression analysis – Techniques to test the up and down regulation of
specific genes like Micro array and Real time PCR.
UNIT VIII
Epigenetics - DNA methylation, genetic imprinting, histone modifications,
chromatin remodeling.
UNIT IX
Inhibitors of transcription and translation : Mode of function and resistance
mechanism – Actinomycin D, α–amanitin, Rifampicin, Tetracyclin,
Streptomycin, Chloramphenicol, Kanamycin, Cyclohaxamide, Diptheria
toxin, Ricin.
UNIT X
Site-directed mutagenesis and its applications.
Practical
Expression studies of a gene controlled by lacz promoter – Induction,
blue/white selection, cell extract separation by PAGE and western blotting;
lambda plaque formation on E. coli lawn; Seperation of gill extract on
PAGE and histochemical staining of Na+ K+ ATPase of fish kept at
different salinities; retrieval of gene information from ensemble and NCBI,
BLAST.
Suggested Readings
Boyer R. 1999. Concepts in Biochemistry. Cole Publ. Co.
Lewin B. 2008. GENES IX. Jones & Bartlet Publ.
Primrose SB & Twyman RM. 2006. Principles of Gene Manipulation and
Genomics. 7th Ed. Blackwell.

99
FBT 504 GENETIC ENGINEERING AND ITS APPLICATION 2+1
IN FISHERIES
Objective
To detail the basic steps in recombinant DNA technology and its
application in optimization of production, health and environment in
fisheries.
Theory
UNIT I
Recombinant DNA technology: DNA modifying enzymes - types of
restriction endonucleases (Type I, II and III), DNA/RNA modifying
enzymes (alkaline phosphatases, kinases, exonucleases, ligases, terminal
transferases); Vectors - plasmids (replication, copy number control and
compatibility), phagemids, cosmids, high capacity vectors (eg. BAC),
shuttle vectors; Adapters, linkers, ligation, transformation and selection.
UNIT II
Hosts: Prokaryotic (selected E. coli strains) and eukaryotic (selected yeast
strains).
UNIT III
DNA amplification: PCR – principle, types and applications; T/A cloning
of amplified products; Structure and function of DNA polymerase and
reverse transcriptase.
UNIT IV
Genomic DNA library: Construction, screening (PFGE) and applications;
chromosome walking.
UNIT V
cDNA library: Construction, screening (PFGE) and clone characterization.
UNIT VI
DNA and protein sequencing: Principle, types and applications.
UNIT VII
Application of rDNA technology : Transgenesis – fish as a model
organism, target genes, methods of gene transfer, transgenic screening
techniques; Production of diagnostics and vaccines; biofactories,
biosensors, waste water treatment, probiotics, GMOs - Biosafety
regulations and ethical issues related to biotechnological products; patent
laws and IPR issues.
UNIT VIII
Optimization of recombinant protein expression in prokaryotes and
eukaryotes.
UNIT IX
Nucleic acid hybridization: Southern, Northern and Western blotting; DNA
probes and their labeling.
Practical
Cloning strategies – insert and vector preparation, ligation, preparation of
competent cells, transformation, clone confirmation techniques (horizontal
slot lysis/colony PCR); Southern hybridization, probe Labeling methods;
Primer designing; DNA sequencing and analysis.
Suggested Readings
Brown TA. 1998. Recombinant DNA. Academic Press.
Brown TA. 2002. Genomes. 2nd Ed. John Wiley & Sons.
Lewin B. 2008. GENES IX. Jones & Bartlet.

100
 Primrose SB, Twyman RM. 2006. Principles of Gene Manipulation and
Genomics. 7th Ed. Blackwell.
Sambrook J & Russel WD. 1989. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory
Manual. Vols. [Link] Spring Harbour.

FBT 505 MOLECULAR AND IMMUNOGENETICS 1+1

Objective
To acquaint the students with techniques used to estimate genetic variation
among individuals and populations for various purposes and DNA diversity
generated by somatic recombination of immunoglobulin genes.
Theory
UNIT I
Biochemical markers: Allozyme polymorphism and its application in
estimating population genetic parameters.
UNIT II
Molecular markers: RAPD, RFLP, AFLP, EST, SNP, Minisatellites and
Microsatellites and application in population genetic analysis and gene
mapping, FISH – principle and application.
UNIT III
Analysis: Interpretation of gels and data analysis using various softwares.
DNA sequence polymorphism and related software for alignment and
analysis.
UNIT IV
Immunogenetics: Molecular biology of Ig synthesis, genetic basis of
antibody diversity, humoral B-cell immunoglobulins, T-cell receptors and
MHC.
Practical
Biochemical markers: Allozyme polymorphism. Molecular Markers:
RAPD, RFLP, AFLP, Minisatellites and [Link] of
gels and data analysis.
Suggested Readings
Caetano-Anolles G & Gresshoff PM. 1998. DNA Markers: Protocols,
Applications and Overviews. Wiley-VCH.
Pasteur N, Pasteur G, Bonhomme F, Catalan J & Britton-Davidian J. 1988.
Practical Isozyme Genetics. John Wiley & Sons.
Sambrook J & Russel WD. 1989. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory
Manual. Vols. [Link] Spring Harbour.
FBT 506 BIOINFORMATICS 1+1
Objective
To learn the application of information technology for the fish genetics
studies.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction to bioinformatics: history, definition, scope and applications;
Fields related to bioinformatics.
UNIT II
Data base: mining tools, submission of DNA sequences; Sequence
alignment and database searching, similarity search, FASTA, BLAST.

101
 UNIT III
Information networks: internet; Gene bank sequence database, EBI-net;
NCBI, Genome net.
UNIT IV
Genomics: genome diagnostics, genome projects, genome analysis.
UNIT V
Proteomics: protein information resources, primary and secondary protein
data bases, analysis packages, predictive methods, ESTs.
UNIT VI
Phylogenetic analysis; Comparative genome analysis; Microarray
bioinformatics.
Practical
Internet search: retrieving information from different data base like NCBI,
protein information sources; Preparation of data base; Use of genome
analysis packages: genetics data base; Searching by similarity;
Phylogenetic analysis; Accessing and submission to gene banks; BLAST,
sequence alignments, comparisons.
Data base: mining tools, submission of DNA sequences; Sequence
alignment and database searching, similarity search, FASTA, BLAST.
Suggested Readings
Attwood TK & Smith DJP. 1999. Introduction to Bioinformatics. Addison
Wesley Longman.
Baxevanis AD & Ouellettee BF. 2002. Bioinformatics, A Practical Guide
to the Analysis of Genes and Proteins. John Wiley & Sons.
Brown SM. 2000. Bioinformatics: A Biologist's Guide to Biocomputing and
the Internet. Eaton Publ.
Campbell MA & Heyer LJ. 2003. Discovering Genomics, Proteomics, and
Bioinformatics. Benjamin Cummings.
Lesk AM. 2008. Introduction to Bioinformatics. Oxford University Press.
Mount DW. 2001. Bioinformatics: Sequence and Genome Analysis. Cold
Spring Harbor Press.
Rashidi HH & Buehler LK. 2005. Bioinformatics Basics: Applications in
Biological Sciences and Medicine. CRC Press.

FBT 507 CELL AND TISSUE CULTURE 1+1

Objective
To impart knowledge on cell and tissue culture techniques and their
application in health management, gene banking and genetic
characterization.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: Structure and Organization of animal cell; Equipments and
materials for animal cell culture technology.
UNIT II
Cell lines and media: Primary and established cell line cultures; media
supplements – their metabolic functions; serum and protein free defined
media and their application.

102
 UNIT III
Cell culture: Basic techniques of cell culture in vitro; development of
primary cultures, cell separation, maintenance of cell lines; biology of
cultured cells, transformation and differentiation of cell cultures.
UNIT IV
Characterization of cell lines: Measurement of viability and cytotoxicity
assays; measuring parameters of growth; karyotyping, isozyme assays,
cryopreservation, assessment of contaminants.
UNIT V
Cell cloning: Micromanipulation, cell transformation, application of fish
cell culture, scaling-up of cell culture.
UNIT VI
Stem cells: Stem cell cultures, embryonic stem cells and their applications;
cell culture based vaccines, organ and histotypic cultures; measurement of
cell death; apoptosis; three dimensional culture and tissue engineering.
UNIT VII
Cell hybridization: Somatic cell fusion, hybridoma technology, Production
and Application of monoclonal antibodies.
Practical
Principles of sterile techniques and cell propagation; Preparation of
different cell culture media; Primary cell culture techniques; Establishing
cell lines: isolation, characterization identification of cell lines; Pure culture
techniques; Maintenance and preservation of cell lines; Propagation of cells
in suspension cultures; Hybridoma technology: strategy and techniques;
Production of monoclonal antibodies.
Suggested Readings
Barnes D & Mathur PJ. 1998. Methods in Cell Biology. Vol. 57. Animal
Cell Culture Methods. Academic Press.
Basega R. (Ed.). 1989. Cell Growth and Division: A Practical Approach.
IRL Press.
Butler M & Dawson M. (Ed.). 1992. Cell Culture. Bios Scientific Publ.
Clynes M. 1998. Animal Cell Culture Techniques. Springer.
Freshney I. 1994. Culture of Animal Cells: A Manual of Basic Techniques.
4th Ed. Wiley-Liss.
Harrison AM, Rae FI & Harris A. 1997. General Techniques of Cell
Culture. Cambridge University Press.
Lan FR. 1994. Culture of Animal Cells. 3rd Ed. Wiley-Liss.
Masters RW. 2000. Animal Cell Culture-Practical Approach. Oxford
University Press.

FBT 508 MARINE BIOTECHNOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To outline an overview on the potential marine resources for bioactive
compounds, pharmaceuticals and the application of biotechnological tools to
combat marine pollution.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: Historical background, overview of the present status of
marine biotechnology, commercially important and potential species,
micro-algae, macro-algae, aquaculture.

103
 UNIT II
Marine Resources: Biodiversity, marine natural products, valuable
chemicals, biomedical and bioactive compounds from marine organisms,
commercial bio-products from marine organisms; green fluorescent protein
from jelly fish and its application, marine organisms as a source of
polysaccharides, antiviral, anticancer and anti-inflammatory compounds;
and commercially important enzymes - Xylanase, agarase, proteases,
chitinases, amylase, lipases, cellulase, phytase.
UNIT III
Environmental Biotechnology: Marine biotechnology for economic
development and environmental problem solving, bio-film and bio-
remediation, bio-sensor and transgenic marine organisms; unculturable
bacteria- occurrence, characteristics, characterization and exploitation;
metagenomic library of unculturable bacteria, marine pollution and its
control; genetically engineered microbes for waste water treatment; Red sea
tide and its control, biofouling and prevention.
UNIT IV
Gene mining : Identification of genes responsible for novel proteins, rDNA
technology for the large scale production of novel proteins, pharmaceutical,
cosmetic and neutraceuticals and their use in drug designing - for various
finfish and shellfish bacterial and fungal toxins.
UNIT V
Fermentation technology: Types – batch, continuous; Down stream
processing of commercially important compounds.
Practical
Extraction of bioactive compounds from seaweeds, microalgae, sponges
and test their efficiency microbiology, biochemistry and molecular assays,
isolation of marine algae, plankton and its culture method, methods for
isolation of viable and unculturable bacteria from sea, recombinant DNA
technology to produce commercially important enzymes.
Suggested Readings
Colwell RD. 1984. Biotechnology in the Marine Sciences. Proceedings of
the First Annual MIT Sea Grant Lecture and Seminar.
Fingerman M, Nagabushana M & Thompson R. 1998. Recent Advances in
Marine Biotechnology. [Link]. Science Publ.
Fusetani N. 2000. Drugs From Sea. Karger Publ.
Kamely D, Chakraborty A & Omenn GS. 1990. Biotechnology and
Biodegradation. Portfolio Publ. Co.
Karl DM. 1995. Microbiology of Deep Sea Hydrothermal Vents. CRC
Press.
Omura S. 1992. The Search for Bioactive Compounds from
Microorganisms. Springer.

104
FBT 509 AQUACULTURE BIOTECHNOLOGY 1+1
Objective
To provide an overview of the application of biotechnological tools in fish
breeding, feed, health, processing and other facets in fisheries.
Theory
UNIT I
Fish Breeding: Synthetic hormones for induced breeding- GnRH analogue
structure and function.
UNIT II
Transgenesis : Methods of gene transfer in fishes, single gene traits,
screening for transgenics, site of integration, applications, regulation of
GMOs, IPR, Evaluation of GFP transgenics.
UNIT III
Gene Bank and conservation: Cryopreservation of gametes and embryos.
UNIT IV
Feed Technology: Micro encapsulated feeds, micro coated feeds, micro-
particulate feeds and bio-encapsulated feeds, mycotoxins and their effects
on feeds.
UNIT V
Health Management: DNA and RNA vaccines, molecular diagnosis of viral
diseases, PCR, Dot-blot, ribotyping of pathogenic microbes, RNAi,
Biofilms and its impact on health management, genetically modified micro-
organisms as probiotics, immunostimulants, bioremediation of soil and
water.
UNIT VI
Algal Biotechnology: Microalgae - indoor and mass culture methods,
biotechnological approaches for production of important microalgae, single
cell protein from Spirulina, raceway system of micro algae culture,
vitamins, minerals and omega3 fatty acids from micro algae, enrichment of
micro algae with micronutrients.
UNIT VII
Post harvest biotechnology: Delaying of spoilage, detection of toxic
substances and pathogenic microbes, biosensors for toxins.
UNIT VIII
Application of nanotechnology in aquaculture.
Practical
Induced breeding of carps, Spirulina culture, identification of selected
algae, cryopreservation of gametes, diagnosis of WSSV, micro-
encapsulation, ribotyping, HAACP methods, preparation of agar, PCR
amplification and cloning of growth hormone gene, transgenesis,
chromosomal manipulation- androgenesis, gynogenesis, triploidy,
tetraploidy.
Suggested Readings
Lakra WS, Abidi SAH, Mukherjee SC & Ayyappan S. 2004. Fisheries
Biotechnology. Narendra Publ. House.
Nagabhushanam R, Diwan AD, Zahurnec BJ & Sarojini R. 2004.
Biotechnology of Aquatic Animals. Science Publ.
Nair PR. 2008. Biotechnology and Genetics in Fisheries and Aquaculture.
Dominant Publ.

105
 Pandian TJ, Strüssmann CA & Marian MP. 2005. Fish Genetics and
Aquaculture Biotechnology. Science Publ.
Reddy PVGK, Ayyappan S, Thampy DM & Gopalakrishna. 2005. Text
Book of Fish Genetics and Biotechnology. ICAR.

FBT 601 ADVANCES IN MOLECULAR AND CELL BIOLOGY 2+1

Objective
To provide a deeper understanding of the molecular and cellular processes
involved in the functioning, maintenance and death of living cells.
Theory
UNIT I
Content of the genome: Genome size and complexity, C-value paradox,
repetitive and non- repetitive DNA, Cot curve, evolution of interrupted
genes, cluster and repeats, gene families, pseudogenes, evolutionary clock.
UNIT II
Protein localization and trafficking: Co-translational and post-translational
translocation, post-translational modifications; Protein transport through
ER - Golgi system; Anterograde and retrograde transport; Exo- and
endocytosis; Clathrin coated vesicles; membrane fusion and protein
localization; Ubiquitin pathway for protein degradation.
UNIT III
Signal transduction: Active and passive transport, carrier proteins
(uniporter/ symporter/antiporter), ion channels (ligand and voltage gated
channels), G-proteins, signaling pathways (Ras/MAPK, JAK-STAT).
UNIT IV
Cell cycle and growth regulation: Cell cycle check points, cyclins, CDKs
(Cycline dependent kinases); Cell differentiation; Apoptosis: programmed
cell death – genetic pathways for PCD, anti and proapoptotic proteins.
UNIT V
Epigenetics : DNA imprinting, histone modifications, histone code.
UNIT VI
Oncogenes and tumour suppressor genes: Viral and cellular oncogenes,
tumour suppressor genes; Structure, function and mechanism of action of
pRB and p53 tumour suppressor proteins.
UNIT VII
RNA interference: History, molecular mechanisms and applications of
antisense RNA, microRNA, siRNA and Ribozymes.
Practical
DNA sequence analysis for identification of cis acting elements – kozak
sequence, intron-exon boundaries, poly A signal, terminators, promoters,
transcription factor binding sites, zinc finger motif, cellular localization
signals using bioinformatics softwares available online; multiple alignment,
tandem repeat identification, promoter analysis, antisense/siRNA design.
Suggested Readings
Alberts B, Johnson A, Lewis J, Raff M, Roberts K & Walter P. 2002.
Molecular Biology of the Cell. 4th Ed. Science Publ.
Boyer R. 1999. Concepts in Biochemistry. Cole Publ. Co.
Lewin B. 2008. GENES IX. Jones & Bartlet.

106
 Lodish H, Berk A, Matsudaira P, Kaiser CA, Krieger M, Scott MP,
Zipursky L & Darnell J. 2004. Molecular Cell Biology. 5th Ed. WH
Freeman.
Scott GF. 1998. Developmental Biology. 2nd Ed. Sunderland Sianuer
Associates.
Watson JD, Baker TA, Bell SP, Gann A, Levine M, Losick R & Inglis C.
2007. Molecular Biology of the Gene. 6th Ed. Benjamin Cummings
Publ.
Wilson EB. 1900. The Cell in Development and Inheritance. 2nd Ed. The
MacMillan Co.

FBT 602 GENETIC ENGINEERING OF EUKARYOTES 2+1

Objective
To provide in-depth knowledge on the techniques available for genetic
engineering of eukaryotes and strategies to optimize recombinant protein
production in eukaryotic expression systems.
Theory
UNIT I
Eukaryotic expression systems: Yeast expression system - host strains,
special features, types of vectors (yeast episomal vectors, integrating
vectors and YACs), yeast two hybrid system.
UNIT II
Insect cell expression system: Special features, types, baculoviral
expression vectors, polyhedron promoters.
UNIT III
Mammalian cell expression system: Special features, selectable markers;
Transfection: principle, types, selection; transduction by viral vectors,
construct design (strong and constitutive promoters, inclusion of introns).
UNIT IV
Fish cell expression systems: Tissue specific promoters, constitutive
promoters and applications.
UNIT V
Strategies for optimizing recombinant gene expression in eukaryotic
systems; Downstream processing of recombinant proteins.
UNIT VI
Transgenesis : Fish as a model organism, methods of gene transfer,
strategies for gene targeting (homologous sites/ cre-lox recombination
system); specialized vectors for high efficiency transgenesis – eukaryotic
transposon vectors, retroviral vectors, etc., Transgene: integration and
detection techniques, an overview of transgenics developed in fisheries
sector – food/or ornamental; Fish as biosensors and biofactories.
UNIT VII
Gene function analysis: Gene knock-outs, gene silencing by RNAi,
morpholinos, etc; site directed and transposon mediated mutagenesis.
Practical
Gene transfer experiments (electroporation, microinjection); Northern
blotting, Western, Southern blotting for confirming integration and
expression of transgene; Gene library: construction of cDNA and genomic
DNA libraries; Screening: DNA hybridization, immunological assay and
protein activity.

107
 Suggested Readings
Boyer R. 1999. Concepts in Biochemistry. Cole Publ. Co.
Brown TA. 2002. Genomes. 2nd Ed. John Wiley & Sons.
Lewin B. 2008. GENES IX. Jones & Bartlet.
Sambrook J & Russel WD. 1989. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory
[Link]. I-III. Cold Spring Harbour.

FBT 603 GENETIC ENGINEERING OF BACTERIA 2+1

AND VIRUSES
Objective
To provide knowledge on various techniques available to produce
genetically engineered microbes and their application, design of viral
vectors for efficient gene delivery.
Theory
UNIT I
Recombinant protein expression in Bacteria: Optimization of expression;
fusion proteins, purification of recombinant proteins - inclusion bodies,
extracellular targeting, engineering of signal sequences, electroporation.
UNIT II
Scope and application of genetic engineering in bacteria: Engineered
microorganisms for bioremediation, biofouling, biosensing,
biofermentation, probiotics and single cell protein.
UNIT III
Molecular biology of fish DNA/RNA viruses: Major groups of DNA/RNA
viruses; their cis acting genetic elements and regulation of protein
expression.
UNIT IV
Genetic engineering of Virus: Use of animal viruses like vaccinia, herpes,
retrovirus, baculovirus and adenovirus as cloning vectors, design of viral
vectors - special features, cis acting regulatory elements; strategies to
optimize recombinant protein production, pro’s and con’s of using viral
vectors as gene delivery vehicles; vectors based on bacteriophage lamda,
P1 and M13, special features and their application in optimizing
recombinant protein production.
UNIT V
Scope and application of genetic engineering in Virus : Efficient gene
delivery strategies, host-pathogen interaction, antigenic proteins,
vaccination approaches, DNA vaccines, diagnostics : methods for detection
of viral infection, estimation of viral load by Real Time PCR, etc.
Practical
Transformation of bacteria by electroporation, Southern and dot-blot
transfer techniques; Restriction mapping of DNA; labeling of DNA probes;
PAGE analysis for recombinant proteins. Preparation of primary and
secondary monolayer cell culture, use of cell culture in virus cultivation
and assay; Viral DNA isolation and restriction analysis; Culture and
maintenance of bacteriophages; RT-PCR.
Suggested Readings
Boyer R. 1999. Concepts in Biochemistry. Cole Publ. Co.
Brown TA. 2002. Genomes. 2nd Ed. John Wiley & Sons.
Lewin B. 2008. GENES IX. Jones & Bartlet.

108
 Sambrook J & Russel WD. 1989. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory
[Link]. I-III. Cold Spring Harbour.

FBT 604 BIOSAFETY AND PATENT LAWS 2+0

Objective
To provide an overview on the current status of genetically modified
organisms and patent laws, biosafety guidelines and regulatory mechanisms
involved.
Theory
UNIT I
Safety and ethical issues: Guidelines for research on genetically modified
organisms (GMOs), quality control of biologicals produced by rDNA
technology, safety in the contained use and release of transgenic animals,
ecological risk of engineered organisms/plants and remedial measures,
ethical issues related to biotechnology products.
UNIT II
Biosafety regulations: Guidelines for environmental release of GMOs,
guidelines for import and shipment of GMOs, mechanism of
implementation of biosafety guidelines at Institutional, national and
international level, Role of national agencies in regulating GMOs; Acts and
treaties related to bisafety of GMOs, Public awareness, perception and
acceptance of products of biotechnology.
UNIT III
Patent laws: Global scenario of genetically modified organisms, Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR), patent laws at institutional, national and
international level.
Suggested Readings
DBT. 1998. Background Document for Workshop on Biosafety issues
Emanating from Use of Genetically Modified Organisms (GMOs).
Bangalore.
Subbaram NR. 1998. Handbook of Indian Patent Law and Practice.
Viswanathan Printers & Publ.
Tzotzos GT. 1995. Genetically Modified Organisms - A Guide to
Biosafety. CABI.
FBT 605 FUNCTIONAL GENOMICS AND PROTEOMICS 1+1
Objective
To give an introduction to application of modern techniques for functional
genome analysis.
Theory
UNIT I
Whole genome analysis: Preparation of ordered cosmid libraries, BAC
libraries, Shotgun libraries and sequencing, conventional and automated
sequencing.
UNIT II
DNA Microarray: Printing of oligonucleotides and PCR products on glass
slides, nitrocellulose paper, genome analysis for global patterns of gene
expression using fluorescent labeled cDNA or end-labeled RNA probes,
analysis of SNP using DNA chips.

109
 UNIT III
Proteome analysis: Two dimensional separation of total cellular proteins,
isolation and sequence analysis of individual protein spots by mass
spectroscopy, protein microarrays, advantage and disadvantage of DNA
and protein microarrrays,
UNIT IV
Subtractive hybridization and differential display for identification of genes
expressed in specific conditions.
Practical
Analysis of SNP using DNA chips, printing of oligonucleotides and PCR
products on glass slides, nitrocellulose paper, conventional and automated
sequencing of DNA, protein sequencing by mass spectroscopy, protein
microarrays.
Suggested Readings
Brenner SE & Levitt M. 2000. Functional Genomics: A Practical
Approach. Oxford University Press.
Peruski LF & Peruski LH. 1997. The Internet and New Biology:Tools for
Genomic and Molecular Research. ASM Press.
Schena M. (Ed.).1999. DNA Microarrays: A Practical Approach. Oxford
University Press.
FBT 606 PROTEIN CHEMISTRY AND ENGINEERING 1+1
Objective
To provide an insight into the structure and function of proteins with a
focus on state-of-the-art protein engineering to design novel proteins and
their application.
Theory
UNIT I
Chemical and physical characteristics of proteins: Properties of amino
acids, peptides, and proteins, chemical modification of proteins, Post-
translational modification of proteins, forces that determine protein
structures, Secondary tertiary and quaternary structures of proteins, protein
folding patterns, protein modules, protein structure based drug design.
UNIT II
Structure Function Relationship of Proteins : DNA binding proteins,
prokaryotic and eukaryotic transcription factors, DNA polymerases,
membrane proteins and receptors, bacteriohodosin, photosynthetic centres,
epidermal growth factor, insulin and ODGF receptors and their interaction
with effectors, protein phosphorylation, immunoglobulins, nucleotide
binding proteins, enzyme serine proteases, ribonuclesase, lysozyme.
UNIT III
Protein-Protein and Protein-DNA Interactions: Biochemical, biophysical
and computational methods to Study Protein-Protein Interactions and
Protein-DNA Interactions.
UNIT IV
Protein and DNA Sequence Analysis: Web-based Literature Search,
Sequence Retrieval and Sequence Analysis, Activities and Regulation of
Protein Enzymes: Functions and Regulation of Enzymes, Regulation of the
Activities of Enzymes and Other Proteins, Phosphorylation and
Dephosphorylation.

110
 UNIT V
Protein Engineering and Protein Design : Protein data base analysis,
methods to alter primary structure of proteins, examples of engineered
proteins, protein design, principles and examples.
UNIT VI
Proteolysis in Cellular Regulation: Mechanism of Protein Degradation and
Proteolysis Pathways.
Practical
Proteomics and sequence analysis tools - Identification and characterization
(Aldente, FindMod, Popitam, Phenyx, pI/Mw, ProtParam), DNA ->
Protein, similarity searches (BLAST), pattern and profile searches
(ScanProsite), post-translational modification and topology prediction,
primary structure analysis, secondary and tertiary structure tools (Swiss-
PdbViewer), alignment and phylogenetic analysis, DNA mobility shift
assay.
Suggested Readings
Creighton TE. 1992. Protein: Structure and Molecular Properties. 2nd Ed.
WH Freeman.
Liebler DC. 2007. Introduction to Proteomics: Tools for the New Biology.
Humana Press.
Twyman RM. 2004. Advanced Text: Principles of Proteomics. Garland
Science/BIOS Scientific Publ.
FBT 607 RNAi TECHNOLOGY 1+1
Objective
To comprehend the basic process of RNAi and issues involved in their
applications.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction : Regulation of gene expression in prokaryotes and eukaryotes,
types of RNA – rRNA, mRNA, tRNA, miRNA, siRNA, shRNA, tncRNA,
gene knock down, gene knock out, co-suppression post transcriptional gene
silencing, quelling, RNAi in C. elegans – landmark events in the discovery
of RNAi components – dsRNA, Dicer, RISC complex, argonaute protein;
mechanism of RNAi, miRNA pathway, RNAi and origin of
heterochromatin.
UNIT II
Ribonuclease II super family: Forms and functions in RNA, maturation,
decay and gene silencing, RNA dependent RNA polymerase in gene
silencing, RNAi in invertebrates – antiviral immunity by dsRNA in
shrimps.
UNIT III
Delivery of RNAi : Bio-distribution, delivery and application, delivery
reagents, target validation, detection methods, delivery systems – viral and
nonviral delivery, RNAi as a tool against animal and human diseases –
HIV, cancer; gene therapy.
Practical
Softwares to design siRNA and target validation – ERNAi, optiRNAi,
iRNAi; different methods of delivery – vector based, naked siRNA,
chemically modified siRNA, gene expression analysis techniques after
RNAi delivery – Real time PCR, hybridization techniques.

111
 Suggested Readings
Hannon GJ. 2003. RNAi, A Guide to Gene Silencing. CHSL Press.
Schepers U. 2005. RNA Interference in Practice. Principles, Basics, and
Methods for Gene Silencing in C. elegans, Drosophils, and
Mammals. WILEY-VCH Verlag, GmbH.
Twyman RM. 2004. Advanced Text: Principles of Proteomics. Garland
Science, BIOS Scientific Publ.

FBT 608 BIOPROCESS TECHNOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To learn the techniques for bulk processing, production and purification of
biologicals.
Theory
UNIT I
Raw materials for bioprocessing, comparison of chemical and biochemical
processing based on energetics and environmental issues. Development of
inocula, kinetics of enzymatic and microbial processes, optimisation
studies, sterilization of media, air and equipment, modes of cell cultivation,
general principles of bioreactor design and their operation -Downstream
processing, separation and purification techniques, quality assurance
testing, representative examples of microbial products, vaccines and
vaccine development.
UNIT II
Immobilization of cells and enzymes: Principles, methodology and
applications, disintegration of cells, separation of solid and liquid phases,
isolation and purification techniques for proteins and other products based
on different physico-chemical properties, eg., precipitation, adsorption,
chromatographic separations, bio-affinity based methods -Principles of
bioprocess control, bioprocess auto mation and application of computers in
bioprocessing, recombinant products with representative examples,
biosafety and environmental monitoring of GEMs, Introduction to patents,
Intellectual Property Rights in Biotechnology.
Practical
Downstream processing, separation and purification of compounds,
Preparation of vaccines, Purification of protein and enzymes by
precipitation, adsorbtion, chromatography and bioaffinity based
methods.
Suggested Readings
Ratledge C & Kristiansen B. (Eds.). 2006. Basic Biotechnology. Cambridge
University Press.
Renneberg R. 2007. Biotechnology for Beginners. Academic Press.
Waites MJ, Morgan NL, Rockey JS & Higton G. 2001. Industrial
Microbiology: An Introduction. Wiley-Blackwell.

112
 FISH BIOTECHNOLOGY
List of Journals

• Animal Biotechnology
• Applied Biochemistry and Biotechnology
• Biochemical Genetics
• Bioinformatics
• Biology of the Cell
• Biotechnology Advances
• Biotechnology and Applied Biochemistry
• Biotechnology and Bioengineering
• Briefings in Bioinformatics
• Cell
• Cell and Tissue Research
• Cell Biology International
• Cell Death and Differentiation
• Cell Growth and Differentiation
• Cell Research
• Critical Reviews in Biotechnology
• Current Bioinformatics
• Current Opinion in Biotechnology
• Current Opinion in Cell Biology
• Current Stem Cell Research and Therapy
• European Journal of Immunogenetics
• Experimental Cell Research
• Gene Expression Patterns
• Gene Structure and Expression
• Genome Research
• Journal of Animal Law and Ethics
• Journal of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology
• Journal of Biotechnology
• Journal of Cell Biology
• Journal of Cell Science
• Journal of Commercial Biotechnology
• Journal of Computational Biology
• Journal of Industrial Microbiology and Biotechnology
• Journal of Marine Biotechnology
• Journal of Molecular Biology
• Journal of RNAi and Gene Silencing
• Marine Biotechnology
• Microbial Biotechnology
• Molecular Biology of the Cell
• Molecular Biotechnology
• Molecular Cell Research
• Molecular Genetics and Genomics

113
• Molecular Marine Biology and Biotechnology
• Molecular Phylogenetics and Evolution
• Nature Biotechnology
• Nature Cell Biology
• Nature Structural and Molecular Biology
• Nucleic Acids Research
• Proteins, Structure, Function, and Bioinformatics
• Recent Patents on Biotechnology
• Reviews in Environmental Science and Biotechnology
• Reviews in Molecular Biotechnology
• Trends in Biotechnology
• Trends in Cell Biology

Suggested Broad Areas for Master’s and Doctoral Research

• Site directed mutagenesis to identify functional motifs and to optimize

recombinant protein production
• Homologous and site specific recombination methods in genetic engineering
• Mutagenic effects of different chemicals
• Temporal and spatial expression kinetics of specific genes involved in regulatory
pathways
• Identification of developmentally regulated genes
• Characterization of promoter regions
• Identification of commercially important genes
• Identification of transcription factor binding sites
• Development of genetically modified microorganisms to serve specific purposes
like biosensors and bio-indicators etc
• Molecular genetic studies for estimating genetic variation and other genetic
parameters in among stocks and species
• Molecular tools for taxonomic identification
• Use of molecular markers to identify specific pathogens
• Computer applications in analyzing biological data
• In silico analysis of regulatory elements
• Phylogenetic analysis of different populations
• Production of monoclonal antibodies
• Development of primary cell culture for different finfish and shellfish species
• Characterization of cell lines
• Identification of genes that produce commercially important bioactive compounds
• Functional characterization of the toxins from marine organisms
• Genetically modified organisms to combat marine pollution
• Large scale production of novel proteins and pharmaceuticals through rDNA
technology
• Transgenic fishes for commercially important traits
• Cryopreservation of fish gametes
• Production of all male population
• Molecular tools for disease diagnosis
• RNAi therapy to combat viral diseases of fin fish and shellfish

114
• Identification of genes responsible for cancer cell proliferation
• Functional analysis of genes by creating knock-outs
• Development of transgenic fish for various purposes
• Site directed and transposon mediated mutagenesis to create mutant lines
• Development of tissue specific cell expression systems
• Genetically engineered microorganisms for recombinant protein production
• Design of viral vectors for efficient gene delivery
• Expression of antigenic proteins
• IPR issues related to GMOs
• Analysis of biosafety laws in different countries
• Identification of genes up/down regulated at specific stimulus
• Development of BAC/cosmid libraries
• Functional characterization of genes involved in specific pathways
• Identification of novel proteins by proteomics tools
• RNAi technology in viral disease management
• Functional characterization of specific genes by siRNA based silencing
• Development of delivery strategies for RNAi based therapy

115
 FISH GENETICS AND BREEDING
Course Structure - at a Glance

CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS

FGB 501* PRINCIPLES OF GENETICS AND BREEDING 2+1
FGB 502* POPULATION GENETICS 2+1
FGB 503* QUANTITATIVE GENETICS 2+1
FGB 504* PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION AND SELECTION METHODS 2+1
FGB 505 FISH BREEDING 2+1
FGB 506 FISH GENETIC RESOURCES AND CONSERVATION 2+1
FGB 507# MOLECULAR AND IMMUNOGENETICS 1+1
FGB 508 MOLECULAR GENETICS 1+1
FGB 509 CYTOGENETICS 1+1
FGB 510# BIOINFORMATICS 1+1
FGB 511 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN FISH GENETICS 1+1
FGB 512# CELL AND TISSUE CULTURE 1+1

FGB 591 MASTER’S SEMINAR 1+0

FGB 599 MASTER’S RESEARCH 20

FGB 601** ADVANCES IN FISH BREEDING 2+1

FGB 602** SELECTION INDEX METHODOLOGIES 2+1
FGB 603** APPLICATION OF GENETICS IN COMMERCIAL
2+1
AQUACULTURE
FGB 604 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY IN FISH GENETICS 1+1
FGB 605 ADVANCES IN CYTOGENETICS 2+1
FGB 606 MOLECULAR BREEDING 2+1
FGB 607 TRANSGENIC PRODUCTION AND GMOS 1+1
FGB 608 LINEAR MODELS IN FISH GENETICS 2+1

FGB 691 DOCTORAL SEMINAR I 1+0

FGB 692 DOCTORAL SEMINAR II 1+0

FGB 699 DOCTORAL RESEARCH 45

* Compulsory for Master’s programme; ** Compulsory for Doctoral programme
# FGB 507, FGB 510 and FGB 512 cross listed with Fish Biotechnology FBT 505, FBT 506 and
FBT 507 respectively

116
 FISH GENETICS AND BREEDING
Course Contents
FGB 501 PRINCIPLES OF GENETICS AND BREEDING 2+1
Objective
To understand the basic principles of genetics and breeding and their
application to fisheries management and aquaculture.
Theory
UNIT I
Historical development of genetics and physical basis of heredity;
Mendelian principles: scope, limitation, probability of Mendelian
inheritance; Modifications to Mendelian ratios.
UNIT II
Genetic variation: Causes and measurement; Chromosome theory of
inheritance: genetic basis of determination of sex.
UNIT III
Chromosome manipulation: Ploidy induction, sex reversal, gynogenesis
and androgenesis; Multiple alleles.
UNIT IV
Linkage and crossing over, recombination, interference.
UNIT V
Modern concept of gene; DNA as genetic material, genetic code and
protein synthesis, transfer and regulation of genetic information.
UNIT VI
Pleiotropy; Penetrance; Gene and genotypic frequency and factors affecting
them, application of selection for performance improvement.
UNIT VII
Mutation: natural and induced, mutagens fate of mutant allele in the
population; Cross breeding and genetic drift.
Practical
Exercises on Mendelian laws, multiple alleles and epistasis; Practical
demonstration of chromosome manipulations, Linkage and crossing over,
ploidy induction; Induction of gynogenesis and androgenesis; Sex reversal.
Suggested Readings
Kirpichnikov VS. 1981. Genetic Basis of Fish Selection. Springer-Verlag.
Lakra WS, Abidi SAH, Mukherjee SC & Ayyappan S. 2004. Fisheries
Biotechnology. Narendra Publ. House.
Lutz CG. 2003. Practical Genetics for Aquaculture. Wiley-Blackwell.
Lynch M & Walsh B. 1997. Genetics and Analysis of Quantitative Traits.
Sinauer, Sunderland.
Purdom CE. 1993. Genetics and Fish Breeding. Chapman & Hall.
Snustad DP & Simmons MJ. 1999. Principles of Genetics. 2nd Ed. John
Wiley & Sons.
Stansfield WD. 1991. Theory and Problems of Genetics. McGraw-Hill.
Tave D. 1993. Genetics for Fish Hatchery Managers. 2nd Ed. Chapman &
Hall.
FGB 502 POPULATION GENETICS 2+1
Objective
Understanding the concepts of population and its structure for fisheries
management and aquaculture.

117
 Theory
UNIT I
Genetics of population: Individual vs. population, genetic structure of
random mating populations.
UNIT II
Hardy Weinberg principles: Test of equilibrium, application and properties
of equilibrium populations; Change in gene frequency under migration,
mutation and selection; Effect of small population on gene frequency.
UNIT III
Estimation of HW principle/equilibrium using various population genetic
tools: phenotypic, protein, and DNA markers.
UNIT IV
Coefficient of genetic differentiation – FST, RST, QST, GST - their relative
merits and demerits, Genetic similarity and distance.
UNIT V
Genetic bottleneck and concept of Mutation drift equilibrium; Null alleles;
Theory of path coefficients and analysis.
UNIT VI
Basis of relationships: Independent and correlated causes; Inbreeding:
types, methods of estimation and consequences; Genetic drift; Effective
population size.
Practical
Exercises on various statistical procedures with emphasis on non-
parametric distributions; Estimation of gene and genotype frequencies;
Estimation of effect of mutation, migration and selection on equilibrium;
Equilibrium in sex linked genes; Estimation of effective population size,
rate of inbreeding, inbreeding co-efficient, path coefficient; Building of
pedigree files; Statistical analysis in relation to genetic stock structure
analysis with dominant and co-dominant markers; Type I and Type II
markers, protein, mtDNA and nuclear DNA markers, EST markers.
Suggested Readings
Doolittle DP. 1987. Population Genetics: Basic Principles. Springer-
Verlag.
Falconer DS & Markay TFC. 1996. An Introduction to Quantitative
Genetics. 4th Ed. Addison Wesley Longman.
Hartl D. 1988. A Primer in Population Genetics. Sunderland.
Hartl D & Clarke AG. 2007. Principles of Population Genetics. 4th Ed.
Sunderland.
Li CC. 1955. Population Genetics. University of Chicago Press.
Pirchner F. 1983. Population Genetics in Animal Breeding. Plenum Press.

FGB 503 QUANTITATIVE GENETICS 2+1

Objective
Understanding the concepts of quantitative genetics and its applications.
Theory
UNIT I
Quantitative genetics: Scope and applications; Polygenes and major genes;
Polygenic segregation and linkage.

118
 UNIT II
Quantitative and qualitative traits: Mode of inheritance and continuous
variation; Components of phenotypic value: population mean, genotypic
value, average effect of gene and gene substitution.
UNIT III
Breeding value: Dominance and interaction deviations; Components of
variation: additive and non additive interaction; Biometrical relationship
among relatives.
UNIT IV
Genetic parameters: Introduction, repeatability, heritability and genetic,
phenotypic and environment correlations.
UNIT V
Selection: Effect on population structure, intensity of selection, response to
selection, methods of selection; Genetic gain and correlated response;
Utilisation of non-addtive genetic variance.
UNIT VI
Heterosis: Theories and estimation; Maternal effects; Diallele crossing;
General and specific combining ability; Recurrent and reciprocal recurrent
selection; Scale effects and their estimation; Progeny testing.
Practical
Properties of Variance, Covariance, Correlation and regression; ANOVA in
genetic parameter estimation; Analysis of genetic variance; Estimation of
heritability by half-sib, full-sib and mid-parent analyses; Repeatability and
their accuracies; Estimation of genetic gain and their relative efficiencies;
Procedures for estimating breeding values; Analysis of diallele crossing.
Suggested Readings
Doolittle DP. 1987. Population Genetics: Basic Principles. Springer-
Verlag.
Falconer DS & Markay TFC. 1996. An Introduction to Quantitative
Genetics. 4th Ed. Addison Wesley Longman.
Li CC. 1955. Population Genetics. University of Chicago Press.
Lynch M & Walsh B. 1997. Genetics and Analysis of Quantitative Traits.
Sinauer, Sunderland.
Pirchner F. 1983. Population Genetics in Animal Breeding. Plenum Press.
Turner HN & Young SSY. 1969. Quantitative Genetics in Sheep Breeding.
Cornell University Press.

FGB 504 PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION AND SELECTION 2+1

METHODS
Objective
To learn the application of genetic tools for genetic improvement of aquatic
species.
Theory
UNIT I
Selection: Scope, application, role of genetics in fish selection and
breeding; National and International scenario of selective breeding
programmes in fish.
UNIT II
Selection: Basis of selection, genetic gain; Response to selection and
factors affecting response; Accuracy of selection; Selection limits;

119
 Renewed selection gain; Bidirectional selection; Aids to selection; Methods
of selection; QTL and MAS.
UNIT III
Construction of selection indices; Sire and dam evaluation; Realized
heritability, repeatability and genetic correlations.
UNIT IV
Mating systems and genetic consequences; Inbreeding depression: causes
and methods to overcome; Selection for threshold characters; Small stock
and inbreeding effects; Out breeding: crossbreeding, utilization of heterotic
effects.
UNIT V
Application of genetic parameter information in formulation of breeding
plans; Stock improvement plans; Development of new strains/synthetic
population; Crossbreeding and hybridization.
UNIT VI
Selection and mating designs for select traits: growth, disease resistance,
color enhancement, fin characters,; Application of markers in selection
programmes, status and their relevance.
UNIT VII
Development of breeding plans for different population sizes and
environments; Trends in fish breeding research. Domestication and
inadvertent selection; Genotype x Environment interaction and its role in
fish/shellfish breeding.
Practical
Estimation of genetic parameters; and construction of selection indices;
Estimation of genetic, phenotypic and environmental correlations; Analysis
of GCA and SCA; Estimation of heterosis and inbreeding depression;
Estimation of G X E interaction; Designing and conducting the challenge
test for disease resistance. Selection: basis of selection, genetic gain;
Response to selection and factors affecting response; Accuracy of selection;
Selection limits; Renewed selection gain; Bidirectional selection; Aids to
selection; Methods of selection; QTL and MAS.
Suggested Readings
Cameron ND. 1997. Selection Indices and Prediction of Genetic Merit in
Animal Breeding. CABI.
Doolittle DP. 1987. Population Genetics: Basic Principles. Springer-
Verlag.
Falconer DS & Markay TFC. 1996. An Introduction to Quantitative
Genetics. 4th Ed. Addison Wesley Longman.
Li CC. 1955. Population Genetics. University of Chicago Press.
Lynch M & Walsh B. 1997 Genetics and Analysis of Quantitative Traits.
Sinauer, Sunderland.
Pirchner F. 1983. Population Genetics in Animal Breeding. Plenum Press.
Turner HN & Young SSY. 1969. Quantitative Genetics in Sheep Breeding.
Cornell University Press.

FGB 505 FISH BREEDING 2+1

Objective
To learn the applications of genetic techniques for stock improvement.

120
 Theory
UNIT I
Historical development of fish breeding and domestication; Current status
of aquaculture in world and India; Tagging and maintaining breeding
records.
UNIT II
Performance: Growth, disease resistance, productive and reproductive traits
and their inheritance; Study of growth curves and their components;
Influence of non-genetic factors on growth.
UNIT III
Endocrine control of reproduction; Synchronization of spawning.
UNIT IV
Effect of breeding programme on genetic diversity of farmed animals;
Present status of breeding, cross breeding in aquaculture; Broodstock
management; Inbreeding depression and heterosis in various economic
characters; Role of Breeders’ associations in national breeding
programmes.
UNIT V
National breeding policy; Economic analyses of national breeding
programmes.
UNIT VI
Reproductive cycle, sex determination, age of maturity, hormone induced
ovulation; Gonad developmental stages in fin/shellfish and levels of
hormonal intervention; Seed quality and fish seed certification; Biosecurity.
Practical
Tagging methods; Construction of growth curves; Standardization of the
performance records for genetic parameters estimations, Record keeping of
stock; Breeding plan and design of breeding programme from successful
case studies; Morphometric analysis; Practicals on synchronization of
spawning.
Suggested Readings
Hoar WS & Randall DJ.1988. Fish Physiology. Academic Press.
Kinghorn BP. 1981. Quantitative Genetics in Fish Breeding. University of
Edinburgh.
Kshirsagar MA & Smith WB. 1995 .Growth Curves. CRC Press.
Purdom CE. 1993. Genetics and Fish Breeding. Chapman & Hall.
Thomas PC, Rath SC & Mohapatra KD. 2003. Breeding and Seed
Production of Finfish and Shellfish. Daya Publ. House.
Weatherely AH & Gill HS. 1988. The Biology of Fish Growth. Blackwell
Synergy.

FGB 506 FISH GENETIC RESOURCES AND 2+1

CONSERVATION
Objective
To impart knowledge on application of genetic principles in conservation
and management of aquatic resources.
Theory
UNIT I
Fish genetic resources: Survey and distribution; Genetic diversity -
importance, estimation and influencing factors.

121
 UNIT II
Characterization and evaluation: Taxonomical, biochemical and molecular
tools; Threatened aquatic species of India and world.
UNIT III
Conservation and preservation of aquatic species: Issues and strategies,
endangered species as per the guidelines of IUCN; Breeding strategies of
threatened species for restocking and live gene bank.
UNIT IV
Data bank and Gene bank: Concepts, objectives, resources, uses; Institutes
and Societies associated with conservation; Impact of inbreeding on genetic
diversity and conservation; Evolutionary potential and heritability.
UNIT V
Importance of mutation, migration and their interaction with selection in
conservation; Application of molecular genetic tools for management of
small population for conservation.
UNIT VI
Genetics and management of wild and captive populations; Genetic
management for reintroduction; In-situ and ex-situ conservation;
Cryopreservation of sperm, eggs and embryos.
UNIT VII
Effective population size and population structure; Factors threatening
indigenous species; IPR issues and patenting of genetic resources;
Regulations regarding introduction of exotic germplasm; Export import
rules and regulations on conservation of aquatic genetic resources; Fish
quarantine – status, procedures, scope and significance; Convention on
Biodiversity and Biodiversity Authority of India.
Practical
Tagging methods for population; Estimation of gene and genotypic
frequencies; Estimation of genetic diversity and relatedness using
molecular information; Application of molecular genetic markers for
estimation of effective population size, rate of inbreeding and genetic
bottleneck; Analysis of genetic variance in population; Morphometric
analysis of stocks; Milt quality analysis; Cryopreservation of milt.
Suggested Readings
Allendorf FW. 2007. Conservation and the Genetics of Populations.
Blackwell.
Cloud JG & Thorgaard GH. 1993. Genetic Conservation of Salmonid
Fishes. NATO ASI Series, Life Sciences, Springer.
Frankham R, Ballou JD & Briscoe DA. 2004. A Primer of Conservation
Genetics. Cambridge University Press.
Frankham R. 1995. Introduction to Conservation Genetics. Annual
Reviews of Genetics.
Hartl D. 1988. A Primer in Population Genetics. Sunderland.

FGB 507 MOLECULAR AND IMMUNOGENETICS 1+1

Objective
To aquaint the students with techniques used to estimate genetic variation
among individuals and populations for various purposes and DNA diversity
generated by somatic recombination of immunoglobulin genes.

122
 Theory
UNIT I
Biochemical markers: Allozyme polymorphism and its application in
estimating population genetic parameters.
UNIT II
Molecular markers: RAPD, RFLP, AFLP, EST, SNP, Minisatellites and
Microsatellites and application in population genetic analysis and gene
mapping, FISH – principle and application.
UNIT III
Analysis: Interpretation of gels and data analysis using various softwares.
DNA sequence polymorphism and related software for alignment and
analysis.
UNIT IV
Immunogenetics: Molecular biology of Ig synthesis, genetic basis of
antibody diversity, humoral B-cell immunoglobulins, T-cell receptors and
MHC.
Practical
Biochemical markers: Allozyme polymorphism. Molecular Markers:
RAPD, RFLP, AFLP, Minisatellites and [Link] of
gels and data analysis.
Suggested Readings
Caetano-Anolles G & Gresshoff PM. 1998. DNA Markers: Protocols,
Applications and Overviews. Wiley-VCH.
Pasteur N, Pasteur G, Bonhomme F, Catalan J & Britton-Davidian J. 1988.
Practical Isozyme Genetics. Ellis Horwood.
Sambrook J & Russel WD. 1989. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory
Manual. Vols. I-III. Cold Spring Harbor.

FGB 508 MOLECULAR GENETICS 1+1

Objective
To understand the basic concepts of molecular genetics
Theory
UNIT I
Gene structure of DNA, replication, Protein synthesis; Operon concept,
genetics of mitochondria and plasmids, transposons and intervening
sequences, minisatellites and macro satellites.
UNIT II
Mutations: Molecular mechanism of spontaneous and induced mutations,
site directed mutagenesis, recombination in bacteria, fungus and virus.
UNIT III
Recombination: Molecular mechanism of genetic recombination,
transduction, transformation and conjugation.
UNIT IV
Genetic code, mechanism of translation and its control, post translation
modification. Control of gene expression in prokaryotes and eukaryotes.
Practical
DNA isolation, Plasmid isolation, Gel electrophoresis and its type, AGE,
PAGE,SDS-PAGE, PCR, Cloning.

123
 Suggested Readings
Caetano-Anolles G & Gresshoff PM. 1998. DNA Markers: Protocols,
Applications and Overviews. Wiley-VCH.
Lehninger LA, Nelson DL & Cox MM. 2008. Principles of Biochemistry.
4th Ed. WH Freeman.
Lewin B. 2004. Genes VII. International Ed. John Wiley & Sons.
Pasteur N, Pasteur G, Bonhomne F, Catalan J & Britton–Davidian J. 1988.
Practical Isozyme Genetics. Ellis Horwood.
Sambrook J & Russel WD. 1989. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory
Manual. Vols. I-III. Cold Spring Harbor.
Stryer L, Berg JM & Tymocz KJL. 2004. Biochemistry. 5th Ed. WH
Freeman.

FGB 509 CYTOGENETICS 1+1

Objective
To understand chromosome as the basic unit of heredity
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction, historical background, importance, improved cytogenetic
techniques.
UNIT II
Chromosome theory of inheritance: chromosomal models and their ultra
structure; Chromosomal movements and position effect.
UNIT III
Sex determination and differentiation, sex chromatin and Lyon’s
hypothesis; Chromosome numbers in fish and karyotyping.
UNIT IV
Chromosomal aberrations: Genetic and evolutionary implications;
Chromosome banding techniques; FISH.
UNIT V
Cytogenetics and evolution; Genotoxicity assays (single cell
electrophoresis, MNT, SCE).
Practical
Preparation of chromosome spreads; Karyotyping; Banding techniques;
MNT, SCE, Comet Assay.
Suggested Readings
Lakra WS, Abidi SAH, Mukherjee SC & Ayyappan S. 2004. Fisheries
Biotechnology. Narendra Publ. House.
Pisano E. 2007. Fish Cytogenetics. Science Publ.
Reddy PVGK, Ayyappan S, Thampy DM & Krishna G. 2005. Fish
Genetics and Biotechnology. ICAR.
FGB 510 BIOINFORMATICS 1+1
Objective
To learn the application of information technology for the fish genetics
studies.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction to bioinformatics: history, definition, scope and applications;
Fields related to bioinformatics.

124
 UNIT II
Data base: mining tools, submission of DNA sequences; Sequence
alignment and database searching, similarity search, FASTA, BLAST.
UNIT III
Information networks: internet; Gene bank sequence database, EBI-net;
NCBI, Genome net.
UNIT IV
Genomics: genome diagnostics, genome projects, genome analysis.
UNIT V
Proteomics: protein information resources, primary and secondary protein
data bases, analysis packages, predictive methods, ESTs.
UNIT VI
Phylogenetic analysis; Comparative genome analysis; Microarray
bioinformatics.
Practical
Internet search: retrieving information from different data base like NCBI,
protein information sources; Preparation of data base; Use of genome
analysis packages: genetics data base; Searching by similarity;
Phylogenetic analysis; Accessing and submission to gene banks; BLAST,
sequence alignments, comparisons. Data base: mining tools, submission of
DNA sequences; Sequence alignment and database searching, similarity
search, FASTA, BLAST.
Suggested Readings
Attwood TK & Smith DJP. 1999. Introduction to Bioinformatics. Addison
Wesley Longman.
Baxevanis AD & Ouellettee BF. 2002. Bioinformatics, A Practical Guide
to the Analysis of Genes and Proteins. John Wiley & Sons.
Brown SM. 2000. Bioinformatics: A Biologist's Guide to Biocomputing and
the Internet. Eaton Publ.
Campbell MA & Heyer LJ. 2003. Discovering Genomics, Proteomics, and
Bioinformatics. Benjamin Cummings.
Lesk AM. 2008. Introduction to Bioinformatics. Oxford University Press.
Mount DW. 2001. Bioinformatics: Sequence and Genome Analysis. Cold
Spring Harbor Press.
Rashidi HH & Buehler LK. 2005. Bioinformatics Basics: Applications in
Biological Sciences and Medicine. CRC Press.

FGB 511 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN FISH GENETICS 1+1

Objective
To comprehend the use of software packages for genetic data analyses
Theory
UNIT I
File Transfer Protocols; Work stations; Application of spreadsheets in
maintaining fish breeding records; Fish breeding data bases.
UNIT II
Introduction to various computer packages used in genetic analyses: SAS,
AsREML, PEST, SelAction; Hendersons’ models in breeding experiments.

125
 UNIT III
Software for molecular genetics data analysis; Bioinformatics;
Bioinformatic applications and tools in fish genetics and breeding; 'R'
statistical package.
Practical
Data input, import, export, modification; Spread sheet in breeding data
management; Use of ML and Reml packages for various component
estimation; Estimation of genetic parameters using various statistical
packages like SAS, AsREML, PEST;, SelAction; Molecular data analysis
using softwares like GENEPOP.
Suggested Readings
Brown SM. 2000. Bioinformatics: A Biologist's Guide to Biocomputing and
the Internet. Eaton Publ.
Cody RP & Smith JF. 1997. Applied Statistics and SAS Programming
Language. Elsevier.
Delviche LD & Slaughter JS. 2003. The Little SAS Book- A Primer. 3rd Ed.
SAS Publ.
Dutkowski G & Gilmour A. 2005. AsReml Cook Book. Statistical Software
Package.
Littell RC, Milliken GA, Stroup WW & Wolfinger RD. 1996. SAS System
for Mixed Models. SAS Institute.
Lynch M & Walsh B. 1997. Genetics and Analysis of Quantitative Traits.
Sinauer, Sunderland.
Saxton AM. 2004. Genetic Analysis of Complex Traits Using SAS. SAS
Publ.

FGB 512 CELL AND TISSUE CULTURE 1+1

Objective
To impart knowledge on cell and tissue culture techniques and their
application in health management, gene banking and genetic
characterization.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: Structure and Organization of animal cell; Equipments and
materials for animal cell culture technology.
UNIT II
Cell lines and media: Primary and established cell line cultures; media
supplements – their metabolic functions; serum and protein free defined
media and their application.
UNIT III
Cell culture: Basic techniques of cell culture in vitro; development of
primary cultures, cell separation, maintenance of cell lines; biology of
cultured cells, transformation and differentiation of cell cultures.
UNIT IV
Characterization of cell lines: Measurement of viability and cytotoxicity
assays; measuring parameters of growth; karyotyping, isozyme assays,
cryopreservation, assessment of contaminants.
UNIT V
Cell cloning: Micromanipulation, cell transformation, application of fish
cell culture, scaling-up of cell culture.

126
 UNIT VI
Cell hybridization: Somatic cell fusion, hybridoma technology, Production
and Application of monoclonal antibodies.
Practical
Principles of sterile techniques and cell propagation; Preparation of
different cell culture media; Primary cell culture techniques; Establishing
cell lines: isolation, characterization identification of cell lines; Pure culture
techniques; Maintenance and preservation of cell lines; Propagation of cells
in suspension cultures; Hybridoma technology: strategy and techniques;
Production of monoclonal antibodies.
Suggested Readings
Barnes D & Mathur PJ. 1998. Methods in Cell Biology. Vol. 57. Animal
Cell Culture Methods. Academic Press.
Basega R. (Ed.). 1989. Cell Growth and Division: A Practical Approach.
IRL Press.
Butler M & Dawson M. (Ed.). 1992. Cell Culture. Bios Scientific Publ.
Clynes M. 1998. Animal Cell Culture Techniques. Springer.
Freshney I. 1994. Culture of Animal Cells: A Manual of Basic Techniques.
4th Ed. Wiley-Liss.
Harrison AM, Rae FI & Harris A. 1997. General Techniques of Cell
Culture. Cambridge University Press.
Lan FR. 1994. Culture of Animal Cells. 3rd Ed. Wiley-Liss.
Masters RW. 2000. Animal Cell Culture-Practical Approach. Oxford
University Press.

FGB 601 ADVANCES IN FISH BREEDING 2+1

Objective
To learn the recent advances and development of breeding plans.
Theory
UNIT I
Broodstock management; Controlled breeding and reproduction in
commercially important fish and shellfish species.
UNIT II
Endocrine control of reproduction; Artificial insemination in shrimp;
Synchronisation of spawning; Cryopreservation of gametes.
UNIT III
Estimation of heritability and repeatability; Phenotypic, genetic and
environmental correlations; Tagging and maintaining breeding records;
Growth curves and their components.
UNIT IV
Influence of non-genetic factors on growth; Factors influencing production
and reproductive traits; Crossbreeding and hybridization; Threshold
characters and their selection procedure.
UNIT V
Breeding plans to exploit additive and non-additive genetic variation;
Maternal influence and its estimation, genetic mechanisms in adaptation,
measurement and adaptability indices; G x E interaction.
UNIT VI
Consequences of inbreeding and management of genetic variation in fish
breeding programme.

127
 Practical
Heritability estimation; Correlation between different traits; Selection and
genetic gains; Inbreeding; Preservation of gametes; Synchronization of
spawning; The focus will be on critical review of contemporary applied
breeding programmes and journal articles - students are also expected to
prepare a term paper for submission at the end of the semester.
Suggested Readings
Doolittle DP. 1987. Population Genetics: Basic Principles. Springer-
Verlag.
Falconer DS & Markay TFC. 1996. An Introduction to Quantitative
Genetics. 4th Ed. Addison Wesley Longman.
Kshirsagar MA & Smith WB. 1995 .Growth Curves. CRC Press.
Li CC. 1955. Population Genetics. University of Chicago Press.
Pirchner F. 1983. Population Genetics in Animal Breeding. Plenum Press.
Thomas PC, Rath SC & Mohapatra KD. 2003. Breeding and Seed
Production of Finfish and Shellfish. Daya Publ. House.

FGB 602 SELECTION INDEX METHODOLOGIES 2+1

Objective
To impart knowledge on the efficiency of different selection methods.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: Past and present status of fish breeding.
UNIT II
Strain comparison; Factors affecting the rate of genetic improvement;
Performance testing.
UNIT III
Correction and standardization of animal breeding data; Simultaneous
prediction of breeding values for several animals; Recurrent and Recurrent
Reciprocal Selection.
UNIT IV
Prediction of breeding values and environmental effects; LS, BLUP, REML
methods, Multivariate Breeding Value Prediction.
UNIT V
Selection based on gene of known large effect: QTL and MAS; Breeding
values for binary traits; Selection and breeding for disease resistance and
survival analysis; Partial diallele analysis; Selection for single trait and
multiple traits.
Practical
Diallele crossing; Estimation of breeding values; Construction of selection
index; Least squares and BLUP methods for estimation of genetic and non
genetic parameters; Application of various computer software for genetic
analyses: SAS, AsREML, PEST, and SelAction; Estimation of genetic
parameter, heritability, building of pedigree information.
Suggested Readings
Cameron ND. 1997. Selection Indices and Prediction of Genetic Merit in
Animal Breeding. CABI.
Doolittle DP.1987. Population Genetics: Basic Principles. Springer-
Verlag.

128
 Falconer DS & Markay TFC. 1996. An Introduction to Quantitative
Genetics. 4th Ed. Addison Wesley Longman.
Li CC. 1955. Population Genetics. University of Chicago Press.
Lynch M & Walsh B. 1997. Genetics and Analysis of Quantitative Traits.
Sinauer, Sunderland.
Pirchner F. 1983. Population Genetics in Animal Breeding. Plenum Press.
Turner HN & Young SSY. 1969. Quantitative Genetics in Sheep Breeding.
Cornell University Press.

FGB 603 APPLICATION OF GENETICS IN COMMERCIAL 2+1

AQUACULTURE
Objective
To provide knowledge on genetic improvement programmes to critically
evaluate the impact on commercial aquaculture.
Theory
UNIT I
Evaluation of international genetic improvement programs like GIFT
Tilapia, Norwegian Salmon, Hungarian carp, Pacific White Shrimp L.
vannamei, etc.
UNIT II
Evaluation of national genetic improvement programs like Jayanti Rohu,
Common Carp, Tiger Shrimp P. monodon, etc.
UNIT III
Socio-economic impact, technological adoption, increased production.
UNIT IV
Environmental impact of different breeding programmes on indigenous
flora and fauna.
Practical
Developing the protocols for evaluating the various genetic improvement
programs and their impacts; Preparation of questionnaire to survey; Survey
on impact of the programme on farmers; Survey on impact of the
programme on the consumers.
Suggested Readings
Kirpichnikov VS. 1981. Genetic Basis of Fish Selection. Springer Verlag.
Lutz CG. 2003. Practical Genetics for Aquaculture. Wiley-Blackwell.
Lynch M & Walsh B. 1997. Genetics and Analysis of Quantitative Traits.
Sinauer, Sunderland.
Purdom CE. 1993. Genetics and Fish Breeding. Chapman & Hall

FGB 604 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY IN FISH GENETICS 1+1

Objective
To understand integration of the methodologies under various genetic
approaches.
Theory
UNIT I
Probability, binomial distribution, multinomial distribution, normal
distribution, chi square distribution, student’s t distribution, and f
distribution.

129
 UNIT II
Testing of genetic hypothesis, test of hypothesis, test for significance, test
for significance ratio, detection and estimation of linkage.
UNIT III
Path coefficient and calculation of inbreeding coefficient and relationship,
analysis of variance, one way estimation of mean and variance, multiple
comparison among means designed contrast, all pair with comparison,
comparison with control partition of variance.
UNIT IV
Hierarchical classification.
UNIT V
Component of variance, multi-invested models, factorial experiment-
mixed classification single covariate in experimental design; Analysis of
multivariate data and non orthogonal data.
UNIT VI
Basic matrix algebra, least square procedure, multiple, regression and
correlation.
Practical
Problems in probability, use of chi square, t distribution and f distribution
in test statistics, problems in path coefficient and calculation of inbreeding
coefficient, ANOVA, single and multiple ways.
Suggested Readings
Biradar RS. 2002. Course Manual on Fisheries Statistics. 2nd Ed. CIFE,
Mumbai.
Keller G. 2001. Applied Statistics with Microsoft Excel. Duxbury.
Kothari CR. 1998. Research Methodology. 2nd Ed. Vishwa Prakashan.
Levin RL & Rubin DS. 1983. Statistics for Management. Prentice-Hall of
India.
Panse VG & Sukhatme PV. 1978. Statistical Methods for Agricultural
Workers. ICAR.
Siegel, S & Castellan NJ Jr. 1988. Non Parametric Statistical Methods.
John Wiley & Sons.
FGB 605 ADVANCES IN CYTOGENETICS 2+1
Objective
To understand the advances in cytogenetics and their applications in
genetic programmes.
Theory
UNIT I
Chromosomal theory of sex determination, sex differentiation; Diploid
number of chromosome in finfish and shellfish; Karyotyping.
UNIT II
Chromosomal aberrations: inherited and induced, structural and numerical;
In-vitro techniques for chromosome handling.
UNIT III
Chromosome banding: Advanced chromosome banding including
Restriction Enzyme banding, fluorescent banding, CMAS3 staining,
replication banding; FISH.
UNIT IV
Genotoxicity assays including Sister chromatid exchanges, MNT, commet
assay.

130
 UNIT V
Cytogenetics and fish evolution; Cytoplasmic inheritance; Cytogentic
application in fish breeding programmes.
Practical
Preparation of chromosome spreads using in-vivo and in-vitro methods;
Karyotyping; Banding methods: G, C NOR, Restriction Enzyme banding;
Fluorescent banding, CMAS3 staining, replication banding; Screening the
brooders for cytogenetic defects.
Suggested Readings
Lakra WS, Abidi SAH, Mukherjee SC & Ayyappan S. 2004. Fisheries
Biotechnology. Narendra Publ. House.
McGregor HC & Varley JM. [Link] with Animal Chromosomes.
John Wiley & Sons.
Pisano E. 2007. Fish Cytogenetics. Science Publ.
Sharma AK & Sharma A. 1980. Chromosome Techniques: Theory and
Practice. Butterworths.
Sumner AT. 1990. Chromosome Banding. Unwin Hyman.

FGB 606 MOLECULAR BREEDING 2+1

Objective
To learn the advances in molecular breeding and their incorporation in
genetic improvement programmes.
Theory
UNIT I
Exploitation of non additive genetic variance; Breeding for disease
resistance; Survival analysis.
UNIT II
Application of markers in fish breeding; Identification of QTLs and MAS.
UNIT III
Cryopreservation of gametes and its applications.
UNIT IV
Chromosome and gene manipulation; Cross breeding and hybridization;
Maintenance of variation; Radiation hazards.
UNIT V
Genetic evaluation of exotics and quarantine procedures; Patenting
methods, IPR issues related to fish genetic innovations.
Practical
Identification of QTLs; Gene mapping; molecular identification of stock;
Radiation hazards and effect on genetic compoments, pedigree assigning
using molecular data, estimation of genetic parameters using molecular
data.
Suggested Readings
Fuller BJ, Benson EE & Lane N. 2004. Life in the Frozen State. CRC
Press.
Lynch M & Walsh B. 1997. Genetics and Analysis of Quantitative Traits.
Sinauer, Sunderland.
Nair PR. 2008. Biotechnology and Genetics in Fisheries and Aquaculture.
Dominant Publ.
Weller JI. 2001. Quantitative Trait Loci Analysis in Animals. CABI.

131
FGB 607 TRANSGENICS PRODUCTION AND GMOs 1+1
Objective
To acquaint with the current status in development of transgenics and their
potential commercialisation.
Theory
UNIT I
Principles of transgenic technology and transgenic production, Its
application to fisheries; Risk assessment; GMOs and biosafety regulations,
gene therapy, designer ornamental fish strains; Biotechnological
interventions in fish breeding.
UNIT II
Ethical Issues in GMOs: Cartigan protocol, National regulations on GMOs,
Impact assessment of GMOs, transgenic containment.
Practical
Gene transfer experiments; Northern blotting, Southern blotting for
integration and expression of transgene; Demonstration of the
electropration, microinjection, expression of the marker genes.

Suggested Readings
Celis JE. 1998. Cell Biology: A Laboratory Handbook. Academic Press.
Pinkert CA. 1994. Transgenic Animal Technology: A Laboratory
Handbook. Academic Press.
Stickney RR. 2005. Aquaculture: An Introductory Text. CABI.

FGB 608 LINEAR MODELS IN FISH GENETICS 2+1

Objective
To learn the application of linear models in fish breeding data.
Theory
UNIT I
Matrix operations: Determinants, inverse of matrix, linear equations, the
matrix algebra of regression analysis.
UNIT II
Analysis of non-orthogonal and multivariate data.
UNIT III
Linear models: Fixed effects, random effects; Mixed models: their
application in estimation of genetic parameters; Model building and
simulations.
Practical
Matrix operation, matrix inversion, matrix algebra of regression analysis;
Analysis of non orthogonal and multivariate data; Least Square analysis in
the one way classification; One way classification with regression and
covariance; Two way classification with and without interactions; Multiple
and nested classification; Maximum likelihood estimation of genetic
parameters under linear and non linear models; Use of various statistical
packages for genetic parameter estimations: SAS, REML, PEST,
SelAction.
Suggested Readings
Dutkowski G & Gilmour A. 2005. AsReml Cook Book. Statistical Software
Package.

132
Littell RC, Milliken GA, Stroup WW & Wolfinger RD. 1996. SAS System
for Mixed Models. SAS Institute.
Lynch M & Walsh B. 1997. Genetics and Analysis of Quantitative Traits.
Sinauer, Sunderland.
Saxton AM. 2004. Genetic Analysis of Complex Traits Using SAS. SAS
Publ.

133
 FISH GENETICS AND BREEDING
List of Journals

• Acta Cytologica
• Advances in Genetics Incorporating Molecular Genetic Medicine
• Animal Genetic Resource Information
• Animal Genetics
• Annual Review of Genetics
• Bioinformatics
• Biological Conservation
• BMC Bioinformatics
• BMC Molecular Biology
• Breeding Science
• Briefings in Bioinformatics
• Briefings in Functional Genomics and Proteomics
• Cancer Genetics and Cytogenetics
• Conservation Biology
• Conservation Genetics
• Cytogenetics
• In Silico Biology
• Indian Journal of Agricultural Statistics
• Indian Journal of Cytology and Genetics
• Indian Journal of Genetics and Plant Breeding
• Indian Journal of Statistics
• Journal of Animal Breed and Genetics
• Journal of Animal Science
• Journal of Applied Statistics
• Journal of Bio-Chemistry and Molecular Biology
• Journal of Computational and Graphical Statistics
• Journal of Genetics
• Journal of Heredity
• Journal of Molecular Biology
• Journal of Official Statistics
• Journal of Statistical Software
• Journal of Statistics Education
• Journal of Tissue Culture Methods
• Molecular Cytogenetics
• Molecular and Cellular Biology

Suggested Broad Areas for Master’s and Doctoral Research

• Cryopreservation of gametes of species of commercial importance

• Estimation of gene and genotype frequencies using various population genetic
tools (markers)
• Estimation of effective population size, inbreeding accumulation rate in a breeding
population

134
• Genetic stock structure analysis; genetic variability studies of species of
commercial importance
• Estimation of genetic parameters in species of commercial importance
• Developing breeding plans for different commercial fish and prawn species
• Estimation of genetic parameters in species of commercial importance
• Estimation of heterosis and Inbreeding depression in breeding population
• Construction of growth curves for different commercial fish and prawn species
• Developing breeding plans for different commercial fish and prawn species
• Cryopreservation of gametes of species of commercial importance
• Application of molecular genetic markers for estimation of effective population
size, rate of inbreeding
• Estimation of genetic diversity and relatedness using molecular information
• Morphometric analysis of stocks
• Milt quality analysis and cryopreservation of milt
• Estimation of linkage disequilibrium using molecular genetic data
• Application of molecular genetic markers for estimation of effective population
size, rate of inbreeding
• Estimation of genetic diversity and relatedness using molecular information
• QTL Analysis and application in selective breeding
• Estimation of linkage disequilibrium using molecular genetic data
• Application of molecular genetic markers for estimation of effective population
size, rate of inbreeding
• Estimation of genetic diversity and relatedness using molecular information
• QTL Analysis and application in selective breeding
• Chromosome mapping for different commercial fish and prawn species
• Karyotyping and chromosome spread preparation for different commercial fish and
prawn species
• Estimation of genetic parameters using various statistical packages like SAS,
AsREML, PEST
• Molecular data analysis using softwares like GENEPOP
• Establishing cell lines
• Construction of growth curves for different commercial fish and prawn species
• Estimation of genetic and non-genetic parameters
• Developing breeding plans for different commercial fish and prawn species
• Cryopreservation of gametes of species of commercial importance
• Developing breeding plans for different commercial fish and prawn species
• Estimation of genetic parameters in species of commercial importance
• Estimation of genotype-environment Interaction
• Estimation of heterosis and Inbreeding depression in breeding population
• Socio-economic impact studies for genetically improved varieties
• Evaluation of International genetic improvement programmes
• Chromosome mapping for different commercial fish and prawn species
• Karyotyping and chromosome spread preparation for different commercial fish and
prawn species
• Pedigree assigning using molecular data
• Estimation of genetic parameters using molecular data
• Estimation of genetic and non-genetic parameters using various statistical packages
like SAS, AsREML, PEST

135
 FISH NUTRITION AND FEED TECHNOLOGY
Course Structure - at a Glance
 
CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS
FNB 501* FISH NUTRITION 2+1
FNB 502*# FISH BIOCHEMISTRY 2+1
FNB 503* FEED FORMULATION AND FEED TECHNOLOGY 2+1
FNB 504* NUTRITIONAL ENERGETICS 2+1
FNB 505 NUTRITIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND FEEDING 1+1
MANAGEMENT
FNB 506 FEED INGREDIENTS AND ADDITIVES 1+1
FNB 507 NUTRITION AND FEEDING OF CRUSTACEANS 1+1
FNB 508 DIGESTIVE PHYSIOLOGY 1+1
FNB 509 PROTEIN NUTRITION 1+1
FNB 510 LIPID NUTRITION 1+1
FNB 511 CARBOHYDRATE NUTRITION 1+1
FNB 512 VITAMIN AND MINERAL NUTRITION 1+1

FNB 591 MASTER’S SEMINAR 1+0

FNB 599 MASTER’S RESEARCH 20

FNB 601** BIOENERGETICS 2+1

FNB 602** ADVANCES IN FEED TECHNOLOGY 2+1
FNB 603** LARVAL AND BROOD STOCK NUTRITION 2+1
FNB 604 ADVANCES IN NUTRITION 1+1
FNB 605 BIOCHEMICAL ENDOCRINOLOGY 1+1
FNB 606 NUTRIGENOMICS 1+1
FNB 607 NUTRACEUTICALS 1+1
FNB 608 FEED INTAKE AND FEEDING BEHAVIOUR 1+1

FNB 691 DOCTORAL SEMINAR I 1+0

FNB 692 DOCTORAL SEMINAR II 1+0

FNB 699 DOCTORAL RESEARCH 45

* Compulsory for Master’s programme; ** Compulsory for Doctoral programme
# FNB 502 cross listed with Fish Physiology and Biochemistry FPB 503
 

136
 FISH NUTRITION AND FEED TECHNOLOGY
Course Contents

FNB 501 FISH NUTRITION 2+1

Objective
To understand the basic principles of fish nutrition and the function of
individual nutrients.
To create awareness on feed additives in aquafeed.
Theory
UNIT I
Protein nutrition of fish and shellfish: Introduction, function and
metabolism of protein, amino acids and their classification, specific
function, protein deficiency symptoms, evaluation criteria of dietary
protein.
UNIT II
Lipid nutrition: Introduction, function, metabolism, Fatty acids and their
classification, specific functions of essential fatty acids, deficiency
symptoms, evaluation of lipid quality.
UNIT III
Carbohydrate nutrition: Introduction, function, metabolism, improvement
of carbohydrate utilization by fish.
UNIT IV
Vitamin and mineral nutrition: Introduction, classification, source,
functions, deficiency symptoms.
UNIT V
Energy nutrition: Definition, energetics, expression of energy value of feed
(gross energy, digestible energy, metabolizable energy, net energy),
partitioning of energy, protein energy ratio.
UNIT VI
Larval nutrition: Importance of live feed and artificial feed, Different types
of feed available for larvae, constraints and scope; Larval gut morphology
and mode of nutrition.
UNIT VII
Brood stock nutrition: Nutrients required for reproduction, egg and sperm
quality.
UNIT VIII
Feed additives: Classification, function, and specific use for economic and
quality fish and shellfish production.
Practical
Identification of common feed ingredients; Proximate analysis: Moisture,
Crude Protein, Crude Lipid, Ash, Acid insoluble ash, Nitrogen free extract
of feed fish tissue, Fatty acid analysis, Calcium, Phosphorus content of
feed.
Suggested Readings
ADCP (Aquaculture Development and Co-ordination Programme). 1980.
Fish Feed Technology. ADCP/REP/80/11. FAO, Rome.
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.

137
 Guillame J, Kaushik S, Berqot P & Metallier R. 2001. Nutrition and
Feeding of Fish and Crustaceans. Springer Praxis.
Halver JE. 1989. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Tiews KT. 1979. Finfish Nutrition and Fishfeed Technology.
Vols. I, II. Heenemann.
Hepher B. 1988. Nutrition of Pond Fishes. Cambridge University Press.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.

FNB 502 FISH BIOCHEMISTRY 2+1

Objective
To acquaint students with the biochemical functions of different
biomolecules.
Theory
UNIT I
Carbohydrates: Definition, classification and biological significance;
Chemical reactions; stereoisomerisms and mutarotation, structure and
properties of monosaccharides, disaccharides, polysaccharides and
mucopolysaccharides.
UNIT II
Proteins: Definition, classification, biological significance; Structure:
primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary; denaturation. Amino acids:
Structure, classification, acid-base properties, stereoisomerisms and
chemical reactions.
UNIT III
Lipids: Definition, classification, biological significance. Fatty acids:
structure, properties and chemical reactions; steroids; saponification and
iodine number, peroxide value of fats. Phospholipids: Structure, properties
and functions; prostaglandins, PUFA (polyunsaturated fatty acids).
UNIT IV
Nucleic acids: Structure, functions and properties. Structure of purines,
pyrimidine; DNA and RNA; different type of DNA and RNA, Watson and
Crick model of DNA.
Practical
Extraction and purification of tissue proteins and lipids. Isolation,
purification and characterization of nucleic acids from tissue extract.
Qualitative and quantitative analysis of proteins, lipids, carbohydrates and
nucleic acids. Quantitative estimation of biomolecules by
spectrophotometric methods.
Suggested Readings
Berg JM, Tymoczko JL & Stryer L. 2002. Biochemistry. WH Freeman.
Houlihan DF, Carter CG, McCarthy ID & Hochachka PW. 1995.
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology of Fishes. Elsevier.
Murray RK, Granner DK, Mayes PA & Rodwell VW. 2000. Harper’s
Biochemistry. Appleton & Lange.
Nelson DL & Cox MM. 2005. Principles of Biochemistry. WH Freeman.
Voet D, Voet JG & Pratt CW. 2006. Fundamentals of Biochemistry. John
Wiley & Sons.

138
FNB 503 FEED FORMULATION AND FEED TECHNOLOGY 2+1
Objective
To learn basic concepts of feed formulation and different feed processing
techniques.
Theory
UNIT I
Feed formulation: General principles, different steps of feed formulation,
classification of feed ingredients; Energy and protein sources; Evaluation of
ingredient quality.
UNIT II
Methods of feed formulation - Pearson’s method, quadratic equation, linear
programming, limitations.
UNIT III
Types of feed: Dry (pellets, flakes, powdered, micro-encapsulated, micro-
bound and micro-coated diets) and non-dry.
UNIT IV
Feed manufacturing units and processes: Pulverizer, grinder, mixer,
pelletizer, crumbler, drier, Extruder/ Expander, Vacuum coater, fat sprayer.
UNIT V
Feed storage: Hydro-stability of feed and their storage; Prevention of
spoilage from rancidity, fungus and associated toxins; Fish disease vectors
in feed and quality control; Feed value in relation to processing; Use of
natural and synthetic carotenoids: Feed additives.
UNIT VI
Computerized least cost formula and criterions for aquafeed formulation;
Enzyme based fish feeds and their role.
UNIT VII
Feed economics and evaluation criteria: FCR, PER, NPU, EAAI, chemical
score, biological value. Aqua feed industries in India.
Practical
Feed formulation exercise; Processing of the ingredients, formulation and
preparation of isocaloric and isonitrogenous feeds; Preparation of feeds
with various binders in order to determine their hydro-stability; Estimation
of trypsin inhibitors, Tannin and HCN in the feed ingredients;
Determination of vitamin C and carotenoids in feeds; Preparation of
mineral and vitamin premix.
Suggested Readings
ADCP (Aquaculture Development and Co-ordination Programme). 1980.
Fish Feed Technology. ADCP/REP/80/11. FAO.
D’ Abramo LR, Conklin DE & Akiyama DM. 1977. Crustacean Nutrition:
Advances in Aquaculture. Vol. VI. World Aquaculture Society, Los
Angeles.
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Guillame J, Kaushik S, Berqot P & Metallier R. 2001. Nutrition and
Feeding of Fish and Crustaceans. Springer Praxis.
Halver JE & Tiews KT. 1979. Finfish Nutrition and Fishfeed Technology.
Vols. I, II. Heenemann.
Halver JE. 1989. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.

139
 Muir JF & Robert D. (Eds.). 1968. Recent Advances in Aquaculture. Vol.
II. Blackwell.
New MB. 1987. Feed and Feeding of Fish and Shrimp. A Manual on the
Preparation and Preservation of Compound Feeds for Shrimp and
Fish in Aquaculture. ADCP/REP/87/26 FAO.

FNB 504 NUTRITIONAL ENERGETICS 2+1

Objective
To learn metabolism of different macromolecules and interlinking of
different energy producing pathways.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction to nutritional energetics: Energy budget equation, energy flow
in fish and shellfish; Gross energy, digestible energy, metabolizable energy,
net energy, heat increment; Factors influencing ingestion, absorption,
excretion, respiration, and metabolism and their effect.
UNIT II
Energy requirement: Energy requirement of fish and factors influencing it;
Estimation of energy content of feed components based on chemicals
composition, indirect and direct methods.
UNIT III
Production and growth : Relationship between feeding and growth; energy
exchange in biological system; Methodology for estimating maintenance
requirement; growth and reproduction; limitation and prospective of
bioenergetics.
UNIT IV
Carbohydrate metabolism: Glycolysis - overview, key structures and
reactions, control of glycolysis; TCA cycle: different steps, stoichiometry
and control of cycle; Alternate pathways of carbohydrate metabolism:
pentose phosphate pathway and gluconeogenesis, glycogen metabolism,
regulation of blood glucose.
UNIT V
Lipid metabolism: Fatty acid oxidation and biosynthesis, Generation of
acetyl CoA, NADH/NADPH and FADH2, oxidation of unsaturated fatty
acids; control of fatty acid metabolism, oxidative phosphorylation: redox
potential, respiratory chain and its enzyme system, ATP synthesis.
UNIT VI
Protein and amino acid metabolism: Oxidative degradation of amino acids,
transmission and deamination, ammonia carriers and excretion;
biosynthesis of non-essential amino acids.
UNIT VII
Intermediary metabolism: Integration of carbohydrate, lipid and protein
metabolism.
Practical
Estimation of gross and digestive energy of feed and feed ingredients;
Estimation of digestibility of nutrients, Bomb- calorimetry; Energy budget
equation based on experiential data supplied; Determination of standard
metabolism in fish; End product estimation of aerobic and anaerobic
carbohydrates metabolism; Enzyme assay of LDH, aminotransferases, acid
phospatase, protease and nucleases; Fatty acid analysis of fish lipids.

140
 Suggested Readings
Berg JM, Tymoczko JL & Stryer L. 2002. Biochemistry. WH Freeman.
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Devlin TM. 1997. Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical Correlations.
Wiley-Liss.
Evans DH & Claiborne JB. 2006. The Physiology of Fishes. CRC Press.
Florkin M & Mason HS. 1963. Comparative Biochemistry. Academic
Press.
Halver J & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Houlihan D, Boujard T & Jobling M. 2001. Food Intake in Fish. Blackwell.
Jobling M. 1994. Fish Bioenergetics. Chapman & Hall.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.
Murray RK, Granner DK, Mayes PA & Rodwell VW. 2000. Harper’s
Biochemistry. Appleton & Lange.
Nelson DL & Cox MM. 2005. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry. WH
Freeman.
Voet D, Voet JG & Pratt CW. 2006. Fundamentals of Biochemistry. John
Wiley & Sons.

FNB 505 NUTRITIONAL REQUIREMENT AND FEEDING 1+1

MANAGEMENT
Objective
To learn nutritional requirements of commercially important fish and
shellfish.
To learn the feeding methods and feed management.
Theory
UNIT I
Experimental diets: Reference diet, purified and semi-purified diet.
Methods for studying nutritional requirements in finfish and shellfish;
Nutrient requirements of warm water and cold water fish and shellfish,
larvae and broodstock of commercially important shellfish and finfish;
Requirement of essential and non-essential amino acids and essential fatty
acids; Factors affecting nutritional requirements of fish and shellfish.
UNIT II
Body composition of fish and shellfish; Nutritive value of live feed.
UNIT III
Growth evaluation: FCR, absolute growth, relative growth. SGR, % weight
gain.
UNIT IV
Feed influence on body composition and quality; Effect of rations on
fecundity and egg quality.
UNIT V
Feeding devices, ration size/feeding rate, feeding frequency, restricted
feeding and compensatory feeding; Nutritional studies and the problem of
applying research findings to farming systems.
UNIT VI
Designing of nutritional experiments: Analysis of experimental data
employing complete Random Block Design (CRD), Random Block Design
(RBD), t- test and analysis of variance; Experimental culture systems.

141
 Practical
Determination of food intake in fry and fingerlings to ascertain the ration.
Purified diet for a fish/prawn to determine protein and lipid requirements.
Estimation of growth parameters for biological evaluation. Measures of
protein quality. (FCR, PER, NPU, B.V). Mineral mixtures and vitamin
premix and exercise on feeding.
Suggested Readings
D’ Abramo LR, Conklin DE & Akiama DM 1977. Crustacean Nutrition:
Advances in Aquaculture. Vol. VI. World Aquaculture SocietyLos
Angeles.
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Guillame J, Kaushik S, Berqot P & Metallier R. 2001. Nutrition and
Feeding of Fish and Crustaceans. Springer Praxis.
Halver JE. 1989. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Tiews KT. 1979. Finfish Nutrition and Fishfeed Technology.
Vols. I, II. Heenemann.
Hepher B. 1988. Nutrition of Pond Fishes. Cambridge University Press.
Houlihan D, Boujard T & Jobling M. 2001. Food Intake in Fish. Blackwell.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.
New MB. 1987. Feed and Feeding of Fish and Shrimp. A Manual on the
Preparation and Preservation of Compound Feeds for Shrimp and
Fish in Aquaculture. ADCP/REP/87/26 FAO. Rome.
NRC (National Research Council). 1993. Nutrient Requirements of Fish.
National Academy Press, Washington.

FNB 506 FEED INGREDIENTS AND ADDITIVES 1+1

Objective
To learn the requirement and availability of ingredients for aqua-feeds and
different types of additives used.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction: National and international scenario; present production trend
and future requirements of feed ingredients.
UNIT II
Ingredient classification: Conventional feed ingredients - protein sources,
energy sources; Unconventional feed ingredients - by-products of agro-
industry, slaughter house, fruit processing units, seafood industry and
forest; Single cell proteins; leaf protein concentrates, gluten meal and grain
by-products.
UNIT III
Proximate composition; International coding of feed ingredients; Amino
acid profile.
UNIT IV
Anti-nutritional factors: Methods of detection and detoxification.
UNIT V
Feed Processing: Methods; effect of processing on nutritional quality and
utilization.

142
 UNIT VI
Storage and quality control: Storage methods; effect of storage on
ingredient quality; Factors affecting quality of ingredients; toxins.
Practical
Proximate composition; Estimation of Tannin, Protease inhibitors, HCN,
Aflatoxin, Available lysine; Storage studies.
Suggested Readings
ADCP (Aquaculture Development and Co-ordination Programme). 1980.
Fish Feed Technology. ADCP/REP/80/11. FAO. Rome.
D’ Abramo LR, Conklin DE & Akiyama DM. 1977. Crustacean Nutrition:
Advances in Aquaculture. Vol. VI. World Aquaculture Society, LA.
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Guillame J, Kaushik S, Berqot P & Metallier R. 2001. Nutrition and
Feeding of Fish and Crustaceans. Springer Praxis.
Halver JE & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Joachim WH & Pascual FP. 2000. Handbook on Ingredients for
Aquaculture Feeds. Kluwer.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.
Rechcigl M. 1977. CRC Handbook Series in Nutrition and Food. CRC
Press.
Rechcigl M. 1983. Handbook of Nutritional Supplements. CRC Press.

FNB 507 NUTRITION AND FEEDING IN CRUSTACEANS 1+1

Objective
To study crustacean nutritional requirements, feed formulation and feeding
strategy.
Theory
UNIT I
Nutritional requirements: Protein, carbohydrate, lipid, vitamin, mineral,
essential amino acid, fatty acid and energy requirements; Requirement
changes during various life stages; Methods for determining and factors
affecting nutritional requirements.
UNIT II
Food and Feeding : Food and feeding habits, natural food organisms,
micro-particulate diets (MBD, MCD, MED, MEM, PARA) for hatcheries;
Grow-out and finisher feeds; Broodstock feeds for conditioning and
maturation; Role of feed additives in crustacean nutrition.
UNIT III
Digestion and Metabolism: Digestive system of crustaceans; Digestive
organs and their role in digestion; Feed ingestion and feeding mechanism;
Gastro-intestinal motility; Digestion, absorption and assimilation of
nutrients; Digestive enzymes and their role; Factors affecting digestibility.
UNIT IV
Feeding management: Feeding ration, rate and frequency; Feed dispensing
methods and devices.
Practical
Study of digestive system of crustaceans; Estimation of digestive enzymes:
proteases, amylases and lipases; Feed formulation and preparation; Hydro-
stability of feed; In- vitro digestibility; Aflatoxin analysis.

143
 Suggested Readings
D’ Abramo LR, Conklin DE & Akiama DM 1977. Crustacean Nutrition:
Advances in Aquaculture. Vol. VI. World Aquaculture SocietyLos
Angeles.
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Guillame J, Kaushik S, Berqot P & Metallier R. 2001. Nutrition and
Feeding of Fish and Crustaceans. Springer Praxis.
Halver JE. 1989. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Tiews KT. 1979. Finfish Nutrition and Fishfeed Technology.
Vols. I, II. Heenemann.
Hepher B. 1988. Nutrition of Pond Fishes. Cambridge University Press.
Houlihan D, Boujard T & Jobling M. 2001. Food Intake in Fish. Blackwell.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.
New MB. 1987. Feed and Feeding of Fish and Shrimp. A Manual on the
Preparation and Preservation of Compound Feeds for Shrimp and
Fish in Aquaculture. ADCP/REP/87/26 FAO. Rome.
NRC (National Research Council). 1993. Nutrient Requirements of Fish.
National Academy Press, Washington.

FNB 508 DIGESTIVE PHYSIOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To learn digestive system of fish and their function.
To learn the basic mechanism of feed intake and digestion process.
Theory
UNIT I
Digestive system of fish and shellfish : Digestive organs and their role;
anatomy and histology of alimentary canal; Feed ingestion, feeding
mechanism, gastro-intestinal motility.
UNIT II
Digestion and absorption: Digestion of proteins, lipids and carbohydrates;
digestibility; absorption and assimilation of energy nutrients, minerals and
vitamins.
UNIT III
Digestive enzymes and their kinetics; Transport of nutrients in the body and
their conversion; Physiological energetics.
UNIT IV
Regulation of digestion: Digestive hormones and their role in fish and
shellfish; Factors affecting digestibility; Acid-base regulation, osmotic and
ionic regulation; Nitrogen metabolism and excretion.
UNIT V
Gustatory stimulants and role of feed attractants.
Practical
Dissection and examination of digestive and excretory organs; Histological
preparation of digestive organs; Assays of enzyme activity of carbohydrate,

144
 protein and lipid digestion; Determination of digestion and assimilation
rates; In vitro digestibility study.
Suggested Readings
D’ Abramo LR, Conklin DE & Akiyama. DM. 1977. Crustacean Nutrition:
Advances in Aquaculture. Vol. VI. World Aquaculture Society, LA.
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Guillame J, Kaushik S, Berqot P & Metallier R. 2001. Nutrition and
Feeding of Fish and Crustaceans. Springer Praxis.
Halver JE & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.

FNB 509 PROTEIN NUTRITION 1+1

Objective
To understand the importance of protein in aquafeed and relationship of
protein with energy.
Theory
UNIT I
Protein and amino acid metabolism - Biosysnthesis of protein; oxidative
and non-oxidative degradation of amino acids, transamination and
deamination; urea cycle; biosynthesis of non-essential amino acids.
UNIT II
Metabolism: digestion, absorption, digestibility, Factors affecting protein
digestibility.
UNIT III
Protein energy inter-relationship (P/E Ratio).
UNIT IV
Protein sources and requirement: Conventional and non-conventional;
dietary non-protein nitrogen; Protein requirement for maintenance, growth
and reproduction; Factors affecting protein requirement; Methods of
requirement study.
UNIT V
Amino acid requirements: Qualitative and quantitative; Synthetic amino
acids.
UNIT VI
Evaluation of protein quality (PER, NPU, BV, ANPU, PPV), Amino acid
antagonism; Protein deficiency symptoms.
Practical
Extraction and purification of protein. Qualitative and quantitative analysis
of proteins; Estimation of crude protein by Microkjeldahl method;
Estimation of protein by Lowry’s method; Estimation of NPN (urea), total
free amino acid, available lysine, amino acids; In-vitro protein digestibility.
Suggested Readings
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Halver JE & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.
Wilson K & Walker J. 1995. Principles and Techniques of Practical
Biochemistry. Cambridge University Press.

145
FNB 510 LIPID NUTRITION 1+1
Objective
To understand the importance of lipids in aqua feed and the relationship of
dietary lipid and tissue lipid.
Theory
UNIT I
Lipid metabolism: Biosynthesis and beta oxidation of fatty acids;
generation of acetyl CoA, NADH/NADPH and FADH2; control of fatty
acid metabolism.
UNIT II
Sources of lipids and fatty acids, lipid digestibility, transport, storage,
mobilization, protein sparing effect.
UNIT III
Requirement: Qualitative and quantitative requirement of essential fatty
acids, total lipids.
UNIT IV
Role of essential fatty acids, influence of dietary lipid on flesh quality,
evaluation of lipid quality, antioxidants, deficiency symptoms.
UNIT V
Concept of designer fish.
Practical
End product estimation of aerobic and anaerobic carbohydrate metabolism
(pyruvate and lactate). Enzyme assay for LDH, MDH, ALT, estimation of
phospholipids; Estimation of total lipid and free fatty acid, peroxide value,
saponification number, iodine value, Estimation of individual fatty acid by
GCMS.
Suggested Readings
Berg JM, Tymoczko JL & Stryer L. 2002. Biochemistry. WH Freeman.
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Halver J & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.
Murray RK, Granner DK, Mayes PA & Rodwell VW. 2000. Harper’s
Biochemistry. Appleton & Lange.
NRC (National Research Council). 1993. Nutrient Requirements of Fish.
National Academy Press, Washington.
Voet D, Voet JG & Pratt CW. 2006. Fundamentals of Biochemistry. John
Wiley & Sons.

FNB 511 CARBOHYDRATE NUTRITION 1+1

Objective
To understand the importance of carbohydrate in aquafeed and the
relationship of dietary carbohydrate and lipid.
Theory
UNIT I
Carbohydrate metabolism: Glycolytic pathway, TCA cycle and Pentose
phosphate pathways, Gluconeogenesis, glycogenesis and glycogenolysis.
UNIT II
Sauces of carbohydrates, digestibility, Factors affecting starch utilization,
carbohydrate and interaction with other nutrients and protein sparing effect.

146
 UNIT III
Constraints of carbohydrate utilization in fish, Strategy to enhance
carbohydrate utilization: gelatinization, exogenous amylases, glucose
intolerance, carbohydrates and immunity.
UNIT IV
Carbohydrate utilization for low cost feed.
Practical
Estimation of starch gelatinization in different feed processing methods;
Blood glucose estimation; In vitro starch digestibility; Available lysine
estimation, Estimation of crude fibre, cellulose and lignin content of feed.
Suggested Readings
D’ Abramo LR, Conklin DE & Akiama DM 1977. Crustacean Nutrition:
Advances in Aquaculture. Vol. VI. World Aquaculture SocietyLos
Angeles.
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Guillame J, Kaushik S, Berqot P & Metallier R. 2001. Nutrition and
Feeding of Fish and Crustaceans. Springer Praxis.
Halver JE. 1989. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Tiews KT. 1979. Finfish Nutrition and Fishfeed Technology.
Vols. I, II. Heenemann.
Hepher B. 1988. Nutrition of Pond Fishes. Cambridge University Press.
Houlihan D, Boujard T & Jobling M. 2001. Food Intake in Fish. Blackwell.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.
New MB. 1987. Feed and Feeding of Fish and Shrimp. A Manual on the
Preparation and Preservation of Compound Feeds for Shrimp and
Fish in Aquaculture. ADCP/REP/87/26 FAO. Rome.
NRC (National Research Council). 1993. Nutrient Requirements of Fish.
National Academy Press, Washington.
FNB 512 VITAMIN AND MINERAL NUTRITION 1+1
Objective
To learn the structure and functions of different vitamins and minerals.
Theory
UNIT I
Vitamins:Structure and properties of water and fat soluble vitamins;
Vitamin as coenzymes and prosthetic groups of enzymes.
UNIT II
Vitamin requirements for different species, Dietary sources of vitamins,
Factors affecting vitamin requirements, Losses of vitamin during feed
processing.
UNIT III
Metabolic changes associated with hypo- and hyper-vitaminosis.
Biosynthesis of vitamins; Manifestation of vitamin deficiency; Vitamin –
mineral interactions.
UNIT IV
Minerals: Macro, micro and toxic minerals.

147
 UNIT V
Mineral requirements for different aquaculture species, Dietary sources of
minerals, Factors affecting mineral requirement, Nutrient-minerals
interaction; Manifestation of mineral deficiency.
Practical
Estimation of calcium, phosphorus, magnesium, Iron, Vitamin C,
Preparation of vitamin and mineral premix, Estimation of vitamion and
mineral loss due to leaching.
Suggested Readings
Berg JM, Tymoczko JL & Stryer L. 2002. Biochemistry. WH Freeman.
Conn EE & Stumpf PK. 1966. Outlines of Biochemistry. John Wiley &
Sons.
Devlin TM. 1997. Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical Correlations.
Wiley-Liss.
Dixon M & Webb EH. 1964. Enzymes. Longman Group.
Florkin M & Mason HS. 1963. Comparative Biochemistry. Academic
Press.
Murray RK, Granner DK, Mayes PA & Rodwell VW. 2000. Harper’s
Biochemistry. Appleton & Lange.
Nelson DL & Cox MM. 2005. Principles of Biochemistry. WH Freeman.
Smith EL, Hill RL, Lehman IR, Lefkowitz RJ, Handler P & White A. 1983.
The Principles of Biochemistry. McGraw-Hill.
Voet D, Voet JG & Pratt CW. 2006. Fundamentals of Biochemistry. John
Wiley & Sons.
FNB 601 BIOENERGETICS 2+1
Objective
To understand metabolism of biomolecules, metabolic process and energy
production.
Theory
UNIT I
Energy requirements of fish: Principles and methods; factors affecting
energy requirement; energy budgeting, metabolic rate and factors affecting
it; respiration and metabolism; metabolic scope.
UNIT II
Energetics of feeding and digestion; relationship between feeding and
growth; Energy requirements for reproduction; energy content of gonads
and gametes; Energetics of gonadal maturation and gamete production.
UNIT III
Scope of intermediary metabolism - triglycerides as energy source; de novo
synthesis, transport and modification of fatty acids in finfish and shellfish;
enzymes required for oxidation of poly-unsaturated fatty acids, formation
of propionyl CoA in oxidation of odd chain fatty acids, biosynthesis of n-3
and n-6 fatty acids; role of desaturases and elongases; biosynthesis of
triglycerides, phospholipids, sphingolipids and cholesterol.
UNIT IV
Coordinated regulation of glycogen synthesis and breakdown; glycogen
targeting protein; glycolysis and its control by phosphorylase,
phosphofructokinase, hexokinase and pyruvate kinase; feeder pathways for
glycolysis; TCA cycle and anabolism; gluconeogenesis and its regulation;

148
 relationship between glyoxylate and TCA cycle; oxidative and non-
oxidative pentose phosphate pathway; electron transport chain and its
enzyme system. ATP synthesis.
UNIT V
Oxidative degradation of amino acids; transmination and deamination;
ammonia carriers, excretion and urea cycle; biosynthesis of non-essential
amino acids and catabolic pathways for amino acids; synthesis of deoxy
and ribonucleotides; uric acid production; derivation of nucleotide groups
of CoA, NAD, FAD from ATP; integration and regulation of lipid
carbonhydrate and protein metabolism in fishes.
Practical
Estimation of oxygen consumption; Estimation of gross energy and
digestible energy of feed; Comparision of energy requirements of
carnivorous, herbivorous and omnivorous fish; Extraction, hydrolysis and
fractionation of proteins and lipids; Assay of mitochondrial and
cytoplasmic enzymes; Estimation of total and free cholesterol.
Suggested Readings
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Evans DH & Claiborne JB. 2006. The Physiology of Fishes. CRC Press.
Halver JE & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Houlihan D, Boujard T & Jobling M. 2001. Food Intake in Fish. Blackwell.
Jobling M. 1994. Fish Bioenergetics. Chapman & Hall.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.

FNB 602 ADVANCES IN FEED TECHNOLOGY 2+1

Objective
To study the quality of feed ingredients and their uses in feed preparation.
To understand production of different types of feeds.
Theory
UNIT I
Feed formulation: Least cost formulation, linear programming; quality of
feed ingredients and their biochemical composition; protein and energy
supplements; premixes of vitamins and minerals; antioxidants in diets;
toxins in feeds; exogenous enzymes; in feed probiotics and their role. Feed
additives. Water stability of diets.
UNIT II
Feed processing machineries; feed manufacture: processing of feed
mixtures, steam pelleting, extrusion marumarization spray beadlts; stability
of nutrients; factors affecting feed manufacture; effects of processing on the
nutritional value of feeds; processes of reducing anti-nutritional factors;
feed mills and their design; quality control of feed; storage of feed and
feed deterioration; economics of feed manufacturing.
Practical
Analysis of anti-nutritional and toxic substances in feed ingredients and
feed;formation of diets using software. Preparation of different types of
feed and their quality evaluation; Effect of feed storage on nutritional value
of feed.

149
 Suggested Readings
ADCP (Aquaculture Development and Co-ordination Programme). 1980.
Fish Feed Technology. ADCP/REP/80/11. FAO. Rome.
D’ Abramo LR, Conklin DE & Akiama DM 1977. Crustacean Nutrition:
Advances in Aquaculture. Vol. VI. World Aquaculture SocietyLos
Angeles.
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Guillame J, Kaushik S, Berqot P & Metallier R. 2001. Nutrition and
Feeding of Fish and Crustaceans. Springer Praxis.
Halver JE. 1989. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Tiews KT. 1979. Finfish Nutrition and Fishfeed Technology.
Vols. I, II. Heenemann.
Hepher B. 1988. Nutrition of Pond Fishes. Cambridge University Press.
Houlihan D, Boujard T & Jobling M. 2001. Food Intake in Fish. Blackwell.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.
Muir JF & Robert D. (Eds.). 1968. Recent Advances in Aquaculture. Vol.
II. Blackwell.
New MB. 1987. Feed and Feeding of Fish and Shrimp. A Manual on the
Preparation and Preservation of Compound Feeds for Shrimp and
Fish in Aquaculture. ADCP/REP/87/26 FAO. Rome.
NRC (National Research Council). 1993. Nutrient Requirements of Fish.
National Academy Press, Washington.

FNB 603 LARVAL AND BROODSTOCK NUTRITION 2+1

Objective
To understand critical phase of larval rearing and specific role of nutrients
in reproduction.
Theory
UNIT I
Nutrient requirement of larvae and broodstock; live feed and their
nutritional quality; nutrient enrichment of live feed; ontogeny of digestive
enzymes in larvae; different types of artificial feed; larval artificial diets -
microencapsulated, microbound, microcoated; feeding management;
feeding devices and strategies.
UNIT II
Feeding methods: manual, mechanical and automatic feeding; factors
affecting feeding behavior (Gustatory stimulants, feeding deterrents,
weaning); larval development, deficiency deformities and survival.
Economics of larval and broodstock feed and feeding.
Practical
Preparation of larval feed. Methods of feeding larvae and calculation of
FCR. Nutritional analysis of live food organisms. Estimation of proteases
in larvae. Estimation of gonado-somatic index and fecundity.
Suggested Readings
CIFE. 1993. Training Manual on Culture of Live Food Organisms for Aqua
Hatcheries. Central Institute of Fisheries Education, Versova,
Mumbai.

150
 De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Guillame J, Kaushik S, Berqot P & Metallier R. 2001. Nutrition and
Feeding of Fish and Crustaceans. Springer Praxis.
Hagiwara A, Snell TW, Lubzens E & Tamaru CS. 1997. Live Food in
Aquaculture. Proceedings of the Live Food and Marine Larviculture
Symposium. Kluwer.
Halver JE & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.

FNB 604 ADVANCES IN NUTRITION 1+1

Objective
To study the mechanism of feed intake, feeding behavior and the concept
eco-friendly feed.
Theory
UNIT I
Feeding behavior; feed intake and environment; techniques of measuring
feed intake. Regulation of feed intake by neuropeptides and hormones;
stimulatory peptides, inhibitory peptides; identification of gustatory feeding
stimulants; Nutrient receptors and transporters hormonal control of
metabolism.
UNIT II
Low cost and eco-friendly diets; optimization of carbohydrates in diets;
strategies for improving protein retention; Feeding standards. Tracer
techniques in fish nutrition.
UNIT III
n-3 and n-6 fatty acids, their functions and deficiencies, fatty acid oxidation
and antioxidants; phospholipids; Feed and flesh quality.
UNIT IV
Effect of artificial diets on digestive processes in larvae and juveniles;
dietary role in growth and reproduction.
UNIT V
Recent advances in feed additives, product quality. Feeds for flesh quality.
Practical
Protein quality estimation (PER, NPU). Digestibility studies. Estimation of
fatty acids.
Suggested Readings
ADCP (Aquaculture Development and Co-ordination Programme). 1980.
Fish Feed Technology. ADCP/REP/80/11. FAO. Rome.
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Guillame J, Kaushik S, Berqot P & Metallier R. 2001. Nutrition and
Feeding of Fish and Crustaceans. Springer Praxis.
Halver JE. 1989. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Tiews KT. 1979. Finfish Nutrition and Fishfeed Technology.
Vols. I, II. Heenemann.
Hepher B. 1988. Nutrition of Pond Fishes. Cambridge University Press.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.

151
FNB 605 BIOCHEMICAL ENDOCRINOLOGY 1+1
Objective
To understand the biochemical mechanism of endocrine function.
To understand the role of hormones on growth and metabolism.
Theory
UNIT I
Biochemical structures and properties of different hormones; Endocrine
glands in fish and shellfish.
UNIT II
Hormonal regulation of calcium and phosphorous metabolism; Role of
ecdysone in moulting.
UNIT III
Reproductive hormones (hypothalamus, pituitary, gonads), digestive and
metabolic hormones; Role of pineal hormones; Mechanism of hormone
action; Role of c-AMP, c-GMP and calcium in hormone action; Hormonal
imbalances.
Practical
Gross and histological studies of finfish and shellfish endocrine glands;
Characterization of growth hormone gene from pituitary genomic DNA.
Suggested Readings
Fingerman M, Nagabhushanam R & Thompson MF. 1997. Recent
Advances in Marine Biotechnology. Vols.I-III. Oxford & IBH.
Hoar WS & Randal DJ. 1969. Fish Physiology. Academy Press.
Lehninger AL. 1984. Principles of Biochemistry. CBS.
Primrose SB. 1989. Modern Biotechnology. Blackwell.
Rodney B. 1998. Concepts in Biochemistry. Cole Publ. Co.

FNB 606 NUTRIGENOMICS 1+1

Objective
To study nutritionally important genes and their interactions with nutrients.
To acquaint with the basics in molecular nutrition.
Theory
UNIT I
Relevance of molecular studies in nutrition; terminologies in molecular
nutrition; cell culture; nutritionally important genes; gene regulation by
lipids and carbohydrates; metabolic control analysis; methodologies in
molecular nutrition.
UNIT II
Tanscriptomics, proteomics and metabolomics; Nutrient-gene interaction
and expression; reverse transcription and cDNA biosynthesis; Fluorescent
labelled probe preparation; microarray technique.
UNIT III
Use of robotics in microarray; microarray nitrocellulose hybridization and
labelling with P32 probes; quantitative real time polymerase chain reaction.
(qRT PCR); gene expression software; relative expression software tool
(REST); interpretation of microarray data; cloning technique.
Practical
RNA extraction and isolation; Purification and preparation of m-RNA from
RNA pool by Oligo dT; DNAse treatment for quality improvement of

152
 RNA; cDNA synthesis by reverse transcription; Elution of PCR product
for gene sequencing; Cloning.
Suggested Readings
Fingerman M, Nagabhushanam R & Thompson MF. 1997. Recent
Advances in Marine Biotechnology. Vols. I-III. Oxford & IBH.
Glick BR & Pasternak JJ. 1999. Molecular Biotechnology: Principles and
Applications of Recombinant DNA Technology. ASM Press.
Hoar WS & Randal DJ. 1969. Fish Physiology. Academy Press.
Lehninger AL. 1984. Principles of Biochemistry. CBS.
Primrose SB. 1989. Modern Biotechnology. Blackwell.
Rodney B. 1998. Concepts in Biochemistry. Cole Publ. Co.

FNB 607 NUTRACEUTICALS 1+1

Objective
To get a comprehensive knowledge about nutraceuticals used in
aquaculture and their delivery system.
Theory
UNIT I
Definition, classification and role of different neutraceticals; mode of
application; functions of acidifiers (citric acid, propionic acid, benzoic
acid).
UNIT II
Exogenous enzymes (phytase, carbohydrase, proteinase) and nutrient
utilisation; prebiotics and probiotics; Single cell proteins as nutraceuticals;
antioxidants and their functions.
UNIT III
Chemoattractants for fish and shellfish; fish based neutraceticals and their
application; designer fish.
UNIT IV
Immunostimulants and their functions (nucleotide, manan oligosaccharides,
beta glucan, levan, bovine lactoferine, sodium alginate, levamisol).
Practical
Estimation of phytase and phytate. Effect of acidifiers on pH in different
parts of GI tract. Estimation of antioxidants vitamin E and vitamin C.
Estimation of n-3 fatty acid.
Suggested Readings
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Guillame J, Kaushik S, Berqot P & Metallier R. 2001. Nutrition and
Feeding of Fish and Crustaceans. Springer Praxis.
Halver JE & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.

FNB 608 FEED INTAKE AND FEEDING BEHAVIOUR 1+1

Objective
To learn different methods of analyzing feed intake and effect of nutritional
factors.

153
Theory
UNIT I
Gustation and feeding behaviour: peripheral gestation sensation, gustatory
pathways in the central nervous system, taste and feeding behavior.
UNIT II
Feed intake: different techniques of feed intake: stomach content analysis,
chemical markers, direct observation and video recording, demand feeder,
X-radiography, Factors affecting feed intake, effect of feeding time on feed
intake and growth, Effect of nutritional factors and feed characteristics on
feed intake.
UNIT III
Regulation of feed intake: Nuropeptides and hormones, Inhibitory peptides,
stimulator peptides, growth hormones.
UNIT IV
Physiological effect of feeding: Different methods of feeding, short terms
effects of meal, tissue metabolic physiology, long term effect of food
intake; feeding frequencies.
Practical
Measurement of feed intake by chemical marker, Feed intake measurement
with respect to temperature, Experiment on feeding stimulant, Feed intake
and blood glucose co-relation, Comparative intake of natural vs artificial
feed.
Suggested Readings
De Silva SS & Anderson TA. 1995. Fish Nutrition in Aquaculture.
Chapman & Hall.
Guillame J, Kaushik S, Berqot P & Metallier R. 2001. Nutrition and
Feeding of Fish and Crustaceans. Springer Praxis.
Halver JE. 1989. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Halver JE & Hardy RW. 2002. Fish Nutrition. Academic Press.
Hepher B. 1988. Nutrition of Pond Fishes. Cambridge University Press.
Houlihan D, Boujard T & Jobling M. 2001. Food Intake in Fish.
Blackwell.
Lovell RT. 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fishes. Kluwer.

154
 FISH NUTRITION AND FEED TECHNOLOGY
List of Journals

• Analytical Biochemistry
• Animal Feed Sciences and Technology
• Animal Nutrition and Feed Technology
• Annals of Nutrition and Metabolism
• Annual Review of Nutrition
• Annual Review of Physiology
• Applied Aquaculture
• Aquaculture
• Aquaculture Nutrition
• Aquaculture Research
• Asia-Austalasian Journal of Animal Science
• British Journal of Nutrition
• Canadian Journal of Biochemistry
• Gene and Development
• Indian Journal of Animal Nutrition
• Israel Journal of Aquaculture- Bamidgeh
• Journal of Fish Physiology and Biochemistry
• Journal of Applied Icthyology
• Journal of Aquaculture in Tropics
• Journal of Aquatic Living Resources
• Journal of Biotechnology
• Journal of Fish Physiology and Biochemistry

Suggested Broad Areas for Master’s and Doctoral Research

• Quantitative estimation of feed intake: natural vs artificial feed

• Digestibility of natural and artificial feed
• Energetics of utilization of natural and artificial feed
• Energetics of utilization of animal vs plant ingredients
• Energetics of growth vs reproduction
• Feeding standards for cultivable species
• Feeding strategy to eliminate waste
• Utilization of refinery waste as single cell protein
• Farmer friendly methods for detoxification of anti-nutritional factors
• Immunostimulants and growth promoters
• Redefining protein-energy ratio in shrimp diet with respect to salinity
• Digestibility due to plant to animal ingredient ratio
• Enhancement of digestibility of plant feed ingredients
• Reduction of dietary protein content through amino acid balance
• Optimizing protein to lipid, protein to carbohydrate content in fish and shrimp
diets
• Dietary lipid source and flesh lipid quality

155
• Optimizing PUFA and HUFA content in individual species
• Impact of lipid peroxidation on growth and flesh quality
• Starch utilization and immunity status
• Optimization of gelatinized to non-gelatinized starch content in feed
• Sources of carbohydrate and their utilization
• Study the key enzymes for carbohydrate metabolism
• Development of species specific vitamin and mineral premix
• Energy utilization from carbohydrate sources
• Enzyme coating and feed additives in pelleted feed
• Low cost microencapsulated, microcoated and microbound diets
• Fortification of larval and broodstock diets
• Utilization of unconventional ingredients
• Nutritional contribution of natural food for growth
• Nutritional comparison of natural and artificial feed
• Biochemical mechanism of endocrine function
• Hormonal regulation of calcium and phosphorous metabolism
• Immunostimulants/ Immunomodulators
• Gene regulation by lipids and carbohydrates
• Fasting , feed intake and nutrient utilization

156
 FISH PHYSIOLOGY AND BIOCHEMISTRY
Course Structure - at a Glance

CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS

FPB 501* PHYSIOLOGY OF DIGESTION, GROWTH AND ENERGETICS 2+1
FPB 502* REPRODUCTIVE PHYSIOLOGY AND ENDOCRINOLOGY 2+1
FPB 503*# FISH BIOCHEMISTRY 2+1
FPB 504* METABOLISM OF BIOMOLECULES 2+1
CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM AND RESPIRATORY 2+1
FPB 505
PHYSIOLOGY
FPB 506 IMMUNOBIOLOGY 1+1
FPB 507 CELLULAR AND MOLECULAR PHYSIOLOGY 2+1
FPB 508 SENSORY PHYSIOLOGY 1+1
FPB 509 PHYSIOLOGY OF FISH BEHAVIOUR 1+1
FPB 510 PHARMACO-BIOLOGY OF AQUACULTURE DRUGS 1+1
FPB 511 PHYSIOLOGY OF EXCRETION AND OSMOREGULATION 1+1
FPB 512 ECOPHYSIOLOGY OF FISHES 1+1
FPB 513 TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES IN BIOCHEMISTRY 1+1
BIOCHEMISTRY OF ENZYMES, VITAMINS, MINERALS AND 2+1
FPB 514
HORMONES
FPB 515 DIAGNOSTIC BIOCHEMISTRY 1+1

FPB 591 MASTER’S SEMINAR 1+0

FPB 599 MASTER’S RESEARCH 20

* Compulsory for Master’s programme
# FPB 503 cross listed with Fish Physiology and Biochemistry FNB 502

157
 FISH PHYSIOLOGY AND BIOCHEMISTRY
Course Contents

FPB 501 PHYSIOLOGY OF DIGESTION, GROWTH AND 2+1

ENERGETICS
Objective
To acquaint students with the various aspects of growth and energy budget
in fish and shellfish.
Theory
UNIT I
Growth: Concept of growth, Determination of age and growth, Growth
curve, Correlation of growth with body weight and length, Metabolism
(anabolism and catabolism) and growth, Biotic and abiotic factors affecting
growth, Role of minerals, vitamins and hormones in the regulation of
growth, Influence of nutrients in growth stimulation.
UNIT II
Food and feeding biology: Components of balanced food, Ingestion of food
and feeding mechanism.
UNIT III
Digestive system in fish and shell fish: Anatomy, histology and functions
of different parts of gastro-intestinal tract in herbivores and carnivores,
Modification of digestive system in relation to growth.
UNIT IV
Physiology of Digestion: Digestion of carbohydrates, lipid and proteins,
Digestive enzymes and regulation of their secretions, Absorption and
assimilation of nutrients, Role of hormones in the regulation of digestion,
Factors affecting digestion and transport of nutrients.
Practical
Analysis of gut content; Estimation of amylase, AST and ALT; Estimations
of pH in different parts of GI tract. Estimation of carbohydrate, protein and
lipid splitting enzymes. Determination of growth and age by otolith and
fish scale analysis.
Suggested Readings
Evans DH & Claiborne JB. 2006. The Physiology of Fishes. CRC Press.
Hoar WS & Randall DJ.1988. Fish Physiology. Academic Press.
Ian AJ & Hoar WS. 2001. Muscle Development and Growth. Academic
Press.
Prosser CL. 1950. Comparative Animal Physiology. WB Saunders.
Shadwick RE & Lauder GV. 2006. Fish Biomechanics. Academic Press.

FPB 502 REPRODUCTIVE PHYSIOLOGY AND 2+1

ENDOCRINOLOGY
Objective
To understand the basic concepts of reproduction in fish and reproductive
technology.
Theory
UNIT I
Anatomy and histology of testes and ovary in fish and shellfish.

158
 UNIT II
Sexual dimorphism, primary and secondary sex characters, bisexual
reproduction, inter-sexes, hermaphroditism, Sex differentiation and factors
affecting sex differentiation. Sex reversal in fish, factors affecting sex
reversal.
UNIT III
Development of gonad, oogenesis; spermatogenesis, metabolic changes
during oogenesis and spermatogenesis, vitellogenesis and gonadal
steroidogenesis.
UNIT IV
Annual reproductive cycle and breeding patterns in male and female.
Pheromones and reproductive behaviour, parental care.
UNIT V
Regulation of seasonal reproduction: Role of environment (photoperiod,
temperature, rainfall), Role of hypothalamo-hypophyseal system and pineal
gland, role of peripheral endocrine system, role of nutrition. Mechanism of
oocyte maturation and ovulation.
UNIT VI
Reproductive technology: Hypophysation and Induced breeding,
cryopreservation of gametes and artificial fertilization. Application of
biotechnology for accelerating gonadal growth and manipulation of the
duration of spawning. In vitro maturation of oocyte and transgenic fish.
Neuro-endocrine system in crustacean and molluscs and its role in the
regulation of reproduction.
Practical
Dissection and display of reproductive system (male and female).
Identification of primary and secondary sex characters. Estimation of
fecundity, gonadosomatic index (GSI), extraction of hormones, isolation,
purification and characterization.
Suggested Readings
Evans DH & Claiborne JB. 2006. The Physiology of Fishes. CRC Press.
Hoar WS & Randall DJ.1988. Fish Physiology. Academic Press.
Scharrer E. 1963. Neuroendocrinology. Columbia University Press.
Thomas PC, Rath SC & Mohapatra KD. 2003. Breeding and Seed
Production of Finfish and Shellfish. Daya Publ. House.

FPB 503 FISH BIOCHEMISTRY 2+1

Objective
To acquaint students with the biochemical functions of different
biomolecules.
Theory
UNIT I
Carbohydrates: Definition, classification and biological significance;
Chemical reactions; stereoisomerisms and mutarotation, structure and
properties of monosaccharides, disaccharides, polysaccharides and
mucopolysaccharides.
UNIT II
Proteins: Definition, classification, biological significance; Structure:
primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary; denaturation. Amino acids:

159
 Structure, classification, acid-base properties, stereoisomerisms and
chemical reactions.
UNIT III
Lipids: Definition, classification, biological significance. Fatty acids:
structure, properties and chemical reactions; steroids; saponification and
iodine number, peroxide value of fats. Phospholipids: Structure, properties
and functions; prostaglandins, PUFA (polyunsaturated fatty acids).
UNIT IV
Nucleic acids: Structure, functions and properties. Structure of purines,
pyrimidine; DNA and RNA; different type of DNA and RNA, Watson and
Crick model of DNA.
Practical
Extraction and purification of tissue proteins and lipids. Isolation,
purification and characterization of nucleic acids from tissue extract.
Qualitative and quantitative analysis of proteins, lipids, carbohydrates and
nucleic acids. Quantitative estimation of biomolecules by
spectrophotometric methods.
Suggested Readings
Berg JM, Tymoczko JL & Stryer L. 2002. Biochemistry. WH Freeman.
Houlihan DF, Carter CG, McCarthy ID & Hochachka PW. 1995.
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology of Fishes. Elsevier.
Murray RK, Granner DK, Mayes PA & Rodwell VW. 2000. Harper’s
Biochemistry. Appleton & Lange.
Nelson DL & Cox MM. 2005. Principles of Biochemistry. WH Freeman.
Voet D, Voet JG & Pratt CW. 2006. Fundamentals of Biochemistry. John
Wiley & Sons.

FPB 504 METABOLISM OF BIOMOLECULES 2+1

Objective
To learn the metabolism of different biomolecules.
Theory
UNIT I
Carbohydrate metabolism :Glycogenesis, glycolysis and their control, TCA
cycle: different steps, stoichiometry and control, Alternate pathways of
carbohydrate metabolism, Pentose phosphate pathway and guconeogenesis,
Glycogen metabolism, Regulation of blood glucose level, Oxidative
phosphorylation, Redox potential, Respiratory chain and its enzyme
system; ATP synthesis.
UNIT II
Lipid metabolism: Biosynthesis and beta oxidation of fatty acids,
Generation of acetyl CoA, NADH/NADPH and FADH2, Control of fatty
acid metabolism.
UNIT III
Protein and amino acid metabolism: Biosynthesis of protein; Oxidative and
non-oxidative degradation of amino acids, transamination and deamination,
Urea cycle, Biosynthesis of non-essential amino acids.
UNIT IV
Nucleic acids metabolism: Purine and pyrimidine metabolism, Biosynthesis
of deoxyribonucleotides and ribonucleotides.

160
 UNIT V
Intermediary metabolism: Integration of carbohydrate, lipid and protein
metabolism.
Practical
End product estimation of aerobic and anaerobic carbohydrate metabolism
(pyruvate and lactate). Enzyme assay for LDH, MDH, ALT and nucleases.
Estimation of phospholipids. Estimation of tissue protein. Estimation of
blood glucose. Estimation of tissue lipid.
Suggested Readings
Conn EE & Stumpf PK. 1987. Outline of Biochemistry. Wiley.
Houlihan DF, Carter CG, McCarthy ID & Hochachka PW. 1995.
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology of Fishes. Elsevier.
Murray RK, Granner DK, Mayes PA & Rodwell VW. 2000. Harper’s
Biochemistry. Appleton & Lange.
Nelson DL & Cox MM. 2005. Principles of Biochemistry. WH Freeman.

FPB 505 CARDIO-VASCULAR SYSTEM AND RESPIRATORY 2+1

PHYSIOLOGY
Objective
To impart knowledge on the dynamics of cardiovascular system and
adaptation of the salt transporting mechanism in fish and their physiology.
Theory
UNIT I
Types of heart, morphological structure, blood vascular system. Lymph and
lymphatic circulation. Regulation of cardiac activity, Neural and
autoregulatory control of heart and haemodynamics, cardiac output,
circulation time, blood pressure.
UNIT II
Definition of respiration, basal metabolic rate (BMR), external respiration,
internal respiration. Types of respiratory organs, gill structure.
UNIT III
Respiratory pigments and their functions.
UNIT IV
Mechanism of gaseous exchange, CO2 transport, countercurrent principle,
water flow across the gills, respiratory pumps, pump musculature and
skeleton, ammonia quotient. Chloride cells and their role in respiration.
UNIT V
Respiratory metabolism, energy budget and expenditure in relation to
environmental conditions and stress.
UNIT VI
Metabolic effects in response to environmental factors (biotic and abiotic).
UNIT VII
Hypoxia and metabolic rate, anoxic layers and habitats. Oxygen
requirements at larval stages.
Practical
Assay of Na+-K+ ATPase activity. Study of rate of oxygen consumption in
relation to abiotic factors (pH, temperature, salinity). Differential count of
blood cells and estimation of haemoglobin concentration, haematocrit
value.

161
 Suggested Readings
Chavin W. (Ed.). 1973. Responses of Fish to Environmental Changes.
Charles C Thomas Publ.
Evans DH & Claiborne JB. 2006. The Physiology of Fishes. CRC Press.
Hoar WS & Randall DJ. 1988. Fish Physiology. Academic Press.
Prosser CL. 1950. Comparative Animal Physiology. WB Saunders.
Rankin JC & Pitcher TJ.1983. Control Processes in Fish Physiology.
Springer.
FPB 506 IMMUNOBIOLOGY 1+1
Objective
To understand different aspects of immunostimulants and their effect on
fish immunity, stress resistance and disease resistance.
Theory
UNIT I
Basic principles of immune system in fishes and shell fishes.
UNIT II
Cell and organ involved in immunity.
UNIT III
Humoral and cell mediated immunity, Mechanism of immunity. Cytokines,
interferon, lymphokine, chemokines, their role in immune response.
UNIT IV
Immunoprophylaxis, toxin, toxoid and vaccines. Immuno-stimulant,
immunomodulation.
UNIT V
Biosynthesis of antibody. Endocrine control of immune system.
UNIT VI
Role of nutraceuticals viz., levan, β-glucan, w3- fatty acid, levanisole,
nucleotide, alginates, bovine lactoferine, etc. on fish/ shellfish immunity
and mechanism of their action.
UNIT VII
Principles of stress resistance, stress tolerance. Challenge study.
Practical
Lysozyme activity. Estimation of NBT. Estimation of CBC. Estimation of
prophenol oxidase. Estimation of superoxide dismutase. Estimation of IgM.
Suggested Readings
Conn EE & Stumpf PK. 1987. Outline of Biochemistry. Wiley.
Evans DH & Claiborne JB. 2006. The Physiology of Fishes. CRC Press.
Houlihan DF, Carter CG, McCarthy ID & Hochachka PW. 1995.
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology of Fishes. Elsevier.
Iwama G & Nakanishi T. 1996. The Fish Immune System. Organism,
Pathogen and Environment. Academic Press.
Murray RK, Granner DK, Mayes PA & Rodwell VW. 2000. Harper’s
Biochemistry. Appleton & Lange.
Van Oss CJ & Van Regenmortel MHV. 1994. Immunochemistry. CRC
Press.
FPB 507 CELLULAR AND MOLECULAR PHYSIOLOGY 2+1
Objective
To acquaint students with the cellular signaling cascades and other various
molecular physiology.

162
 Theory
UNIT I
Protein sequencing, cell signaling and trafficking.
UNIT II
Sensor molecules and bioactive peptides; C-reactive protein.
UNIT III
Structure, functions and expression of heat shock; antifreeze and
metallothionenes proteins.
UNIT IV
Cross protection, mechanism of action of cross protection.
UNIT V
Biochemical mechanism of thermogenesis.
UNIT VI
Adaptation mechanism during thermal extremes; metabolic reactions
during starvation and stress.
UNIT VII
Molecular signaling, gene splicing, duplication and mutation, Gene
expression and regulation mechanism, Zinc finger, leucine zipper. DNA
probes and nucleotide sequencing; gene expression and cloning;
recombinant DNA and DNA fingerprinting. DNA damage. Factors
affecting gene expression. Fish cell culture and stem cells.
Practical
Quantification of [Link] damage by Comet assay. Quantification of C-
reactive protein. Gene sequencing. Amino acid sequencing.
Suggested Readings
Fiege U, Morimoto R & Yahara I. 1996. Stress- Inducible Cellular
Responses. Birkhäuser.
Houlihan DF, Carter CG, McCarthy ID & Hochachka PW. 1995.
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology of Fishes. Elsevier.
Shadwick RE & Lauder GV. 2006. Fish Biomechanics. Academic Press.

FPB 508 SENSORY PHYSIOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To learn the different sensory organs and their functional mechanism in fish
and shellfish.
Theory
UNIT I
Overview of sense organs and their functions in fishes and shell fishes.
UNIT II
Action potential, synapse, Neurotransmitters, impulse transmission,
Excitation-contraction coupling.
UNIT III
Hearing mechanism and specialization. Hearing threshold. Auditory
behavior and ecology.
UNIT IV
Olfactory system and role in feeding, reproduction and migration.
UNIT V
Electroreception, chemoreception in fish.
UNIT VI
Physiology of photoreceptors and pineal gland.

163
 UNIT VII
Effector and motor function, Motor behavior and locomotion.
UNIT VIII
Bioluminescence, Chromatophores.
Practical
Practical on chemoreception using different feeding attractants. Behavioral
studies with respect to temperature and noise. Study of reflex action. Effect
of spinal nerve transection on melanophore behaviour. Effect of optic nerve
transection on melanophore behaviour in response to background colour.
Chromatophores response in relation to background colour, light,
temperature, etc. Chromatophores responses in relation to eye stalk
ablation.
Suggested Readings
Bullock TH, Hopkins CD, Popper AN & Fay RR. 2005. Electroreception.
Birkhäuser.
Evans DH & Claiborne JB. 2006. The Physiology of Fishes. CRC Press.
Hara T. 1996. Fish Physiology. Vol. 25. Sensory Systems Neuroscience.
Elsevier.
Hoar WS & Randall DJ.1988. Fish Physiology. Academic Press.
Northcutt RG & Davis RE. 1983. Fish Neurobiology. University of
Michigan Press.

FPB 509 PHYSIOLOGY OF FISH BEHAVIOUR 1+1

Objective
To understand physiology of behaviour.
Theory
UNIT I
Concepts on fish behavior and regulatory mechanism-alarm reaction-
transduction mechanism.
UNIT II
Domestication processes in communicative behavior. Locomotion
behavior. Sexual behavior. Behavior due to environmental partition.
UNIT III
Predatory avoidance.
UNIT IV
Parental and neonatal behavior.
UNIT V
Chemical signals to evoke feeding behavior.
UNIT VI
Adaptation mechanism in altered environment.
Practical
Tagging studies. Audio visual recording of behavior in simulated
experiment.
Suggested Readings
Brown C, Laland KN & Krause J. 2006. Fish Cognition and Behavior.
Blackwell.
Evans DH & Claiborne JB. 2006. The Physiology of Fishes. CRC Press.
Pitcher TJ. 1993. Behaviour of Teleost Fishes. Springer.

164
FPB 510 PHARMACO-BIOLOGY OF AQUACULTURE 1+1
DRUGS
Objective
To acquaint students with the aquaculture drugs and their delivery
mechanism.
Theory
UNIT I
An introduction to pharmaco-dynamic agents.
UNIT II
Anaesthetics.
UNIT III
Chemotherapeutic agents: antiprotozoal agents, ectoparasiticide,
antihelmenthic.
UNIT IV
Antibacterial, antifungal and antiparsitic drugs.
UNIT V
Delivery system of drugs, Nanotechnology and nanoparticles.
UNIT VI
ISO standards of levels of drugs. GMO, GLP, IPR.
Practical
Estimation of residual level of different drugs .Pharamaco-kinetics.
Suggested Readings
Brown KMT. 2000. Applied Fish Pharmacology. Springer.
Noga EJ. 1996. Fish Disease: Diagnosis and Treatment. Blackwell.
Stockoff MK. 1993. Fish Medicine. WB Saunders.

FPB 511 PHYSIOLOGY OF EXCRETION AND 1+1

OSMOREGULATION
Objective
To understand the physiology of excretion and osmoregulation in fish and
shellfish.
Theory
UNIT I
Definition of excretion and osmoregulation.
UNIT II
Excretory organs in fish and shellfish and their functions.
UNIT III
Mechanism of excretion of nitrogenous waste, water and ion balance.
UNIT IV
Urea cycle, chloride shift mechanism.
UNIT V
Mechanism of osmotic and ionic regulation. Osmoregulation in migratory
animals. Endocrine control of osmoregulation.
UNIT VI
Stenohaline and Euryhaline animals and their tolerance capacity.
Practical
Estimation of osmolarity in blood samples. Estimation of osmolarity in
relation to different salinities. Estimation of ammonia in blood and water
samples.

165
 Suggested Readings
Evans DH & Claiborne JB. 2006. The Physiology of Fishes. CRC Press.
Hoar WS & Randall DJ.1988. Fish Physiology. Academic Press.
Prosser CL. 1950. Comparative Animal Physiology. WB Saunders.

FPB 512 ECOPHYSIOLOGY OF FISHES 1+1

Objective
To acquaint students with an insight into physiology of fish in response to
changes in the aquatic environment both in the wild and captivity.
Theory
UNIT I
Fish and shellfish habitats in different ecological niches.
UNIT II
Effects of Environmental factors and Endocrine disruptors on fish
physiology.
UNIT III
Adaptive and detoxification mechanism, Global warming and its impact on
fish and shellfish physiology.
UNIT IV
Thermal stress in fish and heat shock protein (HSP), Response of fish and
shellfish during hypoxia and the role of cardiovascular and ventillary
system. Physiological adaptations during migration.
UNIT V
Natural and anthropogenic sources of radioactivity in the aquatic
environment.
UNIT VI
Use of radioisotopes in tracer techniques for metabolic studies. Distribution
of radioactive substances in water. International radiological limits for the
export and import of aquatic products.
UNIT VII
The role of food chains in concentration of radionucleides in aquatic
organisms. Effect of radioactive substances on fish. Threat of radioactive
contamination to aquatic animal life.
Practical
Estimate threshold of thermal tolerance and salinity tolerance. Estimation
of LC 50 of pollutants. Estimation of stress enzymes, isozymes. Estimation
of cortisol in serum/plasma. Use of isotopes in tracer techniques for
metabolic studies. Quantification of Tritium and other radioisotope levels
in fish/ shellfish tissues and in aquatic environment.
Suggested Readings
Alan GH. 1995. Water Pollution and Fish Physiology. CRC Press.
Chavin W. (Ed.). 1973. Responses of Fish to Environmental Changes.
Charles C Thomas Publ.
Evans DH & Claiborne JB. 2006. The Physiology of Fishes. CRC Press.
Fiege U, Morimoto R & Yahara I. 1996. Stress- Inducible Cellular
Responses. Birkhäuser.
Jobling M. 1995. Environmental Biology of Fishes. Springer.
Pickering AD. 1981. Stress and Fish. Academic Press.
Rankin JC & Jensen FB. 1996. Fish Ecophysiology. Chapman & Hall.

166
 Schlesinger MJ, Ashburner M & Tissieres A. (Eds.). 1982. Heat Shock
Proteins from Bacteria to Man. Cold Spring Harbor.

FPB 513 TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES IN BIOCHEMISTRY 1+1

Objective
To learn different experimental techniques in fish Biochemistry.
Theory
UNIT I
Theory and application of colorimetry and spectrophotometry: Beer-
Lambert's law; Calibration plot; UV-visual, fluorescent, IR, CD
spectroscopy, Atomic mass spectroscopy and NMR.
UNIT II
Basic principles of chromatography: Theory and applications of paper,
affinity, column, thin layer, ion-exchange, size exclusion and gas
chromatography.
UNIT III
HPLC (High Pressure Liquid Chromatography); Factors affecting
chromatographic resolutions, resolving power and retention time; Methods
of preparing biological samples for chromatographic analysis.
UNIT IV
Radioimmunoassay (RIA) and Enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
(ELISA): Basic principle and application in quantitative estimation of
biological analytes.
UNIT V
Theory and applications of electrophoresis; Gel electrophoresis of proteins
and nucleic acids.
UNIT VI
Determination of molecular weight of proteins and nucleic acids; Principle
and uses of ultracentrifugation; Types of rotors and their applications X-ray
crystallography, MALDI-TOS.
UNIT VII
Beta and gamma scintillation counters, autoradiography and uses of radio
isotopes in fisheries research.
Practical
Quantitative estimation of biomolecules by spectrophotometric methods;
Estimation of proteins by different methods (Lowry, Biuret, Bradford);
Separation of amino acids by paper chromatography Qualitative and
quantitative estimation of fatty acids by gas chromatography; Separation of
proteins and nucleic acids by gel electrophoresis; Application of swing out
and fixed angle rotors in ultra centrifugation.
Suggested Readings
Brewer JM, Pesce AJ & Ashworth RB. 1974. Experimental Techniques in
Biochemistry. Prentice-Hall.
Diamond PS & Denman RF. 1966. Laboratory Techniques in Chemistry
and Biochemistry. Butterworths.
Schreck CB & Moyle PB. 1990. Methods for Fish Biology. American
Fisheries Society, USA.

167
FPB 514 BIOCHEMISTRY OF ENZYMES, VITAMINS, 2+1
MINERALS AND HORMONES
Objective
To acquaint students with different aspects of enzymes, vitamins, minerals
and hormones.
Theory
UNIT I
Enzymes: Nomenclature, classification and structure of enzymes, Active
site; Concepts of activation energy, Transition state and enzyme-substrate
complex, Units of enzyme activity, Factors affecting enzyme activity,
Enzyme kinetics; Km and Vmax values; Lineweaver and Burke Plots,
Competitive and noncompetitive inhibition, Ribozymes; Immobilized and
restriction enzymes.
UNIT II
Vitamins: Chemical structure, sources, biosynthesis and properties of water
and fat soluble vitamins, Metabolic changes associated with hypo and
hyper-vitaminosis.
UNIT III
Minerals: Biological significance of calcium, phosphorous, magnesium,
zinc, manganese, selenium, cobalt, sodium, potassium, iron.
UNIT IV
Hormones: Classification and functional properties of different hormones;
Chemical structure of peptide and steroid hormones; Biosynthesis,
secretion and metabolic role of thyroid, adrenal, gonadal, pancreatic,
hypothalamic and hypophyseal hormones, Hormone receptors and their
regulation, Mechanism of hormone action at cellular level.
Practical
Assay of enzyme activity (alkaline phosphatase, transaminases);
Quantitative estimation of vitamin A; Estimation of serum calcium and
phosphorous; Analysis of peptides from fish pituitary homogenate.
Suggested Readings
Conn EE & Stumpf PK. 1987. Outline of Biochemistry. Wiley.
Houlihan DF, Carter CG, McCarthy ID & Hochachka PW. 1995.
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology of Fishes. Elsevier.
Murray RK, Granner DK, Mayes PA & Rodwell VW. 2000. Harper’s
Biochemistry. Appleton & Lange.
Nelson DL & Cox MM. 2005. Principles of Biochemistry. WH Freeman.

FPB 515 DIAGNOSTIC BIOCHEMISTRY 1+1

Objective
To acquaint students with different aspects of biochemical diagnostic
Techniques.
Theory
UNIT I
OIE (Office of the international epizootics) listed diseases of finfish and
shellfish in the world and their approved diagnostic methods.
UNIT II
Enzymes and isoenzymes of clinical significance; Metabolic disorders
related to carbohydrate, lipid, protein and nucleic acid metabolism in fishes.

168
 UNIT III
Biochemical markers for EUS, viral haemorrhagic septicaemia, enteritis
and spring viraemia in carp; Bacterial kidney diseases (BKD) and WSSV
diagnosis; Biochemical indicators for stress.
UNIT IV
Biochemical techniques for identification of liver diseases, bone disorder
and pesticide poisoning.
UNIT V
Molecular basis of autoimmunity; Detoxification mechanisms of gill, liver
and kidney.
UNIT VI
DNA fingerprinting and its applications in clinical biochemistry.
Practical
Specimen collection, identification, transport, delivery, preparation and
preservation of samples; Estimation of blood glucose, albumin and
globulin; Identification of pathogens by PCR and DNA fingerprinting in
finfish and shellfish; Disease diagnosis by histopathology, histochemistry
and X-ray techniques; Liver and plasma enzyme assay (GOT, GPT, ALP
and AChE); Analysis of stress proteins.
Suggested Readings
Brewer JM, Pesce AJ & Ashworth RB. 1974. Experimental Techniques in
Biochemistry. Prentice-Hall.
Conn EE & Stumpf PK. 1987. Outline of Biochemistry. Wiley.
Diamond PS & Denman RF. 1966. Laboratory Techniques in Chemistry
and Biochemistry. Butterworths.
Houlihan DF, Carter CG, McCarthy ID & Hochachka PW. 1995.
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology of Fishes. Elsevier.
Murray RK, Granner DK, Mayes PA & Rodwell VW. 2000. Harper’s
Biochemistry. Appleton & Lange.
Nelson DL & Cox MM. 2005. Principles of Biochemistry. WH Freeman.
Schreck CB & Moyle PB. 1990. Methods for Fish Biology. American
Fisheries Society, USA.

169
 FISH PHYSIOLOGY AND BIOCHEMISTRY
List of Journals

• Chemical Senses
• Comparative Biochemistry and Physiology
• Environmental Contamination and Toxicology
• European Journal of Pharmacology
• Experientia
• Fish and Shellfish Immunology.
• Fish Physiology and Biochemistry
• General and Comparative Endocrinology
• Immunopharmacology
• Journal of Neuroscience
• Journal of Animal Ecology
• Journal of Animal Physiology and Animal Nutrition
• Journal of Biology
• Journal of Comparative Neurology
• Journal of Ecology, Ecosystems and Ecophysiology
• Journal of Ecophysiology and Occupational Health
• Journal of Experimental Biology
• Journal of Fish and Shellfish Immunology
• Journal of Fish Behaviour
• Journal of Fish Biology
• Journal of Fish Diseases
• Journal of Fish Physiology and Biochemistry
• Journal of Immunopharmacology
• Journal of Muscle Research and Cell Motility
• Journal of Research Methods and Methodological Issues
• Journal of Thermal Biology
• Toxicology Letters

Suggested Broad Areas for Master’s and Doctoral Research

• Role of hormones and growth factors in the regulation of growth

• Diurnal rhythymicity of food intake and growth rate
• Environmental and hormonal control of fish reproduction
• Isolation and characterization of gonadotropin
• Nutritional strategies for fish reproduction
• Isolation and characterization of genes
• Role of carbohydrates, lipids and proteins on metabolism during stress.
• Mechanism of gaseous exchange
• Hypoxia as endocrine disrupters
• Identification and application of nutraceuticals on immunity
• Endocrine control of immunity.
• Identification and characterization of thermo tolerance gene
• Adaptive mechanism to altered environment
• Bioluminiscence, chromatophores

170
• Chromatophore responses in relation to eye stalk ablation.
• Behavioural studies during reproduction
• Behavioural pattern in altered environment.
• Metabolism and pharmaco- kinetics of drugs
• Protein requirement studies based on nitrogen excretion
• Osmotic and ionic regulation in altered environment
• Development of new methods for quantification of biomolecules
• Role vitamin and hormone on growth and reproduction
• Development of vaccines against common diseases

171
 FISH PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY
Course Structure - at a Glance
CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS
FPT 501* TECHNOLOGY OF FREEZING AND STORAGE 2+1
FPT 502* THERMAL PROCESSING OF FISHERY PRODUCTS 2+1
FPT 503* QUALITY ASSURANCE, MANAGEMENT AND 2+1
CERTIFICATION
FPT 504* APPLIED FISH BIOCHEMISTRY 2+1
FPT 505 TECHNIQUES IN MICROBIOLOGY 1+1
FPT 506 CURED, DEHYDRATED AND SMOKED FISHERY PRODUCTS 1+1
FPT 507 HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT OF FRESH FISH 1+1
FPT 508 TECHNOLOGY OF MINCE-BASED FISH PRODUCTS 1+1
FPT 509 ADDITIVES IN FISH PROCESSING 1+1
FPT 510 FISH BY-PRODUCTS AND WASTE UTILIZATION 1+1
FPT 511 MICROORGANISMS OF PUBLIC HEALTH SIGNIFICANCE 1+1
FPT 512 DESIGN, MAINTENANCE OF FISH PROCESSING PLANTS 1+1
AND INSTRUMENTATION
FPT 513 PACKAGING OF FISH AND FISHERY PRODUCTS 1+1

FPT 591 MASTER’S SEMINAR 1+0

FPT 599 MASTER’S RESEARCH 20

FPT 601** BIOCHEMICAL TECHNIQUES IN FISH ANALYSIS 2+1

FPT 602** FUNCTIONAL PROPERTIES OF PROTEINS FROM FISH AND 2+1
SHELLFISH
FPT 603** QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 2+1
FPT 604 LIPIDS OF AQUATIC ORIGIN 2+1
FPT 605 MICROBIAL HAZARDS IN FISH PROCESSING 2+1
FPT 606 VITAMINS, MINERALS AND FLAVOUR BEARING 2+1
COMPONENTS IN AQUATIC ORGANISMS
FPT 607 TOXINS AND CONTAMINANTS 2+1
FPT 608 NUTRITIONAL ASPECTS AND NUTRITION LABELING 2+1
FPT 609 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT OF FISHERY INDUSTRIES 2+1
FPT 610 BY-PRODUCTS, SPECIALTY PRODUCTS AND VALUE 2+1
ADDED PRODUCTS

FPT 691 DOCTORAL SEMINAR I 1+0

FPT 692 DOCTORAL SEMINAR II 1+0

FPT 699 DOCTORAL RESEARCH 45

* Compulsory for Master’s programme; ** Compulsory for Doctoral programme

172
 FISH PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY
Course Contents

FPT 501 TECHNOLOGY OF FISH FREEZING AND FROZEN 2+1

STORAGE
Objective
To give detailed insight into various aspects of freezing of fish.
To provide understanding on chemical, bacterial and sensory changes
during freezing.
Theory
UNIT I
Freezing: Structure of water and ice, Influence of solutes on the structure of
water and ice, phase equlibria and freezing curves of pure water and binary
solutions, freezing curve for fish. Determination of freezing points from
time- temperature plots, calculation of freezing time.
UNIT II
Crystallization, homogeneous and heterogeneous nucleation, super cooling,
crystal growth, eutectic point, location of ice crystals in tissue, physical
changes during freezing.
UNIT III
Technological aspects of freezing: Slow and rapid freezing, Methods of
freezing, comparison of various freezing methods, selection of a freezing
method, product processing, packaging and different types of freezers.
UNIT IV
Chemical treatment prior to freezing: antioxidants, cryoprotectants and
other additives, theories of cryopreservation, glazing.
UNIT V
Frozen storage: Physical and chemical changes - freezer burn and
recrystallisation, different types of recrystallisation.
UNIT VI
Chemical changes in lipids, proteins and nucleotides, freeze denaturation
and theories on denaturation, changes in pH, bacterial changes, sensory
changes, texture, taste, odour, effect of post-mortem condition on sensory
qualities.
UNIT VII
Water holding capacity, time temperature tolerance, temperature and
duration of storage on quality and shelf life.
UNIT VIII
Arrangements within a cold storage, handling and stacking systems, space
requirement, precautions to reduce temperature increase in a cold storage.
UNIT IX
Filleting of fish, treatments, glazing, packaging and freezing. Processing of
prawns, lobster, squid, cuttle fish, crab etc. for freezing.
UNIT X
Different methods of thawing frozen fish, advantages and disadvantages.
Recent advances in fish thawing.
Practical
Filleting of fish, treatments, glazing, packaging, freezing, Processing of
Prawns, Lobster, Squid, Cuttle Fish, Crab etc. in different styles, Packaging

173
 and Freezing, Freezing curve, determination of freezing point. Studies on
physical, chemical and sensory changes.
Suggested Readings
Andrew CC. 1990. Food Refrigeration Processes. Elsevier.
Balachandran KK. 2001. Post-harvest Technology of Fish and Fish
Products. Daya Publ. House.
Clucas IJ. 1981. Fish Handling, Preservation and Processing in the
Tropics. Parts I, II. FAO.
Fennema K, Powrie WD & Marth EH. 1973. Low Temperature
Preservation of Foods and Living Matter. Marcel Dekker.
Gopakumar K. (Ed.). 2002. Text Book of Fish Processing Technology.
ICAR.
Hall GM. (Ed). 1992. Fish Processing Technology. Blackie.
Nambudiri DD. 2006. Technology of Fishery Products. Fishing Chimes.
Regenssein JM & Regenssein CE. 1991. Introduction to Fish Technology.
Van Nostrand Reinhold.
Rudolf K. 1969. Freezing and Irradiation of Fish. Fishing News (Books).
Sen DP. 2005. Advances in Fish Processing Technology. Allied Publ.

FPT 502 THERMAL PROCESSING OF FISHERY 2+1

PRODUCTS
Objective
To provide information on various aspects of thermal / heat processing.
To compare cold sterilization with thermal processing.
To impart knowledge on various types of packaging techniques and
materials used in thermal processing.
Theory
UNIT I
Principles of thermal processing. Mechanism of heat transfer: conduction,
convection, radiation and dielectric and microwave heating, unsteady state
of transfer, heat resistance of bacteria and spores, decimal reduction time,
thermal death time, "Z" and "F" values, 12D concept, heat penetration, cold
point, can size, shape, contents etc. on heat penetration, determination of
process time. Significance of thermal death curve, graphical, formula,
nomogram methods – F0 value, cook value, D value, integrated F value and
their inter-relationship. Heating equipment.
UNIT II
Classification of foods: low acid, medium acid and acidic foods, absolute
sterility, statistical sterility, commercial sterility, pasteurisation and
sterilisation.
UNIT III
Canning process, steps involved, process flow, additives, HTST processing
and aseptic canning, principles and process details, canning machinery and
equipment, canning process for fish/shellfish, value added and ready to use
canned products.
UNIT IV
HACCP and Safety of canned foods and unreliability of post process
sampling of canned foods to ensure sterilization. Status of a batch of
canned foods identifying CCPs and their monitoring by specially trained
personnel.

174
 UNIT V
Spoilage of canned food, physical, chemical and microbial,
Thermobacteriology, death of bacteria, autosterilisation bacteriology of
canned/heat processed fishery products, examination of cans and seams.
UNIT VI
Canning plant location: Practical considerations, canning plant facilities,
layout design.
UNIT VII
Flexible packing, retort pouch processing of fish and fishery products
principles and techniques. Combination and synergistic effects.
UNIT VIII
Hurdle technology: Combination with heat, heat and hydrostatic pressure,
heat and low pH, heat and NaCI and nitrite, combination with ionising
radiation, irradiation and hydrostatic pressure, irradiation and NaCI,
irradiation and other adjuncts, heat and irradiation, irradiation and low
temperature, low pH and specific acids, low aw and adjuncts like Nisin to
reduce severity of heat processing.
UNIT IX
Irradiation: Radiation sources, units, dose levels, radappertization,
radicidation, radurization, effects of irradiation on protein, lipids, vitamins,
bacteriological aspects, physical properties, shelf life and irradiated fish
products.
Practical
Evaluation of pasteurisation and sterilisation, determination of TDT and F
value Examination of canned foods, can seams, testing sterility, isolation of
Bacillus and Clostridium Spp., spore staining, heat penetration curve and
cooling curve, canning operations for different fish/shellfish products.
Double seam profile, Heat Penetration Curve, F0 Value, Z value, Process
time, Canning of table fishes, Bivavles, Crustaceans in different containers,
Operation of over pressure autoclave, Canned culinary preparations,
Examination of canned fishery products.
Suggested Readings
Balachandran KK. 2002. Fish Canning Principles and Practices. CIFT,
Cochin.
Gopakumar K. 2002. Text Book of Fish Processing Technology. ICAR.
Hall GM. (Ed). 1992. Fish Processing Technology. Blackie.
Hersom AC & Hulland ED. 1980. Canned Foods. Chemical Publ. Co.
Larousse J & Brown BE. 1997. Food Canning Technology. Wiley VCH.
Nambudiri DD. 2006. Technology of Fishery Products. Fishing Chimes.
Stumbo. 1973. Thermo Bacteriology in Food Processing. CRC, Academic
Press.
Thorne S. 1991. Food Irradiation. Elsevier.
Venugopal V. 2006. Seafood Processing. Taylor & Francis.
Warne D. 1988. Manual on Fish Canning. FAO Fisheries Tech. Paper 285.
Zeathen P. 1984. Thermal Processing and Quality of Foods. Elsevier.

175
FPT 503 QUALITY ASSURANCES, MANAGEMENT AND 2+1
CERTIFICATION
Objective
To understand various aspects of quality assurance system, quality
management and national / international certification system.
To learn factory sanitation and hygiene, water quality and standard
Theory
UNIT I
Quality management, total quality concept and application in fish trade.
UNIT II
Quality assessment of fish and fishery products - physical, chemical,
organoleptic and microbiological quality standards.
UNIT III
Inspection and quality assurance: Fish inspection in India, process water
quality in fishery industry, product quality.
UNIT IV
Water quality and standards.
UNIT V
Sensory evaluation of fish and fish products, basic aspects, different
methods of evaluation, taste panel selection and constitution, statistical
analysis.
UNIT VI
HACCP and Good manufacturing practices. HACCP principles, practical
aspects of planning and implementation, verification, validation and audit.
UNIT VII
National and International standards: ISO 9000: 2000 series of quality
assurance system, Codex alimentarius, USFDA and EU regulations for fish
export trade, IDP and SAT formations in certification of export worthiness
of fish processing units, regulations for fishing vessels, pre-processing and
processing plants, EU regulations. ISO 22000:2006.
UNIT VIII
Factory sanitation and hygiene: National and international requirements,
SSOP, Sanitary and Phytosanitary measures.
UNIT IX
Food laws in India, integrated food law.
Practical
Evaluation of fish / fishery products for organoleptic, chemical and
microbial quality. Methods for analysis for bacterial quality parameters,
chemical parameters and filth. Evaluation of sanitary conditions in fish
processing units. Analysis of typical hazards. Study of correction and
corrective action. SQC: Introduction, statistical principles involved, process
control, control charts, variable and attribute control charts, Acceptance
sampling, basic ideas, sampling by attributes single and double sampling
plants, Basic concepts of decision making. Familiarization with water
quality analysis.
Suggested Readings
Anthony TT. 1988. Handbook of Natural Toxins. Marine Toxins and
Venom. Vol. III. Marcel Dekker.
Balachandran KK. 2001. Post Harvest Technology of Fish and Fish
Products. Daya Publ. House.

176
 Connell JJ. 1995. Control of Fish Quality. Fishing News Books.
Fennema K, Powrie WD & Marth EH. 1973. Low Temperature
Preservation of Foods and Living Matter. Marcel Dekker.
Gopakumar K. (Ed.). 2002. Text Book of Fish Processing Technology.
ICAR.
Hall GM. (Ed). 1992. Fish Processing Technology. Blackie.
Hui YH, Merle DP & Richard GJ. (Eds.). 2001. Food Borne Disease
Handbook. Seafood and Environmental Toxins. Vol. IV. Marcel
Dekker.
Huss HH, Jakobsen M & Liston J. 1991. Quality Assurance in the Fish
Industry. Elsevier.
John DEV. 1985. Food Safety and Toxicity. CRC Press.
Krenzer R. 1971. Fish Inspection and Quality Control. Fishing News.
Sen DP. 2005. Advances in Fish Processing Technology. Allied Publ.
Vincent K & Omachonu JER. 2004. Principles of Total Quality. CRC
Press.

FPT 504 APPLIED FISH BIOCHEMISTRY 2+1

Objective
To impart knowledge on macro and trace constituents and nutritive value of
fish.
To create basic understanding about toxins and toxic substances and their
toxic effects.
To give a detailed insight into experimental techniques used in food
analysis.
Theory
UNIT I
Seafood proteins: Classification. Sarcoplasmic proteins: Heme proteins,
Myoglobin, Hemocyanins, parvalbumins, antifreeze proteins, pigments,
enzymes- hydrolases, oxidoreductases, and other enzymes.
UNIT II
Myofibrillar proteins: Myosin – isolation, sub-unit composition, actin,
allergins, tropomyosin, troponins, paramyosin, connectin.
UNIT III
Stroma proteins: Connective tissue in the muscle, collagen in fish muscle
and skin: location, characteristics of seafood collagen, collagen on the
quality of seafoods, gaping.
UNIT IV
Functional properties of seafood proteins: Solubility, emulsification,
viscosity, water holding, stability, gelation, texture profile analysis.
UNIT V
Changes in proteins during processing: Denaturation- At high and low
temperatures and kinetics, dissociation / aggregation / coagulation,
reversibility, significance to processing and quality. Hydrolysis and
hydrolysates: Process and applications, proteinases.
UNIT VI
Post mortem biochemical changes, rigor mortis, K-value, TMAO and its
decomposition products, demethylase.

177
 UNIT VII
Non-protein nitrogenous compounds: Free amino acids, peptides,
nucleotides, guanidins, urea, quarternary ammonium compounds etc.
UNIT VIII
Seafood lipids: Composition and nutritive value, lipid types and their
variations, lipid fractionation, estimation of lipid fractions, triglycerides,
phospholipids, non-saponifiables including sterols and vitamins.
Polyunsaturated fatty acids and prostaglandins- beneficial effects on human
health.
UNIT IX
Fatty acid composition of fish liver and body oils, auto-oxidation of fatty
acids, rancidity, lipasas and phospholipases, pro- and anti-oxidants,
oxidation indices, lipid-protein interactions, oxidized lipids-protein
interactions and their impact on quality.
UNIT X
Macro and trace elements in fish and shellfish; Vitamins and Minerals of
nutritional significance, toxic metals and their harmful effects and
metallothionines.
UNIT XI
Flavour and pigments; amines, volatile fatty acids, carbonyls, sulphur
containing compounds, carotenoids, isoprenoids in fish.
UNIT XII
Biogenic amines, Aflatoxins in cured fish.
UNIT XIII
Principles and methods involved in the separation and analysis of fish
muscle constituents: Thin layer, paper and column chromatography,
spectrophotometry, colorimetry, flame photometry, atomic absorption
spectrophotometry, paper, disc and slab electrophoresis.
Practical
Molarity, normality, acid-base, redox titration, buffers. Lipids –
Fractionation by TLC and other chromatographic techniques. Fatty acid
composition by GLC, Amino acid analysis by HPLC. Protein purification
methods: (NH4)2SO4/solvent precipitation. Ultracentrifugation, dialysis
and ultrafiltration, gel filtration, electrophoresis, PAGE and SDS-PAGE,
Marine polysaccharides for food use, molecular biology techniques in fish
and bacterial identification, and topical subjects.
Suggested Readings
George MP & Barbec WT. 1990. Seafood: Effects of Technology and
Nutrition. Marcel Dekker.
Joe MR & Carrie ER. 1984. Food Protein Chemistry. Academic Press.
Lehninger AL. 1982. Principle of Biochemistry. Worth Publ.
Michael ENA. 1990. Biochemistry of Foods. Academic Press.
Nettleton J. 1985. Seafood Nutrition. Van Nojhand Reinhold.
Owen RF. 1996. Food Chemistry. Marcel Dekker.
Pare JRJ & Belanger JMR. 1997. Instrumental Methods in Food Analysis.
Elsevier.
Pomeranz Y & Meloan CE. 1994. Food Analysis Theory and Practice. AVI
Publ.
Rao R. 1980. Textbook of Biochemistry. 2nd Ed. Prentice Hall of India.

178
 Regenstein JM & Regenstein CE. 1984. Food Protein Chemistry.
Academic Press.
Robert GA. 1989. Marine Biogenic Lipids Fats and Oils. Vol. II. CRC
Press.
Roy EM & George JF. 1990. The Sea Food Industry. Van Nostrand
Reinhold.
Roy EM, Geroge JF & Donn RW. 1982. Chemistry and Biochemistry of
Marine Food. Van Nostrand Reinhold.
Shahidi F & Botta JR. 1994. Seafoods: Chemistry, Processing Technology
and Quality. Blackie.
Smith EL, Hill RL, Lehman IR, Lefkowitz RJ, Handler P & White A. 1983.
The Principles of Biochemistry. McGraw-Hill.
Stewart KK. (Ed). 1984. Modern Methods of Food Analysis. AVI Publ.
Suzuki 1981. Fish and Krill Protein Processing Technology. Applied
Science Publ.
Whitaker JR & Tannenbaum SR. 1977. Food Proteins. AVI Publ

FPT 505 TECHNIQUES IN MICROBIOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To learn basic techniques in Microbiology.
Theory
UNIT I
Safety in Microbiology laboratory – Prevention of contamination, aerosol
sampling, disinfection and evaluation of disinfectants.
UNIT II
Microscopy – bright-field, fluorescence, phase-contrast, dark ground and
electron microscope.
UNIT III
Staining techniques – Types of stains and chemistry of staining.
UNIT IV
Sterilisation – Principles of various physical and chemical methods of
sterilisation.
UNIT V
Nutritional requirements of microorganisms – constituents of growth
media, requirement of fastidious organisms alternate nutrition, different
types.
UNIT VI
Isolation, enumeration, preservation and maintenance of cultures - growth
curve, different types of cultures, population estimation techniques.
UNIT VII
Routine tests for identification of bacteria - morphological, cultural,
biochemical and serological. Anaerobic bacteria - methods of anerobiosis.
Basics of mycological and virological techniques. Introduction to
molecular techniques in Microbiology.
Practical
Microscopic techniques, isolation, enumeration and identification of
microorganisms, serological techniques, anaerobic bacteria, mycological,
virological and molecular techniques.

179
 Suggested Readings
Chakraborthy P. 1995. A Text Book of Microbiology. New Central Book
Agency.
Criusted J. 1986. Methods in Microbiology. Academic Press.
Harry WSJR, Paul JV & John JL. 2000. Microbes in Action. Freeman &
Co. II (ICMSF). Academic Press.
James M. 1978. Modern Food Microbiology. 2nd Ed. D. Van Nostrand Co.
Michael J, Pelizar JR & Chan ECS. 1998. Microbiology. McGraw Hill.
Paul JH. 2001. Marine Microbiology- Methods in Microbiology. Vol.
XXX. Academic Press.
Samuel CP & Dunn CG. 1959. Industrial Microbiology. McGraw Hill.
Silliker JH, Elliof RP, Baired AC & Boyan FL. 1980. Microbial Ecology of
Foods. [Link]. (ICMSF). Academic Press.
William CF & Dennis CW. 2000. Food Microbiology. McGraw Hill.

FPT 506 CURED, DEHYDRATED, SMOKED FISHERY 1+1

PRODUCTS
Objective
To create understanding on various scientific preservation techniques of
fish.
To impart knowledge on changes during storage of products.
Theory
UNIT I
Free and bound water in foods, water activity and sorption behaviours of
foods, storage characteristics, microbial spoilage, effects of water activity
on chemical deterioration, enzymatic reaction, non-enzymatic browning,
lipid oxidation, reaction between lipids and proteins, dry fish, control of
micro-organisms.
UNIT II
Principles of drying and dehydration: Psychometrics, drying calculation,
constant rate and falling rate, drying time in air, moisture transport
mechanism, natural drying, solar drying and mechanical drying. Different
types of dryers: tunnel drier, vacuum drier, drum drier, solar drier etc.
UNIT III
Freeze drying, preparation and its nutritive value.
UNIT IV
Dehydration of fish products: dehydration ratio, precautions to be taken in
fish drying; denaturation of fish protein.
UNIT V
Cured fish, types of salt curing, use of salt, factors affecting salt uptake by
fish, lean and fatty fish, whole, gutted or split open, type and size of salt
crystals, source of salts and impurities in salts, effect of impurities on salt
penetration, temperature of salting.
UNIT VI
Spoilage of dried / cured fish, physical, chemical and microbiological
changes, methods to prevent / control spoilage, extension of shelf life.
UNIT VII
Fermented products: different methods of fermentation, indigenous
products and their principles of preservation.

180
 UNIT VIII
Smoke curing, chemistry of smoke, composition and properties, smoking
methods: cold and hot method, use of smoke liquids, production of smoke,
type of wood used, methods of smoke generation, carcinogens in smoke,
smoke kilns.
UNIT IX
Marinades: Principles; processing of cold, cooked and fried marinades,
shelf life and spoilage.
UNIT X
Fish and shellfish pickles: production, shelf life.
UNIT XI
Packaging requirements for dry, cured and fermented products.
Practical
Preparation of dried, cured and fermented fish products, examination of
salt, protein, moisture in dried / cured products, examination of spoilage of
dried / cured fish products, marinades, pickles, sauce.
Suggested Readings
Gopakumar K. 2002. Text Book of Fish Processing Technology. ICAR.
Hall GM. 1992. Fish Processing Technology. Blackie.
Hui YH, Merle DP & Richard JG. 2001. Food Borne Disease Handbook.
Seafood and Environmental Toxins. [Link]. Marcel Dekker.
Oefjen G, Wilhelm H & Peter. 2004. Freeze Drying. Wiley-VCH GmbH &
Co.
Sen DP. 2005. Advances in Fish Processing Technology. Allied Publ.
Wheaton FW & Lawson TB. 1985. Processing Aquatic Food Products.
John Wiley & Sons.

FPT 507 HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT OF 1+1

FRESH FISH
Objective
To teach scientific techniques of handling, storage and transport of fresh
fish.
To teach various post harvest changes during chill storage of fish.
Theory
UNIT I
Structure of fish myosystems, Postmortem changes - Structural and
chemical.
UNIT II
Fish as raw material for processing: Body structure, physical properties,
shape, specific weight, bulk weight, angle of slip, weight composition.
UNIT III
Factors affecting quality of fresh fish: intrinsic and extrinsic factors.
UNIT IV
Handling of fish onboard fishing vessels, Unit operations.
UNIT V
Unloading fish, Fish pumps.
UNIT VI
Post-harvest Fishery losses, Methods to reduce losses.
UNIT VII
Handling of fish in landing centers, defects and modifications needed.

181
 UNIT VIII
Chill storage of fish: Heat load calculation, storage methods. insulated
boxes and insulation thickness, different types of ice, physical, chemical,
microbiological and sensory changes during chill storage, iced storage shelf
life, cold shock, physical, chemical and sensory methods of analysis.
UNIT IX
Different types of ice and their advantages.
UNIT X
Sous-vide technology.
UNIT XI
Melanosis and its prevention, discolouration in aquatic products, non-
enzymatic browning.
UNIT XII
Depuration of bivalves.
UNIT XIII
Transportation: Live fish/shell fish, Transportation of raw fish to local
markets and processing centres, Improvements needed in transportation,
Refrigerated transport systems, Classification of transport vehicles, Cold
chain.
Practical
Chill storage studies: Chemical, physical and sensory analysis,
determination of shelf life. Handling of fish, bivalves, prawns, mollusks,
Depuration, treatment with chemicals, evaluation of freshness of fish.
Suggested Readings
Aitken A, Mackie M, Merritt SH & Windsor ML. 1982. Fish Handling and
Processing. Ministry of Agriculture, Fisheries and Food,
Edinburgh.
Anon. 1965. Fish Handling and Preservation. Proc. Meeting on Fish
Technlogy, Scheveningen. Organisation for Economic Co-operation
and Development, Paris.
Balachandran KK. 2001. Post Harvest Technology of Fish and Fish
Products. Daya Publ.
Connell JJ. 1980. Advances in Fish Sciences and Technology. Farnhan
Surrey.
George MH. 1992. Fish Processing Technology. VCH Publ.
Gopakumar K. (Ed.). 2002. Text Book of Fish Processing Technology.
ICAR.
Sen DP. 2005. Advances in Fish Processing Technology. Allied Publ.

FPT 508 TECHNOLOGY OF MINCE BASED FISH 1+1

PRODUCTS
Objective
To provide knowledge on basic principles and advanced technologies in
processing of mince based fish products.
Theory
UNIT I
Composition of muscle proteins in fish and their role in emulsification and
elasticity formation.

182
 UNIT II
Factors influencing denaturation of muscle proteins and their theories.
Methods to testing protein denaturation.
UNIT III
Factors influencing elasticity formation and theories of gel formation.
Minced meat preparation from different varieties of fresh water and marine
water fishes.
UNIT IV
Improvement of colour of meat using bleaching and certain additives. Use
of anti-denaturants to prevent denaturation of proteins of fish mince during
storage. Changes in meat during mincing and mixing operations and
cooking and setting phenomena.
UNIT V
Technology of processing and preservation of gel forming fish flour
(AFPP), its property and utilisation. Unit operations in analog product
preparation- Crab sticks analogs, moulded lobsters and crabs.
UNIT VI
Battered and breaded products: different types and their preparation,
nutritional and economic significance of products.
UNIT VII
Use of emulsifiers, binders, seasonings, spices, antioxidants, smoke extract,
Preservatives, natural and artificial casings, nitrites and nitrates.
Fortification of fish products with vitamins and minerals. Quality standards
and recent developments.
Practical
Measurement of viscosity of fish proteins by Ostwald viscometer, effect of
water washing on the quality of meat, colour fixation of red colour meat
and estimation of nitrite. Studies on setting of fish meat. Estimation of
starch in the final paste product. Fundamentals of controlled stress
Rheometer. Effect of two stage heating of fish sol on gel strength.
Suggested Readings
Balachandran KK. 2001. Post Harvest Technology of Fish and Fish
Products. Daya Publ.
Bligh EG. 1992. Seafood Science and Technology. Fishing News Book.
Lanier TC & Lee C. 1992. Surimi Based Product Technology. Marcel
Dekker.
Matsumato JJ. 1980. Chemical Deterioration of Proteins. American
Chemical Society, Washington.
Sen DP. 2005. Advances in Fish Processing Technology. Allied Publ.
Suzuki. 1981. Fish and Krill Protein Processing Technology. Applied
Science Publ.

FPT 509 ADDITIVES IN FISH PROCESSING 1+1

Objective
To familiarize with the use of different additives, their effects, levels and
detection.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction to food additives-definition-technical benefits of food
additives-intentional and incidental additives.

183
 UNIT II
Relationship of great revolutions in history to the development of food
additives – Agricultural Revolution-Industrial revolutions – urbanization.
UNIT III
Intentional additives – use of specific nutrients as food additives –
Requirements and considerations. Minerals, vitamins, amino acids and
nutrient concentrates as additives, Incidental additives.
UNIT IV
Policy considerations in the use of food additives. Flavours and colour as
additives.
UNIT V
Antioxidants – Mechanism of antioxidants; commercial antioxidants and
selections.
UNIT VI
Analytical methods for antioxidants.
UNIT VII
Acidulants in food processing; Sequestrants in food processing;
Polyphosphates in fish processing.
Practical
Determination of food additives such as preservatives, antioxidants, curing
agents, chelating agents, acidulants and phosphates in various food
products. Detection of certain intentional and unintentional food additives
in foods.
Suggested Readings
Branen AL, Davidson PM & Salmiven S. 1990. Food Additives. Marcel
Dekker.
Middle KRD & Shubik P. 1989. International Food Regulation Handbook.
Marcel Dekker.
Rahman MS. 2007. Handbook of Food Preservation. 2nd Ed. CRC Press.
Sen DP. 2005. Advances in Fish Processing Technology. Allied Publ.
Wheaton FW & Lawson TB. 1985. Processing Aquatic Food Products.
John Wiley & Sons.

FPT 510 FISH BY-PRODUCTS AND UTILIZATION OF 1+1

FISHERY WASTE
Objective
To provide information on various fish by-products, utilization of fishery
wastes and their nutritional value.
Theory
UNIT I
Fish meal: Production - dry and wet process, machinery, control of quality
of products, specifications, packaging and storage.
UNIT II
Fish body and liver oils: Extraction, purification, preservation and storage,
industrial and nutritional applications of fish oils. Vitamin A and D.
UNIT III
Essential fatty acid functions of fish oils, poly-unsaturated fatty acid
(PUFA), production of concentrates of polyunsaturated fatty acids,
preparation of fatty alcohol and amides.

184
 UNIT IV
Utilisation of shark: Processing of shark meat, removal of urea in meat,
filleting, curing and dehydration, extraction of shark liver oil, Vitamin A,
D, squalene, ambergris, curing and tanning of shark skin, shark cartilage.
UNIT V
Shrimp waste, crab shell and squilla utilisation: Resources and
composition, conventional uses, feeds and manure, conversion to useful
materials like chitin, chitosan, glucosamine hydrochloride, shrimp extract,
commercial production, production and use of protein isolates from squilla
and shrimp waste.
UNIT VI
Fish protein concentrate: Different methods of production, functional
properties, different types of FPC, texturised products and comparison of
FPC to fish meal.
UNIT VII
Fish silage: Acid silage and fermented silage, advantages over fish meal,
nutritional value of silage.
UNIT VIII
Fish hydrolysates: Production and utilisation, biochemical composition and
importance in food and nutrition.
UNIT IX
Miscellaneous by-products: Fish maws and isinglass, pearl essence,
fertilizer, beche-de-mer, processing of snail meat and jelly fish.
Practical
Preparation of fish meal, FPC, fish oils, chitin, chitosan, glucosamine
hydrochloride, fish maws, isinglass, agar, alginic acid, , glue, pearl essence,
fish sauce.
Suggested Readings
Balachandran KK. 2001. Post Harvest Technology of Fish and Fish
Products. Daya Publ.
Gopakumar K. (Ed.). 2002. Text Book of Fish Processing Technology.
ICAR.
Hall GM. (Ed.). 1992. Fish Processing Technology. Blackie.
Nambudiri DD. 2006. Technology of Fishery Products. Fishing Chimes.
Sen DP. 2005. Advances in Fish Processing Technology. Allied Publ.
Wheaton FW & Lawson TB. 1985. Processing Aquatic Food Products.
John Wiley & Sons.
Windsor M & Barlow. 1981. Introduction to Fishery Byproducts. Fishing
News (Books).

FPT 511 MICROORGANISMS OF PUBLIC HEALTH 1+1

SIGNIFICANCE
Objective
To acquaint students regarding bacteria, virus and parasites; food-borne
diseases and their prevention.
Theory
UNIT I
Infection and immunity; diseases and their classification, spreading and
contamination, host resistance.

185
 UNIT II
Bacteria of public health significance in fish/fishery products/environments
- Salmonella, Clostridia, Staphylococcus, E. coli, Streptococcus, Vibrio,
Aeromonas, Listeria, Yersinia, Bacillus. Laboratory techniques for
detection and identification of food poisoning bacteria.
UNIT III
Food-borne bacterial infections. Food infections by Salmonella,
Clostridium perfringens, Vibrio parahaemoliticus, Enteropathogenic E.
coli, Aeromonas hydrophila etc., the nature of causative agent, its source,
incidence, foods involved, the diseases, conditions for outbreak and
prevention. The etiology of diseases: Conditions for outbreak and
prevention.
UNIT IV
Botulism and staphylococcal food poisoning, organism responsible and
their origin, growth and toxin production, nature of toxins, incidence of
poisoning, foods involved.
UNIT V
Food borne non-bacterial infections and intoxications: Aflatoxins, patulin,
ochratoxin and other fungal toxins found in food, toxin producer, source,
nature of toxin, toxicity and significance in foods.
UNIT VI
Virus and Parasites found in foods.
Practical
Laboratory techniques to detect and identify pathogens in fish - [Link],
Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococus faecalis, Clostridium perfrigens,
Clostridium botulinum, Salmonella, Listeria, Vibrio cholera, Vibrio
parabaemolyticus, V. vulnificus, Animal bio-assay of bacterial toxins.
Suggested Readings
Anon. 2001. Food Borne Disease Handbook. 2nd Ed. Vol. IV. Seafood and
Environmental Toxins. Marcel Dekker.
Davis BD, Dulbecco R, Eiser HN & Ginsberg HS. 1980. Microbiology.
Harpar & Row.
Doyle MP, Beuchat LR & Montville TJ. 1997. Food Microbiology -
Fundamentals and Frontiers. American Society for Microbiology.
Harry WSJR, Paul JV & John JL. 2000. Microbes in Action. Freeman &
Co.
Michael J, Pelizar JR & Chan ECS. 1998. Microbiology. McGraw Hill.
Samuel CP & Dunn CG. 1959. Industrial Microbiology. McGraw Hill.
Silliker JH, Elliof RP, Baired AC & Boyan FL. 1980. Microbial Ecology of
Foods. Vol. II. (ICMSF). Academic Press.
William CF & Dennis CW. 2000. Food Microbiology. McGraw Hill.

FPT 512 DESIGN, MAINTENANCE OF FISH PROCESSING 1+1

PLANTS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Objective
To expose the students to design, maintenance of fish processing plant,
machinery and the instruments used in fish processing plants.

186
Theory
UNIT I
Plant design: Fundamentals of processing plant design: Site selection,
design and preparation of layout of processing plants - freezing plant, cold
storage, canning plant, dryers etc.
UNIT II
Functions and construction of refrigeration system: Tests and inspection,
Operation and handling, P-H diagram and basic calculation - Application of
P-H diagram, size and required power of compressor, maintenance of
refrigerating machine, troubles and causes.
UNIT III
Preventive maintenance of machinery and equipment of fish processing
plants, IQF, Canning plant, sausage plant, artificial dryers, smoking
chambers etc., safety controls for freezing and canning plant.
UNIT IV
Effluent treatment: Legislation and standards of effluent discharge, water
pollution control measures in the food industry, waste water treatment
process; dissolved air floatation, sedimentation, chemical treatment,
biological treatment, aeration, carbon adsorption, granular media filtration
and sludge handling. Boilers - Classification and selection of boilers, Boiler
mounting and accessories.
UNIT V
Measurement techniques; Sensors, active and passive sensors,
characteristic of sensors for the measurement of temperature, relative
humidity, aw value, gel strength, moisture, freshness, pH, conductivity, DO,
redox potential, salinity, air velocity, solar energy and brine concentration.
UNIT VI
Thermometers: Different types of thermometers, characteristics and
application.
UNIT VII
Instrumentation techniques: General configuration of instrumentation
system. Instrumentation for measurement of aw value, temperature, pH,
freshness, gel strength, salinity, brine concentration.
UNIT VIII
Thermal properties of foods: Calorie, heat loss, heat gain, specific heat,
Newton's laws of cooling, heat transfer, latent heat, laws of fusion, thermal
conductors, thermal diffusivity.
Practical
Design and Maintenance of Fish Processing Plants; Operation and
maintenance of machinery and equipment for cold storage plant, freezing
plant, canning plant, sausage making, dryers, boilers etc. Assembly of a
refrigeration unit and charging refrigerant. Instrumentation; Measurement
of temperature inside cold storage / freezer, fish during freezing and
thawing. Estimation of Gel strength. Measurement of solar radiation, air
velocity, air temperature. Measurement of salinity, conductivity, pH.
Estimation of water activity.
Suggested Readings
Chupakhim V & Dormenko V. 1985. Fish Processing Equipments. MIR
Publ.
Heid JL & Joslyn MA. 1980. Food Processing Operations. AVI Publ.

187
 Slade FH. 1997. Food Processing Plants. Leonard Hill.
Wheaton FW & Lawson TB. 1985. Processing Aquatic Food Products.
John Wiley & Sons.

FPT 513 PACKAGING OF FISH AND FISHERY PRODUCTS 1+1

Objective
To learn about different packaging materials, their appropriate use and
benefits.
Theory
UNIT I
Food packaging, its purposes and procedures; technological aspects of
packaging fishery products; packing of fresh and frozen fish for consumers;
packaging for transport, shipping and institutional supplies; packaging
standards for domestic and international trade.
UNIT II
Packaging materials; basic films and laminates, their manufacture and
identification; resistance of packaging materials; development of protective
packaging for fishery products.
UNIT III
Methods of testing for packaging materials for their physical properties;
containers and their testing and evaluation; package designs; resistance of
packages to hazards in handling; transport and storage.
UNIT IV
Modified atmosphere packaging, controlled packaging and aseptic
packaging.
UNIT V
Labelling and printing of packaging materials.
Practical
Assessment of quality parameters such as moisture permeability, grease
resistance, thickness/guage of basic plastic films and laminates. Quality
assessment of paper and board and the products prepared from them.
Evaluation of packages with regard to the resistance to handling,
transportation and storage.
Suggested Readings
Balachandran KK. 2001. Post Harvest Technology of Fish and Fish
Products. Daya Publ.
Gopakumar K. 1993. Fish Packaging Technology - Materials and Methods.
Concept Publ.

FPT 601 BIOCHEMICAL TECHNIQUES IN FISH ANALYSIS 2+1

Objective
To provide knowledge on various biochemical techniques in fish analysis.
Theory
UNIT I
General principles of separation of micro and macro molecules, selection of
appropriate tools for analysis of fish samples. Outlines of common
techniques involved in biochemical analysis.
UNIT II
Centrifugation techniques: types of centrifugation, concept of Svedberg
unit, analytical ultracentrifuge.

188
 UNIT III
Filtration technique: different types of filtration, types of filters and means
of using them.
UNIT IV
Spectroscopic techniques: Principles, UV, Visible and IR spectroscopy,
spectro-fluorimetry, flame photometry, atomic absorption
spectrophotometry, ICP- AES, mass spectrometer.
UNIT V
Electrophoretic techniques: General principles, Classification, Paper
electrophoresis, Native and reduced PAGE, IEF, capillary electrophoresis,
2D Gel electrophoresis.
UNIT VI
Chromatographic Techniques: General principles, types of chromatography
- adsorption, partition, ion-exchange, molecular sieve, affinity, gas
chromatography, thin layer chromatography.
UNIT VII
Gas chromatography: Theory and instrumentation.
UNIT VIII
High performance Liquid chromatography, LC MS-MS: Theory and
instrumentation.
Practical
Isolation of proteins: sarcoplasmic, myofibrillar, and stromal. Estimation of
proteins: Biuret, Lowry and Dye binding technique. Amino acid analysis,
non-protein nitrogen. Extraction and estimation of lipids: Measurement of
oxidation and hydrolysis of lipids, Fatty acid profile. Minerals and heavy
metals: Estimation by Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy and flame
photometer. HPLC- determination of histamine Demonstration of GC-MS-
MS, Separation of protein by electrophoresis.
Suggested Readings
Ewing GW. 1997. Analytical Instrumentation Handbook. Marcel Dekker.
Jean IJ & Ikim WJ. 1995. Analysis of Food for Nutrition Labeling and
Hazard Contaminants. Marcel Dekker.
Lampman P & Saunder K. 1979. Introductive Spectroscopy. College Publ.
Larsen BS & McEwen CN. 1988. Mass Spectrometry of Biological
Materials. Marcel Dekker.
Pare JRJ & Belanger JMR. 1997. Instrumental Methods in Food Analysis.
Elsevier.
Peary JA. 1981. Introduction to Analytical Gas Chromatography. Marcel
Dekker.
Robyt JF & White BJ. 1990. Biochemical Techniques - Theory and
Practice. Waveland Press.
Wilson K & Walker J. 2000. Practical Biochemistry - Principles and
Techniques. Cambridge University Press.
Wilson RH. 1994. Spectroscopic Techniques for Food Analysis. VCH Publ.

FPT 602 FUNCTIONAL PROPERTIES OF PROTEINS FROM 2+1

FISH AND SHELLFISH
Objective
To provide knowledge on those biochemical properties known to affect
product property.

189
Theory
UNIT I
Definition of functional properties and their importance in proteins from
fish. Typical functional properties of proteins in food system.
UNIT II
Protein structure and function: Protein folding and non-covalent forces
stabilizing protein structure with special reference to hydrophobic
interactions. Free energy and entropy concept in relation to hydrophobic
interaction. Surface hydrophobicity and its relation to functional
properties. Estimation of surface hydrophobicity and total hydrophobicity.
UNIT III
Solubulity and water sorption of proteins: Factors affecting protein
hydration. Viscosity in relation to protein hydration: Methods of estimating
viscosity.
UNIT IV
Gelation: Definition of gel, mechanism of formation of gel, factors
affecting the gel formation. Evaluation of gelling capacity- thermal,
rheological and microscopy.
UNIT V
Surfactant properties: emulsifying and foaming. Importance of emulsifying
properties of proteins. Theoretical concept of emulsion capacity and
stability. Interfacial properties, adsorption from solution. Methods of
estimating surface tension.
UNIT VI
Emulsion instability: Creaming, sedimentation, aggregation vs Brownian
aggregation. DLVO theory, microemulsions. Methods for estimation of
emulsion capacity and stability.
UNIT VII
Macromoleculear absorption and different stages of foaming. Foam
stability in relation to proteins structure. Foaming ability of different
protein systems with case studies.
UNIT VIII
Denaturation and functionality: Changes in functional properties of
proteins as affected by icing, freezing, drying, salting and heating.
Modification of proteins for improving functionality- Succinylation and
acetylation procedures.
Practical
Evaluation of different functional properties like water absorption, fat
absorption,, gelling, emulsification capacity and stability of fish/shell fish
proteins. Effect of pH, temperature and ionic strength on various functional
properties. Prediction of functional properties using model compounds.
Suggested Readings
Cherry JP. 1991. Protein Functionality in Foods. American Chemical
Society. Washington. D. C.
Damodaran S & Paraf A. 1997. Food Proteins and Their Applications.
Marcel Dekker.
Hill SE, Ledward DA & Mitchell JR. 1998. Functional Properties of Food
Macromolecules. 2nd Ed. Aspen Publ.
Nakai S & Modler HW. 1996. Food Proteins Properties and
Characterisation. VCH Publ.

190
 Phillips LG, Whitehead DM & Kinsella J. 1994. Structure, Function
Properties of Food Proteins. Academic Press.
Suzuki. 1981. Fish and Krill Protein Processing Technology. Applied
Science Publ.
Venugopal V. 2006. Seafood Processing. Taylor & Francis.

FPT 603 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 2+1

Objective
To familiarize students with different aspects of quality management
systems and evaluation techniques for seafood.
To teach Seafood Quality Assurance and Quality Assurance Systems.
Theory
UNIT I
Quality Management Systems: The concept of total quality management.
The principles of TQM. Zero defect planning, Quality circle, Quality link,
Quality culture. Statistical Quality Control. Quality as related to preprocess
handling, transportation, processing and storage.
UNIT II
Quality evaluation techniques for seafood: Physical, chemical.
Bacteriological and Instrumental methods of quality evaluation. Sensory
evaluation.
UNIT III
Quality standards: National and International – Codex, USFDA, EU norms,
ISO, BIS etc. standards for fish and fishery products.
UNIT IV
Seafood Quality Assurance and Quality Assurance Systems: Good
Manufacturing (GMP) and Good Hygiene Practices (GHP) - Codex
guidelines. The concept of HACCP in seafood safety. HACCP team
Management role and CCPs and implementation procedure for HACCP-
ISO 22000 FSMS. ISO 9000 series of standards. Cold schedule and
hotschedule for handling perishable commodities.
UNIT V
Validation of methods for quality assurance- Method selection, Quality
check, inter-lab comparision, proficiency testing. Primary standards.
Reference standards. Reference material (RM), Certified Reference
Material (CRM) and Standard Reference Material (SRM), Uncertainty and
Calculation of Uncertainty of Measurements.
UNIT VI
Sample Accountability: Sampling plan -probability sampling and non-
probability sampling.
Practical
Developing flow charts and exercises in identification of hazards-
preparation of hazard analysis worksheet, plan form and corrective action
procedures in processing of fish. Analysis of typical hazards, study of
correction and corrective action. Detection and estimation of important
toxic chemicals in food, quality defects.
Suggested Readings
Anon. 1992. TQM in New Product Manufacturing. McGraw Hill.
Anon. 1994. Introduction of Total Quality. Prentice Hall.
Anon. 1994. Principles of Total Quality. St. Leuie Press.

191
 Gorbutt J. 1997. Essentials of Food Microbiology. Arnold Hodder Headline
Group.
Huss HH. 2003. Assessment and Management of Seafood Safety and
Quality. FAO Tech. Paper No. 444.
Kanduri L & Eckhartt RA. 2002. Food Safety in Shrimp Processing.
Fishing News Books.
Kreuzer R. 1971. Fish Inspection and Quality Control. Fishing News
Books.
Shukla RK. 2006. Total Quality Management Practicing Manager. New
Royal Book.

FPT 604 LIPIDS OF AQUATIC ORIGIN 2+1

Objective
To impart knowledge on aquatic originated lipids, their metabolic activities
and biological significance.
Theory
UNIT I
Lipid classification: Triglycerides, phospholipids, steroids and other lipids.
Lipid micelles and bilayer.
UNIT II
Fatty acids: Classification, stereochemistry, nutritional significance of fatty
acids.
UNIT III
Source of lipids: Biosynthesis of lipids, lipid metabolism including that of
phospholipids, typical properties of marine lipids.
UNIT IV
Lipids in Biological membranes: Membrane proteins, lipoproteins,
transport across membranes.
UNIT V
Lipid metabolism: Fatty acid oxidation, ketone bodies, lipid biosynthesis,
regulation of cholesterol metabolism. Biological significance of marine
lipids. Ether lipids and Eicosanoids- their significance.
UNIT VI
Modern analytical techniques employed in lipid chemistry. Methods of
extracting poly-unsaturated fatty acids.
Practical
Extraction and fractionation of lipids. Fatty acid composition of different
lipid fractions. Evaluation of oxidation product of fish lipid during
processing and storage.
Suggested Readings
Akoh CC & Min DB. 1998. Food Lipids. Marcel Dekker.
Gurr MI, Harwood JL & Frayn KN. 2002. Lipid Biochemistry. 5th Ed.
Blackwell.
Jnsel P, Turna RE & Ross D. 2001. Nutrition. Jones & Bartlet.
Simpson DS. 1987. Food Biochemistry and Nutritional Value. Longman.
Voet D, Voet JG & Praff CD. 1998. Fundamentals of Biochemistry. John
Wiley.

192
FPT 605 MICROBIAL HAZARDS IN FISH PROCESSING 2+1
Objective
To provide theoretical and practical knowledge on various microbiological
related hazards in fish processing.
Theory
UNIT I
Public health microbiology- Food borne pathogens: Salmonella, Shigella,
Entero-pathogenic E. coli, Clostridium botulinum, Listeria monocytogenes,
Staph aureus and Vibrio cholerae, V. parahemolyticus. Emerging food-
borne pathogens. Water- borne, Air-borne and food-borne diseases.
UNIT II
Microbial virulence- infectious diseases. Virulence.
UNIT III
Microbial toxin production-opportunists and true pathogens.
UNIT IV
Methods for detection: Rapid detection and indirect detection methods of
pathogens and parasites. Method validation.
UNIT V
Antimicrobial systems and food preservation: ecological concepts:
Lactoperoxidase. Nisin, Lysozyme, Bacteriocins.
UNIT VI
Norms for using antimicrobial systems in food processing and preservation.
Food Safety, Risk analysis. Potential health hazards and risks associated
with fish products.
UNIT VII
Packaging and modified atmosphere on the microbiology and shelf life of
fishery products.
UNIT VIII
Predictive modeling in quality and safety assurance of fishery products.
Practical
Antibiotic assay, sensitivity tests, evaluation of antibacterial properties.
Analysis of fish product constituents. MIC, MCC, Risk analysis of
seafood.
Suggested Readings
Cary JW, Linz JE & Bhatnagar D. 2000. Microbial Food Borne Diseases.
Technomic Publ.
Doyle MP, Beuchat LR & Montville TJ. 1997. Food Microbiology -
Fundamentals and Frontiers. American Society for Microbiology.

FPT 606 VITAMINS, MINERALS AND FLAVOUR BEARING 2+1

CONSTITUENTS OF AQUATIC ORGANISMS
Objective
To study the compounds responsible for flavor and colour of fish and
shellfish.
Theory
UNIT I
Vitamins, minerals, pigments, flavour bearing constituents and other
components in aquatic organisms.

193
 UNIT II
Vitamins: Metabolic functions of vitamins, water-soluble and fat-soluble
vitamins. Vitamins from sea food.
UNIT III
Minerals: Role of trace elements in metabolism, trace elements of seafood,
toxic heavy metals in seafood.
UNIT IV
Pigments and flavour bearing compounds of aquatic origin, chemistry,
biochemical role, changes during processing of seafood.
UNIT V
Metabolic functions of hormones.
UNIT VI
Nucleoprotein, nucleic acids, nucleotides, nucleosides.
Practical
Modern methods for analysis of vitamins, minerals and nucleic acids.
Organoleptic evaluation of flavours and pigments. Extraction of flavours
and pigments and evaluation.
Suggested Readings
Ashrust PR. 1999. Food Flavourings. 3rd Ed. Aspen Publ.
Belitz HD & Grosch W. 1999. Food Chemistry. 2nd Ed. Springer.
Hutching JB. 1999. Food Colour and Appearance. 2nd Ed. Aspen Publ.
Teranishi R, Buttery RG & Shahidi F. 1989. Flavour Chemistry - Trends
and Developments. American Chemical Society, Washington, D. C.

FPT 607 TOXINS AND CONTAMINANTS 2+1

Objective
To understand various types of toxins and contaminants and their tolerance
limit.
To understand various analytical methods to estimate toxins and
contaminants.
Theory
UNIT I
Public health problems due to food borne contaminants.
UNIT II
Factors contributing to outbreaks of food poisoning.
UNIT III
Aflatoxins in fishery products. PAH in smoked fish. Biogenic amines and
its significance to human health, Different types of marine bio-toxins such
as Ciguatoxin, Paralytic shellfish toxins diarrhetic shell fish toxins, DSP
toxins, Scomberotoxins, Brevitoxins, etc. Symptoms, treatment,
pharmacology, detection.
UNIT IV
Overview of toxicity of marine animals.
UNIT V
Analytical methods for different types of marine toxins and its tolerance
limits: Stability, bioassays, pharmacology assays, immunoassays,
Instrumental methods.
UNIT VI
Contaminants of the aquatic environment - Heavy metals (Hg, Cd, Pb, Cr,
Ni, As etc.).

194
 UNIT VII
Pesticide contaminants: PCB, organochlorine etc., their source,
bioaccumulation, magnification and toxicity. Persistent pollutants. Toxicity
evaluation. Measurement of LC50 and factors affecting LC50, Animal tissue
analysis.
Practical
Analysis of bacterial and fungal toxins, Analysis of heavy metals and
common pesticides. Biogenic amine estimation, Estimation of LC 50.
Suggested Readings
Anon. 1988. Handbook of Natural Toxins. Vol. III. Marine Toxins and
Venom. Marcel Dekker.
Anon. 1988. Handbook of Natural Toxins. Vol. IV. Bacterial Toxins.
Marcel Dekker.
Anon. 2001. Food borne Disease Handbook. 2nd Ed. Vol. IV. Seafood and
Environmental Toxins. Marcel Dekker.
Edward PR. 1984. Seafood Toxins. American Chemical Society,
Washington, D.C.
Hashimoto Y. 1979. Marine Toxins and Other Bioactive Marine
Metabolites. Scientific Society Press, Tokyo.
Moss J, Iglewski B, Vaughan M & Ju AT. 1995. Bacterial Toxins and
Virulence Factors in Disease. Vol. VIII. Marcel Dekker.

FPT 608 NUTRITIONAL ASPECTS AND NUTRITION 2+1

LABELING
Objective
To create basic understanding about labeling of different products,
guidelines and enforcement.
Theory
UNIT I
Labeling requirements - national and international, legislation on labeling.
UNIT II
Labeling for product traceability.
UNIT III
Components of traceability code – nutrition facts and nutrition labeling,
specific requirements of nutrition labeling, food meant for specific age
groups and convalescing people.
UNIT IV
Serving size, calculation of nutrition facts based on nutrient composition
and serving size.
UNIT V
Type of labeling for organic foods, specific foods like organic foods, GM
foods, irradiated foods, vegetarian and non-vegetarian foods.
UNIT VI
Label design specification – size, colour.
UNIT VII
Major nutrients Minor nutrients, Essential nutrients, Function (or note) of
nutrients - (providing energy, tissue building) Nutritional research -
Nutritional aspects of fish proteins, lipids, vitamins and free minerals
Functional foods/ Neutraceuticals for health, Effect of food processing on

195
 nutritive values of foods. Antinutritional factors, Nutrition labeling,
(Energy value of foods).
Practical
Analysis of major and minor nutrients, calculation of nutrition facts,
preparation of labels for typical food items. Analysis for total calorie,
calorific value of fats, protein and carbohydrates. PER, BV, NPU analysis
of different products.
Suggested Readings
Jnsel P, Turna RE & Ross D. 2001. Nutrition. Jones & Bartlet.
Seshadri V. 1998. Introduction to Clinical Nutrition and Nutritional
Labelling. Marcel Dekker.
Simpson DS. 1987. Food Biochemistry and Nutritional Value. Longman.

FPT 609 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS OF FISHERIES 2+1

INDUSTRIES
Objective
To provide theoretical and practical exposure on Environmental
Management Systems in fisheries industry.
Theory
UNIT I
Environmental Management Systems: Environmental issues, (Ozone
depletion, global warming etc.) pollution, long term ecosystem degradation
etc in aquaculture and processing industries.
UNIT II
Environmental impact assessment studies of fisheries industry and control
measures, Sources of environmental concerns (physical, chemical and
microbiological).
UNIT III
Techniques for the identification of environmental aspects. IS/ISO 14000
and its relevance to Environmental Management System in fisheries
industry: Background, policy and planning, implementation, checking and
review, International and European Laws for Environmental Protection,
National Environmental Laws.
Practical
Composition analysis of fish processing waste, analysis of pollution aspects
of solid and liquid wastes – bacterial load, TDS, BOD, COD, pH,
temperature, oil and grease . Resident time analysis for processing waste at
the site of disposal.
Suggested Readings
Anon. 2000. Manual of Chemical Methods. 2nd Ed. Bureau of Indian
Standards: IS/ISO 14000:1996 on Environmental Management
System US-EPA.
Cesceri LS. 1998. Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Waste
Water. APHA.
Hurst CJ. 2002. Manual of Environmental Microbiology. 2nd Ed. ASM
Press.
Wise DL. 1994. Process Engineering for Pollution Control and Waste
Minimization. Marcel Dekker.

196
FPT 610 FISHERY BY-PRODUCTS, SPECIALTY PRODUCTS 2+1
AND VALUE ADDED PRODUCTS
Objective
To explain the preparation of products from low cost fish.
Theory
UNIT I
Nutritional importance of fish meal and quality requirements -Raw material
quality and changes during processing and storage.
UNIT II
Nutritional importance of fish oil and methods to impart stability to fish
oils on storage, Unsaponifiables in fish liver oils.
UNIT III
Production of fish flour, quality standards and applications.
UNIT IV
Different methods of production of FPC, Different types of FPC, and their
specifications.
UNIT V
Enzyme hydrolysis of fish, fish hydrolysates, fish peptones, hydrolysates
enriched food beverages.
UNIT VI
Food flavour from tiny prawns and non-penaeid prawns.
UNIT VII
Formulation of pet food.
UNIT VIII
Chitin, Chitosan and protein extract from shrimp and crab shell and squilla,
Quality requirements and assessment of chitin and chitosan, Application of
chitin and chitosan. Conversion of chitin and chitosan to high value
products – glucosamine hydrochloride, glucosamine sulphate and their use.
UNIT IX
Extraction of collagen from fish processing wastes, properties and
application. Preparation of biological membranes using collagen and
chitosan for biomedical applications.
UNIT X
Value added products: Present market trends, scope of value addition,
Types of value addition, Important value added products.
UNIT XI
Coated products – Principles and type of coating, coating functions, in
gradients, batter classification, mechanical properties of batter, bread
crumbs, flavorings, seasonings and hydrocolloids in coatings, Fat and oils
in coated food and their chemistry, Trouble shooting techniques for batter
and breading systems, application of batters and breading to seafood.
Practical
Preparation of glucosamine hydrochloride and glucosamine sulphate.
Preparation of isinglass, collagen powder and collagen and chitosan.
Preparation of fish wafers, fish fingers, cutlets etc.
Suggested Readings
Balachandran KK. 2001. Post Harvest Technology of Fish and Fish
Products. Daya Publ.
Gopakumar K. (Ed.). 2002. Text Book of Fish Processing Technology.
ICAR.

197
Hall GM. (Ed.). 1992. Fish Processing Technology. Blackie.
Hui YH., Merle DP & Richard JG. (Eds.). 2001. Food Borne Disease
Handbook. Seafood and Environmental Toxins. Vol. IV. Marcel
Dekker.
Nambudiri DD. 2006. Technology of Fishery Products. Fishing Chimes.
Sen DP. 2005. Advances in Fish Processing Technology. Allied Publ.
Wheaton FW & Lawson TB. 1985. Processing Aquatic Food Products.
John Wiley & Sons.

198
 FISH PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY
List of Journals

• Advances in Applied Microbiology

• Annual Review of Microbiology
• Canadian Journal of Microbiology
• Fishery Technology
• Food Microbiology
• Indian Journal of Agricultural Biochemistry
• Indian Journal of Meat Science and Technology
• Indian Journal of Microbiology
• Indian Journal of Microbiology
• International Journal of Food Microbiology
• International Journal of Food Science and Technology
• Journal of Food Processing and Preservation
• Journal of Food Science and Technology
• Letters in Applied Microbiology
• Meat Science

Suggested Broad Areas for Master’s and Doctoral Research

• Macro and micromoelcular changes in muscle during freezing

• Interaction of food protein with other food constituents during freezing and frozen
storage
• Structural and functional changes of fat and protein
• Development of method to improve shelf life
• Freezing and frozen storage of novel product
• Micromolecular interactions during thermal processing
• Thermal processing in novel packaging materials.
• Study of nutrient losses during thermal processing and/or storage
• Study of combination effect of irradiation and thermal processing.
• Study of hurdle effect in canned preservation.
• Evaluation of quality standards of processing plants
• Establishment of critical limits for novel hazards and development of corrective
action in HACCP protocol
• Interactions between protein and lipid
• Molecular markers development for identification of products
• Development of sensors for quality detection
• Antimicrobial agents in fish and fishery products.
• Effects of processing methods on micro-organisms
• Use of combination additives in cured product for better shelf life
• Establishing scientific basis for traditionally cured fish products.

199
• Effect of good handling practices and proper storage techniques and transportation
on fish quality.
• Processing of different type of products using advanced technology.
• Development of Molecular methods to detect pathogens in food.
• Survival strategy of pathogens in processed food.
• Designing of instruments used in fish processing plants
• Biological and chemical treatment of fish processing wastes
• Effect of different packaging materials on quality and shelf-life of fish and fish
products
• Development of suitable packaging for fish products
• Biochemical characterization of macro molecules with respect to processing
requirements
• Structural and functional changes of fat and protein during processing
• Use of chemicals and biochemicals for modifying functional properties
• Modification of proteins for processing needs
• Rheology of fish and shellfish proteins
• Evaluation of quality standards of processing plants
• Establishment of critical limits for novel hazards and development of corrective
action in HACCP protocol
• Changes in lipid during processing and storage
• Microbial alterations of lipid during fermentation
• Distribution of vitamins and minerals in commercially important tropical fishes.
• Changes in vitamin and mineral during processing
• Extractable flavouring components in fish and shellfish waste
• Anthropogenic contaminants in fish and their residence time
• Development of methods for detection of toxins and contaminants
• Risk assessment of seafood with respect to algal, fungal and biological toxin
• Modern methods for nutritional evaluation of foods
• Effect of pollutants on pre-harvest fish quality
• New methods of waste treatment from processing industries

200
 FISHERIES ECONOMICS
Course Structure - at a Glance

CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS

FEC 501* MICROECONOMICS 2+0
FEC 502* MACROECONOMICS 2+0
FEC 503* ECONOMICS OF DEVELOPMENT AND PLANNING 2+1
FEC 504* FISHERIES RESOURCE ECONOMICS 2+1
FEC 505# MARKETING MANAGEMENT 1+1
FEC 506 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 2+1
FEC 507# PROJECT FORMULATION AND MANAGEMENT 1+1
FEC 508# INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS AND TRADE 1+1
FEC 509 FISHERIES FINANCING AND COOPERATION 1+1
FEC 510 INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMETRICS 1+1
FEC 511 INDIAN ECONOMY 2+0

FEC 591 MASTER’S SEMINAR 1+0

FEC 599 MASTER’S RESEARCH 20

FEC 601** ADVANCED ECONOMIC ANALYSIS 2+1

FEC 602** ADVANCED MARKETING AND PRICE ANALYSIS 2+1
FEC 603** ADVANCED ECONOMETRICS 2+1
FEC 604 FISHERIES PLANNING AND POLICIES 1+1
FEC 605 AQUACULTURE PRODUCTION ECONOMICS 1+1
FEC 606 MARINE RESOURCE ECONOMICS 1+1
FEC 607 ADVANCED INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS AND TRADE 1+1
FEC 608 FISHERIES GOVERNANCE AND SOCIO ECONOMICS 1+1
FEC 609 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY FOR SOCIAL SCIENCES 1+1

FEC 691 DOCTORAL SEMINAR I 1+0

FEC 692 DOCTORAL SEMINAR II 1+0

FEC 699 DOCTORAL RESEARCH 45

* Compulsory for Master’s programme; ** Compulsory for Doctoral programme
#FEC 505, FEC 507 and FEC 508 cross listed with Business Management FBM 502, FBM 514
and FBM 511 respectively

201
 FISHERIES ECONOMICS
Course Contents

FEC 501 MICROECONOMICS 2+0

Objective
To familiarize with the basic concepts and principles of microeconomics,
including the analytical tools.
Theory
UNIT I
Concept of demand, Law and determinants of demand, Demand elasticities,
Price, income and cross elasticities of demand. Supply – Supply concepts,
Law, determinants of supply, cob web theorem, shifts in demand and
supply.
UNIT II
Theory of consumer behaviour – Cardinal and ordinal utility – Law of
Diminishing marginal utility – Indifference curve theory – Revealed
preference theory – consumer surplus.
UNIT III
Theory of cost - Traditional, Modern theory, Engineering cost curves,
Analysis of economies of scale, Production function, Theory of
production – factors of production – production function analysis.
UNIT IV
Theory of product pricing, cost and cost curves, Revenue and revenue
curves – objectives of business firms, profit maximization, Equilibrium of a
firm, TR and TC approach, Market and market structure, Types of factor
and product markets, price discrimination.
UNIT V
General Equilibrium theory, Welfare Economics, Theory of factor pricing
– Distribution Rent, wages, Interest, Profit, Welfare economics.
Practical
Demand - supply relationship. Elasticity - price, income, cross. Factor-
product, factor- factor and product-product relationships. Production costs
and their relationship.
Suggested Readings
Ahuja HL. 2005. Macroeconomics - Theory and Practice. S. Chand & Co.
Dewett KK. 2006. Modern Economic Theory. S. Chand & Co.
Dwivedi DN. 2005. Managerial Economics. Vikas Publ.
Koutsoyiannis A. 2000. Modern Microeconomics. The McMillan Press.
Mankar VG. 1984. Business Economics-Micro Analysis. Himalaya Publ.
Mankiw NG. 1997. Principles of Micro and Macroeconomics. Dryden
Press.
Samuelson PA & Nordhaus WD. 2001. Economics. Tata McGraw Hill.
Thomas CR & Maurice CS. 2006. Managerial Economics. Tata Mc Graw
Hill.

202
FEC 502 MACROECONOMICS 2+0
Objective
To understand the basic concepts and principles of macroeconomics
including the analytical tools used for them.
Theory
UNIT I
Macroeconomics: National Income Accounting – definition and concepts
of NI, different components of national Income, and methods of national
income accounting, Macro economics – National Income accounting –
Determination of national income.
UNIT II
Classical Theory of income and employment, Keynes theory of
employment, Theories of consumption – consumption function –
Investment function – concepts of multiplier and accelerator.
UNIT III
Consumption function, Theories of consumption, Multiplier, Inducement to
invest and marginal efficiency of capital, Classical theory of output and
employment – Keynesian theory of income, output and employment.
UNIT IV
IS-Lm Curve Model, Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply,
Unemployment and Full Employment, ISLM model – Hicks Hansen
synthesis - Aggregate demand and supply – unemployment.
UNIT V
Inflation – causes and control measures - Business cycle – Money, banking
and public finance – Nature and functions of money – Balance of payment.
UNIT VI
Money Supply and its determinants, Economic stabilizations-Fiscal and
Monetary policy, Public Finance, Public revenue and taxation, Balance of
Payment, Foreign Exchange, Fiscal and monetary policies – trade policies
– public finance – public revenue and taxation – economic growth.
Practical
National income accounting, consumption and investment function,
inflation, money supply balance of payment, foreign exchange.
Suggested Readings
Colander D. 2007. Macroeconomics. McGraw Hill.
Gardner A. 1978. Macro Economics: Theory and Policy. MacMillan.
Hahn F & Solow RM. 1997. A Critical Essay on Modern Macroeconomic
Theory. MIT Press.
Keynes JM. 1976. A Treatise of Money. AMS Press.
Mankiw NG. 2002. Macroeconomics. Worth Publ.
Samuelson PA & Nordhaus WD. 2001. Economics. Tata McGraw Hill.
Thomas FD & McDougall DD. 1963. Macro-Economics. McGraw Hill.

FEC 503 ECONOMICS OF DEVELOPMENT AND 1+1

PLANNING
Objective
To acquaint the students with the concept of development and planning.
Theory
UNIT I
Economics of development: concepts and approaches, economic growth

203
 and income distribution, Characteristics of an under developed country ,
Obstacles to economic development ; Rostow’s stages of economic
development.
UNIT II
Economic growth, Meaning and characteristics of modern economic
growth, Adam smith theory, The Ricardian theory, The Malthusian theory,
The classical theory, Lewis’s theory of unlimited supply of labor, The
Marxin theory, The Harrod- Domar Model, The Solow Model of long run
growth, The Mahalanobis Model.
UNIT III
Growth models in Indian planning, Capital formation and economic
Development, Monetary policy in economic development, Fiscal policy in
Economic development, Price policy in Economic development, Economic
planning, Types of planning, Input-output analysis.
UNIT IV
Fisheries development policy and planning – Fisheries development during
5 year plans.
Practical
Physical Quality of Life Indices, Human Development index, Leontieff
model of Input Output model, Analysis of the different growth models
across the different plan periods; Lorenz curve, Gini Ratio.
Suggested Readings
Agrawal AN & Lal K. 1994. Economics of Development and Planning.
Vikas Publ.
Jhingan ML. 1978. Economics of Development and Planning. Vikas Publ.
Subrahmanya KN. 1985. Economic Development and Planning in India.
Deep & Deep Publ.
Todarao MP. 1989. Economic Development of the Third World. Longman.

FEC 504 FISHERIES RESOURCE ECONOMICS 2+1

Objective
To familiarise with the concept and application of economics to the
different resource based production systems.
Theory
UNIT I
Marine fishery resources of India – characteristic features of marine capture
fisheries - status of marine fisheries in India; Inland fishery resources of
India - status and prospects.
UNIT II
Production economics catch and effort studies – methodological issues in
the estimation of fish catch and fishing effort – dimensions of fishing effort
– costs of and returns from fishing – cost components – employment and
earnings of fishermen in relation to technological options – production
function in marine capture fisheries; Maximum Economic Yield-
Productivity in capture and culture Fisheries-An introduction to TFP in
fisheries.
UNIT III
Population equilibrium analysis – sustainable yield curves – overfishing
and underfishing – open access equilibrium yield – maximum sustainable
yield and maximum social yield – Comparative static models – changes in

204
 cost; changes in productivity; changes in price of fish. Management of
fisheries in an environment of risk and uncertainty – challenges in the
management of global fisheries – resource management issues – conflict
management – socioeconomic issues and marine policy.
UNIT IV
Introduction – aquaculture production process – aquaculture systems in
India – factors affecting the economics of aquaculture.
UNIT V
Production concepts applied to aquaculture – cost concepts and cost
functions – Returns concepts – least-cost combination of inputs –
optimization of aquaculture production.
UNIT VI
planning and budgeting – lineal programming – economies of scale –
production function analysis – management of aquaculture production
process – aquaculture management decisions – resource management –
labour and personnel management – financial management – management
of risk and uncertainty in aquaculture – economics of different aquaculture
systems – socioeconomic issues in aquaculture development.
Practical
Estimation of costs and returns of different aquaculture systems – planning
and budgeting – linear programming production function analysis – cost
function analysis – financial and farm business analysis – risk
programming – case studies – visit to fish farms, prawn farms and
hatcheries – discussion on socioeconomic issues in aquaculture
development. Data collection on cost and returns of different fishing
methods (instead of economics of capture fisheries); Structural Change in
the seafood export of India-Estimation of DRC, NPC for selected groups of
exports.
Suggested Reading
Clarke CW. 1976. Mathematical Bio-economics: The Optimal
Management of Renewable Resources. John Wiley.
Cunningham S, Dunn MR & Whitmarsh D. 1985. Fisheries Economics. St.
Martin's Press.
Dunne EB. 1990. Fisheries Economics - An Introduction. Mansell Publ.
Grafton QR, Kirkley J, Kompas T & Squire D. 2006. Economics for
Fisheries Management. Ashgate Publ. Co.
Hartwick JM & Olewiler ND. 1998. Economics of Natural Resource Use.
2nd Ed. Addision Wesley.
Munro GR & Scott A. 1984. The Economics of Fisheries Management.
University of British Columbia.
Palanisamy K, Paramasivam P & Renganathan CR. 2002. Agricultural
Production Economics, Analytical Methods and Applications.
Associated Publ. Co.
Shang YC. 1981. Aquaculture Economics. Westview Press.

FEC 505 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 2+1

Objective
To familiarize with the basic concepts and principles of marketing as
applied to fisheries.
To provide an interface between marketing and management decision.

205
 Theory
UNIT I
Marketing management - Introduction and overview. Marketing system and
environment Market opportunity identification- Customer analysis. Market
segmentation, market positioning and consumer behaviour, Competition
analysis, Market assessment, Marketing environment.
UNIT II
Demand assessment and forecasting, Designing the offer-product decision
and pricing decision, product decision and strategies, product life cycle,
new product development, branding and packaging decisions, Delivering
the offer- distribution management, sales management and communication
strategy management – Salesmanship.
UNIT III
Product management. Pricing policies and practices. Distribution strategy
- channels of distribution, physical distribution.
UNIT IV
Marketing information system. Marketing communication - advertising,
publicity, personal selling, sales promotion.
UNIT V
Marketing research and information system, Marketing research and its
application in fisheries marketing strategy, planning and organisation,
emerging issues in marketing, e-marketing.
Practical
Marketing mix, marketing strategy, segmentation, pricing methods,
consumer behaviours, new product development, marketing research,
measuring effectiveness of marking mix, performance evaluation,
efficiency analysis.
Suggested Readings
Adcock D, Bradfield R, Halborg A & Ross C. 1995. Marketing Principles
and Practice. Pitman Publ.
Amarchand D & Varadharajan B. 1979. An Introduction to Marketing.
Vikas Publ.
Chaston I. 1983. Marketing in Fisheries and Aquaculture. Fishing News
Books.
Dennis A, Brandfield R, Al Halhorg & Ross C. 2004. Marketing Principles
and Practice. Pitman Publ.
Ian C. 1984. Marketing In Fisheries and Aquaculture. Fishing News
Books.
Jolson MA. 2004. Marketing Management. Macmillan Publ.
Kotler P. 2005. Marketing Management. Prentice Hall of India.
Kotler P & Armstrong GM. 2006. Marketing: An Introduction. Prentice
Hall.
Phillip K & Armstrong G. 2007. Principles of Marketing. Prentice Hall.
Phillip K. 2008. Marketing Management. 12th Ed. Prentice Hall of India.

FEC 506 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 2+1

Objective
To introduce the students to different concepts of environmental
economics, its relevance, and tools of measurement.

206
Theory
UNIT I
Ecology and economics - principles of environmental economics - public
goods, club goods and theory of common property - property rights and
ownership incentives equimarginal principle -discounting and risk, user
cost, existence value - substitution between capital and natural resources -
environmental externalities. Population question and theory of
demographic transition - poverty, development and environment –
environment and trade - concept and practice of sustainability.
UNIT II
Market and non-market valuation of natural resources - measurement of
environmental harm and benefit - contingent valuation - difficulties in
application of a supply/demand or benefit/cost framework - application of a
cost-effectiveness or cost-minimization framework. Criteria for evaluating
environmental policies – market based / incentive based strategies like
emission taxes and subsidies, transferable discharge permits - polluter pays
principle. Kyoto Protocol, carbon trading, CDM and GEF - environmental
policies in major industrialised and industrialising countries - international
environmental agreements.
UNIT III
Concept and principles of EIA; methodologies for EIA in fisheries and
aquaculture sector; Institutional (International/National/Stale/Local)
arrangements and strategies for estimation, amelioration and compensation
for impacts; Aquaculture Authority Bill and AAI. Environment related
conflicts and dispute resolution; Coasian theorem and stakeholder decision
making process. Economic theory of fish resource exploitation - absent
property rights in fisheries sector - common property resource use and
management - scarcity and competitive exploitation in fisheries sector -
concepts of Maximum Sustainable Yield (MSY), M/NEY, OSY, Static and
Dynamic MEY, and their interrelationships.
Practical
Case studies on environmental economics of shrimp farming (intensive/
semi-intensive/ extensive) and polyculture farms - Application of Extended
Domestic Resource Cost Ratio and Policy Analysis Matrix for aquaculture
- Case studies on the sustainability of various capture fishery systems -
Economics of inland water and marine pollution - economics of pollution
control - economics of climate change, global warming and fisheries
development - Gordon-Schaefer growth model, Dynamic Poll model and
Bioeconomic model of fisheries resource management.
Suggested Readings
Bhattacharya R. 1997. Environmental Economics: An Indian Perspective.
Oxford University Press.
Cunningham S, Dunn MR & Whitmarsh D. 1985. Fisheries Economics -
An Introduction. Mansell Publ.
Gadgil M. 1997. Ecological Journeys: The Science and Politics of
Conservation in India. Orient Longman.
Prasad M & Biswas AK. 1999. Conducting Environmental Impact
Assessment for Developing Countries. Oxford University Press.
Sankar U. (Ed.). 2001. Environmental Economics. Oxford University Press.

207
 Tietenberg T. 1984. Environmental and Natural Resource Economics.
Scott Foreseman & Co.
Ulph A. 2000. Environmental Policy, International Agreements and
International Trade. Oxford University Press.

FEC 507 PROJECT FORMULATION AND MANAGEMENT 1+1

Objective
To familiarize the students with the basic concepts and principles of project
formulation and management techniques.
To prepare the students to exploit business opportunities in fisheries and
aquaculture.
Theory
UNIT I
Concept, scope and definition of project - difference between plan and
project – project types - advantages and limitations – elements of project
cycle - aspects of project preparation and analysis - project cost and
benefits – comparisons – tangible and intangible cost and benefits; Social
cost benefit analysis – concepts.
UNIT II
Financial and economic aspects of projects: feasibility analysis –
undiscounted measures of project worth - ranking by inspection, pay back
period, average annual proceeds per unit of outlay - time value of money -
discounted measures – discounted pay back period, derivation of
incremental net benefit, net present worth, BC ratio, IRR, net benefit
investment ratio, project alternatives - risk and uncertainties - sensitivity
analysis. Farm planning, budgeting – complete and partial budgeting - farm
business analysis and appraisal techniques – ratio analysis, asset valuation
and depreciation. Financial analysis-balance sheet, cash flow analysis,
profit loss statements.
UNIT III
Guidelines for project preparation report – objective, rational, area,
organization, production, markets and financial results, benefits. Sources of
institutional assistance for project preparation and formulation – bilateral
and multilateral assistance. Project implementation – objective and tasks,
economic aspects of project evaluation. Project management – management
technique – bar chart, milestone chart, activity slack bar chart, PERT,
CPM, inventory management and control, management information system
and project monitoring.
Practical
Practical and Case studies: Ratio analysis, computing depreciation,
valuation of project inventories, complete and partial Budgeting, cash flow
analysis, balance sheet / net worth statement, profit–loss statement/income
statement–undiscounted and discounted measures – net work techniques -
bar charts, milestone chart and activity slack bar chart, PERT and CPM -
project preparation for capture, culture and processing sectors - sensitivity
analysis - project monitoring and evaluation – case studies and feasibility
evaluation.
Suggested Readings
Chaudhary S. 1988. Project Management. Tata McGraw Hill.
Fisheries Project Formulation. FAO Tech. Paper No.334.

208
 Gittenger P. 1972. Economic Analysis of Agricultural Projects. Johns
Hopkins University Press.
Ojha SN & Salim SS. 2000. Entrepreneurship Development and Project
Formulation. CIFE, Mumbai.
Rodney J, Turner S & Simister J. (Eds.). 2007. Project Management.
Infinity Books.
Salim SS, Biradar RS & Pandey SK. 2004. Economic Analysis of Fisheries
Projects. CIFE, Mumbai.
Shang YC. 1990. Aquaculture Economic Analysis - An Introduction. World
Aquaculture Society, USA.

FEC 508 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS AND TRADE 1+1

Objective
To familiarise the students with the basic concepts and principles of
economics as applied to international trade.
Theory
UNIT I
International trade: Nature of international trade, difference between
domestic and foreign trade; Theories of international trade: absolute and
comparative advantage, modern theories of international trade - Hecksher
Ohlin theorem
UNIT II
Concepts of terms of trade, free trade, protection, tariffs, quantitative
restrictions and other non-tariff measures
UNIT III
Exim policy – Export Import procedure – Role of ECGC.
UNIT IV
Growth of marine product exports – MPEDA and its development
programmes – WTO in dispute settlement.
Practical
Pattern and Performance of India's Seafood Exports; Case studies on
product and market diversification. Case studies on competitiveness of
Indian fish and fish products. Case studies on exports of value added
seafood products; Case study of a seafood export firm; Case studies on
(ab)use of SPS / TBT measure; Case studies on non-tariff barriers in
fisheries trade; Case studies on dumping and anti-dumping measures in
seafood trade; Case studies on disputes in TRIPS.
Suggested Readings
Appleyard DR & Field A. J. 2001. International Economics. 4th Ed.
McGraw Hill.
Dennis A. 2001. Trade Theory and Practice. Irwin Publ.
Francis C. 2008. International Economics. Tata McGraw Hill.
Krugman PR & Obstfeld M. 1991. International Economics: Theory and
Policy. Harper Collins Publ.
Mithani JP.1998. International Economics. Tata McGraw Hill.
Samuelson P & Nordhaus WD. 2001. Economics. Tata McGraw Hill.

209
FEC 509 FISHERIES FINANCING AND COOPERATION 1+1
Objective
To understand the basic concepts and practices of fisheries financing and
cooperation.
Theory
UNIT I
Fisheries finance – definition and principles – importance and scope.
Fisheries credit system in India – Basic considerations for providing
fisheries credit financial management tools. Financial management tools –
information flows – income statement – financial statement – Tools for
forward planning – financial ratios. Enterprise budgeting – cash flows –
fisheries credit appraisal – 3 R’s of credit – Banking institutions in India –
Commercial Banks. Regional Rural Banks and Co-operatives. Service
area approach – Reasons for over dues – procedure for recovery – Role of
NABARD and nationalized Banks in Fisheries Finance – credit policies for
Fisheries development. .
UNIT II
Fisheries Cooperatives: Principles and scope of cooperative; Development
of fisheries cooperative in India, Structure and functions of fisheries
cooperative; Evaluation of the performance fisheries cooperatives.
Managerial aspects of cooperative societies; cooperative marketing in
fisheries, State fisheries cooperative Federations, Fisheries Corporation,
Self Help Groups in fisheries.
Practical
Financial statement analysis – Income statement Analysis – important
financial records – Different case studies on fisheries co-operative
societies and their performance.
Suggested Readings
Bhatia BS, Verma HL & Mahesh CH. 2001. Encyclopaedia of Co-
operative Management Vols. I-IV. Deep & Deep Publ.
FAO. 1971. Manual on Fishermen’s Co-operatives. Rome.
FISHCOPFED. 1989. Fish Co-operatives, New Delhi.
Proctor T. 2005. Essentials of Marketing Research. Financial Times
Prentice Hall.
Rajagopalan R. 1997. Rediscovering Cooperation. Vols. I-III. IRMA
Anand.

FEC 510 INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMETRICS 1+1

Objective
To familiarize with the fundamental principles of econometrics.
To apply the theoretical knowledge in econometrics to analysing empirical
phenomenon.
Theory
UNIT I
Econometrics Introduction relationship with other disciplines Matrix
algebra,
UNIT II
Assumptions in the classical linear regression model; Consequences of
multicollinearity, heteroscedasticity, autocorrelation and remedial measures

210
 UNIT III
Econometric model specification criteria, specification errors, measurement
errors of dependent and explanatory variables, Different model
specification criteria
UNIT IV
Time series econometric models, Basic ideas in fitting non-linear
regression models
Practical
Exercises on fitting classical linear regression models, detection of
multicollinearity, heteroscedasticity and autocorrelation in the given data
sets, Model selection using R2, AIC and SIC criteria; Hands on using
econometric packages like SPSS, SAS and SHAZAME
Suggested Readings
Acharya SS & Madnani GMK. 1988. Applied Econometrics for
Agricultural Economists. Himanshu Publ.
Eniya T. 1985. Advanced Econometrics. Basil Blackwell.
Gujarati D. 2004. Basic Econometrics. McGraw-Hill.
Maddala GS. 1977. Econometrics. McGraw Hill.
Stewart J & Gill L. 1998. Econometrics. Prentice Hall.
Thomas RL. 1985. Introductory Econometrics: Theory and Applications.
Longman.

FEC 511 INDIAN ECONOMY 2+0

Objective
To acquaint the students with the different facets of the Indian economy.
Theory
UNIT I
Underdevelopment and the Indian economy, National income of India,
Human resources and economic development Social cost benefit analysis-
concepts.
UNIT II
Analysis of contribution of different sectors to the Indian Economy-
Economic development in India through plan periods; Human development
in India, Occupational structure and economic development, Planning and
Economic development, Objectives and strategy of economic planning,
Industrial policy and Indian planning.
UNIT III
Capital formation in different sectors of the Indian economy by public and
private; Public sector and Indian planning, Disinvestment of public
enterprises, Private sector, joint sector and Indian planning, privatization
and economic reform.
UNIT IV
Foreign trade of India, India’s balance of payment, Indian currency
system, Indian financial system, the problem of capital formation, Indian
public finance, Government subsidies in India.
Suggested Readings
Dutt R & Sundaram KPM. 2002. Indian Economy. S. Chand & Co.
Gittenger P. 1972. Economic Analysis of Agricultural Projects. Johns
Hopkins University Press.

211
 Mozoomdar A. 2002. The Indian Economy: A Different View. Har-Anand
Publ.
Vaidyanathan A. 1995. The Indian Economy: Crisis, Response, and
Prospects. Orient Blackswan.

FEC 601 ADVANCED ECONOMIC ANALYSIS 2+1

Objective
To develop an analytical framework to understand the inter-linkages among
the crucial microeconomic and macroeconomic variables and various
segments of the economy.
To provide an interface between tools and its application in the economy.
Theory
UNIT I
Theory of consumer behaviour: concepts, analytical approaches, limitations
and applications, demand theory, demand functions-derivations analytical
approaches, limitations and applications and elasticity decomposition
analysis, Recent developments in the theory of demand – linear expenditure
system, constant elasticity demand function, dynamic versions of demand
functions distributed lag models, Houthakker’s and Taylor’s dynamic
models; utility functions - separable and additive, homogenous and
homothetic functions, direct and indirect.
UNIT II
Basic theory of the firm: concepts, production functions, isoquants
derivations and applications, optimization behaviour – alternative models,
short run and long run cost functions; total price effect-substitution effect,
output effect and profit maximization effect decomposition analysis-
analytical approaches, joint products-concepts and constrained
optimization.
UNIT III
Extended theory of the firm: homogenous production functions; constant
elasticity of substitution production functions-concepts, properties,
equilibrium analysis and applications; duality in production, production
under uncertainty, linear production functions for single and multi output
cases.
UNIT IV
Commodity market equilibrium-short run, long run, differential cost
conditions; theory of cost and empirical evidence on the shape of cost
functions, taxation applications. Theory welfare: - Criteria of social welfare,
Determination of welfare maximizing out put-mix, Commodity distribution
and resources allocation.
UNIT V
Concept and measurement: national income, Consumption, Investment
Function and Multiplier Price level, inflation, CPI, WSPI, in the economy.
The concept of full employment, inflationary gap. The theory of income
determination and multiple market economic systems, Multiplier and
accelerator analysis, Monetary and fiscal policies, Taxes and expenditure.
Practical
Demand function and it’s derivation, computation of demand and supply
elasticity, Derivation of cost function, Measurement of National income
accounts multiplier price level, inflation, CPI, WSPI.

212
 Suggested Readings
Dernburg TF. 1985. Macroeconomics: Concepts, Theories and Policies.
McGraw Hill.
Edwin M. 1989. Applied Micro Economics. WW Norton.
Ferguson CE. 1989. Micro Economic Theory. AITBS.
Gardner A. 1963. Macroeconomics: Theory and Policies. MacMillan.
Henderson JM & Quandt RE. 1972. Micro Economic Theory - A
Mathematical Approach. McGraw Hill.
Koutsoyiannis A. 1979. Modern Microeconomics. MacMillan Press.
Richard HL & Eckert DR. 1962. The Price System and Resource
Allocation. The Dryden Press, Halt Saunders.
Shapiro EJ. 1989. Macroeconomic Analysis. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
Skaggs NT & Carlson JL. 1996. Macroeconomics. Blackwell.
William HB. 1977. Macroeconomics Theory and Policy. Harper & Row.
FEC 602 ADVANCED MARKETING AND PRICE ANALYSIS 2+1
Objective
To familiarize the students with the basic concepts and principles of
marketing as applied to management decisions.
To provide an interface between marketing and management decision.
Theory
UNIT I
Fisheries marketing definition and scope, functions of fish marketing,
Markets and market structure, Government and Co-operative in fisheries
marketing , integration, marketing efficiency, marketing cost and price
spread, marketing planning, marketing strategy, marketing research,
Marketing infrastructure, Marketing regulations, constraints and
approaches to fish marketing development.
UNIT II
Supply Chain Management Concepts and Evolution, value addition in fish
marketing. Constraints and approaches to SCM in fisheries sector.
Vertical integration and its effect on price determination. Domestic and
external markets for fisheries products. Indian fisheries intervention.
UNIT III
Developing marketing strategies. Advanced studies of marketing
information system and e-marketing, fish-business. Dynamics and
innovations in fisheries marketing system. Applications of econometric
methods of analysis for the study of market behaviours. Computer
application in marketing management; market intelligence, its need,
analysis and dissemination.
UNIT IV
Principles of price determination. Price difference and variability, price
analysis, price elasticities, Price determination of fish and fishery products,
characteristics of demand and supply of fish and fishery product , supply
responses, seasonality, future trading, price support measures. Price
stabilisation policies.
UNIT V
Seafood and aquaculture markets world-wide, Marketing channels,
Economies of scale, Economics of processing, Economic feasibility and
Business Plan Development. Policies and regulations that affect

213
 aquaculture marketing and distribution. Indian seafood and aquaculture
marketing environment.
Practical
Price determination of fish and fishery products, Price difference and
variability, price analysis, price elasticities, Price determination, Market
integration and marketing efficiency, Case studies of supply chains in urban
and rural fish markets, and exported product and domestically traded
product. Country Risk Analysis: case studies of comparative risk positions
of various countries as export markets for fish products. Export
composition and destination of Indian agricultural commodities and
seafood products. Import composition and origin. Analysing trade
performance before and after WTO; Analysis of international price trends
and volatility; Case studies of seafood export firms. Case studies of
economics of shrimp farms (intensive/ semi-intensive/ extensive) and
polyculture farms. Extended domestic cost resource ratio and policy
analysis matrix for Shrimp farming. Case studies e-marketing dynamics
and innovations in fisheries marketing.
Suggested Readings
Adeock D & Brandfield R. 1998. Marketing Principles and Practice.
Pitman Publ.
Amarchand D & Varadharajan B. 1979. An Introduction to Marketing.
Vikas Publ.
Branson RE & Dougla N. 1983. Introduction to Agricultural Marketing.
McGraw Hill.
Chaston I. 1983. Marketing in Fisheries and Aquaculture. Fishing News
Books.
Jolson MA. 1978. Marketing Management. Macmillan Publ.
Kotler P & Armstrong G. 2004. Principles of Marketing. Prentice Hall.
Kotler P. 2005. Marketing Management. Prentice Hall of India.
Shephard GS. 1963. Agricultural Price Analysis. Iowa State University
Press.
Taha HA. 2003. Operational Research: An Introduction. Prentice Hall.
FEC 603 ADVANCED ECONOMETRICS 2+1
Objective
To familiarize with the basic tools and techniques as applied to economic
decisions.
To provide an interface between applied Econometrics and decision
making.
Theory
UNIT I
Economics, Statistics and Econometrics. Representation of economic
phenomenon, relationship among economic variables, linear and non-linear
economic models. Regression and Correlation; Partial correlation; The
normality assumption (Classical Normal Linear regression Model Nature of
Regression Analysis – Simple regression, multiple regression and their
assumptions.
UNIT II
Basic concepts of matrix algebra, differentiation, integration and
probability distribution theory; Correlation matrix, residual variance, co-
efficient of multiple correlation, standard errors of co-efficient estimates

214
 and their uses in regression, analysis of partial correlation and its uses in
interpreting regression co-efficients.
UNIT III
Hypothesis testing, Estimation inference; Ordinary least squares – deriving
normal equations, assumptions and properties of OLS; Estimation and
interpretation coefficients; Large sample properties – Maximum Likelihood
Estimation; Violation of basic assumption of OLS and remedies.
UNIT IV
Multicollinearity, Heteroscedasticity, Autocorrelation, Normality
assumption; Use of Dummy Variables – Simultaneous equation model;
Time Series Analysis; Basic Econometric Modeling.
Practical
Application of OLS; application of generalised least square; Tests for
Multicollinearity, Heteroscedasticity, Autocorrelation, and Normality
assumption. Estimation of Economic Parameters.
Suggested Readings
Anthony RN & Reece JS. 1975. Accounting Principles. AITBS.
Bendrey M, Bendrey M, Hussey R & West C. 2003. Essentials of Financial
Accounting in Business. Cengage Learning EMEA.
Chandra P. 2005. Fundamentals of Financial Management. Tata McGraw
Hill.
Maheshwari SN & Maheshwari SK. 2006. A Textbook of Accounting for
Management. Vikas Publ.
McLaney E. 2006. Business Finance: Theory and Practice. Financial
Times, Prentice Hall.
Wood F & Sangster A. 2005. Business Accounting. Prentice hall.

FEC 604 FISHERIES PLANNING AND POLICIES 1+1

Objective
To understand the planning and policy tools and techniques.
Theory
UNIT I
Planning in India-Objectives, allocation, achievements and bottlenecks of
Indian plans, Strategy of Indian planning, resource Mobilization.
UNIT II
Fisheries Development and policy under the plans, Fisheries schemes;
Centrally and State sponsored schemes. Different sectoral schemes,
Agriculture policies, Need for a separate fishery policy. Leasing policies
for inland water bodes and brackish water bodies in different states, Input
Policy, Financing and Credit Policy, fish marketing and pricing policy,
Export –Import Policy.
UNIT III
Types of planning, Stages in the planning process, Planning models.
Planning for utilization of surplus resources including manpower.
UNIT IV
Subsidies in Fisheries, regional disparities, poverty and unemployment in
India with respect to the fisherfolk. Policies, sectoral study of capture and
culture fisheries.

215
 Practical
Performance appraisal of the different sectors over the years; Developing
policy framework for the fisheries sector.
Suggested Readings
Benjamin HH. 1968. Economic Development, Problems, Principles and
Policies. WW Norton.
Gerald MM. 1984. Leading Issue in Economic Development. Oxford
University Press.
Herrick BH & Charles PK. 1983. Economic Development. McGraw-Hill.
Michael PT. 1989. Economic Development in the Third World. Orient
Longman.

FEC 605 AQUACULTURE PRODUCTION ECONOMICS 1+1

Objective
To learn the basic concepts and principles of economics as applied to
aquaculture.
To gain an understanding of the different types of economic concepts and
the analytical tools used for them.
Theory
UNIT I
Production economics- nature and scope, approaches terms and concepts
Different production relationship – factor- product, factor - factor, product-
product Farm management. Risk and uncertainty, productions and cost
concept.
UNIT II
Mathematical analysis of production relationship – concept of production
function, different types, characteristics, economics Implications, economic
optimum and physical optimum, decision make with multiple variables.
UNIT III
Decision making with no risk, with risk, Technology, Input use and factor
share, Farm business analysis economic efficiency in fish production, yield
gap, yield penalties and yield declines.
UNIT IV
Economic aspects of different aquaculture production systems in India and
abroad.
Practical
Estimation of the different production relationships, Farm business
analysis, mathematical analysis of production relationship, Estimation of
physical and economic optimum, Inclusion of risk and uncertainty in
aquaculture systems, Incorporation of technology as a component in the
production function, Estimation of yield gap and factor shares.
Suggested Readings
Cunningham S, Dunn MR & Whitmarsh D. 1985. Fisheries Economics –
An Introduction. Mansell Publ.
Gujarati DN. 1995. Basic Econometrics. McGraw Hill.
Heady EO & Dillon JL. 1961. Agricultural Production Functions. Kalyani.
Heady EO. 1960. Economics of Agricultural Production and Resource Use.
Prentice Hall.
Lawson RM. 1984. Economics of Fisheries Development. Frances Pinter &
Publisher.

216
 Salim SS, Biradar RS & Pandey SK. 2004. Fisheries Economics and
Marketing: An Introduction. CIFE, Mumbai.
Sankhayan PL.1988. Introduction to the Economics and Agricultural
Production. Prentice Hall.
Shang YC. 1990. Aquaculture Economic Analysis – An Introduction.
World Aquaculture Society, USA.

FEC 606 MARINE RESOURCE ECONOMICS 1+1

Objective
To familiarize with the basic concepts and principles of economics as
applied to marine resources.
To gain an understanding of the different types of economics concepts and
the analytical tools used for them.
Theory
UNIT I
Historical background and characteristics of different forms of production
functions, derivatives, alternative algebric forms of production functions
and their applications, choice and functions in empirical analysis.
UNIT II
Optimisation and resource allocation. Multiple product relationships.
Production possibility curves. Choice between products and resource use.
Spatial and temporal allocation of resources. Resource-use efficiency: size,
productivity and returns to scale, measurement of production efficiency.
UNIT III
Problem formulation for programming, preparation of input-output matrix,
objective functions and constraint equations. Assumptions of L.P. Basic
and non-basic solutions; feasible and infeasible solutions. Simplex method
and its application for solving fisheries problems, use of artificial factors,
problems of degeneracy, inconsistency, infeasible and unbounded
solutions. The generalized simplex method; the dual method; the dual
simplex method.
UNIT IV
Measurement of risk and optimization under risk.
Practical
Application of linear programming for solving practical problems in
farming with the help of following: Variable resource programming,
Variable price programming, Integer Programming, Recursive
programming. Theory of games and application of linear programming for
solving game problems in farm decision making. Transport models,
Dynamic programming.
Suggested Readings
Dholakia AD. 2004. Fisheries and Aquatic Resources of India. Daya Publ.
House.
Gujarati DN. 1995. Basic Econometrics. McGraw Hill.
Heady EO & Dillon JL. 1961. Agricultural Production Functions. Kalyani.
Heady EO. 1960. Economics of Agricultural Production and Resource Use.
Prentice Hall.
Sankhayan PL. 1988. Introduction to the Economics and Agricultural
Production. Prentice Hall.
Shanbhogue SL. 2000. Marine Fisheries of India. ICAR.

217
FEC 607 ADVANCED INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS AND 1+1
TRADE
Objective
To gain conceptual clarity on the important linkages between domestic
economy and its external sector.
To incorporate international issues in designing strategies in the changing
environment.
Theory
UNIT I
Concept and Theories of international trade – Classical theories,
Reciprocal demand, Offer curve technique; concepts of terms of trade,
gains from trade, international trade as a substitute for growth, theory of
immesirising growth; Modern theory of international trade – Hecksher-
Ohlin theory, factor price equalization theory, Stopler Samuelson theory,
Robinsky theorem, recent theories of international trade Specific Factors
Model, Capital and Labor Mobility, and Intermediate Goods,
Competitiveness Analysis.
UNIT II
Developing Countries' Concerns of Balance of payment; Rate of exchange;
International capital movements; Free trade Vs Protection, types of
protection; Anti-dumping measures and trade.
UNIT III
International Financial institutions (WTO, WB, IMF); International
Monetary Systems: International Business Environment, European
Monetary System and Emergence of Euro.
UNIT IV
GATT and WTO, transition from GATT to WTO, WTO provision and its
agreements: Agreement on Agriculture (AoA), Agreement on SPS
measures and its salient features, Role of Codex Alimentarius Commission
(CAC) and Agreement in Trade Related Intellectual Property rights
(TRIPs). Challenges, strategies and opportunities in seafood exports. Need
for Agreement on Fisheries. Export/Import regulations; entry process for
imports, Export promotion: New Avenues and measures. Market Access
and Trade liberalisation. Trade and Environment; Trade and labour
standards; WTO and Indian Business.
Practical
Determination of absolute and comparative advantage. Gains from trade
with fixed exchange rates. Estimation of terms of trade. Derivation of offer
curves and effects of technological change and factor supply. Estimation of
protection coefficients. Measurement of effects of tariff imposition. Effects
of tariff and non-tariff barriers on domestic supply and imports. Preparation
of BOP. Performance of Export/import accounts.
Suggested Readings
Charles PK. 1968. International Economics. Richard D. Irwin.
Ethier WJ. 1995. Modern International Economics. Norton International
Ed.
Francis C. 1999. International Economics. Tata McGraw Hill.
Kemp MC. 1964. Pure Theory of International Trade. Prentice Hall.
Walterjngo & Kaaj A. 1981. International Economics. 3rd Ed. Prentice
Hall.

218
FEC 608 FISHERIES GOVERNANCE AND SOCIO ECONOMICS 1+1
Objective
To familiarize with the underlying importance of proper governance of the
fisheries sector.
To review status of fisherfolk in the country.
Theory
UNIT I
Importance of fisheries sector in Indian economy; Fisheries administrative
set up at Centre and States - sphere of responsibilities of Central and State
governments/agencies for fisheries development. Fisheries legislation in
India: background, Indian Fisheries Act of 1897 and subsequent
Amendments.
UNIT II
Marine capture fisheries: comparative study of Marine Fishery Regulation
Acts of coastal Indian States – licensing/registration of vessels and
mechanisation – declaration of closed season, protection of endangered
species, prohibition of destructive fishing methods, regulation of mesh size,
filing of return on fish catch and income. Features of MPEDA Act and
Rules, 1972 – guidelines for operation of Indian deep sea fishing vessels in
Indian EEZ – Maritime Zone of India (regulation of fishing by foreign
vessels) Act 1981 - aquatic exotics and quarantine regulations - Marine
Fisheries Policy, 2004. Coastal Aquaculture Authority.
UNIT III
Aquaculture: Guidelines under CRZ notification of 1991 and its
Amendments, land leasing policies, regulations on use of chemicals and
antibiotics - features of Aquaculture Seed (Quality Control) Relevant
Central/state legislative provisions of Environment, Wildlife, Water,
Biodiversity: (riverine, reservoir and aquaculture), processing in different
States.
UNIT IV
Economic theories and growth models of fish resource development and
exploitation; Fishery resource management; Maximum Sustainable Yield
(MSY), Maximum and Net Economic Yield (M/NEY), Optimum
Sustainable Yield (OSY), Static Maximum Economic Yield (SMEY),
Dynamic Maximum Economic Yield (DMEY) Socioeconomics – An
overview of the socio economic status of the fisherfolk in India, overview
of various welfares schemes, Disaster management. Role of fisheries co-
operatives, corporation and NGOs in the development of the fisherfolk.
Social, economic and cultural context in which NREGA is implemented
Labour market relation: wage, work opportunity, migration, livelihood
security, income generation.
Practical
Licensing/registration of vessels. Estimation of socio-economic parameter
of fisherfolk in India. Computation of various resources efficiency
measures.
Suggested Readings
Gaisford JD & Kerr WA. 2001. Economic Analysis for International Trade
Negotiations. John Wiley & Sons.

219
 Green D & Griffith M. 2002. Dumping on the Poor: The Common
Agricultural Policy, the WTO and International Development.
CAFOD, London.
Sikdar S. 2003. Contemporary Issues in Globalisation - An Introduction to
Theory and Policy in India. Oxford University Press.
Tussie D & Glover D. 2000. The Developing Countries in World Trade -
Policies and Bargaining Strategies. Lynne Rienner.
Weber ML. 2001. From Abundance to Scarcity: A History of U.S. Marine
Fisheries Policy. Island Press.

FEC 609 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY FOR SOCIAL SCIENCES 1+1

Objective
To acquaint the students with the basic concepts of research methods,
processes and tools.
To provide hands on training in data collection and analysis.
Theory
UNIT I
Social science - definition, goals and functions. Role of social science
research in agriculture. Fisheries economics research-induction and
deduction, sources of information, review of literature.
UNIT II
Identification of problem, and formulation of objectives and hypothesis.
Types of hypothesis. Testing of hypothesis. Research design. Type of data
and their sources, methods of data collection- formal (sampling) and
informal (PRA, RRA) survey techniques preparation of questionnaire,
interview method, mail order method, cost accounting method.
UNIT III
Analysis of data - methods of analysis. Selection of appropriate tools for
analysis. Introduction to statistical software for social sciences.
UNIT IV
Report writing-methods of reporting. Use of tables, graphs, diagram, etc. in
reports using computers.
Practical
The students will identify a problem in agricultural economics and work on
the problem during the semester as trained in theory classes by intensively
using personal computers.
Suggested Readings
Kothari CR. 1998. Research Methodology. 2nd Ed. Vishwa Prahashan.
Kothari CR. 2000. Quantitative Techniques. 3rd Ed. Vikas Publ.
Kumar R. 1996. Research Methodology: a Step-by-Step Guide for
Beginners. Sage Publ.
Mukerjee N. 1993. Participatory Rural Appraisal: Methodology and
Applications. Concept Publ. Co.

220
 FISHERIES ECONOMICS
List of Journals

• AgExporter
• Agricultural Economics Research Review
• Agrimarketing
• American Journal of Agricultural Economics
• Aquaculture International
• Asian Development Review
• Asian Economic Review
• Australian Journal of Agricultural and Resource Economics
• Co-operator
• Ecological Economics
• Econometrica
• Economic and Political Weekly
• Economic Perspectives
• Economic Survey
• Economic Theory
• Empirical Economics
• Environment and Development Economics
• European Journal of Research Methods for the Behavioral and Social Sciences
• Experimental Economics
• Fisheries Technology
• Food Outlook
• Indian Co-operative Review
• Indian Journal of Agricultural Economics
• Indian Journal of Agricultural Marketing
• Indian Journal of Fisheries
• Indian Journal of Foreign Trade
• Indian Seafood Journal
• International Advances in Economic Research
• International Economics and Economic Policy
• International Entrepreneurship and Management Journal
• International Environmental Agreements: Politics, Law and Economics
• International Journal of Social Research Methodology
• International Review of Economics.
• Journal of Co-operative Management
• Journal of Industry, Competition and Trade: From Theory to Policy
• Journal of International Entrepreneurship
• Journal of Management and Governance
• Marine Policy
• Marine Products Export Review (Financial Year)
• Monthly Monitoring of Indian Economy
• MPEDA Newsletter
• PRIME of MPEDA
• Report of the Directorate General of Commercial Intelligence and Statistics

221
• Review of Agricultural Economics
• Seafood Export Journal
• Statistics of Marine Products Export
• Survey Research Methods
• The Indian Economic Journal
• Vikalpa

Suggested Broad Areas for Master’s and Doctoral Research

• Profitability and comparative performance of different aquaculture systems

• Investment pattern and capital flow in fisheries sector over the years
• Price spread / consumer surplus, and marketing efficiency of different marketing
channels in fisheries marketing
• Opportunities and challenges for organised fish retail markets
• Impact of mechanization / modernization in coastal fisheries on productivity ,
sustainability and livelihood
• Cost benefit analysis of different aquaculture production systems
• Capital formation and fisheries development in different plans
• Social and ecological impact of coastal aquaculture
• Social and ecological benefit of waste water based aquaculture systems
• Preparation of model commercial project proposals
• Economic and financial analysis of fisheries project proposals
• Export performance and potential of fish and fish products3
• WTO and its implications on the fisheries trade
• Forecasting of the structure and pattern of Indian seafood trade
• Export competitiveness of Indian fish and fish products
• Status and performance of fisheries co-operatives in marine and inland fisheries
sectors
• Financial appraisal of the different co-operatives
• Estimation of credit requirement of Indian fishing community
• Economic evaluation of the fisheries cooperatives –case studies
• Contribution of agriculture and fisheries to Indian economy over the years
• Capital formation In Indian Agriculture and allied sectors
• Demand and supply projections for fish and fish products
• Consumer preference and market segmentation in domestic and export markets for
fish products
• Policy gaps and anomalies in Indian fisheries and aquaculture
• Science an d politics of monsoon ban in coastal fisheries
• Production constraints in different aquaculture production systems
• Yield gap analysis of the different aquaculture production systems
• Impact of trade and environment with respect to high value export oriented
fisheries
• Analysing the MSY, MEY and SOY of the different marine resources
• Comparative advantage and competitiveness of Indian fish products in relation to
major exporting countries
• Impact of anti-dumping and subsidies on Indian fish exports
• Comparative study of land leasing policies in different States

222
 FISHERIES ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY
Course Sturcture - at a Glance

CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS

FET 501* ADVANCED FISHING GEAR TECHNOLOGY 2+1

FET 502* ADVANCED FISHING CRAFT TECHNOLOGY 2+1
FET 503* RESPONSIBLE FISHING 2+1
FET 504* REFRIGERATION AND ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 2+1
FET 505 MARINE ENGINEERING 1+1
FET 506 AQUACULTURAL ENGINEERING 1+1
FET 507 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 0+1

FET 508 FISHING HARBOUR AND FLEET MANAGEMENT 1+1

FET 509 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING AND POLLUTION 1+1

CONTROL
FET 510 SEA SAFETY AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT 1+0
FET 511 FISH PROCESSING MACHINERY 1+1
FET 512 ACOUSTICS, NAVIGATION AND SEAMANSHIP 1+1

FET 591 MASTER’S SEMINAR 1+0

FET 599 MASTER’S RESEARCH 20

* Compulsory for Master’s programme

223
 FISHERIES ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY
Course Contents
FET 501 ADVANCED FISHING GEAR TECHNOLOGY 2+1
Objective
To learn advanced fishing gear technology, design modification of existing
fishing gears and selectivity studies of various fishing gears.
Theory
UNIT I
Fishing gear design – Conventional and current practice for the
representation of fishing gear by scale drawing; The use of computers in
the scale drawing of fishing gear to determine the defects in gear, design to
develop new gears.
UNIT II
Selection of fishing gear, analysis of the parameters of specific fishing
gears and the derivation of empirical relationships for use in the design
process.
UNIT III
Design of bottom, mid-water and surface trawl; gill nets and tangle nets;
types of gill nets-single-walled gill nets, framed gill nets tangle nets and
their technical characteristics, two and three walled trammel nets, combined
gill nets; traps – their classification and general principles of construction.
UNIT IV
Design of stake nets; fyke nets; purse seine, hooks and lines, long lines and
trolling gear.
UNIT V
Attraction of fish – fishing with electricity; Light fishing, fish pumps;
operation and mechanization of long lining.
UNIT VI
Factors to be considered in gill netting in selection of meshes for the
different fishes. Aimed fishing using the modern electronic devices like
echo sounder, Sonar and trawl eye.
UNIT VII
The selectivity of trawl fishing gears, design of otter boards for various
types of trawl fishing.
UNIT VIII
Case studies relating towed, surrounding and static fishing gear and their
energy consumption.
UNIT IX
Fishing gear testing – full scale and model testing in flume tanks, methods
of testing a fishing gear.
UNIT X
The influence of design features on the overall economic performance of
fishing gears.
Practical
Exercises on scale drawing of different types of fishing gears. Use of
cadnet programme in the design of trawl gears. Model net calculations,
Calculations of energy requirements of different gears. Onboard experience
of different fishing methods. Use of net monitoring instruments. Study of
fishing gears through models of nets and field study. Making sketches.

224
 Reading of gear designs. – Trawl nets, Purse seines, Gill net and Long line.
Familiarization with design drawing soft ware. Design of otter boards and
other accessories. Survey of gears and preparation of designs according to
scale by taking measurements from a net.
Suggested Readings
Baranov FI. 1969. Selected Works on Fishing Gear. Vol. I. Commercial
Fishing Techniques. Israel Programme for Scientific Translations,
Jerusalem.
Baranov FI. 1977. Selected Works on Fishing Gear. Keterpress Enterprises.
Israel.
Ben-Yami M. 1994. Purse Seining Manual. FAO Fishing Manual.
Biswas KP. 1996. Harvesting Aquatic Resources. Daya Publ. House.
Bjordal A & Lokkeborg S. 1998. Long Lining. Fishing News Books.
Brandt AV. 1984. Fish Catching Methods of the World. Fishing News
Books.
FAO. 1987. Small Scale Fishing Gear.
Fridman AL. 1986. Calculations for Fishing Gear Designs. FAO Fishing
Manual. Fishing News Books.
Garner J. 1988. Modern Deep Sea Trawling Gear. Fishing News Books.
Hameed SM & Boopendranath MR. 2000. Modern Fishing Gear
Technology. Daya Publ. House.
Kristionsson H. 1975. Modern Fishing Gear of the World. The White Friars
Press.
Sreekrishna Y & Shenoy L. 2001. Fishing Gear and Craft Technology.
ICAR.
FET 502 ADVANCED FISHING CRAFT TECHNOLOGY 2+1
Objective
To understand advanced aspects of fishing craft such as better design and
modification of existing craft layout.
Theory
UNIT I
Different types of fishing crafts-purse seiner, trawler, stern and side trawler,
long liner, gill netter, etc; main differences in the method of construction
and design; consideration regarding the speed and other fishing
requirements. Deck layout and deck equipments of fishing vessels based on
the fishing method; Planning internal capacities of fish hold, engine room,
crew accommodation, fuel tanks and freshwater tanks.
UNIT II
Engine installation in fishing vessels; engine bearers for wooden boats;
alignment of shaft; stern gear assembly; length of shafts; intermediate
shafts; reverse and reduction gear assembly.
UNIT III
Principles of operating steering arrangement; remote control; mast and
derrick arrangements; fish hold; - Rudder principles; helm – design details.
Principal dimensions of a boat. Importance of shape of under water hull,
classification and description of hull forms based on shape and speed –
length ratio.
UNIT IV
Theory of waves; rolling, pitching and heaving; wall sides formula;
resistance and motion – wave and eddy creating resistance, fluid resistance.

225
 Safety and stability aspects of fishing vessels – factors affecting stability,
stability information to be carried on vessels, hydrostatic curves, and static
stability curves and safety measures on fishing vessels.
UNIT V
Barnaby’s tables; speed length ratios; effects of wetted surfaces on speed;
angle of entrance, parallel body, propeller action; types of propellers;
design data; D/P values. Powering of fishing boats, different types of
resistance and their calculations, power requirements of various types of
fishing boats, auxiliary power, propulsive efficiency, type of propellers, and
use of kort nozzle.
UNIT VI
Rudder design and principles of operation; model test etc. Boat fastenings
and fittings used in boat construction.
UNIT VII
Biodeterioration of wood – marine fouling and boring organisms,
preventive measures.
UNIT VIII
Raw materials, properties and construction of FRP, Aluminum, Ferro-
cement and Steel boats. Corrosion – types, fundamentals, measurement and
preventive measures.
UNIT IX
Construction of a wooden boat – Various stages of construction, description
of various machines and tools used in boat building yard, layout of a typical
wooden boat building yard.
UNIT X
Inspection of fishing boat under construction and in operation. Care and
maintenance of wooden boats – factors causing damage, hull protection
methods and maintenance schedule
Practical
Visit to boat building yards for on – the – spot study of different stages of
wooden boat construction and to study the layout. Identification of various
tools and machines used in boat building. Study of various stages of boat
construction with the help of boat models and making their sketches.
Calculation of various dimensions; Study of deck lay outs of different types
of fishing vessels and preparation of sketches; Visit to dry dock
Suggested Readings
Fyson JF. (Ed). 1985. Design of Small Fishing Vessels. Fishing News
Books.
Marine Institute. 1988. Proc. World Symposium on Fishing Gear and
Fishing Vessel Design, The Newfoundland and Labrador Institute
of Fisheries and Marine Technology, St. John’s, Newfoundland,
Canada.
Pike D. 1992. Fishing Boats and Their Equipments. Fishing News Books.
Ponnambalam A. 2003. Fishing Craft Technology. CIFNET, Cochin.
Sanisbury JC. 1996. Commercial Fishing Methods-An Introduction to
Vessels and Gear. Fishing News Books.
Shenoy L. 1988. Course Manual in Fishing Technology. CIFE, Mumbai.
Sreekrishna Y & Shenoy L. 2001. Fishing Gear and Craft Technology.
ICAR.
Traung T. 1967. Fishing Boats of the World. Fishing News Books.

226
 Yadav YS. 2002. Traditional Fishing Craft of the Bay of Bengal. BOBP,
Chennai.
FET 503 RESPONSIBLE FISHING 2+1
Objective
To learn various responsible fishing techniques which cause less damage to
the environment and biodiversity and to understand methods for reducing
bycatch in trawl net.
Theory
UNIT I
Scope and objectives of FAO Code of conduct for Responsible Fisheries.
Articles of CCRF-Description of the code.
UNIT II
Elaboration of Article 8-Fishing operations; By-catch and discards –
Definitions, bycatch reduction devices, Turtle excluder devices, finfish and
shrimp excluder devices.
UNIT III
Selective fishing gear and practices – Selectivity of trawls, gill nets and
lines-Environmental friendly fishing – Energy conservation and resource
enhancement.
UNIT IV
Fish Aggregation devices (FADs) – Objectives and types of FADs. Design
and construction of FADs.
UNIT V
Energy optimization in fisheries – methods of energy conservation in fish
harvesting.
UNIT VI
Application of Remote sensing and PFZ and GIS in fisheries.
UNIT VII
Illegal, Unregulated and Unreported fishing methods (IUU); Destructive
and prohibited fishing systems and practices.
UNIT VIII
Eco friendly fishing methods and fishing gears.
UNIT IX
Effect of fishing on nontarget species – Effect of bottom trawl on benthic
fauna and habitats. Conservation methods issues and implications for
biodiversity.
Practical
Study of design and operation of BRDs and TEDs; Preparation of
document listing and prohibited fishing practices; compilation of package
of practices for energy conservation; iInterpretation of SST and Ocean
colour charts, study of Potential Fishing Zone (PFZ) maps; problems on
fishing gear selectivity; studies on impact of various fishing gears on
environment and biodiversity.
Suggested Readings
Bergstrom M. 1983. Review of Experiences with and Present Knowledge
about Fish Aggregating Devices, BOBP/WP/23 Bay of Bengal
Programme, Madras.
CIFNET MODULE III & IV. Code of Conduct for Responsible Fisheries.
FAO. 1995. Code of Conduct for Responsible Fisheries, Rome.

227
 FAO. 1996. Fishing Operations. FAO Training Guidelines for Responsible
Fisheries. No. 1. Rome.
FAO. 2003. Fisheries Management. The Ecosystem Approach to Fisheries.
FAO Technical Guidelines for Responsible Fisheries. No.4,
Suppl.2, Rome.
Kaiser MJ & de Groot SJ. 2000. Effect of Fishing on Non-Target Species
and Habitats. Blackwell.

FET 504 REFRIGERATION & ELECTRICAL 2+1

ENGINEERING
Objective
To impart knowledge on engineering aspects of refrigerators, freezers and
heat-load calculation etc and to teach electrical aspects of fishing vessel.
Theory
UNIT I
Principles of refrigeration – Vapour Compression system, Vapour
adsorption system – Refrigeration cycle.
UNIT II
Application of Refrigeration in fisheries Refrigeration in sea food
processing plant coefficient of Performance (CoP).
UNIT III
Types of freezers and their efficiency, Heat load calculations – Insulations.
Frosting and defrosting in freezers and cold stores.
UNIT IV
Refrigeration in Factory Trawlers. Refrigerated Transport.
UNIT V
Sources of energy; General structure of electrical power systems, Power
transmission and distribution via overhead lines and underground cables,
Steam, Hydel, Gas and Nuclear power generation.
UNIT VI
Principal and application of DC Networks, single phase AC Circuits, three
phase AC circuits, magnetic, transformers, induction motor, DC Motors
etc.
UNIT VII
Electrical Measuring Instruments: DC PMMC instruments shunt and
multipliers, multimeters, moving iron ammeters and voltmeters,
dynamometer, wattmeter, AC watt-hour meter, extension of instrument
ranges.
UNIT VIII
Principles and working; electronic components; Audio; R.F. circuits;
electron tubes, transistors; principles of electronic circuits; amplifiers,
oscillators, rectifier, tuned circuits – transmission of reception.
UNIT IX
Classification of waves according to frequency and their propagation
through different media.
UNIT X
Principles of working of radio, radio telephone, radio direction finder, echo
sounder, sonar, radar, GPS etc.

228
 Practical
Visit to refrigeration plants, heat load calculations. Handling and operation
of refrigeration equipments – compressor, condenser, evaporator, liquid
return system, gas purging, oil drain, oil charging, refrigerant charging,
defrosting; ice making and harvesting; study of various automatic control
devices; expansion valves, L.P. and H.P. switches, solenoid valves. Study
of various types of fish processing machineries; electrical motors,
transformers, GPS, SONAR etc.
Suggested Readings
Ayyappan VP. 2002. Elements of Electrical Technology. CIFNET, Cochin.
Joshy CD & Devadhason M. 2001. Basic Electronics and Fish Finding
Equipments. CIFNET, Cochin.
Shawyer M & Pizzali AFM. 2003. The Use of Ice on Small Fishing Vessels.
FAO Tech. Paper No. 436. Rome.
Sternin UG, Nikonorou IV & Yu BK. 1976. Electrical Fishing. Keter Publ.
House.
FET 505 MARINE ENGINEERING 1+1
Objective
To learn engineering aspects of marine engines for effective utilization
during fishing and propulsion system of fishing vessels.
Theory
UNIT I
Engine characteristics – capacity of cylinders, IHP, BHP, FHP, BMEP,
torque determinations; SFC values. IC engines – working cycles – Indicator
diagrams – Performance number – Supercharging – Engine performance
curves – Duel-fuel engines. Handling of IC engine and maintenances –
Engine and boiler room arrangements – Steering gears – auxiliary engines –
Heat exchangers – Propeller Shaft driver steam generators.
UNIT II
Compression ratio and thermal efficiency; volumetric efficiency;
mechanical efficiency different ratings – continuous, peak, intermittent.
Feel and lubricant – Strokes – Cooling method – Running characteristics –
Size weight – Power requirement.
UNIT III
Propulsion system – Combinations of engine, power transmission and
propeller.
UNIT IV
Function of main engine, friction, clutch, hydraulic coupling, gearbox,
thrust; bearing, shafting, propeller.
UNIT V
Auxiliary machinery systems – Requirements of a winch, windlass, line
and net hauler – estimation of their driving torque and power; Operation of
a hydraulic steering gear; Rudder torque. Floating offshore structures –
Diving underwater vehicles. Diving – Underwater vehicles. Estimation
grower requirement for various types of fishing – Efficiency group of
fishing techniques – Resistance group of fishing methods – Computation of
engine power.
Practical
Study of basic machine parts, shafts, keys, couplings, levers, joints, pulleys,
belts, gears and bearings. Study of Engine parts, engine testing,

229
 dissembling and assembling a running condition marine engine; study of
marine diesel engines, fuel consumption testing with load; Propeller
calculations using the computers; calculations related to engine power.
Suggested Readings
Calder N. 1992. Marine Diesel Engines. Waterline Books.
CIFNET. 2004. Fishery Engineering. Cochin.
Morgan N. 1990. Marine Technology Reference Book. Butterworths.
Rajput RK. 2006. Thermal Engineering. Laxmi Publ.
Rethinadhas C. 2002. Marine Engineering. CIFNET, Kochi.
Watson GO & Harvey RA. 1971. Steering Gear. Butterworths.
FET 506 AQUACULTURAL ENGINEERING 1+1
Objective
To familiarize engineering aspects of fish farm and hatchery, farm
machinery operation and maintenance.
Theory
UNIT I
Site selection for aquaculture; surveying and leveling, earthwork
calculations. Design of dykes, sluice, channels.
UNIT II
Tide fed farms; studies on water supply; aquaculture in open systems-
design of cages, rafts, pens, rakes, ropes etc.
UNIT III
Fluid mechanics, pumps, flow estimation and measurement; aquaculture in
ponds, raceways and tanks.
UNIT IV
Recirculating aquaculture system; aeration, sterilization and disinfection,
ponds, tanks and other impounding structures; filtration. Aeration – Gases
in water. Gas transfer – Theory of oxygenation – Types of aerations.
Efficiency of Aerators. Recirculation and water – Reuse systems – water
exchange – water reuse methods – Recirculation – Advantage – Designs of
re-use systems.
UNIT V
Fundamentals of concrete; building materials, cement, RCC. Engineering
aspects of fish and shrimp hatchery. Farm machinery operation and
maintenance. Pond sealing techniques. Shapes roof design – Load carrying
system. Floors, walls, ventilation.
UNIT VI
Automatic feeding system – Feed dispensers – Demand feeders. Design and
construction of aquaculture system pond construction – water transportion
system – Pump houses – Inlet and outlet structures – Water treatment
plants.
Practical
Visit to hatcheries and farms; Instruments used in aquaculture; Operations
of aerators, filters, water supply systems. Calculations related to earth
requirement aerated efficiency and pump selection. Pump installations
.Design of pump house. Computation of water requirement, pump, and
pumping rates.
Suggested Readings
Bose AN,Ghosh SN, Yang CT & Mitra A. 1991. Coastal Aquaculture
Engineering. E. Arnold.

230
 Ivar LO. 2007. Aquaculture Engineering. Daya Publ. House.
Lawson TB. 1997. Fundamentals of Aquaculture Engineering. CBS.
Wheaton EW. 1970. Aquaculture Engineering. Wiley-Interscience.

FET 507 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 0+1

Objective
To gain knowledge on practical aspects of computer aided engineering
graphic.
Practical
UNIT I
Introduction to engineering graphics – Drawing instruments and their use –
Different types of lines – Lettering & dimensioning – Familiarisation with
current India Standard Code of Practice for Engineering Drawing.
UNIT II
Introduction to scales. Introduction to orthographic projections –
Horizontal, vertical and profile planes – First angle and third angle
projections – Projection of points in different coordinates – Projections of
lines inclined to one of the reference planes.
UNIT III
Projections of lines inclined to both the planes – True lengths of the lines
and their angles of inclination with the reference planes – Traces of lines.
Projection of plane laminae of geometric shapes inclined one of the
reference planes – inclined to both the planes – auxiliary projections.
UNIT IV
Projections of polyhedra and solids of revolution – Frustum – projection of
solids with axis parallel to one of the planes and parallel or perpendicular
to the other plane – Projections with the axis inclined to one of the planes.
Projections of solids with axis inclined to both the planes – Projection of
spheres. Sections of solids by planes perpendicular to at least one of the
reference planes – True shapes of sections, Developments.
Suggested Readings
Bhatt ND. [Link] Engineering Drawing. Charotar Publ. House,
Anand.
Rising JS & Almfeldt MW. 1964. Engineering Graphics: An Integration of
Engineering Drawing, Descriptive Geometry and Engineering
Problems Solution. WC. Brown.
Venugopal K. 2004. Engineering Drawing and Graphics. New Age
International.

FET 508 FISHING HARBOUR AND FLEET MANAGEMENT 1+1

Objective
To learn fishing harbour Engineering, fishing fleet management and
manning regulations.
Theory
UNIT I
FAO classification of fishing vessels. Indigenous fishing boats of India –
fishing boats of maritime states of India, fishing boats used in the inland
and brackish waters, account of mechanized boats introduced in India.

231
 UNIT II
Personnel management, planning of fishing cruises. Fishing fleet capacity,
fleet registration, fleet insurance, seaworthiness assessment, tonnage
measurements.
UNIT III
Statutory rules and regulations under MSA, classified societies, manning
regulations and requirements; regulations to prevent collisions at sea.
UNIT IV
Classification and functions of fishing harbour. Facilities – waterside and
landside facilities, services and utilities provided, layout of a modern
fishing harbour, stages in the planning of fishing harbours. Dredging.
Economic evaluation on fishing harbour project.
UNIT V
Dry docks and slipway –.Fishing harbour management and maintenance.
Practical
Visit to dry dock; Visit to fishing harbour, study of boats with the help of
boat models and making sketches; Visit to various vessel types of fishing
vessel.
Suggested Readings
FAO. 1960. Report to Government of India on Fishing Harbours Based on
the Work of C. G. B. Juke and C.R.B. Juke. FAO Report No. 1242.
Rome.
FAO. 1962. Second Report to Government of India on Fishing Harbour
Based on the Work of B. W. Johnson. FAO Report No. 1538. Rome.
Ramakrishnan TK. 2007. Ocean Engineering. Gene Tech Books.
Sciortino SA, Barcali A & Carlesi M. 1995. Construction and Maintenance
of Artisanal Fishing Harbours and Village Landingss. FAO, Rome.
Sreekrishna Y & Shenoy L. 2001. Fishing Gear and Craft Technology.
ICAR.

FET 509 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING AND POLLUTION 1+1

Objective
To understand engineering aspects of environment to protect the
environment from pollution.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction – Quality of water – Quantity of water – conveyance of water
– treatment of water – filtration of water – Disinfections of water – water
softening.
UNIT II
Distribution system of water. Collection and conveyance of refuse – pumps
– sewage disposal – primary and secondary treatment of sewage.
UNIT III
Environmental Pollution – Ecological Balances – Ozone layer – Green
House effect – Fossil Fuels. Atmosphere pollution – water pollution.
Marine oil pollution – Cause – Oil filtering equipment. Oil record book and
controlling monitoring of marine pollution. Bunkering. MORPOL
regulations.

232
 UNIT IV
Air pollution – Control of Air pollution. Air pollution causes, Setting
chambers, Cyclone Filters. Solid waste disposal. Sources of Pollutants –
Classification. Air- pollution – Emission of harmful touchils. Littering of
the sea – Plastics – Foods – Papers – Metals – Garbage – Regulation.
UNIT V
Low cost waste treatment systems and their Design. Ballest water
management in ships. Discharge of ballast water – Problems of ballast
water – Log book maintenance – Managing ballast water. Waste water and
treatment, Industrial waste water management – Solid waste disposal.
Environment and corrosion, Mathematical modeling for environment
pollution control.
Practical
Visit to various pollution control stations. Familiarization of pollution
control instrument. Pollution control in Fishing harbours. Pollution control
in aquacultural farms.
Suggested Readings
Bist DS. 2000. Safety and Security at Sea - A Guide to Safer Voyages.
Butterworth- Heinemann.
Salvato JA, Nemerow NL & Agardy FJ. 2004. Environmental Engineering.
John Wiley & Sons.
Sciortino JA & Ravikumar R. 1999. Fishery Harbour Manual on the
Prevention of Pollution. BOBP. Chennai.

FET 510 SEA SAFETY AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT 1+0

Objective
To learn theoretical aspects of sea safety and disaster management, water
warning signal and bad weather preparations.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction to sea safety – Safe navigation procedures for fishing vessels;
Distress signals; Distress signals.
UNIT II
Accidents associated with marine environment-crossing surf, bad weather,
poor visibility storms, loss of power at sea, loss of way, grounding,
collisions. Injuries from fish, animals and machinery. Man overboard and
capsizing.
UNIT III
Signals for fishing vessel safety; agencies involved in fishing vessel rescue
operations. Keeping watch at sea – Preventing collusions – Heavy weather
preparations crow management.
UNIT IV
Fire onboard and Fire fighting equipments. First aid at sea; Weather
warning signals and weather reporting system for fishing vessels; Bad
weather preparations for fishing vessels.
UNIT V
Stranding and beaching of fishing vessels and refloatation procedures;
Measures to enhance sea safety; International conventions related to sea
safety.

233
 UNIT VI
Types of natural and man made hazards in fisheries – Cyclone, tsunami etc.
Characteristics and impact of various disasters. Preparedness for disasters
at sea. Mass evacuation, storm shelters and survival platforms.
Suggested Readings
Bist DS. 2000. Safety and Security at Sea - A Guide to Safer Voyages.
Butterworth-Heinemann.
FAO. 1975. Code of Safety for Fisherman and Fishing Vessels.
International Maritime Organization, London.
International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea. 1974. Universal
Publ. Corp. Mumbai.
Larkin FJ. 1998. Basic Coastal Navigation. 2nd Ed. Sheridan.
Prakasan U. 1997. Rule of the Road Signal and Voyage. CIFNET, Cochin.
Sreekrishna Y & Shenoy L. 2001. Fishing Gear and Craft Technology.
ICAR.

FET 511 FISH PROCESSING MACHINERY 1+1

Objective
To familiarize with engineering aspects of various equipments related to
fish processing and design and layout of factory vessels and processing
factories.
Theory
UNIT I
Theory of machines; mechanisms; transmission of power; friction wheels;
toothed gears; belt drive.
UNIT II
Processing equipments on board the fishing vessels. Belt drivers, graders,
deskinners, freezers, and canning machineries.
UNIT III
Study of fish meal plant equipments; freeze drying and dehydrating
equipments.
UNIT IV
Types of boilers and their auxiliary equipments used in fish processing
industries.
UNIT V
Twin screw extruders, driers, grading two filtering machines, Packing
machines–Equipment Maintenance and safety.
Practical
Study of various types fish processing machineries; calculation of power
requirements. Study of boilers and its operation, canning equipments, Twin
screw extruders.
Suggested Readings
EIRI. 2000. Modern Packaging Technology. Engineers India Research
Institute, New Delhi.
Gopakumar K. 2002. Text Book of Fish Processing Technology. ICAR.
Heldman DR. 1975. Food Process Engineering. AVI Publ.
Kondrashova NG. 1986. Shipboard Refrigeration and Fish Processing
Equipment. Balkema, Leiden.
Novikov VM. 1982. Handbook of Fishery Technology. Vol. I. Amerind
Publ.

234
 Slade FH. 1997. Food Processing Plants. Leonard Hill Books.
Stansby ME. 1963. Industrial Fishery Technology. Reinhold Publ.

FET 512 ACOUSTICS, NAVIGATION AND SEAMANSHIP 1+1

Objective
To understand engineering aspects of fish acoustics equipment, navigation
and seamanship for fishing vessel safety.
Theory
UNIT I
Basic principles of acoustic fish detection. Acoustic surveys, acoustic
equipments used in fishing.
UNIT II
Echo sounder – major components, specifications and uses; Sonar –
specifications, types; instruments used for evaluation of underwater gear
performance.
UNIT III
Global positioning system (GPS); vessel monitoring systems (VMS);
communication systems – VHF, SSB, Immarsat system; safety devices –
SART, EPIRB, GMDSS.
UNIT IV
Navigation – types, navigational equipments, RADAR, Radio direction
finder, Decca, LORAN, OMEGA, Autopilot, Fixing of vessel position,
Navigational charts, Satellite; Navigator - Navigation and fishing lights,
distress signals; Rules of the Road.
UNIT V
Ship and its main parts; ropes – their types, handling; strength and
preservation; knots and splices; measurement of speed; maintenance of log
sheet; anchoring mooring; steering; rolling and pitching; Morse code;
accidents; marine compass and its uses; sextant; chart reading positions –
simple position lines.
Practical
Chart work; operation of echo sounder, Sonar, GPS, Radar and
communication systems like VHF, SSB; familiarization with safety devices
like SART, EPIRB and GMDSS; identification and study of navigation and
fishing lights, distress signals and navigational equipments like compass,
chronometer, aneroid barometer, sextant and logs.
Suggested Readings
CIFNET. 2004. Fishery Engineering. Cochin.
FAO. 1998. Fishing Operations. Vessel Monitoring Systems. FAO
Technical Guidelines for Responsible Fisheries No. 1. Suppl. 1,
Rome.
Joshy CD & Devadhason M. 2001. Basic Electronics and Fish Finding
Equipments. CIFNET, Cochin.
Larkin FJ. 1998. Basic Coastal Navigation. 2nd Ed. Sheridan.
MacLennan DN & Simmonds EJ. 1992. Fisheries Acoustics. Fish and
Fisheries Series 5. Chapman & Hall.
Mitson RB. 1983. Fisheries Sonar. Fishing News Books.
Sreekrishnan Y & Shenoy L. 2001. Fishing Gear and Craft Technology.
ICAR.

235
 FISHERIES ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY
List of Journals

• Aquacultural Engineering
• Aquaculture
• Environmental Science
• Fish and Fisheries
• Fisheries Research
• Fisheries Science
• Fishing Technology
• Indian Journal of Ecology
• Indian Journal of Marine Sciences
• Journal of Indian Ocean studies

Suggested Broad Research Areas for Master’s Research

• Design upgradation of existing fishing gears for better catch

• Development of new fishing gear design and efficiency studies
• Design upgradation of fishing crafts
• Fouling effects on fishing crafts and prevention methods
• Problems of wooden crafts with boring organisms
• Energy organization of fishing crafts
• Design of BRD and TED their efficiency studies
• Studies on remote sensing and PFZ
• Heat load calculations design and layout upgradation of processing plants.
• Marine engine power ratings under various load conditions
• Design and layout studies of fish farms.
• Design of various fish farm, equipments through engineering graphics
• Low cost waste treatment systems and their design
• Management options for ballast water
• Disaster management strategies
• Use of IT in disaster preparedness
• Study of power requirements for different processing machinery
• Factors determining the selection of processing machinery
• Modern tools for navigation
• Application of eco-sounder in locating fish shoals

236
 FISHERIES EXTENSION
Course Structure - at a Glance
CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS
FEX 501* PERSPECTIVES AND PRACTICES OF FISHERIES EXTENSION 2+1
FEX 502* EXTENSION COMMUNICATION AND METHODS 2+1
FEX 503* PARTICIPATORY APPROACHES IN FISHERIES EXTENSION 2+1
FEX 504* TRAINING FOR HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT 2+1
FEX 505 COMMUNITY MOBILISATION AND ORGANISATIONAL 1+1
DEVELOPMENT
FEX 506 DIFFUSION AND ADOPTION OF INNOVATIONS IN FISHERIES 1+1
FEX 507 MULTIMEDIA CREATIONS AND APPLICATIONS 0+2
FEX 508 PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT OF DEVELOPMENT 1+1
PROGRAMMES
FEX 509 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 1+1
FEX 510 GENDER, LIVELIHOOD AND DEVELOPMENT 1+1
FEX 511 DEVELOPMENT JOURNALISM 1+1
FEX 512 INDIGENOUS TRADITIONAL KNOWLEDGE IN FISHERIES 1+1
FEX 513 COMMUNITY BASED DISASTER MANAGEMENT 1+1

FEX 591 MASTER’S SEMINAR 1+0

FEX 599 MASTER’S RESEARCH 20

FEX 601** ADVANCES IN FISHERIES EXTENSION MANAGEMENT 2+1

FEX 602** MONITORING AND EVALUATION OF DEVELOPMENT 2+1
PROGRAMMES
FEX 603** MEASUREMENT AND SCALING TECHNIQUES 2+1
FEX 604 EXTENSION SERVICE SYSTEM MANAGEMENT 1+1
FEX 605 ADVANCES IN TRAINING METHODS AND EDUCATION 1+1
TECHNOLOGY
FEX 606 SOCIAL AND GENDER ISSUES IN FISHERIES 1+1
FEX 607 INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY FOR 1+1
FISHERIES DEVELOPMENT
FEX 608 INTERNATIONAL EXPERIENCES IN FISHERIES EXTENSION 2+0
FEX 610 ERGONOMICS 1+1

FEX 691 DOCTORAL SEMINAR I 1+0

FEX 692 DOCTORAL SEMINAR II 1+0

FEX 699 DOCTORAL RESEARCH 45

* Compulsory for Master’s programme ; ** Compulsory for Doctoral programme

237
 FISHERIES EXTENSION
Course Contents

FEX 501 PERSPECTIVES AND PRACTICES OF FISHERIES 2+1

EXTENSION
Objective
To gain insights intodifferent concepts, principles, praxis, recent changes
and emerging challenges in fisheries extension.
To acquire skills required to practice various fisheries extension
approaches.
Theory
UNIT I
Overview of fisheries and aquaculture sector in India and world; Special
characteristics of fisheries sector and its stakeholders; Understanding
extension education, research, and service; Overview of fisheries research,
development and extension systems in India; Scope and importance of
fisheries and aquaculture extension.
UNIT II
Critical review of philosophy, principles, concepts, and practices of
fisheries extension systems and approaches; Teaching, learning and co-
learning; Epistemology of knowledge in fisheries – ITK vis-à-vis lab
generated knowledge.
UNIT III
Fisheries extension – advantages and limitations of present welfare and
subsidy oriented extension systems; Development and extension
approaches as practiced by public agencies like Department of Fisheries,
KVKs, Agricultural Technology Management Agency (ATMA), NGOs,
FAO, Bay of Bengal Programme (BOBP-IGO), and by the private sector;
participatory fisheries extension approaches.
UNIT IV
Aquaculture extension system - review of extension approach as practiced
by DoF, FFDA, and BFDA; Market led extension approaches; Importance
of Information and Communication Technology (ICT) in fisheries
extension system.
Practical
Exercises on development of extension and field manuals; Exercises on
participatory learning / co-learning; Case study of extension approaches
practiced by select State Departments of Fisheries, FFDAs / BFDAs, select
NGOs, AMUL model; case study of market led extension approaches like
e-choupal choupal, Agri Business Clinics, etc.; Critical review of
experiences and lessons from fisheries extension practices from across the
world; case study on the use of ICT for fisheries development; Field
exposure by visiting established extension projects.
Suggested Readings
Chandrasekhar CS. (Ed.). 2004. Privatization of Agricultural Extension in
India. MANAGE, Hyderabad.
Kumar D. 1996. Aquaculture Extension Services Review: India. FAO
Fisheries Circular No. 906, Rome.

238
 Malhotra SP & Sinha VRP. 2007. Indian Fisheries and Aquaculture in a
Globalizing Economy. Part II. Narendra Publ. House.
Ramchandran C. 2004. Teaching not To F(in)ish: A Constructivist
Perspective on Reinventing a Responsible Marine Fisheries
Extension System. CMFRI, Kochi.
Ray GL. 2006. Extension, Communication and Management. 6th Ed.
Kalyani.
Rivera WM. 2000. Agricultural Extension: Worldwide Institutional
Evolution and Forces for Change. Elsevier.

FEX 502 EXTENSION COMMUNICATION AND METHODS 2+1

Objective
To learn different communication strategies used in mass, group and
personal contact methods of extension programme.
To get hands on training in application of extension methods and
communication aids.
Theory
UNIT I
Communication - meaning, process, theories and models; Traditional
communication; Individual, group and mass communication, levels of
communication; non-verbal communication; AV aids – selection and use.
UNIT II
Communicator - role of communicator in extension education,
communicator’s behaviour; communication skills; fidelity of
communication; communication competence and empathy; communication
effectiveness and credibility; improving oral and written communication;
message – meaning, dimensions, characteristics, treatment and
effectiveness, distortion of message; simulation exercises; channels of
communication – meaning, dimensions, classification, selection, efficiency,
credibility, use; audience or receivers; feedback; communication behaviour;
social network – homophily and heterophily.
UNIT III
Communicating with fishers and fish farmers; barriers in communication;
communication and social change; futuristic shape of communication
technologies.
UNIT IV
Recent communication technologies – Internet based technologies, video
and teleconferencing, computer assisted instructions, Information kiosks,
Village Resource Centres, Community networks, WAN, MAN, AGRINEt,
e-Governance; Cyber extension and e-learning.
Practical
Exercises in written and oral communication; documenting and presenting
success stories in fisheries, AV aids - rationale and preparation of AV aids
with local resources; public speaking and presentation skills; organising
meetings, guided discussions; organizing field demonstrations and field-
days; preparation of information, education and communication materials
on various aspects of fisheries; instructional video and ICT; Practicing tele
and video conferencing, case study of a community radio, tele-centres and
farmer discussion groups; designing a website on fisheries and aquaculture;

239
 developing a script and shooting a video film as an extension aid;
Development and use of e-learning modules.
Suggested Readings
Lesiskar RV & Pettit JD. 2004. Business Communication. 8th Ed. Tata
McGraw-Hill.
Locker KO & Kaczmarek SK. 2004. Business Communication-Building
Critical Skill. Tata McGraw Hill.
Mathur KB. 1994. Communication for Development and Social Change.
Allied Publ.
Moakley FX. 1973. Handbook of Audio-Visual Aids. Harcourt Brace
Jovanovich.
Samanta RK. 1990. Development Communication for Agriculture. DK
Publ.
Singh R. 1993. Communication Technology for Rural Development. BR
Publ.
Van Den Ban AW. 1985. Communication for Rural Innovation: Rethinking
Agricultural Extension. Blackwell.

FEX 503 PARTICIPATORY APPROACHES IN FISHERIES 2+1

EXTENSION
Objective
To gain knowledge on participatory approaches in fisheries extension
programmes.
To gain practical experience in participatory approaches and techniques.
Theory
UNIT I
Participatory approaches for aquatic resources management and
development: need, importance and guiding principles; Community
mobilization methods - Farmer-First Approach; Trickle Down System –
concept, method and processes; Knowledge Driven Extension System –
concept and method.
UNIT II
Community based fisheries management and Fisheries co-management –
concept, origin, importance, types, method, processes, stakeholder rights,
responsibilities and participation, institutional mechanisms, implementation
constraints, experiences from other countries; conflict resolution and
management; Public-Private-Community Partnership.
UNIT III
Participatory Learning Approach (PLA) including role-plays, case studies,
brainstorming, and ranking of priority issues, discovery-based experiential
learning, participatory education methods like FGD; Participatory
appraisal techniques - census mapping, resource mapping, social mapping;
selection of participatory methods and their uses; Farmer Field Schools for
Aquaculture.
Practical
Conducting Participatory Rural Appraisal in select villages and developing
action plans; Conducting focused group discussion and developing action
plan; Facilitating group formation based on the felt needs and to implement
the action plans / plan of work; Reviewing national and international case
studies on participatory approach to aquaculture research and development;

240
 case studies and simulation exercises on fisheries co-management /
community based fisheries management.
Suggested Readings
Brown D, Derek S & Simon FS. 2005. Mainstreaming Fisheries Co-
Management in the Asia-Pacific. Asia-Pacific Fishery Comm. Rep.
Publ. 2005/24, FAO, United Nations Regional Office for Asia and
the Pacific, Bangkok.
Chambers R, Arnold P & Thrupp LA. 1989. Farmers First: Farmer
Innovation and Agricultural Research. Intermediate Technology
Publ.
Chambers R. 1983. Rural Development Putting the Last First. Longman.
Edwards P, Little DC & Demaine H. 2002. Rural Aquaculture. CABI.
Kumar D. 1999. Trickle Down System (TDS) of Aquaculture Extension for
Rural Development. RAP Publ.
Robert SP. 2005. Fisheries Co-Management: A Practical Hand Book.
CABI.

FEX 504 TRAINING FOR HUMAN RESOURCE 2+1

DEVELOPMENT
Objective
To learn the design and methods of conducting training programmes for the
trainers, fishers and fish farmers.
To acquire hands-on practice in use of training aids and tools.
Theory
UNIT I
Human Resource Development – Concept and significance; Education,
learning and training; Instructional design and educational technology;
Theories of learning - radical behaviorism, cognitivism, constructivism;
training and development; Gender sensitive training.
UNIT II
Types of Training - Induction, on-the-job, off-the-job, in-service,
customized, inception, trainers’, participatory, web-based, fishers/fish
farmers’, farmer-led, vocational and echo-training; Training tools like T-
Group, Fish bowl exercise, ice-breakers, team-building exercises and
games; workshop and writeshop.
UNIT III
Preparation of Training Manuals- content writing; Training cycle - training
need assessment, developing training objectives and outcome, developing
training modules and lesson plan, logistic management and evaluation of
training programme, follow-up and action plan.
UNIT IV
Facilitating Community Mobilization Process - Perception of service
delivery system, level of expertise and capacity amongst the community to
facilitate such services, willingness of the community to match individual
interests with community interest, facilitation of resources for mobilizing
community; Promoting Public-Private-Community Participation.
Practical
Training need assessment for different clientele groups; Designing training
tools and manuals on fisheries; Organising and conducting fisheries

241
 training programmes; Evaluation of training; Impact studies in terms of
results (output, outcome and impact); Team building exercises.
Suggested Readings
Donald LK. 1998. Evaluating Training Programmes: The Four Levels.
Berrett-Koehler.
Kumar D, Ojha SN & Biradar RS. 2006. Public-Private and Community
Participation for Sustainable Rural Livelihood Development
through Fisheries. In: National Convention on Knowledge Driven
Agricultural Development: Management of Change. AR Scientists’
Forum 24-26 March 2006, New Delhi.
Lynton RP & Pareek U. 1973. Training for Development. Sage Publ.
Misra DC. 1990. New Directions in Extension Training. Directorate of
Extension, Ministry of Agriculture, New Delhi.
Phillips JJ. 1998. Handbook of Training Evaluation and Measurement
Methods. Gulf Publ.
Singh RP, Thamtani A & Singh P. 1996. Training Management. Jain Publ.

FEX 505 COMMUNITY MOBILISATION AND ORGANISATION 1+1

DEVELOPMENT
Objective
To gain insights into the relevant know-how on the structure and functions
of community institutions.
To acquire competency and confidence to bring about desirable social
change by organizing communities.
Theory
UNIT I
Sociological and psychological perspectives of social institutions, culture,
community and community organization; functions of community; rural
sociology and its relevance to extension education; social stratification;
social changes, conflict in rural society.
UNIT II
Communities as vehicles of change; community mobilization - entering,
submerging, empowering and governance; outreach, community centres
and services; models of community organization in developing countries;
social action; challenges in mobilization, advocacy, coalition building and
networking, facilitation and mediation; role of NGOs.
UNIT III
Rural development – rural context and livelihood, rural poverty, policies,
programmes and interventions; rural local self governance – Panchayati
Raj; rural-urban migration, social problems, displacement and
rehabilitation; rights of indigenous communities; community participation
for natural resources management; strategies of developmental
intervention; international processes and implications for local
communities; leader and leadership – types, role, theories and its
implication for development; motivation – theories, types and importance;
social perceptions, influence and relationships; attitudes; emotion and
stress.
Practical
Approach to and strategies of community organizing – study of specific
cases/illustrations of strategies and efforts on a range of issues that have

242
 been effective; exercises on community organisation; identification of
village leaders and their role in community development; cases on social,
cultural and technological changes; Preparing investigative report of
fishing/fish farming village considering culture, language, values, norms,
institutions, social organization, groups, social stratification, social conflict,
etc.
Suggested Readings
Chitambar JB. 1990. Introductory Rural Sociology. Wiley Eastern.
Haralambos M, Heald RM & Holborn M. 1995. Sociology: Themes and
Perspectives. Collins Educ.
Morgan CT & King RA. 1975. Introduction to Psychology. Tata McGraw
Hill.
Sinha VRP. 1999. Rural Aquaculture in India. FAO, United Nations,
Thailand. RAP Publ.

FEX 506 DIFFUSION AND ADOPTION OF INNOVATIONS 1+1

IN FISHERIES
Objective
To impart knowledge on diffusion of fisheries innovations.
To be able to critically analyse the innovation decision processes in the
fisheries sector.
Theory
UNIT I
Elements of diffusion; diffusion research – history, typology, contributions
and criticisms; generalising diffusion via meta research; innovations in
fisheries – innovation development process, socio-economic status, equality
and innovation development, converting research into practice; Critique on
Rogers’ innovation decision process, innovation attributes and adopter
categories.
UNIT II
Opinion leadership – meaning, characteristics, types and their
measurement; diffusion networks; social learning theory; Change agent –
meaning, roles, factors of success, change agent contact; centralised and
decentralised diffusion systems; innovation in organisations - contract
farming – merits and demerits; consequences of innovations – model and
classification, equality in the consequences; recent studies in innovation
decision process.
Practical
Case study of the diffusion process of select fisheries innovations;
Analysing the factors influencing adoption and rejection of fisheries
technologies and practices; case studies of select innovation diffusion
models like AMUL, Grameen Bank, and WADI-NABARD/BAIF; case
study of decision making pattern in fisher villages and the role of men,
women and youth; case studies on opinion leaders and change agents in
transfer of fisheries technologies; field visit to study select models of ToT.
Suggested Readings
Louise G. 1998. Working with Indigenous Knowledge. International
Development Research Centre, Canada.
Rogers EM. 2003. Diffusion of Innovation. 5th Ed. Free Press.

243
 Stephen D. 1979. The Diffusion of Process Innovations. Cambridge
University Press.
Warren DM, Slikkerveer LJ & Brokensha D. (Eds.). 1995. The Cultural
Dimension of Development: Indigenous Knowledge Systems.
Intermediate Technology Publ.

FEX 507 MULTIMEDIA CREATIONS AND APPLICATIONS 0+2

Objective
To acquire competence and hands-on skills on preparation and application
of various multimedia tools.
Practical
Multimedia Environment - Multimedia hardware devices, Multimedia
software tools, Multimedia content creation and integration process;
Graphics and effects – scanner, other image capture methods; Image editing
and 2D Animation using Photoshop; Vector graphics using Corel Draw;
Digital Audio - Basic features and digitization, audio recording and
dubbing, audio card, non-linear editing and mixing of different audio
formats, audio editing and composing of music, special effects; Script
development and Story board preparation; Digital Video - analog and
digital video, video recording, capturing and conversion into different
video file formats, video editing, special effects; Organization of content -
choice of media, categorization of photographs, queuing of audio and video
clips, logical sequencing, text entry; Multimedia Authoring - concepts,
navigation planning and hyper linking; User friendly tools - MS Office
Power point, Macromedia Director; Preparation of multimedia
presentation; CD/DVD writing, labeling and presentation.
Suggested Readings
[Link]
[Link]
[Link]
[Link]
[Link]
[Link]

FEX 508 PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT OF FISHERIES 1+1

DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMMES
Objective
To understand different aspects of planning processes.
To acquire competency to plan, implement, monitor and evaluate extension
and development programmes.
Theory
UNIT I
Importance, principles and processes in developing extension programmes;
Planning for sustainable development, Economic Planning- types of
planning; Planning strategies at various levels- Top down and bottom up
approaches. Panchayati Raj institutions; Execution of various programmes,
Plan allocation and performance of fisheries over the different plan-periods
in India.

244
 UNIT II
Project preparation and project appraisal in terms of social benefit analysis,
shadow prices; Project Management Techniques - PERT and CPM; Logical
Framework Approach (LFA), Stakeholder analysis; Participatory
Monitoring and Evaluation (PROME); People’s participation in extension
programmes, significance, importance and approaches.
UNIT III
Critical analysis of Agriculture, Fisheries and Rural Development
Programmes; design, operation, institutional mechanism and socio-cultural
and economic impact of programmes such as NREGA; labour market
relations; Fisheries development vis-à-vis fisheries for development;
Livelihood Frameworks.
Practical
Need assessment, setting objectives, developing plan of work, Success
indicators, Impact assessment of fisheries development programmes,
SWOT analysis; Exercises on PERT and CPM Presentation of Fisheries
and Aquaculture policies of select countries; Study visits to selected
extension project areas – DOE, KVKs, SAUs, and ICAR institutes.
Suggested Readings
Haq BU & Kullenberg G. (Eds.). 1997. Coastal Zone Management
Imperative for Maritime Developing Nations. Springer.
Jhingan ML. 1978. Economics of Development and Planning. Vikas Publ.

FEX 509 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 1+1

Objective
To familiarize the students with the basic concepts of Human Resource
Management with special reference to organizations in fisheries sector.
Theory
UNIT I
Concept of management: Definition, Management process (planning,
organising, staffing, leading and controlling), Managerial levels and roles.
Evolution of management theories: Scientific management school,
Classical organization theory school, Behavioural school, Management
science school.
UNIT II
Concept of Human Resource Management(HRM), Primary activities of
HRM (staff, training and development, motivation, maintenance), HR
process (HRP, recruitment, selection, socialization, training and
development, performance appraisal, promotion, transfer, demotion,
separation).
UNIT III
HR out sourcing, Understanding equal opportunity: Guarding against
discriminatory practices, glass ceiling, Managing careers: Concept of
career, individual and organisational perspective, career development
versus employee development, internal, external events and career stages,
mentoring and coaching.
UNIT IV
Compensation dynamics: Contracts for compensation, efficiency wages,
wage earning and sharing, ownership options, screening, signalling,
designing of contract, types of rewards, job evaluation and establishing pay

245
 structure, executive, international and special compensation plans,
employee benefits, safety and health programmes, labour relations and
collective bargaining. Corporate social responsibility.
Practical
Applying management functions in a real setting; developing managerial
games; creativity and problem solving techniques; understanding different
perceptions and avoiding perceptual distortions; analysing different needs
of a diverse work place; performance evaluation; psychometric testing;
developing training module for leadership and motivation; exercises on
time management.
Suggested Readings
Alan P. 2002. Principles of Human Resource Management. Blackwell.
Bratton J. 1999. Human Resource Management: Theory and Practice.
MacMillan Press.
Decenzo DA & Robbins SP. 1997. Human Resource Management. John
Wiley & Sons.
Ferris GR. 2003. Handbook of Human Resource Management. Blackwell.
Milgrom P & Robert J. 1992. Economics Organization and Management.
Prentice Hall.
Schuler RS & Jackson S. 2006. Strategic Human Resource Management.
Blackwell.

FEX 510 GENDER, LIVELIHOOD AND DEVELOPMENT 1+1

Objective
To gain knowledge on issues related to gender, livelihood and
development.
To understand the trade off between gender, livelihood and development.
Theory
UNIT I
Theoretical foundations of gender: Social construction of gender,
patriarchy, family and household; Gender and Livelihood - Concept of
livelihood, work, access and control of natural resources, Livelihoods in
transition; Gender and Development - women in development (WID),
women and development (WAD) gender in development (GID), gender
and development (GAD).
UNIT II
Indicators of status- Physical Quality of Life Indices (PQLI), Human
Development Index (HDI); Rural-urban migration; Impact of fisheries
development on men and women, Development strategies, Integrated
model of development, microfinance, SHGs, vocational training and
development , equality, constitutional protection; Planning and
development for change.
Practical
Developing case studies on social and gender issues in fisheries; Case
studies on Rural –urban migration; Assessment of the social indicators –
PQLI and HDI; Evaluation of the performance of the SHGs; Exercises on
social and gender sensitive policies; Case studies on gender relations in
fisheries / rural development programmes such as NREGA.
Suggested Readings
Agarwal B. 1986. Women, Poverty and Agricultural Growth in India. JPS.

246
 Agarwal B. 1994. A Field of One’s Own: Gender and Land Rights in South
Asia. Cambridge University Press.
Bhasin K. 2000. Understanding Gender. Kali for Women, New Delhi.
Bhatt ER, Desai A, Thamarajakshi R, Pande M, Arunachalam J & Kohli V.
1988. Shramashakti: Report of National Commission on Self
Employed Women. Government of India, New Delhi.
Menon N. 1999. Gender and Politics in India. Oxford.

FEX 511 DEVELOPMENT JOURNALISM 1+1

Objective
To gain critical awareness and reflective ability necessary to identify,
articulate and analyse major issues in fisheries development.
To gain knowledge on the different skills applicable in journalism.
Theory
UNIT I
Media industry, concepts and theories in practice of news writing; relating
theories of journalism to professional practice; Development journalism –
meaning, principles, importance and scope; Basics of news production -
gathering and selecting news, writing news for newspapers, magazines,
farm bulletins and folders, editorial writing, feature writing, headline and
cutline writing, news collection and interview, photography and art,
copyediting and proofreading, word processing, computer layout and
design.
UNIT II
Editing and design - introduction to news selection and emphasis;
techniques and skills for editing print news media; critical analysis of
layout and design conventions of print news media.
UNIT III
Magazine journalism - profile and feature writing; Radio and television
journalism - principles and practices of gathering, writing and producing
news for radio and television; Photo journalism - visual language, skills and
techniques; New media journalism – websites and blogs, writing, editing
and site design skills for online journalism; Responsible journalism -
fairness and balance, libel, and the commercial nature of the media,
constructive criticism; advertisements – principles and practice; careers in
journalism.
Practical
Identification, articulation and analysis of major issues related to fisheries
development; critical analysis of fisheries related news stories and feature
articles from development magazines / news papers; Gathering and writing
news stories, feature articles and editorials; Designing, editing and
publishing campus news letters; interface with editors of journals and
magazines; Critical analysis of fisheries related radio news stories;
Producing radio news items for broadcast; digital photography and image
editing; designing and developing a theme based website / blog; Visits to
select printing presses, media organizations and news agencies.
Suggested Readings
Aggarwal VB & Gupta VS. 1991. Handbook of Journalism and Mass
Communication. Concept Publ.
Bond FF. 2002. An Introduction to Journalism. The MacMillan Co.

247
 David W. 2001. Journalism Made Simple. Rupa & Heinmann.
Kamat MV. 1992. Professional Journalism. Vikas Publ.
Ray GL. 2005. Journalism. Kalyani.
Roland W. 1994. Journalism in Modern India. Asia Publ.

FEX 512 INDIGENOUS TRADITIONAL KNOWLEDGE 1+1

IN FISHERIES
Objective
To learn different indigenous knowledge systems and their importance in
fisheries.
Theory
UNIT I
Indigenous knowledge - historical perspective, terminologies, concepts,
systems, Importance, Relevance and roles in fisheries sector; Reasons for
the non adoption of technical knowledge; Indigenous vis-a-vis scientific
knowledge.
UNIT II
Types of indigenous knowledge; Information, practices and technologies;
Beliefs, tools, materials, documentation, validation and dissemination of
ITK; Peoples’ Biodiversity Register; Accessing the indigenous knowledge;
Constraints of indigenous knowledge, conserving ITK.
UNIT III
Issues in protection of traditional knowledge / ITK - understanding Indian
Biological Diversity Act and National Biodiversity Authority, - limits to
benefit sharing – IPR, PIC, TRIPS vs. CBD; Blending indigenous
knowledge and modern technologies.
Practical
Documentation of ITK in fisheries; Development of case studies of ITK in
fisheries; Institutions and NGOs involved in ITK collection and validation.
Suggested Readings
Anon. 1998. Aquatic Sciences and Fisheries Abstracts. United Nations
Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Information Retrieval
Limited, Cambridge Communications Corporation.
Berkes F, Mahon R, McConney P, Pollnac R & Pomeroy R. 2001.
Managing Small-Scale Fisheries: Alternative Directions and
Methods. IDRC, Canada.
Inglis J. 1993. Traditional Ecological Knowledge: Concepts and Cases.
IDRC, Canada.
Robert SP & Rebecca RG. 2006. Fishery Co-Management: A Practical
Handbook. CABI.

FEX 513 COMMUNITY BASED DISASTER MANAGEMENT 1+1

Objective
To familiarize with different disasters and their impact.
To get acquainted with the strategies and methods to cope up with disasters.
Theory
UNIT I
Basic concepts: Hazard, risk, vulnerability, disaster, capacity building.
Multi-hazard and disaster vulnerability of India.

248
 UNIT II
Types of natural and manmade hazards in fisheries and aquaculture -
cyclones, floods, droughts, tsunami, El-nino, la nina, algal blooms,
avalanches, pollution, habitat destruction, over fishing, introduction of
exotic species, landslides, epidemics, loss of bio-diversity.
UNIT III
Climate change and global warming; Issues related to depletion of water
resources; Causes, characteristics and impact of various disasters.
UNIT IV
Management strategies: pre-disaster, during disaster and post-disaster; Pre-
disaster - prevention, preparedness and mitigation; different ways of
detecting and predicting disasters; early warning, communication and
dissemination, community based disaster preparedness, structural and non-
structural mitigation measures; During disaster: response and recovery
systems at national, state and local, coordination between different
agencies, international best practices; Post-disaster: Methods for
assessment of initial and long term damages, reconstruction and
rehabilitation.
UNIT V
Prevalent national and global management practices in disaster
management. Agencies involved in monitoring and early warnings at
district, state, national and global level; Sea safety and health.
Practical
Methods for assessment of initial and long term damages. Preparedness in
pre, during and post disasters. Acquaintance with fire-fighting devices. Life
saving appliances and first-aid. Operation and usage of communication
channels and media. Uses of distress signals and technologies. Relief and
rehabilitation measures, trauma counseling. Field visits and case studies.
Group discussion.
Suggested Readings
An Earthquake Preparedness Guide: A Ready Reckoner for Home
Dwellers. 2005. National Disaster Management Division, Ministry
of Home Affairs, Government of India, New Delhi.
Comfort LK. 2005. Managing Disaster: Strategies and Policy Perspectives.
Duke Press Policy Studies.
Gupta MC & Sharma VK. Orissa Super Cyclone ’99. 2000. National
Institute of Disaster Management, Ministry of Home Affairs,
Government of India, New Delhi.
Manual on Natural Disaster Management in India. 2001. National Institute
of Disaster Management, Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of
India, New Delhi.
Natural Disaster Response Plan. 2001. National Institute of Disaster
Management, Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of India, New
Delhi.
Sinha A. 2001. Disaster Management. National Institute of Disaster
Management, Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of India, New
Delhi.

249
FEX 601 ADVANCES IN FISHERIES EXTENSION 2+1
MANAGEMENT
Objective
To learn about the recent development in extension management in terms
of concepts, approaches and methods.
Theory
UNIT I
Approaches of Fisheries and Aquaculture Extension: A critical analysis of
different approaches; Extension programmes of corporate sector, the
concept importance and implications of livelihood extension, Technology
Base of Aqauculture Extension : Importance and relevance of indigenous
knowledge system, identification and documentation of ITK, Integration of
ITK system with formation research, Agricultural Knowledge and
Information System (AKIS); significance of theories of social learning for
extension practice; Cyber Extension: Concept of cyber extension, national
and international cases on extension projects using ICT and their impacts.
UNIT II
Economics of Fisheries and Aquaculture extension: National investments
in extension, impacts of fisheries / aquaculture extension, alternative
methods of financing fisheries / aquaculture extension, privatization of
fisheries / aquaculture extension – scope, limitations and experiences and
cases; Implications of GATT agreement for extension services, re-
orientation of extension services for agri-business and marketing activities,
GOI-NGO collaboration to improve
UNIT III
Efficiency of extension. Extension and contemporary issues: issues related
to rural poverty, environmental protection of farm and home, bio-diversity,
sustainable development, food and nutritional security, recent advances in
biotechnology. Analysis of ITK system, cases on integration of ITK and
formal research; Analysis of cases on cyber extension and privatization of
extension: pattern and success stories.
Practical
Critical analysis of the management aspects. Study and preparation of case
material on selected dimensions of management through visits to various
fisheries development organisations and to study their management
effectiveness.
Suggested Readings
Chandrasekhar CS. (Ed.). 2004. Privatization of Agricultural Extension in
India. MANAGE, Hyderabad.
Kumar D. 1996. Aquaculture Extension Services Review: India. FAO
Fisheries Circular No. 906, Rome.
Malhotra SP & Sinha VRP. 2007. Indian Fisheries and Aquaculture in a
Globalizing Economy. Part II. Narendra Publ. House.
Ramchandran C. 2004. Teaching not To F(in)ish: A Constructivist
Perspective on Reinventing a Responsible Marine Fisheries
Extension System. CMFRI, Kochi.
Ray GL. 2006. Extension, Communication and Management. 6th Ed.
Kalyani.
Rivera WM. 2004. Agricultural Extension: Worldwide Institutional
Evolution and Forces for Change. Elsevier.

250
FEX 602 MONITORING AND EVALUATION OF 2+1
DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMMES
Objective
To understand about the concept and types of impact studies.
Theory
UNIT I
Monitoring, evaluation and impact assessment - importance and scope in
fisheries programmes; conceptual frameworks, results frameworks and
logic models; Quantitative and qualitative indicators – characteristics and
their selection criteria; indicators and information systems for sustainable
fisheries development - testing and improving indicators; Integration of M
and E systems into development programmes.
UNIT II
Difference between outcome and impact; Types of impact assessment:
Climate impact assessment; Demographic impact assessment; Development
impact; assessment; Ecological impact assessment; Economic and fiscal
impact assessment; Environmental auditing; Environmental impact
assessment; Environmental management systems; Health impact
assessment; Project evaluation; Public consultation; Public participation ;
Risk assessment; Social impact assessment; Strategic impact assessment;
Technology assessment, Equality impact assessment.
UNIT III
Impact assessment methods: Types-Within-without; Before-after; Case
study; Participatory; Social Auditing; Steps: Quantifying the impact
parameters; Identification of data sources and their types; Sampling design;
Data generation; Analysis; Report writing
Practical
Development of M and E plan and procedures for fisheries using
participatory approach. Preparing M and E plan for some fisheries
programmes. Developing indicators and information system for sustainable
fisheries development.
Analysis of different reports, conducting impact assessment exercises, case
studies.
Suggested Readings
Capturing Experience: Evaluation, Evaluation and Impact Assessment
Methods,
[Link]
y/[Link]
Equality Impact Assessment,
[Link]
Evaluating Development Operations: Methods for Judging Outcomes and
Impacts. Operations Evaluation Department, The World Bank.
Lessons and Practice Number 10, July 1997.
John P, Peter R & Simon Z. 1995. Social Auditing for Small Organizations:
The Workbook. New Economics.
Louisa G & Edwards M. 1995. Toolkits: A Practical Guide to Assessment,
Monitoring, Review and Evaluation. Gosling, Development Manual
5, Save the Children, UK.
Resources on Impact Assessment, [Link] uem/eia/[Link]

251
FEX 603 MEASUREMENT AND SCALING TECHNIQUES IN 2+1
FISHERIES EXTENSION
Objective
To acquire skills in different measurement concepts and techniques.
To acquire skills in important techniques of scaling techniques in social
science research.
Theory
UNIT I
Measurement - concept, importance, levels and their properties; Reliability:
concept, importance, types - split half, parallel form, test-retest reliability;
interpretation of reliability coefficients; Validity: concept and types -
content, criterion related, construct, concurrent and predictive validity.
UNIT II
Development and standardisation of tests and scales - knowledge test, types
of time test; Difficulty index, discrimination index, point biserial
correlation and scoring; Item analysis: concept and use in behavioural
research; interpretation of research data; Intelligence tests: definition, types
and scoring method; Projective tests: Thematic Apperception Test,
Rorschach’s ink plot test, words association test, etc.
UNIT III
Content analysis - method and scope; Critical incident technique - method
and application; Sociometry – concept, types like sociogram, sociometric
indices and matrices, their applications; Semantic differential technique;
Psychometric analysis; Q Methodology; H-Technique.
UNIT IV
Scaling techniques; concept, construction and use of attitude statements;
Method of Paired Comparison - Thurstone's Contribution, development of
scale with 'F' 'P' and 'Z' Martices, calculation of scale values, tests of
significance, administration and scoring; Method of Equal Appearing
Intervals - rational, development, sorting procedures, calculation of scale
and 'Q' values, administration and scoring; Method of Successive Intervals
- rational, development, estimating intervals widths, determining scale
values, internal consistency check, administration and scoring; Method of
Summated Rating - rational, development and procedure for selection of
items, interpretation of 'T' scores and administration.
UNIT V
Scalogram Analysis – rational, unidimensionality of the scale, Cornell
technique and other methods of scalogram analysis, coefficient of
reproduciability, scale and non-scale types and their administration; Scale
Discrimination Technique - development of this technique, obtaining scale
and 't' values and advantages of scale discrimination technique.
UNIT VI
Non-Parametric Tests - meaning and types, one sample runs test of
randomness, sign test, wilcoxon signed rank test, wilcoxon-Mann-Whitney
test, Cochran Q test, Spearman rank order correlation coefficient, Kendall
rank order correlation coefficient and Kendall’s coefficient of concordance.
Practical
Exercises on measurement and frequency distributions. Problems on
reliability and validity and interpretation of the results. Problems on

252
 transformation of scores. Exercises on difficulty index, discriminant on
power. Exercise on point biserial correlation. Exercises on interpretation of
scores correlation coefficients and its interpretations. Interpretation of
multiple correlation coefficient (R) and R2. Interpretation of path
coefficients, direct and indirect effects, etc. Discriminant function analysis -
Results and Interpretation; Review of techniques and other procedures
including scales developed with special reference to Extension Education
research. Assignments for different scaling procedures based on the class
discussion by using the hypothetical or actual data. Practical exercises on
how to compute reliability and validity measures for test scores. Method of
paired comparison. Method of equal appearing intervals. Method of
successive intervals. Method of summated ratings. Scalogram analysis.
Scale discrimination technique; Exercises on Non-parametric tests.
Suggested Readings
Goode WJ & Hatt PF. 1985. Methods in Social Research. Mc Graw-Hill.
Junker BH. 1979. Field Work: An Introduction to the Social Sciences.
University of Chicago Press.
Kerlinger FN. 2000. Foundation of Behavioural Research. Globe Offset
Press.
Kothari CR. 1998. Research Methodology. Vishwa Prakashan.
Young PV. 1997. Scientific Social Surveys and Research. Prentice Hall of
India.

FEX 604 EXTENSION SERVICE SYSTEM MANAGEMENT 1+1

Objective
To gain an understanding of structure, organisation and working of
fisheries extension service system at various levels.
To acquire competency to critically evaluate the performance of extension
service agencies.
Theory
UNIT I
Meaning and scope of extension service system and its management; Public
administration and bureaucracy - concepts, origin and development;
Marxian, Weberian and Gandhian thoughts on bureaucracy; bureaucratic
vs. developmental organisation.
UNIT II
Processes of management- POSDCORB; Structure, organisation, function,
working and management of public extension service agencies like DoFs,
FFDA, BFDA, MPEDA, NFDB, NABARD, Fisheries Development
Corporations, State Fish Seed Development Corporations, KVKs, SAUs,
Fisheries Co-operatives, international agencies, corporate sector, private
organizations and MNCs.
UNIT III
Delegation of power, autonomy and organisational communication and
conflicts in governmental, UN agencies, non-governmental and private
extension service organisations; Conflicting roles and responsibilities of
extension agents.
UNIT IV
Organisational communication – meaning, methods, types and techniques;
functions and importance in motivation and control; formal and informal

253
 communication networks in GOs, NGOs and POs; behaviour of individuals
in organisations; Organisational change and communication; patterns of
communication of organisational communication; managing organisational
communication in fisheries sector.
UNIT V
Research, extension and client systems linkages; linkages and coordination
between Dept. of Fisheries and other line Depts. like Irrigation / Water
Resources, Environment, Forestry, Agriculture at grassroots, District, State
and Central levels; HRD policy in governmental, non-governmental and
private extension service organizations. Strengthening governance -
transparency, accountability and people’s participation.
Practical
Case study and analysis of State Departments of Fisheries in selected
States; Case studies in structure organization, staffing, career advancement,
quality of service delivery at grassroots level in governmental, non-
governmental and private extension service organisations like DoFs,
FFDA, NABARD, State Fish Seed Development Corporations, KVKs,
Fisheries Co-operatives, NGOs, and private sector organisations; Study of
patterns of communication and effectiveness of Fisheries Development
Organisation; Study visit to DoF, Maharashtra, NGOs, NABARD, private
sector agencies involved in fisheries extension.
Suggested Readings
Kumar D. 1996. Aquaculture Extension Services Review: India. FAO
Fisheries Circular No. 906, Rome.
Ramchandran C. 2004. Teaching not To F(in)ish: A Constructivist
Perspective on Reinventing a Responsible Marine Fisheries
Extension System. CMFRI, Kochi.
Ray GL. 2006. Extension, Communication and Management. 6thEd.
Kalyani.
Roling N. 1988. Extension Science: Information Systems in Agricultural
Development. Cambridge University Press.
Swanson BE, Bentz RP & Sofranko AJ. 1997. Improving Agricultural
Extension. A Reference Manual. FAO, Rome.

FEX 605 ADVANCES IN TRAINING METHODS AND 1+1

EDUCATION TECHNOLOGY
Objective
To understand the relevant and emerging areas in training.
To learn the latest tools in training programmes.
Theory
UNIT I
Training tools: Expectation setting, Course design, Icebreakers, climate
setting and team building exercises, Monitoring and evaluation, Follow up.
Commodity System Assessment Methodology: Formation of
interdisciplinary team; Developing preproduction, production, post harvest,
marketing and service delivery strategies; Workshops: Coordination
committee; Expected output; Institutional support; baseline document;
Resource persons; Selection of participants; Developing workshop agenda;
Conducting the workshop.

254
 UNIT II
Collection of missing information; Checklist for organizing a workshop;
Training Manual-Documenting Good Management Practices: challenges,
emerging knowledge; Indigenous knowledge, synthesis.
UNIT III
Distance Learning: Identification of potential learners; Defining learning
objectives; Designing learning materials; marketing; Implementation;
Monitoring and evaluation; Designing programmes for community radio;
Farmer field school: Origins of the Farmer field school; Description of a
typical Farmer field school; FAO support for Farmer field schools in Asia;
Costs and benefits of the Farmer field school.
UNIT IV
Teaching and learning process in extension education. Its characteristics,
steps in extension education process, setting up of learning situation, guides
to effective extension teaching; Recent research findings in instructional
technology; Manpower planning in fisheries – administration -teaching –
research and extension activities. Research studies in fisheries training.
Practical
Simulated exercises on Commodity System Assessment Methodology,
Planning a Workshops, Documenting Good Management Practices,
Designing materials for Distance Learning, and using icebreakers, climate
setting and team building exercises. Preparing script for Radio, Press and
TV. Computer graphics, practicing folk methods. Taking photos for
popular and scientific publications. Practicing the use of different
projectors –systems of multimedia projection. Visit to inland fish farm,
marine villages and industrial units and identification of technological
problems in selecting extension methods and programmes.
Suggested Readings
Farming Freshwater Prawns. A Manual for the Culture of the Giant River
Prawn (Macrobrachium rosenbergii). 2004. FAO Fisheries Tech.
Paper No. 428, Rome.
Jerry LG. 1990. A Commodity Systems Assessment Methodology for
Problem and Project Identification. Post Harvest Institute for
Perishables. College of Agriculture, University of Idaho.
Loretta S. 2005. Good Agricultural Practices Standards: A Way Towards
Safe and Sustainable Agriculture? Seminar on Certification and
Regulations for Food Safety, 31 May 2005, Wageningen.
Scott M. 2001. Distance Education and Distance Learning: A Framework
for the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations.
Sustainable Development Department, FAO.

FEX 606 SOCIAL AND GENDER ISSUES IN FISHERIES 1+1

Objective
To acquire an understanding of fishers society, culture and livelihood and
identify different issues of concerning them.
Theory
UNIT I
Social life of fishers: Family, religion and caste among others; Economic,
political and cultural organisation of fishers; demographic aspects; Social
stratification, poverty and economic equality among fishers; social mobility

255
 and migration; social and economic relationship between fishers and non-
fishers, Capacity development and social capital.
UNIT II
Rural development in India - concept and history; role of fisheries in rural
development; Leadership and leaders in fisheries – types, their roles and
function; identification, training and development of local leaders; Role of
change agents; Indicators of social change and their measurement; Review
of significant research findings.
UNIT III
Social change and social conflict in fisheries: concept and theories of social
change; modernisation and social change in fisheries; impact of
urbanisation; impact of trade liberalisation and globalisation; forms and
content of social conflict in fisheries; conflict between traditional/small
scale and modern mechanised fishers; conflict over inland and coastal
aquatic resources; role of the State and international community in aquatic
resources management and conflict resolution; extension and development
programmes for fishers; role and functions of FFDA, BFDA and fisheries
research institutes/colleges.
UNIT IV
Gender issues in fisheries: concept of gender; feminist movements, theories
of gender inequality, empowerment discourse; division of labour between
men and women; relationship between social class and gender; gender
differences in socialisation, educational attainment and social mobility.
Women and men in small scale fisheries and processing sector, Ergonomics
and health issues; fishers and coastal resources management; technological
changes and their implications for fishers; fishery cooperatives and
empowerment; development programmes for fishers; globalisation and
women fishers; policy issues.
Practical
Case studies on social and gender issues in fisheries; Case studies on social
conflicts and their resolution; Tools and frameworks for gender awareness
planning; Book review; Exercises in social and gender sensitive policies;
Use of different methods of identifying village leaders – observation
sociometry, key informant technique, etc.; Indexing leaders by leadership
index; Identifying the indicators of social change and their measurement;
Analysing the change agents role; Studying the consequences of social
change.
Suggested Readings
Haq MU. 2002. Human Development in South Asia: Globalisation and
Human Development. Oxford University Press.
Kishwar M. 1999. Off the Beaten Track: Rethinking Gender Justice for
Indian Women. Oxford University Press.
NCAER 1998. Human Development Report: West and Central India.
Oxford University Press.
Rairkar P. 2000. Indian Peasant Women Speak Up. Orient Longman.
Singh K & Tewari R. 2002. Women in Fisheries. Indian Society of
Fisheries Professionals, Mumbai.

256
FEX 607 INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION 1+1
TECHNOLOGY FOR FISHERIES DEVELOPMENT
Objective
To learn the extent of utility and relevance of ICT in fisheries development
and draw lessons from case studies.
Theory
UNIT I
Concept of information communication technology and its role in fisheries
development. Information communication technologies –print and
electronic media, email, Internet, video and teleconferencing, computer
assisted instructions, touch screens, micro computers and web technologies.
Information kiosks. Networking system of information- type of network-
PAN, LAN, Can, MAN, WAN, AGRINEt, e-Governance. Cyber extension.
Extension through virtual mode, e-learning. Agricultural technology
Information Centres (ATIC), technology parks. Management Information
System in fisheries extension. Use of expert system in fisheries extension.
UNIT II
Internet in fisheries extension with specific reference to communication
technology Internet – email – voicemail – teletext – videotext – tele and
video conferencing and its application.
Practical
Study of different kinds of information technologies. Print and electronic
media. Practicing tele and video conferencing. Development of computer
assisted instructions. Touch screens and information kiosks. Study of
computer networks and its applications in fisheries. Development and use
of e-learning modules in fisheries. Audio aids – wireless public address
system; multimedia Projectors; Audio recording – video recording –Audio
cassette – Compact Disc (CD) production in fisheries; Various types of
cameras – video format – digital cameras ; Video - video editing system -
use of computer for video editing - non-linier editing; Power point software
– designing slides – using templates. Digital photography – techniques
application in extension; Study of various public address systems, Systems
of Multimedia Projection, Practice and creation of interactive CDs in
fisheries, Study and practice of various kinds of video editing systems.
Practice and use of digital photography.
Suggested Readings
Batchelor S, Evangelista S, Hearn S, Peirce M, Sugden S & Webb M. 2003.
ICT for Development: Contributing to the Millennium Development
Goals: Lessons Learned from Seventeen Info Dev Projects. World
Bank, Wasingten D. C.
NIC. 2005. Good Governance through ICT. NIC, Ministry of IT,
Government of India, New Delhi.
NISG. 2004. ICT for Development: Make ICT Work for People.
Compilation of ICT Cases in India, NISG, Hyderabad.

FEX 608 INTERNATIONAL EXPERIENCES IN FISHERIES 2+0

EXTENSION
Objective
To gain knowledge on different international agencies of development.

257
 To appraise the extension systems of the leading fisheries countries of the
world.
Theory
UNIT I
Understanding fisheries and aquaculture extension and development
systems in South Asian countries and South East Asian countries -
Thailand, Indonesia, Malaysia, Vietnam, Myanmar, China; Extension
system in Japan; Linkages between Research and Development system in
these countries; Status of fishing communities in these countries.
UNIT II
Analysing mission, approaches and achievements of fisheries development
organizations: World Fish Centre, International Collective in Support of
Fish Workers (ICSF), International Fishmeal and Oil Manufacturers
Association (IFOMA), Asian Fisheries Society (AFS), National Marine
Fisheries Service of USA, Fisheries Division of FAO, World Fish Forum,
Asia-Pacific Fisheries Commission (APFIC), Committee for Inland
Fisheries and Aquaculture of Africa (CIFAA) Commission for Inland
Fisheries of Latin America (COPESCAL), European Inland Fisheries
Advisory Commission (EIFAC), General Fisheries Commission for the
Mediterranean (GFCM), Indian Ocean Tuna Commission (IOTC), Regional
Commission for Fisheries (RECOFI), Western Central Atlantic Fishery
Commission (WECAFC);
Suggested Readings
Kumar D. 1999. Trickle Down System (TDS) of Aquaculture Extension for
Rural Development. RAP Publ. FAO, Bangkok, Thailand.
Pomeroy R & Berkes F. 1997. Two to Tango: The Role of Government in
Fisheries Co-management. Marine Policy, Vol. 21. Belhaven Press,
London.
Sen S & Nielsen JR. 1996. Fisheries Co-management: A Comparative
Analysis. Marine Policy, Vol. 20. Belhaven Press, London.

FEX 609 ERGONOMICS 1+1

Objective
To familiarize the students with the fundamentals of ergonomics and its
application.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction to ergonomics and its multidisciplinary approach.
UNIT II
Human machine - environment interface, work study, posture, ergonomics
aspects of environment: illumination, sound, temperature, humidity, radiant
heat, air velocity, body dimensions, anthropometry and workplace design,
fatigue, occupational health studies.
UNIT III
Application of ergonomics in fisheries and agriculture sector.

Practical
Physical environment study, assessment of body composition and
dimensions, measurement of grip strength, measurement of physiological
work by heart rate method and RPE, posture analysis by flexi curve,

258
 psycho- physiological tests; designing of ergonomics tool/product/system
for fisheries sector; review paper on ergonomics and fisheries/agriculture.
Suggested Readings
Astrand PO, Rodahl K, Dahl H & Stromme S. 1994. A Textbook of Work
Physiology. Human Kinetics Publ.
Grandjean E. 1988. Fitting the Task to the Man: An Ergonomic Approach.
4th Ed. Taylor & Francis.
Karwowski W & Marras WS. (Eds.). 2003. Occupational Ergonomics:
Principles of Work Design. CRC Press.
Pheasant S. 1991. Ergonomics, Work and Health. Aspen Publ.
Wilson JR & Corlett EN. (Eds.). 2005. Evaluation of Human Work: A
Practical Ergonomics Methodology. 3rd Ed. CRC Press.

259
 FISHERIES EXTENSION
List of Journals
• Agricultural Economic Research Review
• Agricultural Extension Review
• American Journal of Evaluation
• British Journal of Educational Technology
• Disaster Management and Response
• Disaster Prevention and Management
• Down To Earth
• Economic and Political Weekly
• Ergonomics
• Evaluation Journal of Australasia
• Extension Review
• Gender and Society
• Gender, Work and Organization
• Honey Bee
• Indian Journal of Agricultural Extension
• Indian Journal of Extension Education
• Indian Journal of Mass Communication
• Indian Journal of Public Administration
• Indian Journal of Social Science Research
• Indian Journal of Social Work
• Indian Journal of Traditional Knowledge
• Indian Journal of Tropical Biodiversity
• Indian Research Journal of Extension Education
• International Journal of Agricultural Extension
• International Journal of Education and Development using ICT
• International Journal of Project Management
• International Journal of Social Research Methodology
• International Journal of Training and Development
• Journal of Communication
• Journal of Computer Assisted Learning
• Journal of Extension Education
• Journal of Extension Systems
• Journal of Rural Development
• Journal of Social Work
• MANAGE Extension Research Review
• Politics and Gender
• R&D Journal of Graphic Design
• R&D Journal of Information and Communication Technologies
• R&D Journal of Multimedia
• Rural Sociology
• The journal of disaster studies, policy and management
• The Journal of Gender Studies
• The Journal of Vocational Education and Training
• The Project Management Journal
• Vikalpa

260
 Suggested Broad Areas for Master’s and Doctoral Research

• Comparative study on performance of public, private and market led extension

systems
• Performance and impact of ATMA model of service delivery / knowledge
dissemination
• Communication effectiveness of different media
• Impact of community radio and ICT led extension systems
• Case studies on co-management and community based fisheries management
experiences in India
• Training need assessment of State Department of Fisheries
• Recruitment policy and career advancement in State Department of Fisheries
• Role and importance of PRIs and NGOs in implementing fisheries development
programmes
• Critical factors in successful development of community based organisations
• Reach and impact of fisheries innovations
• Stakeholder analysis of fisheries innovations
• Developing effective interactive e-learning and multimedia products
• Reach and impact of fisheries innovations
• Socio-economic impact assessment of development programmes
• HRM practices of various State Fisheries Departments, NGOs and private
consultancies
• Division of labour and gender equity among fishing communities
• Content analysis of development oriented articles / features in print /electronic
media for their reach, readability, and persuasion and conviction
• Political economy of mass media and development journalism
• Case studies on documentation and validation of ITK practices in fisheries sector
• Impact of Tsunami 2005 on fishers livelihoods and fisheries
• Pattern of rehabilitation work and its impact
• Returns to investment in fisheries and aquaculture extension
• Evolving participatory result oriented monitoring and evaluation system for
fisheries development programmes in developing countries.
• Developing appropriate scaling technique for measuring the attitude of fishers
towards conservation technologies
• Professionalism in Service Delivery System
• Performance of public and NGO led extension systems
• Developing and field testing of effective training tools for trainers
• Conflict between small scale fishers and large scale fishers and in(adequacy) of the
present resolution mechanism.
• Social change, mobility and integration in fishing communities
• Case studies on success stories in use of ICT for fisheries development
• Limiting factors in effective use of ICT for Development
• Comparative study of effectiveness / performance of extension systems in India
and Indonesia / Thailand
• Levels of workload among Fishers and their impact on health

261
 FISHERIES RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
Course Structur - at a Glance

CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS

FRM 501* INLAND FISHERIES RESOURCES 2+1
FRM 502* MARINE FISHERIES RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 2+1
MARINE ECOSYSTEMS, BIODIVERSITY AND
FRM 503* 2+1
CONSERVATION
FRM 504* TROPICAL FISH STOCK ASSESSMENT 2+1
FRM 505 FISHERIES REGULATIONS 2+1
REMOTE SENSING AND GIS FOR FISHERIES
FRM 506 1+1
MANAGEMENT
FRM 507# INTEGRATED COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT 2+1
FRM 508 AQUATIC FLORAL RESOURCES 2+1
FEEDING AND REPRODUCTIVE BIOLOGY OF
FRM 509 2+1
FINFISH AND SHELLFISH
DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY OF FINFISH AND
FRM 510 2+1
SHELLFISH
FRM 511 FISHING AND ALLIED TECHNOLOGIES 2+1
FRM 512 MODERN TECHNIQUES IN ICHTHYOTAXONOMY 2+1

FRM 591 MASTER’S SEMINAR 1+0

FRM 599 MASTER’S RESEARCH 20

FRM 601** ASSESSMENT OF AQUATIC BIODIVERSITY 2+1

FRM 602** APPLICATIONS OF FISHERIES MODELS IN STOCK
2+1
ASSESSMENT
FRM 603** CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT OF
2+1
EXPLOITED FISHERIES RESOURCES
FRM 604 CORAL REEF MANAGEMENT 2+1
FRM 605 DATA COLLECTION AND ESTIMATION OF 0+2
EXPLOITED FISHERIES RESOURCES
FRM 606 FISHERIES ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT 2+1
FRM 607 ISSUES IN CAPTURE FISHERIES 1+1

FRM 691 DOCTORAL SEMINAR I 1+0

FRM 692 DOCTORAL SEMINAR II 1+0

FRM 699 DOCTORAL RESEARCH 45

* Compulsory for Master’s programme; ** Compulsory for Doctoral programme
#FRM 507 cross listed with Aquatic Environment Management AEM 503

262
 FISHERIES RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
Course Contents

FRM 501 INLAND FISHERIES RESOURCES 2+1

Objective
To understand the present exploitation and future potential of inland
Fisheries.
To learn the methodologies for assessments of Inland Fisheries Resources.
Theory
UNIT I
Categorization of different freshwater fisheries resources: Ponds, lakes,
bheels, tanks, estuaries, brackish water lagoons, wetlands, biosphere
reserves and mangroves and derelict water bodies their problems and
management aspects.
UNIT II
Bheel fisheries resources of India: Open and closed bheels, productivity
conditions, Capture scenario, prospects of culture based systems.
UNIT III
Riverine fisheries resources: Present trend of dwindling fisheries resources,
direct and Indirect effects of human intervention in rivers, habitat
modification and improvement (rehabilitation of channels and flood plains),
protection and restoration of fish movements (different types of fish passes
and enhancement of fish migration), management and repair of riverine
vegetation, stock enhancement strategies like introduction of new species,
pre- and post- stocking management, potential risk of stocking.
UNIT IV
Cold water fisheries of India: Present trends, problems due to habitat
destruction, management aspects, prospects of sports fisheries in India.
UNIT V
Reservoir Fisheries: Classification of reservoirs, present productivity levels,
management practices.
UNIT VI
Estuarine fisheries: classification of estuaries- present productivity level-
potential; Problem – management practices.
UNIT VII
Assessment of carrying capacity of different inland water bodies; Water
budgeting. Community participation in fishery resource management.
Practical
Freshwater fish identification – tagging – different types of tags – Visit to
nearest freshwater body; catching methods – catch data analysis on major
freshwater resource – Estuaries - Reservoirs – Major lakes - of India –
Biodiversity indices – Gear selectivity.
Suggested Readings
Blaber JM. 1997. Fish and Fisheries in Tropical Estuaries. Chapman &
Hall.
FAO. Technical Papers on Freshwater Fisheries.
Jhingran VG & Pathak V. 1987. Ecology and Management of Bheels in
Assam: A case study of Dhir Bheel. In: Workshop on Development

263
 of Bheel Fisheries in Assam, held at Assam Agricultural University,
Guwahati from 21st to 22nd April.
Jhingran VG & Sehgal KL. 1978. Cold Water Fisheries of India. J.
Inland. Fish. Soc. India. Sp. Publ.
Jhingran VG. 1991. Fish and Fisheries of India. 3rd Ed. Hindustan Publ.
Sugunan VV. 1997. Reservoir Fisheries of India. Daya Publ. House.

FRM 502 MARINE FISHERIES RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 2+1

Objective
To know the present level of exploitation of marine resources and to impart
knowledge on conservation measures.
To learn the recent methodologies of sustainable exploitation of renewable
resources.
Theory
UNIT I
Major fishing nation of the world, major fishing regions, present trend of
marine capture fisheries.
UNIT II
Important finfish and shellfish resources in demersal and pelagic systems;
conservation strategies.
UNIT III
Principles of management of fisheries resources objectives of management,
issues and challenges of managing multi-gear fisheries.
UNIT IV
Mud bank fishery- wedge bank fishery-Commonly used tools for input and
output regulation.
UNIT V
Sustainability: Principles, social economic ecological biological and legal
issues Fisheries co-management.
UNIT VI
Marine Biodiversity of selected areas including coral reef conservation.
UNIT VII
Fisheries and fishing methods in open waters: Inshore fisheries (up to 50 m
depth), offshore fisheries (50-200 m depth) High sea fisheries (beyond
200m) up to outer limit of EEZ and in International waters.
UNIT VIII
Conservation aspects: Biodiversity principles, categorization of species into
endangered; Indeterminate and extinct varieties- managing the highly
exploited fishery resources.
UNIT IX
Case studies of fisheries conflicts depending on problems in different
states.
Practical
Marine fishery resources – visit to nearest marine landing center – length
frequency analysis – catching method – catch data analysis on marine
fishery resources of India– closed season studies – gear selectivity.
Suggested Readings
Bal DV & Rao KV. 1990. Marine Fishes of India. 1st Revised Ed. Tata
McGraw Hill.

264
 Chandra P. 2007. Fishery Conservation, Management and Development.
SBS Publ.
Dholakia AD. 2004. Fisheries and Aquatic Resources of India. Daya Publ.
House.
FAO. Technical Papers on Marine Fisheries.
Kurian CV & Sebastian VO. 1986. Prawns and Prawn Fisheries of India.
Hindustan Publ. Corp.
Peter BM & Joseph JC. Jr. 2000. Fishes- An Introduction to Ichthyology.
4th Ed. Prentice Hall.
Samuel CT. 1968. Marine Fisheries in India. Narendra Publ. House.
Shanbhogue SL. 2000. Marine Fisheries of India. ICAR.
Yadav BN. 1997. Fish and Fisheries. 2nd Ed. Daya Publ. House.

FRM 503 MARINE ECOSYSTEMS, BIODIVERSITY AND 2+1

CONSERVATION
Objective
To study the biodiversity of flora and fauna and its assessment using the
various biodiversity indices for conservation of aquatic resources.
To understand the ecological impacts on various resources.
Theory
UNIT I
Biology of selected endangered species of sponges, corals, gastropods,
bivalves, sea cucumbers, fishes, sea snakes, turtles, birds and marine
mammals.
UNIT II
IUCN criteria –- Red List, Wild life protection act, International treaties
and conventions, Marine Protected Areas, Sanctuaries and Biosphere
reserves. Establishment of National marine parks, in situ and ex situ
conservation.
UNIT III
Marine and Coastal Ecosystems – Overview; physico-chemical
environment; ecological notions; plankton; benthos, mangroves; sea grasses
and corals.
UNIT IV
Human impact on ecosystem.
UNIT V
Marine biodiversity: threats, planning and management, tools for
conservation.
Practical
Identification of scheduled aquatic organisms- Predators of endangered
animals. Observation of stranded marine mammals, corals, seafans and
other endangered aquatic Organisms, Visit to various aquatic ecosystem for
recording the biodiversity and richness indices, Conservation planning.
Suggested Readings
Balakrishnan Nair N & Thampy DM. 1980. A Text Book of Marine
Ecology. The MacMillan Co.
Castro P & Huber ME. 1997. Marine Biology. 2nd Ed. Mc-Graw Hill.
Duxbury AC, Duxbury AB & Sverdrup KA. 2000. An Introduction to the
World’s Oceans. 6th Ed. McGraw Hill.
Gross G. 1993. Oceanography: A View of the Earth. 6th Ed. Prentice Hall.

265
 Iversen ES. 1996. Living Marine Resources. Chapman & Hall.
McCormick JM & Thiruvathaakal JV. 1976. Elements of Oceanography.
WB Saunders.
Nybakken JW. 1997. Marine Biology - An Ecological Approach. 4th Ed.
Addison Wesley.
Raymont JEG. 1973. Plankton and Productivity in the Oceans. Pergamon
Press.
Sverdrup HV, Johnson MW & Fleming RH. 1959. The Oceans - Their
Physics, Chemistry and General Biology. Prentice Hall.

FRM 504 TROPICAL FISH STOCK ASSESSMENT 2+1

Objective
To understand the application of various models to estimate fish
population.
To get an idea of the interaction of tropical fish population in the
ecosystem.
Theory
UNIT I
Stock concept.
UNIT II
Estimation of growth parameters and mortality rates.
UNIT III
Virtual population methods.
UNIT IV
Gear selectivity. Sampling of commercial catches.
UNIT V
Yield per recruit model.
UNIT VI
Surplus production model. Swept area method - Box model.
UNIT VII
Stock recruitment relationship – Stochastic model – estimation of technical
reference point MSY and other yield base reference point.
UNIT VIII
Multispecies, ecosystem and economic and social reference points.
Eumetric fishing.
UNIT IX
Ecopath and Ecocism models.
Practical
Data collection and estimation of growth and mortality parameters. Gear
selection – Yield per recruit – Analytical and holistic models – growth
parameters – Cohort analysis – Jones method. Gill net, trawl selectivity –
Swept area method. MSY- Stock recruitment relationship.
Suggested Readings
Beverton RJH & Holt SJ. 2004. On the Dynamics of Exploited Fish
Population. The Blackburn Press.
Callucci VG, Saila SB, Gustafson DJ & Rothschild BJ. 1996. Stock
Assessment, Quantitative Methods and Applications for Small Scale
Fisheries. Lewis Publ.
Gulland JA. 1977. Fish Population Dynamics. John Wiley & Sons.

266
 Gulland JA. 1992. A Review of Length Based Approaches to Assessing
Fish Stocks. FAO Tech. Paper No. 323, Rome.
Nickolskhi GV. 1980. Theory of Fish Population Dynamics as the
Biological Background for Rational Exploitation and Management
of Fishery Resources. Bishen Singh Mahendra Pal Singh, Dehra
Dun.
Ricker WE. 1971. Methods for the Assessment of Fish Production in
Freshwaters. Blackwell, Oxford & IBH.
Sparre P & Venema SC. 1998. Introduction to Tropical Fish Stock
Assessment. Part 1 Manual. FAO. Fisheries Tech. Paper No. 301,
Rome.
FRM 505 FISHERIES REGULATIONS 2+1
Objective
To understand the importance of enforcement of fisheries regulations and
policies.
Theory
UNIT I
Fisheries regulatory and developmental setup in Centre and States and their
spheres of responsibility; need for fisheries management; regulatory, legal
and enforcement regimes.
UNIT II
Monitoring, Control and Surveillance (MCS) systems for capture fisheries:
definition; components; role in fisheries management; design
considerations; operational procedures such as data collection, fisheries
patrols, boarding, inspection procedures, verification of catches,
verification of position, transshipment, Port State control and FAO
“flagging arrangement”, and fisheries prosecutions.
UNIT III
Regulatory and developmental issues concerning deep sea fishing –
Guidelines for operation.
UNIT IV
Indian deep sea fishing vessels in Indian EEZ. Maritimes Zones of India
Act 1981 (Regulation of fishing by Foreign vessels). Draft Marine Fisheries
Policy.
UNIT V
Marine fisheries legislations in various States of India; Land Reforms Act;
Coastal Aquaculture legislations, (Environmental Protection Act,
Biodiversity Act, Aquaculture Authority Act) regulations concerning
discharge of effluents in water bodies.
UNIT VI
International Law of the Sea: Historical perspectives; international
negotiations and settlements over open seas; conflict management; shared
stocks.
UNIT VII
Code of Conduct for Responsible Fishing.
UNIT VIII
Management needs associated with aquaculture development; Coastal
Regulation Zone (CRZ) in the context of aquaculture. Sustainability,
Integrated Coastal Zone Management and ecosystem management.

267
 UNIT IX
Inland Fisheries Regulation and Development: Inland fisheries governance,
Inland Fisheries Act, Inland property regime, leasing policies for
waterbodies. Issues of property rights in Inland water bodies.
UNIT X
National Water Policy; water needs for agriculture, industry, potability and
fisheries, fishing rights in open waters; and role of fisheries cooperatives,
aqua/ecotourism. Concepts and implication of Interlinking of rivers on
fisheries and biodiversity.
Practical
Given a real life or imaginary set of MCS situation data for a specific area,
to formulate a management plan (with the help of prevailing legislation)
with the following objectives : (1) Resource (2) Environment (3)
Biodiversity (4) Technology (5) Society (6) Economics and (7) Conflicts;
compilation of these into an overall management plan. Visit to appropriate
Government/NGO and preparation of working report. Mesh size studies for
trawl, gillnets and purse seine. Comparative studies on the Fisheries Acts of
any two states of India and preparation of a report.
Suggested Readings
Anon. 1998. Maritime Law of India in the International Context.
Bhadarkar Publ.
Brahtz JFP. 1972. Coastal Zone Management. U.N. International Economic
and Social Affairs, New York.
Churchill RR & Lowe AV. 1988. Law of the Sea. Manchester University
Press.
Henkin L, Pugh RC & Smit H. 1993. International Law: Cases and
Materials. West Publ. Co.
Sinha RK. (Ed.). 1996. Marine Resources and Applicable Laws (World
Environmental Series - 009). Commonwealth Publ.
Verghese CP. 1989. Fishing Regulation in India’s Territorial Waters.
World Fishing.

FRM 506 REMOTE SENSING AND GIS FOR FISHERIES 1+1

MANAGEMENT
Objective
To know the satellite information and its application in fisheries resource
management.
Theory
UNIT I
Basic terms and concepts; Electromagnetic radiation and its properties,
atmospheric interactions, target interactions.
UNIT II
Sensor platforms – boats, balloons, air-crafts and satellites, Sensor systems
– global acquisition systems and sequential acquisition systems.
UNIT III
Environmental satellites – The Landsat series, NOAA and IRS; Digital
image processing and interpretation.
UNIT IV
Elements of GIS, Application of remote sensing and GIS to fisheries and
aquaculture planning and development.

268
 Practical
Study of satellite information, interpretation of satellite pictures for
resource management, case studies on remote sensing and GIS applications.
Suggested Readings
Decker D. 2000. GIS Data Sources. Riley & Sons.
Jeff Thurston Thomas K Poiker & J Patrick Moore. 2000. Integrated
Geospatial Technology - A Guide to GPS, GIS and Data Logging.
John Wiley & Sons.
Kraak MJ & Ferjan O. 2003. Cartography, Visualization of Spatial Data.
Prentice Hall.
Meaden GJ & Kaptesky JM. 1991. Geographical Information Systems and
Remote Sensing in Inland Fisheries and Aquaculture. FAO
Fisheries Tech. Paper No. 318, Rome.
Patel AN & Singh S. 1992. Remote Sensing – Principles and Applications.
Scientific Publ.
Valavanis VD. 2002. GIS System in Oceanography and Fisheries. Taylor &
Francis.

FRM 507 INTEGRATED COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT 2+1

Objective
To impart knowledge on the coastal resources, integrated coastal zone
management strategies and disaster management.
Theory
UNIT I
Coastal resources: Coastal natural resources systems: flora and fauna,
trophic relationship, nutrient production, cycle and transport; Mangrove
ecosystem - species diversity and distribution of mangroves in India, Other
inter-tidal system- Seagrass system, Coral reef system, Sandy beach
system, Lagoon and estuary system.
UNIT II
Developmental activities and biodiversity loss: Ecological issues, Non-
sustainable development, Pollution, threats to biodiversity, habitat
destruction, Depletion of fisheries resources, impacts of global environment
changes, Multiple uses of the Coastal Zone, Urban settlement, Industrial
development, waste disposal, Shore protection works, ports and marine
transportation. Land transportation infrastructure, Water control and supply
projects, sea fisheries, Aquaculture, Coastal forest industries, Coastal
agriculture, industries.
UNIT III
Coastal Zone Management: Integrated Coastal Zone Management (ICZM):
its need and benefits, Principles, Goals and objectives of the ICZM
programme; Scope, Extent of jurisdiction, Boundaries of the coastal zone,
policies and planning for coastal resource management; Management
mechanisms- Pollution control, Protected areas (sanctuaries, marine parks
and biosphere reserves), Protection from natural hazards; Socioeconomic
impacts and its assessment, Disaster management for coastal environment.
UNIT IV
Coastal tourism: Beach resorts, restaurants and parks within the coastal
zone as per existing rules and regulations. Impact of pollution on coastal
resources.

269
 Practical
Analysis of soil and water characteristics of coastal areas where man made
impacts have established; Assessment of damages of water quality;
Collection, preservation and identification of coastal biological
communities; Survey of different coastal zones; Visit to the protected areas.
Suggested Readings
Brahtz JFP. 1972. Coastal Zone Management. U. N. Department of
International Economic and Social Affairs, New York.
Cairns J Jr. 1994. Implementing Integrated Environmental Management.
Virginia Tech. University.
Clark JR. 1992. Integrated Management of Coastal Zones. FAO Fisheries
Tech. Paper No. 327, Rome.
Coastal Area Management and Development. 1982 U. N. Department of
International Economic and Social Affairs, New York.
David S & Jeremy P. 2001. Inshore Fisheries Management. Methods and
Technologies in Fish Biology and Fisheries. Vol. II. Kluwer.
Khanna BK. 2000. All You Wanted to Know About Disasters. New India
Publ. Agency.

FRM 508 AQUATIC FLORAL RESOURCES 2+1

Objective
To gain in-depth knowledge on the categorization, utilization, conservation
and management of aquatic floral resources.
Theory
UNIT I
Taxonomy and phenology of freshwater microphytes and macrophytes;
their importance in resource management.
UNIT II
Brackishwater flora – micro and macrophytes; their taxonomy, phenology
and ecological importance and conservation practices.
UNIT III
Marine algal resources; Taxonomy, biodiversity, life history, ecological and
economical importance and conservation techniques.
UNIT IV
Seagrass resources; Taxonomy, biodiversity, life history, ecological and
economical importance and conservation techniques.
UNIT V
Commercially important aquatic floral resources.- Agar-algin-
phytocolloids- food grade algal resource- other uses like pollution
treatment, fodder, fertilizer production, etc.
Practical
Collection and identification of freshwater and brackishwater plants and
seaweeds. Phenological observations of aquatic flora, seaweed resources
and preparation of charts – Herbaria preparation.
Suggested Readings
Chapman VJ & Chapmen DJ. 1980. Seaweeds and Their Uses. Chapman &
Hall.
Chapman VJ. 1976. Mangrove Vegetation. J. Cramer.
Chaudhuri AB. 2007. Biodiversity of Mangroves. Daya Publ. House.

270
 Firth FE. 1971. The Encyclopedia of Marine Resources. Von Nostrand
Reinholt.
Iversen ES. 1996. Living Marine Resources. Chapman & Hall.
Petr T. 2000. Interactions Between Fish and Aquatic Macrophytes in
Inland Waters- A Review. FAO Fisheries Tech. Paper No. 396,
Rome.
Richmond A. (Ed.). 2004. Handbook of Microalgal Culture. Blackwell.
Sundaralingam VS. 1990. Marine Algae (Morphology, Reproduction and
Biology). Bishen Singh Mahendra Pal Singh, Dehra Dun.

FRM 509 FEEDING AND REPRODUCTIVE BIOLOGY OF 2+1

FINFISH AND SHELLFISH
Objective
To study the role of feeding and reproductive biology in the context of
fisheries resources.
To learn the application of biological inferences for the management of
finfish and shellfish resources.
Theory
UNIT I
Food of different types of fin and shell fishes.
UNIT II
Feeding types- filter feeders, carnivores, omnivores and their trophic levels.
– Ontogenic changes in feeding- Forage theory- Mismatch hypothesis of
Cushing.
UNIT III
Morphological and anatomical adaptation for feeding; feeding behavior of
wild and cultured species.
UNIT IV
Techniques in the analysis of gut contents and indices, digestion rates, food
consumption rates etc.
UNIT V
Mode of reproduction: Asexual, hermaphroditism, protoandric, protogynic,
sexual.
UNIT VI
Reproductive cycles - Semalparity and iteroparity-maturation and spawning
periodicity and maturity stages.
UNIT VII
Factors influencing reproduction-Biotic and abiotic.
UNIT VIII
Migration- various types of spawning migration.
UNIT IX
Assessment of mean trophic level and prey - predator relationship.
Practical
Morphological and anatomical features of fin fishes and shellfishes with
different feeding habits. Analysis of gut contents. Use of indices in feeding,
digestion and food consumption rates of fishes. Identification of spawning
season, maturity stages, estimation of gonadosomatic index and
intraovarian periodicity.

271
 Suggested Readings
Adiyodi KG & Adiyodi RG. 2000. Reproductive Biology of Invertebrates:
Vol. X. Part B. Progress in Developmental Endocrinology. John
Wiley & Sons.
Agarwal NK. 1996. Fish Reproduction. APH Publ. Corp.
Barrington EJW. 1981. Invertebrate Structure and Function. 2nd Ed. The
English Language Book Society & Nelson.
Bone Q, Marshall NB & Blaxter JHS. 1995. Biology of Fishes. 2nd Ed.
Blackie.
Carl EB. 1979. Biology of Fishes. 2nd Ed. John Wiley & Sons.
Hoar WS & Randall DJ. (Ed.) 1969. Fish Physiology. Vol. III. Academic
Press.
Jobling M. 1995. Environmental Biology of Fishes. Chapman & Hall.
Khanna SS. 1993. An Introduction to Fishes. Central Book Depot.
Maria JR, Augustine A &. Kapoor BG. 2006. Fish Reproduction. Science
Publ.
Nikolsky GV. 1983. Fisheries Biology. Academic Press.
Saxena AB. 1996. Life of Crustaceans. Recent Advance in Entomology
Series-10. Anmol Publ.
Venkataramanujam K & Ramanathan N. 1994. Manual of Finfish Biology.
Oxford & IBH.

FRM 510 DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY OF FINFISH AND 2+1

SHELLFISH
Objective
To impart knowledge on the collection and identification of eggs and larvae
of commercially important finfish and shellfish.
Theory
UNIT I
Identification of eggs and larvae of commercially important finfishes,
crustaceans, molluscs and echinoderms.
UNIT II
Quantitative samplings of fish eggs and larvae; spatial and temporal
distribution, dispersion of eggs and larvae in food webs, effect of
environmental parameters on eggs and larvae.
UNIT III
Natural food of shell fish and finfish larvae from egg to adult
(commercially important shellfishes and finfishes).
Practical
Identification of commercially important species of crustacean, molluscan
eggs and larvae, spat. Morphometry of eggs and larvae of finfishes,
identification keys. Quantitative sampling- shellfish and finfish larvae; food
and feeding habits of larval stages of shell and finfishes.
Suggested Readings
Barrington EJW. 1981. Invertebrate Structure and Function. 2nd Ed. The
English Language Book Society & Nelson.
Diwan AP & Dhakad NK. 2004. Embryology of Fishes. Recent Advances
in Embryology Series-1. Anmol Publ.
Ede DA. 1978. An Introduction to Developmental Biology. Blackie.

272
 Hoar WS & Randall J. (Ed.). 1988. Fish Physiology. Vol XI. The
Physiology of Developing Fish. Part B. Viviparity and Post hatching
Juveniles. Academic Press.
Jobling M. 1995. Environmental Biology of Fishes. Chapman & Hall.
Khan SA, Raffi SM & Lyla PS. 2003. Larvae of Decapod Crustaceans.
Centre of Advanced Study in Marine Biology, Parangipettai, Tamil
Nadu.
Silas EG. 1983. Development of Penaeid Prawns. CMFRI Bull. No. 28.

FRM 511 FISHING AND ALLIED TECHNOLOGIES 2+1

Objective
To gain knowledge on the design, fabrication and operation of fishing gear
and operation of fish finding equipments.
Theory
UNIT I
Design, fabrication and operation of various fishing gears: trawls (pelagic
and bottom), purse seine, gillnets, trammel nets, dol nets, FADs (Floating
and bottom – artificial reefs), traps and lines.
UNIT II
Harvesting methods in inland water bodies and their improvisation:
Gillnets, cast nets, lines, dragnets, bag nets etc.
UNIT III
Destructive and prohibited fishing practices.
UNIT IV
By-catch reduction devices: Definition of bycatch, types of bycatch
reduction devices and the principles of operation.
UNIT V
Turtle Excluder Devices: Definition, types of TEDs – soft and hard types,
materials used for their construction and maintenance.
UNIT VI
Acoustics: Acoustic surveys for fishing, acoustic aids in fishing and
acoustic measurements.
UNIT VII
Safety at sea: Safety devices – Accidents associated with marine
environment, boat design and navigation, mitigation measures.
UNIT VIII
GMDSS and other safety devices. Advanced communication Systems –
VHF, SSB, INMARSAT System.
UNIT IX
Vessel Monitoring Systems (VMS): Importance, uses, role in fisheries
management.
UNIT X
Satellite navigation system: GPS – Components of GPS, working,
functions, hand held GPS, important applications of GPS in fisheries and
aquaculture.
UNIT XI
Fishing harbours: Classification, facilities, layout of a typical fishing
harbour, stages in the planning of fishing harbours.

273
 UNIT XII
Code of Conduct for Responsible Fishing (CCRF): Articles of CCRF,
Elaboration of Article 8: Fishing Operations.
Practical
Drawing and reading gear designs - Field visits to fishing harbour and
preparation of drawing of its lay out - Training onboard fishing vessels in
fishing techniques, familiarization with navigation and communication
equipments -Study of layout and operation of a fish landing centre; Study
of fish aggregating devices -Familiarization with various safety devices.
Suggested Readings
Duncan A. 1980. A Fisherman’s Guide to Ecosounding and Sonar
Equipment. Acoustic Fish Detection Instruments. University of
Rhode Island. Marine Bull. 41.
FAO. 1972. Catalogue of Fishing Gear Designs. Fishing News Books.
FAO. 1980. Definition and Classification of Fishery Vessel Types. FAO
Fisheries Tech. Paper No. 267, Rome.
John S. 1996. Commercial Fishing Methods - An Introduction to Vessels
and Gear. Fishing News Books.
Nirgess K. 1966. Fishing Boats and Equipments. Fishing News Books.
Sreekrishna Y & Shenoy L. 2001. Fishing Gears and Craft Technology.
ICAR.
Traung JO. 1955. Fishing Boats of the World. 1. Fishing News Books.
Traung JO. 1960. Fishing Boats of the World. 2. Fishing News Books.
Traung JO. 1967. Fishing Boats of the World. 3. Fishing News Books.
Tucker DG. 1967. Sonar in Fisheries - a Forward Look. Fishing News
Books.

FRM 512 MODERN TECHNIQUES IN ICHTHYOTAXONOMY 2+1

Objective
To enable the students in differentiating genera/ species up to stock level
using classical, molecular and computer based techniques.
Theory
UNIT I
Identification of stocks based on classical and modern taxonomical
methods.
UNIT II
Classical taxonomy – morphometrics – meristics.
UNIT III
Modern taxonomical tools – Electrophoretic studies (muscle myogen,
eyelens protein, enzyme pattern and serology), Karyotyping.
UNIT IV
Molecular markers – PCR, RAPD, RFLP, Microsatellites, mini satellites
and Mitochondrial DNA, and their application in fish phylogenetic studies.
Practical
PAGE – Muscle myogen, eyelens proteins, enzymes of different species of
finfishes; fish chromosomes preparation and identification DNA Isolation
and quantification, PCR techniques Statistical software used in fish
molecular studies.

274
 Suggested Readings
Cooksey K. 1997. Molecular Approaches to the Study of the Oceans.
Chapman & Hall.
FAO. 2000. DNA Based Molecular Diagnostic Techniques.
Kocher TD & Carol AS. (Ed.). 1997. Molecular Systematics of Fishes.
Academic Press.
Le Gal Y & Halvorson HO. 1998. New Development in Marine
Biotechnology. Plenum Press.
Mayer E. 1977. Principle of Systematic Zoology. Tata McGraw Hill.
Ponniah AG & George J. 1998. Fish Chromosome Atlas. National Bureau
of Fish Genetic Resources (NBFGR), Lucknow.
Whitmore DH. 1990. Electrophoretic and Isoelectric Focusing Techniques
in Fisheries Management. CRC Press.

FRM 601 ASSESSMENT OF AQUATIC BIODIVERSITY 2+1

Objective
To impart in-depth knowledge on aquatic biodiversity, its assessment and
conservation methods.
To understand the ecological impact of various aquatic resources.
Theory
UNIT I
Definitions and measurement: Methods, scales and indices of biodiversity
assessment.
UNIT II
Biodiversity (microalgae to aquatic vertebrates) of any three of the
following or similar ecosystem: Chilka Lake, Narmada river system,
Gangetic system, Jaykwadi reservoir, Himalayan lake, Himalayan river,
Hooghly Maltah estuarine system, Coramandondal coast, Gulf of Mannar,
Gulf of Kutch, Malabar upwelling, Bhitarkanika.
UNIT III
Threats to biodiversity: Overexploitation, land reclamation, pollution,
habitation, conversion of agricultural land and aquacultural farms (case
studies pertaining to any sensitive marine/estuarine/freshwater hot spots).
UNIT IV
Conservation and Restoration: Declaration of mangrove sanctuaries and
mangrove afforestation, marine protected areas, Ganga Action Plan,
introduction of exotic species and their implications; potential
consequences and conflicts of linking rivers.
UNIT V
Impacts of anthropogenic intervention on aquatic biodiversity: Damming of
rivers, construction of sea walls, micro hydel power stations, oil rigs.
UNIT VI
Legal regimes of biodiversity: International and national conventions and
Acts for biodiversity.
UNIT VII
Institutionalization of biodiversity conservation (Such as creation of
Biodiversity Boards/Authority.
Practical
Preparation of records and inventories of biodiversity of any three critically
important ecosystem based on secondary data and field visits- Compilation

275
 of all important International and National laws and conventions related to
biodiversity
Suggested Readings
Brian G. 1992. Global Biodiversity - Status of the Earth’s Living
Resources. Chapman & Hall.
Denton TE. 1973. Fish Chromosome Methodology. Charles Thomas Publ.
Elliott AN. (Ed.). 1993. Global Marine Biological Diversity. Inland Press.
Gunderson DR. 1993. Surveys of Fisheries Resources. John Wiley & Sons.
Khanna DR, Chopra AK & Prasad G. 2005. Aquatic Biodiversity in India.
Daya Publ. House.
Kumar U & Asija M. J. 2000. Biodiversity Principles and Conservation.
Agrobios.
Lakra WS, Abidi R, Singh AK, Sood N, Rathore G & Swaminathan TR.
2000. Fish Introductions and Quarantine: Indian Perspective.
National Bureau of Fish Genetic Resources (NBFGR), Lucknow.
Lambshead PJD, Paterson GLJ & Gage JD. 1997. Biodiversity
Professional. Version 2. National History Museum and the Scottish
Association of Marine Science.
Magurran AE. 1988. Ecological Diversity and its Measurement. Taylor &
Francis.
Mahanta PC & Tyagi LK. 2003. Participatory Approach for Fish
Biodiversity Conservation in North East India. National Bureau of
Fish Genetic Resources (NBFGR), Lucknow.
Ponniah AG & Gopalakrishnan A. (Eds.). 2000. Endemic Fish Diversity of
Western Ghats. National Bureau of Fish Genetic Resources
(NBFGR), Lucknow.
Zoological Survey of India. 2007. National Symposium on Conservation
and Valuation of Marine Biodiversity.

FRM 602 APPLICATIONS OF FISHERIES MODELS IN STOCK 2+1

ASSESSMENT
Objective
To study the application of various dynamics and holistic models used in
fish stock assessment.
Theory
UNIT I
History and development of analytical models; Analytical models; its
history and development.
UNIT II
Application of Beverton and Holt’s, Thompson and Bell models in
trophics.
UNIT III
Logistic models of Schaefer and Fox.
UNIT IV
Prey predator models. 4. Stock recruitment models of Ricker, Beverton and
Holt.
UNIT V
Bioeconomic modeling.
UNIT VI
Ecopath and ecosim models.

276
 Practical
Application of logistic and analytical models in marine, riverine and
estuarine systems. Ecopath modeling based on secondary data.
Suggested Readings
Beverton RJH & Holt SJ. 2004. On the Dynamics of Exploited Fish
Population. The Blackburn Press.
Edwards EF & Megrey BA. 1989. Mathematical Analysis of Fish Stock
Dynamics. American Fisheries Society, Maryland.
Gulland JA. (Ed.). 1977. Fish Population Dynamics. John Wiley & Sons.
Nickolskhi GV. 1980. Theory of Fish Population Dynamics as the
Biological Background for Rational Exploitation and Management
of Fishery Resources. Bishen Singh Mahendra Pal Singh, Dehra
Dun.
Ray H & Carl JW. 1992. Quantitative Fisheries Stock Assessment Choice,
Dynamics and Uncertainty. Kulwer.
Ricker WE. 1971. Methods for the Assessment of Fish Production in
Freshwaters. Blackwell, Oxford & IBH.

FRM 603 CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT OF 2+1

EXPLOITED FISHERIES RESOUCES
Objective
To apprise the students on the various conservation and management
strategies of exploited fisheries resources.
Theory
UNIT I
Marine parks, marine protected areas, biosphere reserves, closed seasons.
UNIT II
Cryopreservation of exploited and endangered species.
UNIT III
Fishing regulation policies - A critique on the draft Indian Fisheries policy.
A critical appraisal of Inland Fisheries Legislation of any two states of
India.
UNIT IV
Protection of habitat of corals, mangrove, seaweeds, sea grass beds.
Implementation of square cod end mesh – to reduce by-catch.
UNIT V
Legal proceedings / implementation for protection of exploited and
endangered fishery resources.
UNIT VI
Total allowable catch, regulation of mesh size for conservation of exploited
fishery resources.
UNIT VII
Management of major reservoirs of India; optimal stocking and production
of cultivable resources.
UNIT VIII
A comparative study of the marine regulation acts of any two neighboring
countries with reference to Environmental Protection Act (EPA).
UNIT IX
Compile the rules relating to marine fisheries exploitation included in the
final UNCLOS III treaty.

277
 Practical
Based on the existing policy, suggest and draft ideal inland and marine
fishery legislation for any one Indian State. With reference to the laws of
the sea (UNCLOS III) treaty, recommend ways and means to solve dispute
of shared stocks. Develop a framework for conflict resolution of traditional
and mechanized fisheries.
Suggested Readings
Mahanta PC & Tyagi LK. 2003. Participatory Approach for Fish
Biodiversity Conservation in North East Inidia. National Bureau of
Fish Genetic Resources (NBFGR), Lucknow.
Menon AGK. 2004. Threatened Fishes of India and their Conservation.
Fishries Survey of India.
Michael RR. 1997. Fisheries Conservation and Management. Prentice
Hall.
Pascoe S. 2005. Bycatch Management and the Economics of Discarding.
Daya Publ. House.
Thorpe JE, Talbot C & Miles MS. (Ed.) 1995. Conservation of Fish and
Shell Fish Resource; Managing Diverisity. Academic Press.

FRM 604 CORAL REEF MANAGEMENT 2+1

Objective
To learn identification and classification of different corals and their
habitats.
To impart knowledge on the conservation and management of coral
resources.
Theory
UNIT I
Type of coral reefs and their distribution.
UNIT II
Origin of coral reefs – coral reefs of the world.
UNIT III
Ecology of coral reefs; factors influencing growth; productivity of coral
reefs; plants and animals associates of living reef corals and fringing reefs.
UNIT IV
Nutrition, production, larval dispersal and settlement of corals.
UNIT V
Soft coral type and their ecology.
UNIT VI
Bioactive substances of soft and hard corals, sedimentation in coral reef
environment.
UNIT VII
Economic importance of coral reefs.
UNIT VIII
Management and conservation of coral reefs and soft corals.
Practical
Collection and identification of soft and hard corals; Survey of corals and
mapping; identification of associated organisms; preparation of checklist
and associated organisms of Indian coast. Predatory animals of corals,
Extraction of bioactive substances from soft and hard corals. Observations
of destructive methods of corals and coral reef fishes.

278
 Suggested Readings
Bakus GJ. 1994. Coral Reef Ecosystem. Oxford & IBH.
Bayer FM, Manfred G & Jakob V. 1983. Illustrated Trilingual Glossary of
Morphological and Anatomical Terms Applied to Octocorallia.
Leiden.
Biswas KP. 2008. Corals of Tropical Oceans. Daya Publ. House.
James PSBR. 1986. Recent Advances in Marine Biology. Today &
Tomorrow.
Peter S. (Ed.).2006. Coral Reef Fishes: Dynamics and Diversity in a
Complex Ecosystem. Academic Press.
Polunin NVC & Roberts CM. 1996. Reef Fisheries. Chapman & Hall.
Rogers CS. 1994. Coral Reef Monitoring Manual for the Caribbean and
Western Atlantic. National Park Service, Virgin Islands.
Rosenberg E & Loya Y. (Eds.). 2004. Coral Health and Disease. Springer.
Talbot F & Wilkinson C. 2001. Coral Reefs, Management and Seagrasses.
A Source Book for Managers. Australian Institute of Marine Suck
Australia.

FRM 605 DATA COLLECTION AND ESTIMATION OF 0+2

EXPLOITED FISHERIES RESOURCES
Objective
To learn in detail the sampling designs and estimation of catch and effort
data.
Practical
Collection of fishery data at landing centres from different gears separately.
Details of craft and gear of landing centres. Recording of data in the entry
forms. Definition of length for various groups of fish/crustaceans/molluscs.
Collection of length frequency data of fishes at landing centres. Estimation
of age and growth based frequency data.
Growth, mortality, population and stock parameters employing FiSAT,
Length structured VPA, Thompson and Bell yield stock prediction for
single and multifleet version. Beverton and Holt yield-per-recruit model;
biomass-per-recruit. Relative yield-per-recruit model and yield isopleth
diagram.
Suggested Readings
Beverton RJH & Holt SJ. 2004. On the Dynamics of Exploited Fish
Population. The Blackburn Press.
Callucci VG, Saila SB, Gustafson DJ & Rothschild BJ. 1996. Stock
Assessment. Quantitative Methods and Applications for Small Scale
Fisheries. Lewis Publ.
Gulland JA. 1977. Fish Population Dynamics. John Wiley & Sons.
Gulland JA. 1992. A Review of Length Based Approaches to Assessing
Fish Stocks. FAO Tech. Paper. 323.
Nickolskhi GV. 1980. Theory of Fish Population Dynamics as the
Biological Background for Rational Exploitation and Management
of Fishery Resources. Bishen Singh Mahendra Pal Singh, Dehra
Dun.
Ricker WE. 1971. Methods for the Assessment of Fish Production in
Freshwaters. Blackwell, Oxford & IBH.

279
 Sparre P & Venema SC. 1998. Introduction to Tropical Fish Stock
Assessment. Part 1 Manual. FAO Fisheries Tech. Paper No. 301,
Rome.

FRM 606 FISHERIES ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT 2+1

Objective
To know the probable impacts of environmental factors on fishery
resources and gain knowledge on the standard methods applicable in
fisheries environmental assessment.
Theory
UNIT I
Critically important climatic factors (temperature, rainfall and wind pattern
/ monsoon influencing aquatic (inland and marine) productivity and
production.
UNIT II
Remotely sensed SST, Chlorophyll and Wind pattern features of Indian
seas used in locating Potential Fish Zones (PFZ).
UNIT III
Influence of rainfall intensity, its seasonal and annual variations on fish
migration, breeding, recruitment and production. (Correlation of rainfall
data from IMD and catch data on fishes from same region for bringing out
the impact of rain on production).
UNIT IV
Optimum water quality parameters prescribed for various water bodies
(marine and inland) for different user groups including fisheries.
UNIT V
Environmental Impact Assessment of various anthropogenic causes;
domestic and industrial water discharge into waters and their impact on
fisheries. Tannery discharge and its impact on fisheries.
UNIT VI
Status, structure and trophic profile (at primary, secondary and tertiary
levels) of four typical water bodies: i) Marine, ii) Estuarine iii) Reservoir
iv) River in relation to nutrient profile, plankton profile and oxygen profile
in spatial and temporal terms.
Practical
Preparation of isoclines of temperature, rainfall and chlorophyll pattern of
data gathered from satellites and demarcation of the PFZ’s. Development of
a graphic picture of the vertical and horizontal profiles of various nutrients,
temperature, oxygen, plankton and fish density of any well defined aquatic
system.
Suggested Readings
Canter LW. 1994. Environmental Impact Assessment. Mc-Graw Hill.
Grilbert M & Gould R. 1998. Achieving Environmental Standards. Pitman
Publ.
Peter W. (Ed.). 1988. Environmental Impact Assessment: Theory and
Practice. World Research Institute, Routledge, London.

280
FRM 607 ISSUES IN CAPTURE FISHERIES 1+1
Objective
To get comprehensive knowledge on the major issues / challenges faced in
capture fisheries.
Theory
UNIT I
Over- capacity (excessive fishing efforts); Over exploitation. By-catch and
Discards.
UNIT II
IUU (Illegal, Unregulated and Unreported) Fishing. Problems encountered
in Monitoring, Control and Surveillance (MCS).
UNIT III
Ghost fishing, destructive fishing practices.
Practical
Assessment of fishing capacity; stages of overexploitation, case studies and
field visits.
Suggested Readings
Bal DV & Rao KV. 1990. Marine Fishes of India. 1st Revised Ed. Tata
McGraw Hill.
Chandra P. 2007. Fishery Conservation Management and Development.
SBS Publ.
Dholakia AD. 2004. Fisheries and Aquatic Resources of India. Daya Publ.
House.
Kurian CV & Sebastian VO. 1986. Prawns and Prawn Fisheries of India.
Hindustan Publ. Corp.
Moyle PB & Joseph JC Jr. 2000. Fishes – An Introduction to Ichthyology.
4th Ed. Prentice Hall.
Samuel CT. 1968. Marine Fisheries in India. Oceanographic Laboratory,
University of Kerala.
Shanbhogue SL. 2000. Marine Fisheries of India. ICAR.
Yadav BN. 1997. Fish and Fisheries. 2nd Ed. Daya Publ. House.

281
 FISHERIES RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
List of Journals

• Aquaculture Nutrition
• BioTechniques.
• Bulletin of Mathematical Biology
• Conservation
• Conservation Biology
• Conservation Letters
• Coral Reefs
• Ecological Management and Restoration
• Ecology of Freshwater Fish
• Ecosystem Health
• Environmental Biology of Fishes
• Environmental Management
• Estuaries and Coasts
• Fish and Fisheries
• Fisheries Management and Ecology
• Fisheries Research
• Fisheries Science
• Freshwater Biology
• Gene
• Hydrobiologia
• Indian Journal of Ecology
• Indian Journal of Marine Sciences
• Journal of Biosciences
• Journal of Evolutionary Biology
• Journal of Fish Biology
• Journal of Ichthyology and Aquatic Biology
• Journal of Indian Ocean studies
• Journal of Mathematical Biology
• Journal of the Marine Biological Association of India.
• Lakes and Reservoirs: Research andManagement
• Limnology and Oceanography
• Marine Ecology
• Molecular Ecological Notes
• Molecular Marine Biology and Biotechnology
• Natural Resource Modeling
• Plant Biology
• Reviews in Fish Biology and Fisheries
• Plant Breeding
• [Link]
• [Link]

Suggested Broad Areas for Master’s and Doctoral Research

• Mapping of fisheries resources in different freshwater bodies
• Estimation of biodiversity and abundance of various freshwater fishes
• Fish stock assessment in different freshwater bodies using FiSAT
• Analysis of productivity in different freshwater bodies
• Fish stock assessment in various marine ecosystems using FiSAT

282
• Assessment of bycatch from trawl, bottom set gill net
• Sea ranching and effect of ranching in the marine ecosystem
• Estimation of biodiversity and abundance of endangered species of sponges, corals,
gastropods, bivalves, sea cucumbers, fishes, sea snakes, turtles, birds and marine mammals
• Effect of conservation measures on the restoration of depleting fish stocks
• Estimation of biomass in various marine ecosystems
• Estimation of MSY in various marine ecosystems
• Fish stock assessment in various marine ecosystems using FiSAT
• Development of proper guidelines for commercial deep sea fishing
• Impact of Coastal Regulation Zone on the stock replenishment
• Monitoring, Control and Surveillance (MCS) systems for inland and marine capture
fisheries
• Collection of satellite information on various aquatic resources and ground truthing
• Interpretation of satellite pictures for resource management
• Use of remote sensing for Potential Fish Zone
• Estimation of floral/ faunal diversity of mangroves and coral reefs.
• Estimation of fleets and catches at landing sites for effective fisheries management
• Studies on biodiversity estimates for coastal resources
• Estimation of biodiversity of aquatic floral resources.
• Catalogue preparation of commercially important aquatic floral resources
• Neurohormones controlling the reproduction of commercial crustacean species
• Identification of commercially important species of finfish and shellfish eggs and larvae,
spat.
• Forcasting the fishery potential through the study of abundance of finfish and shellfish
eggs and larval in the marine ecosystem.
• Food and feeding habits of larval stages of shell and finfishes.
• Stock assessment of individual freshwater and marine fish using FiSAT
• Assessment of By catch from trawl, bottom set gill net
• Catalogue preparation of commercially important fishes (FW , BW Marine)
• Studies on biodiversity estimates for coastal resources, fresh water bodies.
• Food and feeding habit of commercially important group of fishes and shellfishes.
• Microsatellite base identification of commercial fishes
• Karyotaxonomy of commercially important fishes and shellfishes
• Studies on biodiversity estimates for fisheries resources in various aquatic ecosystem.
• Stock assessment of individual freshwater and marine fish using FiSAT
• Assessment of By catch from trawl, bottom set gill net
• Ecopath modelling for minor reservoir, small waterbody
• Conservation biology and marine pollution
• Coral reef reproduction, assessment, monitoring and management
• Coral reef resilience, restoration and interaction with associated fauna and flora
• Remote sensing and geospatial analysis of coral reef ecosystem.
• Biogeochemical cycles in coral reef environments.
• Estimation of biomass in various marine ecosystems
• Estimation of MSY in various marine ecosystems
• Fish stock assessment in various marine ecosystems using FiSAT
• Fishery Independent survey for coral resource estimation
• Estimation of Taxonomic distinctness for major finfish and shellfish resources
• Mapping of various marine and inland fisheries resources
• Estimation of biodiversity of various marine and inland fisheries resources
• Analysis of Catch composition by gear and craft in marine and inland water bodies
• Fish stock assessment in various marine and inland ecosystems using FiSAT
• Assessment of bycatch from trawl, bottom set gill net

283
 COMMON SUPPORTING COURSES

CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS

STM 501 STATISTICAL METHODS 2+1

STM 502 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 1+1
STM 601 ADVANCED STATISTICAL METHODS 2+1
STM 602 SOFTWARE FOR FISHERIES DATA ANALYSIS AND 0+2
MANAGEMENT

Course Contents

STM 501 STATISTICAL METHODS 2+1

Objective
To acquaint the students with various statistical methods and techniques
To provide hands on training in data analysis through statistical software.
Theory
UNIT I
Sampling distribution for mean and proportion, standard error, confidence
interval for mean and proportion; Test of hypothesis: type I and type II
errors, level of significance, tests based on Z, t, X2 and F distribution.
UNIT II
Properties of estimators: unbiasedness, efficiency, sufficiency and
consistency.
UNIT III
Simple correlation and regression, Spearman’s rank correlation.
UNIT IV
Basic concepts of sampling techniques: simple random, stratified,
systematic, cluster and two stage sampling and their applications in
fisheries.
UNIT V
Analysis of variance: one way and two way classification; Non-parametric
test, advantages and disadvantages over parametric tests; Run test and Sign
test.
Practical
Tests of hypothesis based on Z, t, X2 and F; Simple correlation and
regression, Rank correlation; Analysis of variance: one way and two way;
Simple random, stratified, systematic, cluster and two stage sampling; Sign
test, Run test; Hands on experience in using the statistical software
packages MS Excel, Systat and SPSS in data analysis and interpretation.
Suggested Readings
Biradar RS. 2002. Course Manual on Fisheries Statistics. 2nd Ed. CIFE,
Mumbai.
Keller G. 2001. Applied Statistics with Microsoft Excel. Duxbury.
Kothari CR. 1998. Research Methodology. 2nd Ed. Wishwa Prahashan.
Levin RL & Rubin DS. 1983. Statistics for Management. Prentice-Hall of
India.

284
 Panse VG & Sukhatme PV. 1978. Statistical Methods for Agricultural
Workers. ICAR.
Siegel S & Castellan NJ. Jr. 1988. Non Parametric Statistical Methods.
John Wiley & Sons.

STM 502 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 1+1

Objective
To acquaint the students with basic concepts of research methods and
processes.
To develop research skills for planning, designing, conduct and reporting of
research.
Theory
UNIT I
Elements of scientific method; Research - purpose, relevance and scope;
Generalization and transferability of research data; Objectivity and value-
neutrality in scientific research; ethical dilemmas in research.
UNIT II
Types of research - basic, applied, strategic, anticipatory and adaptive
research; historical, descriptive and experimental research; Qualitative and
quantitative research methods; Experimental and ex-post facto approaches,
survey research, action research, participatory research, case study method,
content analysis.
UNIT III
Steps involved in research process; Identifying and defining researchable
problems; Formulation of research objectives; Hypothesis - meaning, types,
development of hypothesis and its testing; Constructs; Nature and type of
variables; Types and levels of measurement; Types of reliability and
validity and their measurement.
UNIT IV
Methods of observation and data collection for biological and social
sciences research; Selection of appropriate tools for analysis of biological
and social sciences research data;
UNIT V
Formats of research report - writing thesis/dissertation, research articles -
abstracts, literature review, materials and methods, results and discussion,
summary and references.
Practical
Exercises on identification of a problem and formulation of research
questions and hypothesis; use of data base systems and online resources;
Preparing a mock synopsis / outline of research work; Exercises on case
study research / developing case studies; Exercises on reliability and
validity; Review and evaluation of research articles, books, theses and their
presentation; Conduct of a mock research including designing a research
programme, conducting experiment / field research, data collection,
analysis, report writing and presentation; Writing a research article; Writing
a winning research proposal.
Suggested Readings
Kerlinger FN. 1983. Foundations of Behavioural Research. Surjeet Publ.
Kothari CR. 1998. Research Methodology. 2nd Ed. Vishwa Prahashan.

285
 Kumar R. 1996. Research Methodology: a Step-by-Step Guide for
Beginers. Sage Publ.
Rossiter DG. 2003. Preparation for [Link]. Thesis Research. ITC,
Netherlands.
Walliman N. 2001. Your Research Project: a Step-by-Step Guide for the
First Time Researcher. Sage Publ.

STM 601 ADVANCED STATISTICAL METHODS 2+1

Objective
To expose the students to advanced statistical methods and hands on
training in the analysis of data using statistical software.
Theory
UNIT I
Introduction to matrix algebra, Bayes’ theorem and its application,
mathematical expectation.
UNIT II
Probability distribution: Negative, Binomial, Hyper-geometric and
Exponential and their application in fisheries; Multivariate normal
distribution; Multiple and Partial correlation and regression.
UNIT III
Multivariate ANOVA; Likelihood Methods; Concept of Principal
component analysis; Canonical correlation and Path coefficients;
Discriminant analysis; Factor analysis and Cluster analysis;
Transformations; Analysis of Covariance.
UNIT IV
Linear programming: Objective function, graphical solution of linear
programming problem, Simplex method.
UNIT V
Non parametric test: Wilcoxon test, Mann-Whitney U-test, Kruskal and
Wallis test and Friedman’s test; Use of computer software for data analysis;
Survival analysis.
Practical
Exercises on Bayes’ theorem; Negative, Binomial distribution; Hyper-
geometric distributions; Exponential distribution; Multiple and partial
correlation and regression analysis; Principal component analysis;
Canonical correlation and path coefficients; Discriminant analysis; Factor
analysis and Cluster analysis; Transformations; Covariance analysis;
Wilcoxon test, Mann-Whitney test, Kruskal and Wallis test and Friedman’s
test and linear programming; Use of computer software.
Suggested Readings
Anderson TW. 1984. An Introduction to Multivariate Statistical Analysis.
Wiley Series in Probability and Statistics, Singapore.
Biradar RS. 2002. Course Manual on Fisheries Statistics. 2nd Ed. CIFE,
Mumbai.
Ghosh S. 1999. Multivariate Analysis, Design of Experiments and Survey
Sampling. Marcel Dekker.
Keller G. 2001. Applied Statistics with Microsoft Excel. Duxbury.
William RD & Matthew G. 1984. Multivariate Analysis, Methods and
Applications. John Wiley & Sons.

286
STM 602 SOFTWARE FOR FISHERIES DATA 0+2
ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT
Objective
To provide hands on training on the use of various statistical packages in
data analysis.
Practical
Introduction to computer software: SPSS, SAS, SYSTAT and
STATISTICA for analysis and presentation of fisheries data; Basic
concepts of database management systems; Introduction to MS-ACCESS,
ORACLE (RDBMS); Exercises on analysis of data using MS-EXCEL,
SPSS, SAS, FISAT, SYSTAT and STATISTICA; Creation of Database
using MS-ACCESS, ORACLE.
Suggested Readings
Kettell 2003. MS Office: The Complete Reference.
Khattree R & Naik D. 2000. Multivariate Data Reduction and
Discrimination with SAS Software. SAS Institute North Carolina.
SPSS Base 11.0: User’s Guide. SPSS Inc., Bangalore.
STATISTICA : The Small Book User Guide. StatSoft, USA.
Steven F. 2001. Oracle PL / SQL Best Practices: Optimising Oracle Code.
SPD/O’Reilly Reprints.
Systat 8.0: Getting Started Manual.

287
 COMPULSORY NON-CREDIT COURSES
(Compulsory for Master’s programme in all disciplines; Optional for Ph.D. scholars)

CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS

PGS 501 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SERVICES 0+1

PGS 502 TECHNICAL WRITING AND COMMUNICATIONS
0+1
SKILLS
PGS 503 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY AND ITS
1+0
(e-Course) MANAGEMENT IN AGRICULTURE
PGS 504 BASIC CONCEPTS IN LABORATORY TECHNIQUES 0+1
PGS 505 AGRICULTURAL RESEARCH, RESEARCH ETHICS
1+0
(e-Course) AND RURAL DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMMES
PGS 506
DISASTER MANAGEMENT 1+0
(e-Course)

Course Contents
PGS 501 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SERVICES 0+1
Objective
To equip the library users with skills to trace information from libraries
efficiently, to apprise them of information and knowledge resources, to
carry out literature survey, to formulate information search strategies, and
to use modern tools (Internet, OPAC, search engines etc.) of information
search.
Practical
Introduction to library and its services; Role of libraries in education,
research and technology transfer; Classification systems and organization
of library; Sources of information- Primary Sources, Secondary Sources
and Tertiary Sources; Intricacies of abstracting and indexing services
(Science Citation Index, Biological Abstracts, Chemical Abstracts, CABI
Abstracts, etc.); Tracing information from reference sources; Literature
survey; Citation techniques/Preparation of bibliography; Use of CD-ROM
Databases, Online Public Access Catalogue and other computerized library
services; Use of Internet including search engines and its resources; e-
resources access methods.

PGS 502 TECHNICAL WRITING AND COMMUNICATIONS SKILLS 0+1

Objective
To equip the students/scholars with skills to write dissertations, research
papers, etc.
To equip the students/scholars with skills to communicate and articulate in
English (verbal as well as writing).
Practical
Technical Writing - Various forms of scientific writings- theses, technical
papers, reviews, manuals, etc; Various parts of thesis and research

288
 communications (title page, authorship contents page, preface, introduction,
review of literature, material and methods, experimental results and
discussion); Writing of abstracts, summaries, précis, citations etc.;
commonly used abbreviations in the theses and research communications;
illustrations, photographs and drawings with suitable captions; pagination,
numbering of tables and illustrations; Writing of numbers and dates in
scientific write-ups; Editing and proof-reading; Writing of a review article.
Communication Skills - Grammar (Tenses, parts of speech, clauses,
punctuation marks); Error analysis (Common errors); Concord;
Collocation; Phonetic symbols and transcription; Accentual pattern: Weak
forms in connected speech: Participation in group discussion: Facing an
interview; presentation of scientific papers.
Suggested Readings
Chicago Manual of Style. 14th Ed. 1996. Prentice Hall of India.
Collins’ Cobuild English Dictionary. 1995. Harper Collins.
Gordon HM & Walter JA. 1970. Technical Writing. 3rd Ed. Holt, Rinehart
& Winston.
Hornby AS. 2000. Comp. Oxford Advanced Learner’s Dictionary of
Current English. 6th Ed. Oxford University Press.
James HS. 1994. Handbook for Technical Writing. NTC Business Books.
Joseph G. 2000. MLA Handbook for Writers of Research Papers. 5th Ed.
Affiliated East-West Press.
Mohan K. 2005. Speaking English Effectively. MacMillan India.
Richard WS. 1969. Technical Writing. Barnes & Noble.
Robert C. (Ed.). 2005. Spoken English: Flourish Your Language. Abhishek.
Sethi J & Dhamija PV. 2004. Course in Phonetics and Spoken English. 2nd
Ed. Prentice Hall of India.
Wren PC & Martin H. 2006. High School English Grammar and
Composition. S. Chand & Co.

PGS 503 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY AND ITS 1+0

(e-Course) MANAGEMENT IN AGRICULTURE
Objective
The main objective of this course is to equip students and stakeholders with
knowledge of intellectual property rights (IPR) related protection systems,
their significance and use of IPR as a tool for wealth and value creation in a
knowledge-based economy.
Theory
Historical perspectives and need for the introduction of Intellectual
Property Right regime; TRIPs and various provisions in TRIPS Agreement;
Intellectual Property and Intellectual Property Rights (IPR), benefits of
securing IPRs; Indian Legislations for the protection of various types of
Intellectual Properties; Fundamentals of patents, copyrights, geographical
indications, designs and layout, trade secrets and traditional knowledge,
trademarks, protection of plant varieties and farmers’ rights and bio-
diversity protection; Protectable subject matters, protection in
biotechnology, protection of other biological materials, ownership and
period of protection; National Biodiversity protection initiatives;
Convention on Biological Diversity; International Treaty on Plant Genetic
Resources for Food and Agriculture; Licensing of technologies, Material

289
 transfer agreements, Research collaboration Agreement, License
Agreement.
Suggested Readings
Erbisch FH & Maredia K.1998. Intellectual Property Rights in Agricultural
Biotechnology. CABI.
Ganguli P. 2001. Intellectual Property Rights: Unleashing Knowledge
Economy. McGraw-Hill.
Intellectual Property Rights: Key to New Wealth Generation. 2001. NRDC
& Aesthetic Technologies.
Ministry of Agriculture, Government of India. 2004. State of Indian
Farmer. Vol. V. Technology Generation and IPR Issues. Academic
Foundation.
Rothschild M & Scott N. (Ed.). 2003. Intellectual Property Rights in
Animal Breeding and Genetics. CABI.
Saha R. (Ed.). 2006. Intellectual Property Rights in NAM and Other
Developing Countries: A Compendium on Law and Policies. Daya
Publ. House.
The Indian Acts - Patents Act, 1970 and amendments; Design Act, 2000;
Trademarks Act, 1999; The Copyright Act, 1957 and amendments; Layout
Design Act, 2000; PPV and FR Act 2001, and Rules 2003; National
Biological Diversity Act, 2003.

PGS 504 BASIC CONCEPTS IN LABORATORY TECHNIQUES 0+1

Objective
To acquaint the students on the basics of commonly used techniques in
laboratory.

Practical
Safety measures while in Lab; Handling of chemical substances; Use of
burettes, pipettes, measuring cylinders, flasks, separatory funnel,
condensers, micropipettes and vaccupets; washing, drying and sterilization
of glassware; Drying of solvents/chemicals. Weighing and preparation of
solutions of different strengths and their dilution; Handling techniques of
solutions; Preparation of different agro-chemical doses in field and pot
applications; Preparation of solutions of acids; Neutralisation of acid and
bases; Preparation of buffers of different strengths and pH values. Use and
handling of microscope, laminar flow, vacuum pumps, viscometer,
thermometer, magnetic stirrer, micro-ovens, incubators, sandbath,
waterbath, oilbath; Electric wiring and earthing. Preparation of media and
methods of sterilization; Seed viability testing, testing of pollen viability;
Tissue culture of crop plants; Description of flowering plants in botanical
terms in relation to taxonomy
Suggested Readings
Furr AK. 2000. CRC Hand Book of Laboratory Safety. CRC Press.
Gabb MH & Latchem WE. 1968. A Handbook of Laboratory Solutions.
Chemical Publ. Co.

290
PGS 505 AGRICULTURAL RESEARCH, RESEARCH ETHICS 1+0
(e-Course) AND RURAL DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMMES
Objective
To enlighten the students about the organization and functioning of
agricultural research systems at national and international levels, research
ethics, and rural development programmes and policies of Government.
Theory
UNIT I
History of agriculture in brief; Global agricultural research system: need,
scope, opportunities; Role in promoting food security, reducing poverty and
protecting the environment; National Agricultural Research Systems
(NARS) and Regional Agricultural Research Institutions; Consultative
Group on International Agricultural Research (CGIAR): International
Agricultural Research Centres (IARC), partnership with NARS, role as a
partner in the global agricultural research system, strengthening capacities
at national and regional levels; International fellowships for scientific
mobility.
UNIT II
Research ethics: research integrity, research safety in laboratories, welfare
of animals used in research, computer ethics, standards and problems in
research ethics.
UNIT III
Concept and connotations of rural development, rural development policies
and strategies. Rural development programmes: Community Development
Programme, Intensive Agricultural District Programme, Special group –
Area Specific Programme, Integrated Rural Development Programme
(IRDP) Panchayati Raj Institutions, Co-operatives, Voluntary
Agencies/Non-Governmental Organisations. Critical evaluation of rural
development policies and programmes. Constraints in implementation of
rural policies and programmes.
Suggested Readings
Bhalla GS & Singh G. 2001. Indian Agriculture - Four Decades of
Development. Sage Publ.
Punia MS. Manual on International Research and Research Ethics. CCS,
Haryana Agricultural University, Hisar.
Rao BSV. 2007. Rural Development Strategies and Role of Institutions -
Issues, Innovations and Initiatives. Mittal Publ.
Singh K.. 1998. Rural Development - Principles, Policies and
Management. Sage Publ.

PGS 506 DISASTER MANAGEMENT 1+0

(e-Course)
Objectives
To introduce learners to the key concepts and practices of natural disaster
management; to equip them to conduct thorough assessment of hazards,
and risks vulnerability and capacity building.
Theory
UNIT I
Natural Disasters- Meaning and nature of natural disasters, their types and
effects. Floods, Drought, Cyclone, Earthquakes, Landslides, Avalanches,

291
 Volcanic eruptions, Heat and cold Waves, Climatic Change: Global
warming, Sea Level rise, Ozone Depletion
UNIT II
Man Made Disasters- Nuclear disasters, chemical disasters, biological
disasters, building fire, coal fire, forest fire. Oil fire, air pollution, water
pollution, deforestation, Industrial wastewater pollution, road accidents, rail
accidents, air accidents, sea accidents.
UNIT III
Disaster Management- Efforts to mitigate natural disasters at national and
global levels. International Strategy for Disaster reduction. Concept of
disaster management, national disaster management framework; financial
arrangements; role of NGOs, Community-based organizations, and media.
Central, State, District and local Administration; Armed forces in Disaster
response; Disaster response: Police and other organizations.
Suggested Readings
Gupta HK. 2003. Disaster Management. Indian National Science
Academy. Orient Blackswan.
Hodgkinson PE & Stewart M. 1991. Coping with Catastrophe: A
Handbook of Disaster Management. Routledge.
Sharma VK. 2001. Disaster Management. National Centre for Disaster
Management, India.

292